original

[gb-231r1-is01/Gingerbread_2.3.3_r1_IS01.git] / prebuilt / darwin-x86 / toolchain / arm-eabi-4.3.1 / info / gdb.info

This is gdb.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
../../../../toolchain/android-toolchain/gdb-6.6/gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo.

INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Gdb: (gdb).                     The GNU debugger.
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY

   This file documents the GNU debugger GDB.

   This is the Ninth Edition, of `Debugging with GDB: the GNU
Source-Level Debugger' for GDB Version 6.6.

   Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996,
1998,
1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Free Software Foundation, Inc.

   Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
Invariant Sections being "Free Software" and "Free Software Needs Free
Documentation", with the Front-Cover Texts being "A GNU Manual," and
with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.

   (a) The Free Software Foundation's Back-Cover Text is: "You have
freedom to copy and modify this GNU Manual, like GNU software.  Copies
published by the Free Software Foundation raise funds for GNU
development."

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Summary,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)

Debugging with GDB
******************

This file describes GDB, the GNU symbolic debugger.

   This is the Ninth Edition, for GDB Version 6.6.

   Copyright (C) 1988-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

* Menu:

* Summary::                     Summary of GDB
* Sample Session::              A sample GDB session

* Invocation::                  Getting in and out of GDB
* Commands::                    GDB commands
* Running::                     Running programs under GDB
* Stopping::                    Stopping and continuing
* Stack::                       Examining the stack
* Source::                      Examining source files
* Data::                        Examining data
* Macros::                      Preprocessor Macros
* Tracepoints::                 Debugging remote targets non-intrusively
* Overlays::                    Debugging programs that use overlays

* Languages::                   Using GDB with different languages

* Symbols::                     Examining the symbol table
* Altering::                    Altering execution
* GDB Files::                   GDB files
* Targets::                     Specifying a debugging target
* Remote Debugging::            Debugging remote programs
* Configurations::              Configuration-specific information
* Controlling GDB::             Controlling GDB
* Sequences::                   Canned sequences of commands
* TUI::                         GDB Text User Interface
* Interpreters::                Command Interpreters
* Emacs::                       Using GDB under GNU Emacs
* Annotations::                 GDB's annotation interface.
* GDB/MI::                      GDB's Machine Interface.

* GDB Bugs::                    Reporting bugs in GDB
* Formatting Documentation::    How to format and print GDB documentation

* Command Line Editing::        Command Line Editing
* Using History Interactively:: Using History Interactively
* Installing GDB::              Installing GDB
* Maintenance Commands::        Maintenance Commands
* Remote Protocol::             GDB Remote Serial Protocol
* Agent Expressions::           The GDB Agent Expression Mechanism
* Copying::                     GNU General Public License says
                                how you can copy and share GDB
* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation
* Index::                       Index

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Summary,  Next: Sample Session,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top

Summary of GDB
**************

The purpose of a debugger such as GDB is to allow you to see what is
going on "inside" another program while it executes--or what another
program was doing at the moment it crashed.

   GDB can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
these) to help you catch bugs in the act:

   * Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its
     behavior.

   * Make your program stop on specified conditions.

   * Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.

   * Change things in your program, so you can experiment with
     correcting the effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.

   You can use GDB to debug programs written in C and C++.  For more
information, see *Note Supported languages: Supported languages.  For
more information, see *Note C and C++: C.

   Support for Modula-2 is partial.  For information on Modula-2, see
*Note Modula-2: Modula-2.

   Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables,
or nested functions does not currently work.  GDB does not support
entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal
syntax.

   GDB can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although it
may be necessary to refer to some variables with a trailing underscore.

   GDB can be used to debug programs written in Objective-C, using
either the Apple/NeXT or the GNU Objective-C runtime.

* Menu:

* Free Software::               Freely redistributable software
* Contributors::                Contributors to GDB

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Free Software,  Next: Contributors,  Up: Summary

Free software
=============

GDB is "free software", protected by the GNU General Public License
(GPL).  The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
program--but every person getting a copy also gets with it the freedom
to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to the
source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.  Typical
software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the Free
Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.

   Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says
that you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms
away from anyone else.

Free Software Needs Free Documentation
======================================

The biggest deficiency in the free software community today is not in
the software--it is the lack of good free documentation that we can
include with the free software.  Many of our most important programs do
not come with free reference manuals and free introductory texts.
Documentation is an essential part of any software package; when an
important free software package does not come with a free manual and a
free tutorial, that is a major gap.  We have many such gaps today.

   Consider Perl, for instance.  The tutorial manuals that people
normally use are non-free.  How did this come about?  Because the
authors of those manuals published them with restrictive terms--no
copying, no modification, source files not available--which exclude
them from the free software world.

   That wasn't the first time this sort of thing happened, and it was
far from the last.  Many times we have heard a GNU user eagerly
describe a manual that he is writing, his intended contribution to the
community, only to learn that he had ruined everything by signing a
publication contract to make it non-free.

   Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
price.  The problem with the non-free manual is not that publishers
charge a price for printed copies--that in itself is fine.  (The Free
Software Foundation sells printed copies of manuals, too.)  The problem
is the restrictions on the use of the manual.  Free manuals are
available in source code form, and give you permission to copy and
modify.  Non-free manuals do not allow this.

   The criteria of freedom for a free manual are roughly the same as for
free software.  Redistribution (including the normal kinds of
commercial redistribution) must be permitted, so that the manual can
accompany every copy of the program, both on-line and on paper.

   Permission for modification of the technical content is crucial too.
When people modify the software, adding or changing features, if they
are conscientious they will change the manual too--so they can provide
accurate and clear documentation for the modified program.  A manual
that leaves you no choice but to write a new manual to document a
changed version of the program is not really available to our community.

   Some kinds of limits on the way modification is handled are
acceptable.  For example, requirements to preserve the original
author's copyright notice, the distribution terms, or the list of
authors, are ok.  It is also no problem to require modified versions to
include notice that they were modified.  Even entire sections that may
not be deleted or changed are acceptable, as long as they deal with
nontechnical topics (like this one).  These kinds of restrictions are
acceptable because they don't obstruct the community's normal use of
the manual.

   However, it must be possible to modify all the _technical_ content
of the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
through all the usual channels.  Otherwise, the restrictions obstruct
the use of the manual, it is not free, and we need another manual to
replace it.

   Please spread the word about this issue.  Our community continues to
lose manuals to proprietary publishing.  If we spread the word that
free software needs free reference manuals and free tutorials, perhaps
the next person who wants to contribute by writing documentation will
realize, before it is too late, that only free manuals contribute to
the free software community.

   If you are writing documentation, please insist on publishing it
under the GNU Free Documentation License or another free documentation
license.  Remember that this decision requires your approval--you don't
have to let the publisher decide.  Some commercial publishers will use
a free license if you insist, but they will not propose the option; it
is up to you to raise the issue and say firmly that this is what you
want.  If the publisher you are dealing with refuses, please try other
publishers.  If you're not sure whether a proposed license is free,
write to <licensing@gnu.org>.

   You can encourage commercial publishers to sell more free, copylefted
manuals and tutorials by buying them, and particularly by buying copies
from the publishers that paid for their writing or for major
improvements.  Meanwhile, try to avoid buying non-free documentation at
all.  Check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and
insist that whoever seeks your business must respect your freedom.
Check the history of the book, and try to reward the publishers that
have paid or pay the authors to work on it.

   The Free Software Foundation maintains a list of free documentation
published by other publishers, at
`http://www.fsf.org/doc/other-free-books.html'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Contributors,  Prev: Free Software,  Up: Summary

Contributors to GDB
===================

Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
programs.  Many others have contributed to its development.  This
section attempts to credit major contributors.  One of the virtues of
free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here.  The file
`ChangeLog' in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow account.

   Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.

     _Plea:_ Additions to this section are particularly welcome.  If you
     or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
     omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!

   So that they may not regard their many labors as thankless, we
particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases:
Andrew Cagney (releases 6.3, 6.2, 6.1, 6.0, 5.3, 5.2, 5.1 and 5.0); Jim
Blandy (release 4.18); Jason Molenda (release 4.17); Stan Shebs
(release 4.14); Fred Fish (releases 4.16, 4.15, 4.13, 4.12, 4.11, 4.10,
and 4.9); Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5,
and 4.4); John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9); Jim
Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, and 3.3); and Randy Smith (releases 3.2,
3.1, and 3.0).

   Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.

   Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner and Daniel
Berlin.  James Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler.  Early work on C++
was by Peter TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to
release 3.0).

   GDB uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple object-file
formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.  Henkel-Wallace, Rich
Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.

   David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did the
original support for encapsulated COFF.

   Brent Benson of Harris Computer Systems contributed DWARF 2 support.

   Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
support.  Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support.  Chris
Hanson improved the HP9000 support.  Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki
Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support.  David Johnson contributed
Encore Umax support.  Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
Jeff Law contributed HP PA and SOM support.  Keith Packard contributed
NS32K support.  Doug Rabson contributed Acorn Risc Machine support.
Bob Rusk contributed Harris Nighthawk CX-UX support.  Chris Smith
contributed Convex support (and Fortran debugging).  Jonathan Stone
contributed Pyramid support.  Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support.
Tim Tucker contributed support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode.
Pace Willison contributed Intel 386 support.  Jay Vosburgh contributed
Symmetry support.  Marko Mlinar contributed OpenRISC 1000 support.

   Andreas Schwab contributed M68K GNU/Linux support.

   Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
libraries.

   Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
several machine instruction sets.

   Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
develop remote debugging.  Intel Corporation, Wind River Systems, AMD,
and ARM contributed remote debugging modules for the i960, VxWorks,
A29K UDI, and RDI targets, respectively.

   Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
command-line editing and command history.

   Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code, the
Modula-2 support, and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.

   Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.  He also
enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded symbols.

   Hitachi America (now Renesas America), Ltd. sponsored the support for
H8/300, H8/500, and Super-H processors.

   NEC sponsored the support for the v850, Vr4xxx, and Vr5xxx
processors.

   Mitsubishi (now Renesas) sponsored the support for D10V, D30V, and
M32R/D processors.

   Toshiba sponsored the support for the TX39 Mips processor.

   Matsushita sponsored the support for the MN10200 and MN10300
processors.

   Fujitsu sponsored the support for SPARClite and FR30 processors.

   Kung Hsu, Jeff Law, and Rick Sladkey added support for hardware
watchpoints.

   Michael Snyder added support for tracepoints.

   Stu Grossman wrote gdbserver.

   Jim Kingdon, Peter Schauer, Ian Taylor, and Stu Grossman made nearly
innumerable bug fixes and cleanups throughout GDB.

   The following people at the Hewlett-Packard Company contributed
support for the PA-RISC 2.0 architecture, HP-UX 10.20, 10.30, and 11.0
(narrow mode), HP's implementation of kernel threads, HP's aC++
compiler, and the Text User Interface (nee Terminal User Interface):
Ben Krepp, Richard Title, John Bishop, Susan Macchia, Kathy Mann,
Satish Pai, India Paul, Steve Rehrauer, and Elena Zannoni.  Kim Haase
provided HP-specific information in this manual.

   DJ Delorie ported GDB to MS-DOS, for the DJGPP project.  Robert
Hoehne made significant contributions to the DJGPP port.

   Cygnus Solutions has sponsored GDB maintenance and much of its
development since 1991.  Cygnus engineers who have worked on GDB
fulltime include Mark Alexander, Jim Blandy, Per Bothner, Kevin
Buettner, Edith Epstein, Chris Faylor, Fred Fish, Martin Hunt, Jim
Ingham, John Gilmore, Stu Grossman, Kung Hsu, Jim Kingdon, John Metzler,
Fernando Nasser, Geoffrey Noer, Dawn Perchik, Rich Pixley, Zdenek
Radouch, Keith Seitz, Stan Shebs, David Taylor, and Elena Zannoni.  In
addition, Dave Brolley, Ian Carmichael, Steve Chamberlain, Nick Clifton,
JT Conklin, Stan Cox, DJ Delorie, Ulrich Drepper, Frank Eigler, Doug
Evans, Sean Fagan, David Henkel-Wallace, Richard Henderson, Jeff
Holcomb, Jeff Law, Jim Lemke, Tom Lord, Bob Manson, Michael Meissner,
Jason Merrill, Catherine Moore, Drew Moseley, Ken Raeburn, Gavin
Romig-Koch, Rob Savoye, Jamie Smith, Mike Stump, Ian Taylor, Angela
Thomas, Michael Tiemann, Tom Tromey, Ron Unrau, Jim Wilson, and David
Zuhn have made contributions both large and small.

   Andrew Cagney, Fernando Nasser, and Elena Zannoni, while working for
Cygnus Solutions, implemented the original GDB/MI interface.

   Jim Blandy added support for preprocessor macros, while working for
Red Hat.

   Andrew Cagney designed GDB's architecture vector.  Many people
including Andrew Cagney, Stephane Carrez, Randolph Chung, Nick Duffek,
Richard Henderson, Mark Kettenis, Grace Sainsbury, Kei Sakamoto,
Yoshinori Sato, Michael Snyder, Andreas Schwab, Jason Thorpe, Corinna
Vinschen, Ulrich Weigand, and Elena Zannoni, helped with the migration
of old architectures to this new framework.

   Andrew Cagney completely re-designed and re-implemented GDB's
unwinder framework, this consisting of a fresh new design featuring
frame IDs, independent frame sniffers, and the sentinel frame.  Mark
Kettenis implemented the DWARF 2 unwinder, Jeff Johnston the libunwind
unwinder, and Andrew Cagney the dummy, sentinel, tramp, and trad
unwinders.  The architecture specific changes, each involving a
complete rewrite of the architecture's frame code, were carried out by
Jim Blandy, Joel Brobecker, Kevin Buettner, Andrew Cagney, Stephane
Carrez, Randolph Chung, Orjan Friberg, Richard Henderson, Daniel
Jacobowitz, Jeff Johnston, Mark Kettenis, Theodore A. Roth, Kei
Sakamoto, Yoshinori Sato, Michael Snyder, Corinna Vinschen, and Ulrich
Weigand.

   Christian Zankel, Ross Morley, Bob Wilson, and Maxim Grigoriev from
Tensilica, Inc. contributed support for Xtensa processors.  Others who
have worked on the Xtensa port of GDB in the past include Steve Tjiang,
John Newlin, and Scott Foehner.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sample Session,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Summary,  Up: Top

1 A Sample GDB Session
**********************

You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about GDB.
However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
debugger.  This chapter illustrates those commands.

   One of the preliminary versions of GNU `m4' (a generic macro
processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
definition within another stop working.  In the following short `m4'
session, we define a macro `foo' which expands to `0000'; we then use
the `m4' built-in `defn' to define `bar' as the same thing.  However,
when we change the open quote string to `<QUOTE>' and the close quote
string to `<UNQUOTE>', the same procedure fails to define a new synonym
`baz':

     $ cd gnu/m4
     $ ./m4
     define(foo,0000)

     foo
     0000
     define(bar,defn(`foo'))

     bar
     0000
     changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)

     define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))
     baz
     Ctrl-d
     m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string

Let us use GDB to try to see what is going on.

     $ gdb m4
     GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
      of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
      the conditions.
     There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
      for details.

     GDB 6.6, Copyright 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
     (gdb)

GDB reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the rest when
needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly.  We now
tell GDB to use a narrower display width than usual, so that examples
fit in this manual.

     (gdb) set width 70

We need to see how the `m4' built-in `changequote' works.  Having
looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
`m4_changequote', so we set a breakpoint there with the GDB `break'
command.

     (gdb) break m4_changequote
     Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.

Using the `run' command, we start `m4' running under GDB control; as
long as control does not reach the `m4_changequote' subroutine, the
program runs as usual:

     (gdb) run
     Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
     define(foo,0000)

     foo
     0000

To trigger the breakpoint, we call `changequote'.  GDB suspends
execution of `m4', displaying information about the context where it
stops.

     changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)

     Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
         at builtin.c:879
     879         if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))

Now we use the command `n' (`next') to advance execution to the next
line of the current function.

     (gdb) n
     882         set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
      : nil,

`set_quotes' looks like a promising subroutine.  We can go into it by
using the command `s' (`step') instead of `next'.  `step' goes to the
next line to be executed in _any_ subroutine, so it steps into
`set_quotes'.

     (gdb) s
     set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
         at input.c:530
     530         if (lquote != def_lquote)

The display that shows the subroutine where `m4' is now suspended (and
its arguments) is called a stack frame display.  It shows a summary of
the stack.  We can use the `backtrace' command (which can also be
spelled `bt'), to see where we are in the stack as a whole: the
`backtrace' command displays a stack frame for each active subroutine.

     (gdb) bt
     #0  set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
         at input.c:530
     #1  0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
         at builtin.c:882
     #2  0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
     #3  0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
         at macro.c:71
     #4  0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
     #5  0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195

We step through a few more lines to see what happens.  The first two
times, we can use `s'; the next two times we use `n' to avoid falling
into the `xstrdup' subroutine.

     (gdb) s
     0x3b5c  532         if (rquote != def_rquote)
     (gdb) s
     0x3b80  535         lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ?  \
     def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
     (gdb) n
     536         rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
      : xstrdup(rq);
     (gdb) n
     538         len_lquote = strlen(rquote);

The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
`lquote' and `rquote' to see if they are in fact the new left and right
quotes we specified.  We use the command `p' (`print') to see their
values.

     (gdb) p lquote
     $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
     (gdb) p rquote
     $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"

`lquote' and `rquote' are indeed the new left and right quotes.  To
look at some context, we can display ten lines of source surrounding
the current line with the `l' (`list') command.

     (gdb) l
     533             xfree(rquote);
     534
     535         lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
      : xstrdup (lq);
     536         rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
      : xstrdup (rq);
     537
     538         len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
     539         len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
     540     }
     541
     542     void

Let us step past the two lines that set `len_lquote' and `len_rquote',
and then examine the values of those variables.

     (gdb) n
     539         len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
     (gdb) n
     540     }
     (gdb) p len_lquote
     $3 = 9
     (gdb) p len_rquote
     $4 = 7

That certainly looks wrong, assuming `len_lquote' and `len_rquote' are
meant to be the lengths of `lquote' and `rquote' respectively.  We can
set them to better values using the `p' command, since it can print the
value of any expression--and that expression can include subroutine
calls and assignments.

     (gdb) p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)
     $5 = 7
     (gdb) p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)
     $6 = 9

Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the `m4'
built-in `defn'?  We can allow `m4' to continue executing with the `c'
(`continue') command, and then try the example that caused trouble
initially:

     (gdb) c
     Continuing.

     define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))

     baz
     0000

Success!  The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones.  The
problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
lengths.  We allow `m4' exit by giving it an EOF as input:

     Ctrl-d
     Program exited normally.

The message `Program exited normally.' is from GDB; it indicates `m4'
has finished executing.  We can end our GDB session with the GDB `quit'
command.

     (gdb) quit

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Commands,  Prev: Sample Session,  Up: Top

2 Getting In and Out of GDB
***************************

This chapter discusses how to start GDB, and how to get out of it.  The
essentials are:
   * type `gdb' to start GDB.

   * type `quit' or `Ctrl-d' to exit.

* Menu:

* Invoking GDB::                How to start GDB
* Quitting GDB::                How to quit GDB
* Shell Commands::              How to use shell commands inside GDB
* Logging output::              How to log GDB's output to a file

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Invoking GDB,  Next: Quitting GDB,  Up: Invocation

2.1 Invoking GDB
================

Invoke GDB by running the program `gdb'.  Once started, GDB reads
commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.

   You can also run `gdb' with a variety of arguments and options, to
specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.

   The command-line options described here are designed to cover a
variety of situations; in some environments, some of these options may
effectively be unavailable.

   The most usual way to start GDB is with one argument, specifying an
executable program:

     gdb PROGRAM

You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
specified:

     gdb PROGRAM CORE

   You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you
want to debug a running process:

     gdb PROGRAM 1234

would attach GDB to process `1234' (unless you also have a file named
`1234'; GDB does check for a core file first).

   Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a
fairly complete operating system; when you use GDB as a remote debugger
attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of "process", and
there is often no way to get a core dump.  GDB will warn you if it is
unable to attach or to read core dumps.

   You can optionally have `gdb' pass any arguments after the
executable file to the inferior using `--args'.  This option stops
option processing.
     gdb --args gcc -O2 -c foo.c
   This will cause `gdb' to debug `gcc', and to set `gcc''s
command-line arguments (*note Arguments::) to `-O2 -c foo.c'.

   You can run `gdb' without printing the front material, which
describes GDB's non-warranty, by specifying `-silent':

     gdb -silent

You can further control how GDB starts up by using command-line
options.  GDB itself can remind you of the options available.

Type

     gdb -help

to display all available options and briefly describe their use (`gdb
-h' is a shorter equivalent).

   All options and command line arguments you give are processed in
sequential order.  The order makes a difference when the `-x' option is
used.

* Menu:

* File Options::                Choosing files
* Mode Options::                Choosing modes
* Startup::                     What GDB does during startup

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: File Options,  Next: Mode Options,  Up: Invoking GDB

2.1.1 Choosing files
--------------------

When GDB starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID).  This is
the same as if the arguments were specified by the `-se' and `-c' (or
`-p' options respectively.  (GDB reads the first argument that does not
have an associated option flag as equivalent to the `-se' option
followed by that argument; and the second argument that does not have
an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to the `-c'/`-p'
option followed by that argument.)  If the second argument begins with
a decimal digit, GDB will first attempt to attach to it as a process,
and if that fails, attempt to open it as a corefile.  If you have a
corefile whose name begins with a digit, you can prevent GDB from
treating it as a pid by prefixing it with `./', e.g. `./12345'.

   If GDB has not been configured to included core file support, such
as for most embedded targets, then it will complain about a second
argument and ignore it.

   Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
following list.  GDB also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
(If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with `--' rather than
`-', though we illustrate the more usual convention.)

`-symbols FILE'
`-s FILE'
     Read symbol table from file FILE.

`-exec FILE'
`-e FILE'
     Use file FILE as the executable file to execute when appropriate,
     and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core dump.

`-se FILE'
     Read symbol table from file FILE and use it as the executable file.

`-core FILE'
`-c FILE'
     Use file FILE as a core dump to examine.

`-c NUMBER'

`-pid NUMBER'
`-p NUMBER'
     Connect to process ID NUMBER, as with the `attach' command.  If
     there is no such process, GDB will attempt to open a core file
     named NUMBER.

`-command FILE'
`-x FILE'
     Execute GDB commands from file FILE.  *Note Command files: Command
     Files.

`-eval-command COMMAND'
`-ex COMMAND'
     Execute a single GDB command.

     This option may be used multiple times to call multiple commands.
     It may also be interleaved with `-command' as required.

          gdb -ex 'target sim' -ex 'load' \
             -x setbreakpoints -ex 'run' a.out

`-directory DIRECTORY'
`-d DIRECTORY'
     Add DIRECTORY to the path to search for source and script files.

`-r'
`-readnow'
     Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather
     than the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is
     needed.  This makes startup slower, but makes future operations
     faster.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Mode Options,  Next: Startup,  Prev: File Options,  Up: Invoking GDB

2.1.2 Choosing modes
--------------------

You can run GDB in various alternative modes--for example, in batch
mode or quiet mode.

`-nx'
`-n'
     Do not execute commands found in any initialization files.
     Normally, GDB executes the commands in these files after all the
     command options and arguments have been processed.  *Note Command
     files: Command Files.

`-quiet'
`-silent'
`-q'
     "Quiet".  Do not print the introductory and copyright messages.
     These messages are also suppressed in batch mode.

`-batch'
     Run in batch mode.  Exit with status `0' after processing all the
     command files specified with `-x' (and all commands from
     initialization files, if not inhibited with `-n').  Exit with
     nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the GDB commands in
     the command files.

     Batch mode may be useful for running GDB as a filter, for example
     to download and run a program on another computer; in order to
     make this more useful, the message

          Program exited normally.

     (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under GDB
     control terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.

`-batch-silent'
     Run in batch mode exactly like `-batch', but totally silently.  All
     GDB output to `stdout' is prevented (`stderr' is unaffected).
     This is much quieter than `-silent' and would be useless for an
     interactive session.

     This is particularly useful when using targets that give `Loading
     section' messages, for example.

     Note that targets that give their output via GDB, as opposed to
     writing directly to `stdout', will also be made silent.

`-return-child-result'
     The return code from GDB will be the return code from the child
     process (the process being debugged), with the following
     exceptions:

        * GDB exits abnormally.  E.g., due to an incorrect argument or
          an internal error.  In this case the exit code is the same as
          it would have been without `-return-child-result'.

        * The user quits with an explicit value.  E.g., `quit 1'.

        * The child process never runs, or is not allowed to terminate,
          in which case the exit code will be -1.

     This option is useful in conjunction with `-batch' or
     `-batch-silent', when GDB is being used as a remote program loader
     or simulator interface.

`-nowindows'
`-nw'
     "No windows".  If GDB comes with a graphical user interface (GUI)
     built in, then this option tells GDB to only use the command-line
     interface.  If no GUI is available, this option has no effect.

`-windows'
`-w'
     If GDB includes a GUI, then this option requires it to be used if
     possible.

`-cd DIRECTORY'
     Run GDB using DIRECTORY as its working directory, instead of the
     current directory.

`-fullname'
`-f'
     GNU Emacs sets this option when it runs GDB as a subprocess.  It
     tells GDB to output the full file name and line number in a
     standard, recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is
     displayed (which includes each time your program stops).  This
     recognizable format looks like two `\032' characters, followed by
     the file name, line number and character position separated by
     colons, and a newline.  The Emacs-to-GDB interface program uses
     the two `\032' characters as a signal to display the source code
     for the frame.

`-epoch'
     The Epoch Emacs-GDB interface sets this option when it runs GDB as
     a subprocess.  It tells GDB to modify its print routines so as to
     allow Epoch to display values of expressions in a separate window.

`-annotate LEVEL'
     This option sets the "annotation level" inside GDB.  Its effect is
     identical to using `set annotate LEVEL' (*note Annotations::).
     The annotation LEVEL controls how much information GDB prints
     together with its prompt, values of expressions, source lines, and
     other types of output.  Level 0 is the normal, level 1 is for use
     when GDB is run as a subprocess of GNU Emacs, level 3 is the
     maximum annotation suitable for programs that control GDB, and
     level 2 has been deprecated.

     The annotation mechanism has largely been superseded by GDB/MI
     (*note GDB/MI::).

`--args'
     Change interpretation of command line so that arguments following
     the executable file are passed as command line arguments to the
     inferior.  This option stops option processing.

`-baud BPS'
`-b BPS'
     Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
     interface used by GDB for remote debugging.

`-l TIMEOUT'
     Set the timeout (in seconds) of any communication used by GDB for
     remote debugging.

`-tty DEVICE'
`-t DEVICE'
     Run using DEVICE for your program's standard input and output.

`-tui'
     Activate the "Text User Interface" when starting.  The Text User
     Interface manages several text windows on the terminal, showing
     source, assembly, registers and GDB command outputs (*note GDB
     Text User Interface: TUI.).  Alternatively, the Text User
     Interface can be enabled by invoking the program `gdbtui'.  Do not
     use this option if you run GDB from Emacs (*note Using GDB under
     GNU Emacs: Emacs.).

`-interpreter INTERP'
     Use the interpreter INTERP for interface with the controlling
     program or device.  This option is meant to be set by programs
     which communicate with GDB using it as a back end.  *Note Command
     Interpreters: Interpreters.

     `--interpreter=mi' (or `--interpreter=mi2') causes GDB to use the
     "GDB/MI interface" (*note The GDB/MI Interface: GDB/MI.) included
     since GDB version 6.0.  The previous GDB/MI interface, included in
     GDB version 5.3 and selected with `--interpreter=mi1', is
     deprecated.  Earlier GDB/MI interfaces are no longer supported.

`-write'
     Open the executable and core files for both reading and writing.
     This is equivalent to the `set write on' command inside GDB (*note
     Patching::).

`-statistics'
     This option causes GDB to print statistics about time and memory
     usage after it completes each command and returns to the prompt.

`-version'
     This option causes GDB to print its version number and no-warranty
     blurb, and exit.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Startup,  Prev: Mode Options,  Up: Invoking GDB

2.1.3 What GDB does during startup
----------------------------------

Here's the description of what GDB does during session startup:

  1. Sets up the command interpreter as specified by the command line
     (*note interpreter: Mode Options.).

  2. Reads the "init file" (if any) in your home directory(1) and
     executes all the commands in that file.

  3. Processes command line options and operands.

  4. Reads and executes the commands from init file (if any) in the
     current working directory.  This is only done if the current
     directory is different from your home directory.  Thus, you can
     have more than one init file, one generic in your home directory,
     and another, specific to the program you are debugging, in the
     directory where you invoke GDB.

  5. Reads command files specified by the `-x' option.  *Note Command
     Files::, for more details about GDB command files.

  6. Reads the command history recorded in the "history file".  *Note
     Command History::, for more details about the command history and
     the files where GDB records it.

   Init files use the same syntax as "command files" (*note Command
Files::) and are processed by GDB in the same way.  The init file in
your home directory can set options (such as `set complaints') that
affect subsequent processing of command line options and operands.
Init files are not executed if you use the `-nx' option (*note Choosing
modes: Mode Options.).

   The GDB init files are normally called `.gdbinit'.  On some
configurations of GDB, the init file is known by a different name
(these are typically environments where a specialized form of GDB may
need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name for the
specialized version's init file).  These are the environments with
special init file names:

   * The DJGPP port of GDB uses the name `gdb.ini', due to the
     limitations of file names imposed by DOS filesystems.  The Windows
     ports of GDB use the standard name, but if they find a `gdb.ini'
     file, they warn you about that and suggest to rename the file to
     the standard name.

   * VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): `.vxgdbinit'

   * OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): `.os68gdbinit'

   * ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): `.esgdbinit'

   * CISCO 68k: `.cisco-gdbinit'

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) On DOS/Windows systems, the home directory is the one pointed to
by the `HOME' environment variable.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Quitting GDB,  Next: Shell Commands,  Prev: Invoking GDB,  Up: Invocation

2.2 Quitting GDB
================

`quit [EXPRESSION]'
`q'
     To exit GDB, use the `quit' command (abbreviated `q'), or type an
     end-of-file character (usually `Ctrl-d').  If you do not supply
     EXPRESSION, GDB will terminate normally; otherwise it will
     terminate using the result of EXPRESSION as the error code.

   An interrupt (often `Ctrl-c') does not exit from GDB, but rather
terminates the action of any GDB command that is in progress and
returns to GDB command level.  It is safe to type the interrupt
character at any time because GDB does not allow it to take effect
until a time when it is safe.

   If you have been using GDB to control an attached process or device,
you can release it with the `detach' command (*note Debugging an
already-running process: Attach.).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Shell Commands,  Next: Logging output,  Prev: Quitting GDB,  Up: Invocation

2.3 Shell commands
==================

If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your debugging
session, there is no need to leave or suspend GDB; you can just use the
`shell' command.

`shell COMMAND STRING'
     Invoke a standard shell to execute COMMAND STRING.  If it exists,
     the environment variable `SHELL' determines which shell to run.
     Otherwise GDB uses the default shell (`/bin/sh' on Unix systems,
     `COMMAND.COM' on MS-DOS, etc.).

   The utility `make' is often needed in development environments.  You
do not have to use the `shell' command for this purpose in GDB:

`make MAKE-ARGS'
     Execute the `make' program with the specified arguments.  This is
     equivalent to `shell make MAKE-ARGS'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Logging output,  Prev: Shell Commands,  Up: Invocation

2.4 Logging output
==================

You may want to save the output of GDB commands to a file.  There are
several commands to control GDB's logging.

`set logging on'
     Enable logging.

`set logging off'
     Disable logging.  

`set logging file FILE'
     Change the name of the current logfile.  The default logfile is
     `gdb.txt'.

`set logging overwrite [on|off]'
     By default, GDB will append to the logfile.  Set `overwrite' if
     you want `set logging on' to overwrite the logfile instead.

`set logging redirect [on|off]'
     By default, GDB output will go to both the terminal and the
     logfile.  Set `redirect' if you want output to go only to the log
     file.  

`show logging'
     Show the current values of the logging settings.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Commands,  Next: Running,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top

3 GDB Commands
**************

You can abbreviate a GDB command to the first few letters of the command
name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
GDB commands by typing just <RET>.  You can also use the <TAB> key to
get GDB to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to show you the
alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).

* Menu:

* Command Syntax::              How to give commands to GDB
* Completion::                  Command completion
* Help::                        How to ask GDB for help

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Command Syntax,  Next: Completion,  Up: Commands

3.1 Command syntax
==================

A GDB command is a single line of input.  There is no limit on how long
it can be.  It starts with a command name, which is followed by
arguments whose meaning depends on the command name.  For example, the
command `step' accepts an argument which is the number of times to
step, as in `step 5'.  You can also use the `step' command with no
arguments.  Some commands do not allow any arguments.

   GDB command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
unambiguous.  Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
documentation for individual commands.  In some cases, even ambiguous
abbreviations are allowed; for example, `s' is specially defined as
equivalent to `step' even though there are other commands whose names
start with `s'.  You can test abbreviations by using them as arguments
to the `help' command.

   A blank line as input to GDB (typing just <RET>) means to repeat the
previous command.  Certain commands (for example, `run') will not
repeat this way; these are commands whose unintentional repetition
might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to repeat.
User-defined commands can disable this feature; see *Note dont-repeat:
Define.

   The `list' and `x' commands, when you repeat them with <RET>,
construct new arguments rather than repeating exactly as typed.  This
permits easy scanning of source or memory.

   GDB can also use <RET> in another way: to partition lengthy output,
in a way similar to the common utility `more' (*note Screen size:
Screen Size.).  Since it is easy to press one <RET> too many in this
situation, GDB disables command repetition after any command that
generates this sort of display.

   Any text from a `#' to the end of the line is a comment; it does
nothing.  This is useful mainly in command files (*note Command files:
Command Files.).

   The `Ctrl-o' binding is useful for repeating a complex sequence of
commands.  This command accepts the current line, like <RET>, and then
fetches the next line relative to the current line from the history for
editing.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Completion,  Next: Help,  Prev: Command Syntax,  Up: Commands

3.2 Command completion
======================

GDB can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
are for the next word in a command, at any time.  This works for GDB
commands, GDB subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.

   Press the <TAB> key whenever you want GDB to fill out the rest of a
word.  If there is only one possibility, GDB fills in the word, and
waits for you to finish the command (or press <RET> to enter it).  For
example, if you type

     (gdb) info bre <TAB>

GDB fills in the rest of the word `breakpoints', since that is the only
`info' subcommand beginning with `bre':

     (gdb) info breakpoints

You can either press <RET> at this point, to run the `info breakpoints'
command, or backspace and enter something else, if `breakpoints' does
not look like the command you expected.  (If you were sure you wanted
`info breakpoints' in the first place, you might as well just type
<RET> immediately after `info bre', to exploit command abbreviations
rather than command completion).

   If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you
press <TAB>, GDB sounds a bell.  You can either supply more characters
and try again, or just press <TAB> a second time; GDB displays all the
possible completions for that word.  For example, you might want to set
a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name begins with `make_', but when
you type `b make_<TAB>' GDB just sounds the bell.  Typing <TAB> again
displays all the function names in your program that begin with those
characters, for example:

     (gdb) b make_ <TAB>
GDB sounds bell; press <TAB> again, to see:
     make_a_section_from_file     make_environ
     make_abs_section             make_function_type
     make_blockvector             make_pointer_type
     make_cleanup                 make_reference_type
     make_command                 make_symbol_completion_list
     (gdb) b make_

After displaying the available possibilities, GDB copies your partial
input (`b make_' in the example) so you can finish the command.

   If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place,
you can press `M-?' rather than pressing <TAB> twice.  `M-?' means
`<META> ?'.  You can type this either by holding down a key designated
as the <META> shift on your keyboard (if there is one) while typing
`?', or as <ESC> followed by `?'.

   Sometimes the string you need, while logically a "word", may contain
parentheses or other characters that GDB normally excludes from its
notion of a word.  To permit word completion to work in this situation,
you may enclose words in `'' (single quote marks) in GDB commands.

   The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
name of a C++ function.  This is because C++ allows function
overloading (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished
by argument type).  For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you
may need to distinguish whether you mean the version of `name' that
takes an `int' parameter, `name(int)', or the version that takes a
`float' parameter, `name(float)'.  To use the word-completion
facilities in this situation, type a single quote `'' at the beginning
of the function name.  This alerts GDB that it may need to consider
more information than usual when you press <TAB> or `M-?' to request
word completion:

     (gdb) b 'bubble( M-?
     bubble(double,double)    bubble(int,int)
     (gdb) b 'bubble(

   In some cases, GDB can tell that completing a name requires using
quotes.  When this happens, GDB inserts the quote for you (while
completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
place:

     (gdb) b bub <TAB>
GDB alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
     (gdb) b 'bubble(

In general, GDB can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if you
have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
completion on an overloaded symbol.

   For more information about overloaded functions, see *Note C++
expressions: C plus plus expressions.  You can use the command `set
overload-resolution off' to disable overload resolution; see *Note GDB
features for C++: Debugging C plus plus.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Help,  Prev: Completion,  Up: Commands

3.3 Getting help
================

You can always ask GDB itself for information on its commands, using
the command `help'.

`help'
`h'
     You can use `help' (abbreviated `h') with no arguments to display
     a short list of named classes of commands:

          (gdb) help
          List of classes of commands:

          aliases -- Aliases of other commands
          breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
          data -- Examining data
          files -- Specifying and examining files
          internals -- Maintenance commands
          obscure -- Obscure features
          running -- Running the program
          stack -- Examining the stack
          status -- Status inquiries
          support -- Support facilities
          tracepoints -- Tracing of program execution without

          stopping the program
          user-defined -- User-defined commands

          Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
          commands in that class.
          Type "help" followed by command name for full
          documentation.
          Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
          (gdb)

`help CLASS'
     Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
     list of the individual commands in that class.  For example, here
     is the help display for the class `status':

          (gdb) help status
          Status inquiries.

          List of commands:

          info -- Generic command for showing things
           about the program being debugged
          show -- Generic command for showing things
           about the debugger

          Type "help" followed by command name for full
          documentation.
          Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
          (gdb)

`help COMMAND'
     With a command name as `help' argument, GDB displays a short
     paragraph on how to use that command.

`apropos ARGS'
     The `apropos' command searches through all of the GDB commands,
     and their documentation, for the regular expression specified in
     ARGS. It prints out all matches found. For example:

          apropos reload

     results in:

          set symbol-reloading -- Set dynamic symbol table reloading
                                           multiple times in one run
          show symbol-reloading -- Show dynamic symbol table reloading
                                           multiple times in one run

`complete ARGS'
     The `complete ARGS' command lists all the possible completions for
     the beginning of a command.  Use ARGS to specify the beginning of
     the command you want completed.  For example:

          complete i

     results in:

          if
          ignore
          info
          inspect

     This is intended for use by GNU Emacs.

   In addition to `help', you can use the GDB commands `info' and
`show' to inquire about the state of your program, or the state of GDB
itself.  Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this manual
introduces each of them in the appropriate context.  The listings under
`info' and under `show' in the Index point to all the sub-commands.
*Note Index::.

`info'
     This command (abbreviated `i') is for describing the state of your
     program.  For example, you can list the arguments given to your
     program with `info args', list the registers currently in use with
     `info registers', or list the breakpoints you have set with `info
     breakpoints'.  You can get a complete list of the `info'
     sub-commands with `help info'.

`set'
     You can assign the result of an expression to an environment
     variable with `set'.  For example, you can set the GDB prompt to a
     $-sign with `set prompt $'.

`show'
     In contrast to `info', `show' is for describing the state of GDB
     itself.  You can change most of the things you can `show', by
     using the related command `set'; for example, you can control what
     number system is used for displays with `set radix', or simply
     inquire which is currently in use with `show radix'.

     To display all the settable parameters and their current values,
     you can use `show' with no arguments; you may also use `info set'.
     Both commands produce the same display.

   Here are three miscellaneous `show' subcommands, all of which are
exceptional in lacking corresponding `set' commands:

`show version'
     Show what version of GDB is running.  You should include this
     information in GDB bug-reports.  If multiple versions of GDB are
     in use at your site, you may need to determine which version of
     GDB you are running; as GDB evolves, new commands are introduced,
     and old ones may wither away.  Also, many system vendors ship
     variant versions of GDB, and there are variant versions of GDB in
     GNU/Linux distributions as well.  The version number is the same
     as the one announced when you start GDB.

`show copying'
`info copying'
     Display information about permission for copying GDB.

`show warranty'
`info warranty'
     Display the GNU "NO WARRANTY" statement, or a warranty, if your
     version of GDB comes with one.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Running,  Next: Stopping,  Prev: Commands,  Up: Top

4 Running Programs Under GDB
****************************

When you run a program under GDB, you must first generate debugging
information when you compile it.

   You may start GDB with its arguments, if any, in an environment of
your choice.  If you are doing native debugging, you may redirect your
program's input and output, debug an already running process, or kill a
child process.

* Menu:

* Compilation::                 Compiling for debugging
* Starting::                    Starting your program
* Arguments::                   Your program's arguments
* Environment::                 Your program's environment

* Working Directory::           Your program's working directory
* Input/Output::                Your program's input and output
* Attach::                      Debugging an already-running process
* Kill Process::                Killing the child process

* Threads::                     Debugging programs with multiple threads
* Processes::                   Debugging programs with multiple processes
* Checkpoint/Restart::          Setting a _bookmark_ to return to later

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Compilation,  Next: Starting,  Up: Running

4.1 Compiling for debugging
===========================

In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate debugging
information when you compile it.  This debugging information is stored
in the object file; it describes the data type of each variable or
function and the correspondence between source line numbers and
addresses in the executable code.

   To request debugging information, specify the `-g' option when you
run the compiler.

   Programs that are to be shipped to your customers are compiled with
optimizations, using the `-O' compiler option.  However, many compilers
are unable to handle the `-g' and `-O' options together.  Using those
compilers, you cannot generate optimized executables containing
debugging information.

   GCC, the GNU C/C++ compiler, supports `-g' with or without `-O',
making it possible to debug optimized code.  We recommend that you
_always_ use `-g' whenever you compile a program.  You may think your
program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing your luck.

   When you debug a program compiled with `-g -O', remember that the
optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger shows you what is
really there.  Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
exactly match your source file!  An extreme example: if you define a
variable, but never use it, GDB never sees that variable--because the
compiler optimizes it out of existence.

   Some things do not work as well with `-g -O' as with just `-g',
particularly on machines with instruction scheduling.  If in doubt,
recompile with `-g' alone, and if this fixes the problem, please report
it to us as a bug (including a test case!).  *Note Variables::, for
more information about debugging optimized code.

   Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
`-gg' for debugging information.  GDB no longer supports this format;
if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.

   GDB knows about preprocessor macros and can show you their expansion
(*note Macros::).  Most compilers do not include information about
preprocessor macros in the debugging information if you specify the
`-g' flag alone, because this information is rather large.  Version 3.1
and later of GCC, the GNU C compiler, provides macro information if you
specify the options `-gdwarf-2' and `-g3'; the former option requests
debugging information in the Dwarf 2 format, and the latter requests
"extra information".  In the future, we hope to find more compact ways
to represent macro information, so that it can be included with `-g'
alone.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Starting,  Next: Arguments,  Prev: Compilation,  Up: Running

4.2 Starting your program
=========================

`run'
`r'
     Use the `run' command to start your program under GDB.  You must
     first specify the program name (except on VxWorks) with an
     argument to GDB (*note Getting In and Out of GDB: Invocation.), or
     by using the `file' or `exec-file' command (*note Commands to
     specify files: Files.).


   If you are running your program in an execution environment that
supports processes, `run' creates an inferior process and makes that
process run your program.  (In environments without processes, `run'
jumps to the start of your program.)

   The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
receives from its superior.  GDB provides ways to specify this
information, which you must do _before_ starting your program.  (You
can change it after starting your program, but such changes only affect
your program the next time you start it.)  This information may be
divided into four categories:

The _arguments._
     Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
     `run' command.  If a shell is available on your target, the shell
     is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal
     conventions (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution)
     in describing the arguments.  In Unix systems, you can control
     which shell is used with the `SHELL' environment variable.  *Note
     Your program's arguments: Arguments.

The _environment._
     Your program normally inherits its environment from GDB, but you
     can use the GDB commands `set environment' and `unset environment'
     to change parts of the environment that affect your program.
     *Note Your program's environment: Environment.

The _working directory._
     Your program inherits its working directory from GDB.  You can set
     the GDB working directory with the `cd' command in GDB.  *Note
     Your program's working directory: Working Directory.

The _standard input and output._
     Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
     standard output as GDB is using.  You can redirect input and output
     in the `run' command line, or you can use the `tty' command to set
     a different device for your program.  *Note Your program's input
     and output: Input/Output.

     _Warning:_ While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
     pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to
     another program; if you attempt this, GDB is likely to wind up
     debugging the wrong program.

   When you issue the `run' command, your program begins to execute
immediately.  *Note Stopping and continuing: Stopping, for discussion
of how to arrange for your program to stop.  Once your program has
stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the `print' or
`call' commands.  *Note Examining Data: Data.

   If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the
last time GDB read its symbols, GDB discards its symbol table, and
reads it again.  When it does this, GDB tries to retain your current
breakpoints.

`start'
     The name of the main procedure can vary from language to language.
     With C or C++, the main procedure name is always `main', but other
     languages such as Ada do not require a specific name for their
     main procedure.  The debugger provides a convenient way to start
     the execution of the program and to stop at the beginning of the
     main procedure, depending on the language used.

     The `start' command does the equivalent of setting a temporary
     breakpoint at the beginning of the main procedure and then invoking
     the `run' command.

     Some programs contain an "elaboration" phase where some startup
     code is executed before the main procedure is called.  This
     depends on the languages used to write your program.  In C++, for
     instance, constructors for static and global objects are executed
     before `main' is called.  It is therefore possible that the
     debugger stops before reaching the main procedure.  However, the
     temporary breakpoint will remain to halt execution.

     Specify the arguments to give to your program as arguments to the
     `start' command.  These arguments will be given verbatim to the
     underlying `run' command.  Note that the same arguments will be
     reused if no argument is provided during subsequent calls to
     `start' or `run'.

     It is sometimes necessary to debug the program during elaboration.
     In these cases, using the `start' command would stop the
     execution of your program too late, as the program would have
     already completed the elaboration phase.  Under these
     circumstances, insert breakpoints in your elaboration code before
     running your program.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Arguments,  Next: Environment,  Prev: Starting,  Up: Running

4.3 Your program's arguments
============================

The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
`run' command.  They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
Your `SHELL' environment variable (if it exists) specifies what shell
GDB uses.  If you do not define `SHELL', GDB uses the default shell
(`/bin/sh' on Unix).

   On non-Unix systems, the program is usually invoked directly by GDB,
which emulates I/O redirection via the appropriate system calls, and
the wildcard characters are expanded by the startup code of the
program, not by the shell.

   `run' with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
`run', or those set by the `set args' command.

`set args'
     Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is
     run.  If `set args' has no arguments, `run' executes your program
     with no arguments.  Once you have run your program with arguments,
     using `set args' before the next `run' is the only way to run it
     again without arguments.

`show args'
     Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Environment,  Next: Working Directory,  Prev: Arguments,  Up: Running

4.4 Your program's environment
==============================

The "environment" consists of a set of environment variables and their
values.  Environment variables conventionally record such things as
your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
path for programs to run.  Usually you set up environment variables with
the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run.
When debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a
modified environment without having to start GDB over again.

`path DIRECTORY'
     Add DIRECTORY to the front of the `PATH' environment variable (the
     search path for executables) that will be passed to your program.
     The value of `PATH' used by GDB does not change.  You may specify
     several directory names, separated by whitespace or by a
     system-dependent separator character (`:' on Unix, `;' on MS-DOS
     and MS-Windows).  If DIRECTORY is already in the path, it is moved
     to the front, so it is searched sooner.

     You can use the string `$cwd' to refer to whatever is the current
     working directory at the time GDB searches the path.  If you use
     `.' instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
     `path' command.  GDB replaces `.' in the DIRECTORY argument (with
     the current path) before adding DIRECTORY to the search path.

`show paths'
     Display the list of search paths for executables (the `PATH'
     environment variable).

`show environment [VARNAME]'
     Print the value of environment variable VARNAME to be given to
     your program when it starts.  If you do not supply VARNAME, print
     the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
     your program.  You can abbreviate `environment' as `env'.

`set environment VARNAME [=VALUE]'
     Set environment variable VARNAME to VALUE.  The value changes for
     your program only, not for GDB itself.  VALUE may be any string;
     the values of environment variables are just strings, and any
     interpretation is supplied by your program itself.  The VALUE
     parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to
     a null value.

     For example, this command:

          set env USER = foo

     tells the debugged program, when subsequently run, that its user
     is named `foo'.  (The spaces around `=' are used for clarity here;
     they are not actually required.)

`unset environment VARNAME'
     Remove variable VARNAME from the environment to be passed to your
     program.  This is different from `set env VARNAME ='; `unset
     environment' removes the variable from the environment, rather
     than assigning it an empty value.

   _Warning:_ On Unix systems, GDB runs your program using the shell
indicated by your `SHELL' environment variable if it exists (or
`/bin/sh' if not).  If your `SHELL' variable names a shell that runs an
initialization file--such as `.cshrc' for C-shell, or `.bashrc' for
BASH--any variables you set in that file affect your program.  You may
wish to move setting of environment variables to files that are only
run when you sign on, such as `.login' or `.profile'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Working Directory,  Next: Input/Output,  Prev: Environment,  Up: Running

4.5 Your program's working directory
====================================

Each time you start your program with `run', it inherits its working
directory from the current working directory of GDB.  The GDB working
directory is initially whatever it inherited from its parent process
(typically the shell), but you can specify a new working directory in
GDB with the `cd' command.

   The GDB working directory also serves as a default for the commands
that specify files for GDB to operate on.  *Note Commands to specify
files: Files.

`cd DIRECTORY'
     Set the GDB working directory to DIRECTORY.

`pwd'
     Print the GDB working directory.

   It is generally impossible to find the current working directory of
the process being debugged (since a program can change its directory
during its run).  If you work on a system where GDB is configured with
the `/proc' support, you can use the `info proc' command (*note SVR4
Process Information::) to find out the current working directory of the
debuggee.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Input/Output,  Next: Attach,  Prev: Working Directory,  Up: Running

4.6 Your program's input and output
===================================

By default, the program you run under GDB does input and output to the
same terminal that GDB uses.  GDB switches the terminal to its own
terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal modes
your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
running your program.

`info terminal'
     Displays information recorded by GDB about the terminal modes your
     program is using.

   You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
redirection with the `run' command.  For example,

     run > outfile

starts your program, diverting its output to the file `outfile'.

   Another way to specify where your program should do input and output
is with the `tty' command.  This command accepts a file name as
argument, and causes this file to be the default for future `run'
commands.  It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
process, for future `run' commands.  For example,

     tty /dev/ttyb

directs that processes started with subsequent `run' commands default
to do input and output on the terminal `/dev/ttyb' and have that as
their controlling terminal.

   An explicit redirection in `run' overrides the `tty' command's
effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
terminal.

   When you use the `tty' command or redirect input in the `run'
command, only the input _for your program_ is affected.  The input for
GDB still comes from your terminal.  `tty' is an alias for `set
inferior-tty'.

   You can use the `show inferior-tty' command to tell GDB to display
the name of the terminal that will be used for future runs of your
program.

`set inferior-tty /dev/ttyb'
     Set the tty for the program being debugged to /dev/ttyb.

`show inferior-tty'
     Show the current tty for the program being debugged.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Attach,  Next: Kill Process,  Prev: Input/Output,  Up: Running

4.7 Debugging an already-running process
========================================

`attach PROCESS-ID'
     This command attaches to a running process--one that was started
     outside GDB.  (`info files' shows your active targets.)  The
     command takes as argument a process ID.  The usual way to find out
     the PROCESS-ID of a Unix process is with the `ps' utility, or with
     the `jobs -l' shell command.

     `attach' does not repeat if you press <RET> a second time after
     executing the command.

   To use `attach', your program must be running in an environment
which supports processes; for example, `attach' does not work for
programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system.  You must
also have permission to send the process a signal.

   When you use `attach', the debugger finds the program running in the
process first by looking in the current working directory, then (if the
program is not found) by using the source file search path (*note
Specifying source directories: Source Path.).  You can also use the
`file' command to load the program.  *Note Commands to Specify Files:
Files.

   The first thing GDB does after arranging to debug the specified
process is to stop it.  You can examine and modify an attached process
with all the GDB commands that are ordinarily available when you start
processes with `run'.  You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
continue; you can modify storage.  If you would rather the process
continue running, you may use the `continue' command after attaching
GDB to the process.

`detach'
     When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use
     the `detach' command to release it from GDB control.  Detaching
     the process continues its execution.  After the `detach' command,
     that process and GDB become completely independent once more, and
     you are ready to `attach' another process or start one with `run'.
     `detach' does not repeat if you press <RET> again after executing
     the command.

   If you exit GDB or use the `run' command while you have an attached
process, you kill that process.  By default, GDB asks for confirmation
if you try to do either of these things; you can control whether or not
you need to confirm by using the `set confirm' command (*note Optional
warnings and messages: Messages/Warnings.).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Kill Process,  Next: Threads,  Prev: Attach,  Up: Running

4.8 Killing the child process
=============================

`kill'
     Kill the child process in which your program is running under GDB.

   This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
running process.  GDB ignores any core dump file while your program is
running.

   On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside GDB
while you have breakpoints set on it inside GDB.  You can use the
`kill' command in this situation to permit running your program outside
the debugger.

   The `kill' command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
executable file while it is running in a process.  In this case, when
you next type `run', GDB notices that the file has changed, and reads
the symbol table again (while trying to preserve your current
breakpoint settings).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Threads,  Next: Processes,  Prev: Kill Process,  Up: Running

4.9 Debugging programs with multiple threads
============================================

In some operating systems, such as HP-UX and Solaris, a single program
may have more than one "thread" of execution.  The precise semantics of
threads differ from one operating system to another, but in general the
threads of a single program are akin to multiple processes--except that
they share one address space (that is, they can all examine and modify
the same variables).  On the other hand, each thread has its own
registers and execution stack, and perhaps private memory.

   GDB provides these facilities for debugging multi-thread programs:

   * automatic notification of new threads

   * `thread THREADNO', a command to switch among threads

   * `info threads', a command to inquire about existing threads

   * `thread apply [THREADNO] [ALL] ARGS', a command to apply a command
     to a list of threads

   * thread-specific breakpoints

     _Warning:_ These facilities are not yet available on every GDB
     configuration where the operating system supports threads.  If
     your GDB does not support threads, these commands have no effect.
     For example, a system without thread support shows no output from
     `info threads', and always rejects the `thread' command, like this:

          (gdb) info threads
          (gdb) thread 1
          Thread ID 1 not known.  Use the "info threads" command to
          see the IDs of currently known threads.

   The GDB thread debugging facility allows you to observe all threads
while your program runs--but whenever GDB takes control, one thread in
particular is always the focus of debugging.  This thread is called the
"current thread".  Debugging commands show program information from the
perspective of the current thread.

   Whenever GDB detects a new thread in your program, it displays the
target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
form `[New SYSTAG]'.  SYSTAG is a thread identifier whose form varies
depending on the particular system.  For example, on LynxOS, you might
see

     [New process 35 thread 27]

when GDB notices a new thread.  In contrast, on an SGI system, the
SYSTAG is simply something like `process 368', with no further
qualifier.

   For debugging purposes, GDB associates its own thread number--always
a single integer--with each thread in your program.

`info threads'
     Display a summary of all threads currently in your program.  GDB
     displays for each thread (in this order):

       1. the thread number assigned by GDB

       2. the target system's thread identifier (SYSTAG)

       3. the current stack frame summary for that thread

     An asterisk `*' to the left of the GDB thread number indicates the
     current thread.

     For example,

     (gdb) info threads
       3 process 35 thread 27  0x34e5 in sigpause ()
       2 process 35 thread 23  0x34e5 in sigpause ()
     * 1 process 35 thread 13  main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffff8)
         at threadtest.c:68

   On HP-UX systems:

   For debugging purposes, GDB associates its own thread number--a
small integer assigned in thread-creation order--with each thread in
your program.

   Whenever GDB detects a new thread in your program, it displays both
GDB's thread number and the target system's identification for the
thread with a message in the form `[New SYSTAG]'.  SYSTAG is a thread
identifier whose form varies depending on the particular system.  For
example, on HP-UX, you see

     [New thread 2 (system thread 26594)]

when GDB notices a new thread.

`info threads'
     Display a summary of all threads currently in your program.  GDB
     displays for each thread (in this order):

       1. the thread number assigned by GDB

       2. the target system's thread identifier (SYSTAG)

       3. the current stack frame summary for that thread

     An asterisk `*' to the left of the GDB thread number indicates the
     current thread.

     For example,

     (gdb) info threads
         * 3 system thread 26607  worker (wptr=0x7b09c318 "@") \

     at quicksort.c:137
           2 system thread 26606  0x7b0030d8 in __ksleep () \

     from /usr/lib/libc.2
           1 system thread 27905  0x7b003498 in _brk () \

     from /usr/lib/libc.2

   On Solaris, you can display more information about user threads with
a Solaris-specific command:

`maint info sol-threads'
     Display info on Solaris user threads.

`thread THREADNO'
     Make thread number THREADNO the current thread.  The command
     argument THREADNO is the internal GDB thread number, as shown in
     the first field of the `info threads' display.  GDB responds by
     displaying the system identifier of the thread you selected, and
     its current stack frame summary:

          (gdb) thread 2
          [Switching to process 35 thread 23]
          0x34e5 in sigpause ()

     As with the `[New ...]' message, the form of the text after
     `Switching to' depends on your system's conventions for identifying
     threads.

`thread apply [THREADNO] [ALL] COMMAND'
     The `thread apply' command allows you to apply the named COMMAND
     to one or more threads.  Specify the numbers of the threads that
     you want affected with the command argument THREADNO.  It can be a
     single thread number, one of the numbers shown in the first field
     of the `info threads' display; or it could be a range of thread
     numbers, as in `2-4'.  To apply a command to all threads, type
     `thread apply all COMMAND'.

   Whenever GDB stops your program, due to a breakpoint or a signal, it
automatically selects the thread where that breakpoint or signal
happened.  GDB alerts you to the context switch with a message of the
form `[Switching to SYSTAG]' to identify the thread.

   *Note Stopping and starting multi-thread programs: Thread Stops, for
more information about how GDB behaves when you stop and start programs
with multiple threads.

   *Note Setting watchpoints: Set Watchpoints, for information about
watchpoints in programs with multiple threads.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Processes,  Next: Checkpoint/Restart,  Prev: Threads,  Up: Running

4.10 Debugging programs with multiple processes
===============================================

On most systems, GDB has no special support for debugging programs
which create additional processes using the `fork' function.  When a
program forks, GDB will continue to debug the parent process and the
child process will run unimpeded.  If you have set a breakpoint in any
code which the child then executes, the child will get a `SIGTRAP'
signal which (unless it catches the signal) will cause it to terminate.

   However, if you want to debug the child process there is a workaround
which isn't too painful.  Put a call to `sleep' in the code which the
child process executes after the fork.  It may be useful to sleep only
if a certain environment variable is set, or a certain file exists, so
that the delay need not occur when you don't want to run GDB on the
child.  While the child is sleeping, use the `ps' program to get its
process ID.  Then tell GDB (a new invocation of GDB if you are also
debugging the parent process) to attach to the child process (*note
Attach::).  From that point on you can debug the child process just
like any other process which you attached to.

   On some systems, GDB provides support for debugging programs that
create additional processes using the `fork' or `vfork' functions.
Currently, the only platforms with this feature are HP-UX (11.x and
later only?) and GNU/Linux (kernel version 2.5.60 and later).

   By default, when a program forks, GDB will continue to debug the
parent process and the child process will run unimpeded.

   If you want to follow the child process instead of the parent
process, use the command `set follow-fork-mode'.

`set follow-fork-mode MODE'
     Set the debugger response to a program call of `fork' or `vfork'.
     A call to `fork' or `vfork' creates a new process.  The MODE
     argument can be:

    `parent'
          The original process is debugged after a fork.  The child
          process runs unimpeded.  This is the default.

    `child'
          The new process is debugged after a fork.  The parent process
          runs unimpeded.


`show follow-fork-mode'
     Display the current debugger response to a `fork' or `vfork' call.

   On Linux, if you want to debug both the parent and child processes,
use the command `set detach-on-fork'.

`set detach-on-fork MODE'
     Tells gdb whether to detach one of the processes after a fork, or
     retain debugger control over them both.

    `on'
          The child process (or parent process, depending on the value
          of `follow-fork-mode') will be detached and allowed to run
          independently.  This is the default.

    `off'
          Both processes will be held under the control of GDB.  One
          process (child or parent, depending on the value of
          `follow-fork-mode') is debugged as usual, while the other is
          held suspended.


`show detach-on-follow'
     Show whether detach-on-follow mode is on/off.

   If you choose to set DETACH-ON-FOLLOW mode off, then GDB will retain
control of all forked processes (including nested forks).  You can list
the forked processes under the control of GDB by using the `info forks'
command, and switch from one fork to another by using the `fork'
command.

`info forks'
     Print a list of all forked processes under the control of GDB.
     The listing will include a fork id, a process id, and the current
     position (program counter) of the process.

`fork FORK-ID'
     Make fork number FORK-ID the current process.  The argument
     FORK-ID is the internal fork number assigned by GDB, as shown in
     the first field of the `info forks' display.


   To quit debugging one of the forked processes, you can either detach
from it by using the `detach fork' command (allowing it to run
independently), or delete (and kill) it using the `delete fork' command.

`detach fork FORK-ID'
     Detach from the process identified by GDB fork number FORK-ID, and
     remove it from the fork list.  The process will be allowed to run
     independently.

`delete fork FORK-ID'
     Kill the process identified by GDB fork number FORK-ID, and remove
     it from the fork list.


   If you ask to debug a child process and a `vfork' is followed by an
`exec', GDB executes the new target up to the first breakpoint in the
new target.  If you have a breakpoint set on `main' in your original
program, the breakpoint will also be set on the child process's `main'.

   When a child process is spawned by `vfork', you cannot debug the
child or parent until an `exec' call completes.

   If you issue a `run' command to GDB after an `exec' call executes,
the new target restarts.  To restart the parent process, use the `file'
command with the parent executable name as its argument.

   You can use the `catch' command to make GDB stop whenever a `fork',
`vfork', or `exec' call is made.  *Note Setting catchpoints: Set
Catchpoints.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Checkpoint/Restart,  Prev: Processes,  Up: Running

4.11 Setting a _bookmark_ to return to later
============================================

On certain operating systems(1), GDB is able to save a "snapshot" of a
program's state, called a "checkpoint", and come back to it later.

   Returning to a checkpoint effectively undoes everything that has
happened in the program since the `checkpoint' was saved.  This
includes changes in memory, registers, and even (within some limits)
system state.  Effectively, it is like going back in time to the moment
when the checkpoint was saved.

   Thus, if you're stepping thru a program and you think you're getting
close to the point where things go wrong, you can save a checkpoint.
Then, if you accidentally go too far and miss the critical statement,
instead of having to restart your program from the beginning, you can
just go back to the checkpoint and start again from there.

   This can be especially useful if it takes a lot of time or steps to
reach the point where you think the bug occurs.

   To use the `checkpoint'/`restart' method of debugging:

`checkpoint'
     Save a snapshot of the debugged program's current execution state.
     The `checkpoint' command takes no arguments, but each checkpoint
     is assigned a small integer id, similar to a breakpoint id.

`info checkpoints'
     List the checkpoints that have been saved in the current debugging
     session.  For each checkpoint, the following information will be
     listed:

    `Checkpoint ID'

    `Process ID'

    `Code Address'

    `Source line, or label'

`restart CHECKPOINT-ID'
     Restore the program state that was saved as checkpoint number
     CHECKPOINT-ID.  All program variables, registers, stack frames
     etc.  will be returned to the values that they had when the
     checkpoint was saved.  In essence, gdb will "wind back the clock"
     to the point in time when the checkpoint was saved.

     Note that breakpoints, GDB variables, command history etc.  are
     not affected by restoring a checkpoint.  In general, a checkpoint
     only restores things that reside in the program being debugged,
     not in the debugger.

`delete checkpoint CHECKPOINT-ID'
     Delete the previously-saved checkpoint identified by CHECKPOINT-ID.


   Returning to a previously saved checkpoint will restore the user
state of the program being debugged, plus a significant subset of the
system (OS) state, including file pointers.  It won't "un-write" data
from a file, but it will rewind the file pointer to the previous
location, so that the previously written data can be overwritten.  For
files opened in read mode, the pointer will also be restored so that the
previously read data can be read again.

   Of course, characters that have been sent to a printer (or other
external device) cannot be "snatched back", and characters received
from eg. a serial device can be removed from internal program buffers,
but they cannot be "pushed back" into the serial pipeline, ready to be
received again.  Similarly, the actual contents of files that have been
changed cannot be restored (at this time).

   However, within those constraints, you actually can "rewind" your
program to a previously saved point in time, and begin debugging it
again -- and you can change the course of events so as to debug a
different execution path this time.

   Finally, there is one bit of internal program state that will be
different when you return to a checkpoint -- the program's process id.
Each checkpoint will have a unique process id (or PID), and each will
be different from the program's original PID.  If your program has
saved a local copy of its process id, this could potentially pose a
problem.

4.11.1 A non-obvious benefit of using checkpoints
-------------------------------------------------

On some systems such as GNU/Linux, address space randomization is
performed on new processes for security reasons.  This makes it
difficult or impossible to set a breakpoint, or watchpoint, on an
absolute address if you have to restart the program, since the absolute
location of a symbol will change from one execution to the next.

   A checkpoint, however, is an _identical_ copy of a process.
Therefore if you create a checkpoint at (eg.) the start of main, and
simply return to that checkpoint instead of restarting the process, you
can avoid the effects of address randomization and your symbols will
all stay in the same place.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Currently, only GNU/Linux.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Stopping,  Next: Stack,  Prev: Running,  Up: Top

5 Stopping and Continuing
*************************

The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
trouble, you can investigate and find out why.

   Inside GDB, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
as a signal, a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a GDB command
such as `step'.  You may then examine and change variables, set new
breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue execution.  Usually,
the messages shown by GDB provide ample explanation of the status of
your program--but you can also explicitly request this information at
any time.

`info program'
     Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
     running or not, what process it is, and why it stopped.

* Menu:

* Breakpoints::                 Breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints
* Continuing and Stepping::     Resuming execution
* Signals::                     Signals
* Thread Stops::                Stopping and starting multi-thread programs

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Breakpoints,  Next: Continuing and Stepping,  Up: Stopping

5.1 Breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints
=============================================

A "breakpoint" makes your program stop whenever a certain point in the
program is reached.  For each breakpoint, you can add conditions to
control in finer detail whether your program stops.  You can set
breakpoints with the `break' command and its variants (*note Setting
breakpoints: Set Breaks.), to specify the place where your program
should stop by line number, function name or exact address in the
program.

   On some systems, you can set breakpoints in shared libraries before
the executable is run.  There is a minor limitation on HP-UX systems:
you must wait until the executable is run in order to set breakpoints
in shared library routines that are not called directly by the program
(for example, routines that are arguments in a `pthread_create' call).

   A "watchpoint" is a special breakpoint that stops your program when
the value of an expression changes.  The expression may be a value of a
variable, or it could involve values of one or more variables combined
by operators, such as `a + b'.  This is sometimes called "data
breakpoints".  You must use a different command to set watchpoints
(*note Setting watchpoints: Set Watchpoints.), but aside from that, you
can manage a watchpoint like any other breakpoint: you enable, disable,
and delete both breakpoints and watchpoints using the same commands.

   You can arrange to have values from your program displayed
automatically whenever GDB stops at a breakpoint.  *Note Automatic
display: Auto Display.

   A "catchpoint" is another special breakpoint that stops your program
when a certain kind of event occurs, such as the throwing of a C++
exception or the loading of a library.  As with watchpoints, you use a
different command to set a catchpoint (*note Setting catchpoints: Set
Catchpoints.), but aside from that, you can manage a catchpoint like any
other breakpoint.  (To stop when your program receives a signal, use the
`handle' command; see *Note Signals: Signals.)

   GDB assigns a number to each breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint
when you create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with
one.  In many of the commands for controlling various features of
breakpoints you use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you
want to change.  Each breakpoint may be "enabled" or "disabled"; if
disabled, it has no effect on your program until you enable it again.

   Some GDB commands accept a range of breakpoints on which to operate.
A breakpoint range is either a single breakpoint number, like `5', or
two such numbers, in increasing order, separated by a hyphen, like
`5-7'.  When a breakpoint range is given to a command, all breakpoint
in that range are operated on.

* Menu:

* Set Breaks::                  Setting breakpoints
* Set Watchpoints::             Setting watchpoints
* Set Catchpoints::             Setting catchpoints
* Delete Breaks::               Deleting breakpoints
* Disabling::                   Disabling breakpoints
* Conditions::                  Break conditions
* Break Commands::              Breakpoint command lists
* Breakpoint Menus::            Breakpoint menus
* Error in Breakpoints::        ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
* Breakpoint related warnings:: ``Breakpoint address adjusted...''

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Set Breaks,  Next: Set Watchpoints,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.1 Setting breakpoints
-------------------------

Breakpoints are set with the `break' command (abbreviated `b').  The
debugger convenience variable `$bpnum' records the number of the
breakpoint you've set most recently; see *Note Convenience variables:
Convenience Vars, for a discussion of what you can do with convenience
variables.

   You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.

`break FUNCTION'
     Set a breakpoint at entry to function FUNCTION.  When using source
     languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as C++,
     FUNCTION may refer to more than one possible place to break.
     *Note Breakpoint menus: Breakpoint Menus, for a discussion of that
     situation.

`break +OFFSET'
`break -OFFSET'
     Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the
     position at which execution stopped in the currently selected
     "stack frame".  (*Note Frames: Frames, for a description of stack
     frames.)

`break LINENUM'
     Set a breakpoint at line LINENUM in the current source file.  The
     current source file is the last file whose source text was printed.
     The breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any
     of the code on that line.

`break FILENAME:LINENUM'
     Set a breakpoint at line LINENUM in source file FILENAME.

`break FILENAME:FUNCTION'
     Set a breakpoint at entry to function FUNCTION found in file
     FILENAME.  Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
     superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
     functions.

`break *ADDRESS'
     Set a breakpoint at address ADDRESS.  You can use this to set
     breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
     information or source files.

`break'
     When called without any arguments, `break' sets a breakpoint at
     the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
     (*note Examining the Stack: Stack.).  In any selected frame but the
     innermost, this makes your program stop as soon as control returns
     to that frame.  This is similar to the effect of a `finish'
     command in the frame inside the selected frame--except that
     `finish' does not leave an active breakpoint.  If you use `break'
     without an argument in the innermost frame, GDB stops the next
     time it reaches the current location; this may be useful inside
     loops.

     GDB normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until
     at least one instruction has been executed.  If it did not do
     this, you would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without
     first disabling the breakpoint.  This rule applies whether or not
     the breakpoint already existed when your program stopped.

`break ... if COND'
     Set a breakpoint with condition COND; evaluate the expression COND
     each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the value is
     nonzero--that is, if COND evaluates as true.  `...' stands for one
     of the possible arguments described above (or no argument)
     specifying where to break.  *Note Break conditions: Conditions,
     for more information on breakpoint conditions.

`tbreak ARGS'
     Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop.  ARGS are the same as
     for the `break' command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
     way, but the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the first
     time your program stops there.  *Note Disabling breakpoints:
     Disabling.

`hbreak ARGS'
     Set a hardware-assisted breakpoint.  ARGS are the same as for the
     `break' command and the breakpoint is set in the same way, but the
     breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware may
     not have this support.  The main purpose of this is EPROM/ROM code
     debugging, so you can set a breakpoint at an instruction without
     changing the instruction.  This can be used with the new
     trap-generation provided by SPARClite DSU and most x86-based
     targets.  These targets will generate traps when a program
     accesses some data or instruction address that is assigned to the
     debug registers.  However the hardware breakpoint registers can
     take a limited number of breakpoints.  For example, on the DSU,
     only two data breakpoints can be set at a time, and GDB will
     reject this command if more than two are used.  Delete or disable
     unused hardware breakpoints before setting new ones (*note
     Disabling: Disabling.).  *Note Break conditions: Conditions.  For
     remote targets, you can restrict the number of hardware
     breakpoints GDB will use, see *Note set remote
     hardware-breakpoint-limit::.

`thbreak ARGS'
     Set a hardware-assisted breakpoint enabled only for one stop.  ARGS
     are the same as for the `hbreak' command and the breakpoint is set
     in the same way.  However, like the `tbreak' command, the
     breakpoint is automatically deleted after the first time your
     program stops there.  Also, like the `hbreak' command, the
     breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware may
     not have this support.  *Note Disabling breakpoints: Disabling.
     See also *Note Break conditions: Conditions.

`rbreak REGEX'
     Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
     REGEX.  This command sets an unconditional breakpoint on all
     matches, printing a list of all breakpoints it set.  Once these
     breakpoints are set, they are treated just like the breakpoints
     set with the `break' command.  You can delete them, disable them,
     or make them conditional the same way as any other breakpoint.

     The syntax of the regular expression is the standard one used with
     tools like `grep'.  Note that this is different from the syntax
     used by shells, so for instance `foo*' matches all functions that
     include an `fo' followed by zero or more `o's.  There is an
     implicit `.*' leading and trailing the regular expression you
     supply, so to match only functions that begin with `foo', use
     `^foo'.

     When debugging C++ programs, `rbreak' is useful for setting
     breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any
     special classes.

     The `rbreak' command can be used to set breakpoints in *all* the
     functions in a program, like this:

          (gdb) rbreak .

`info breakpoints [N]'
`info break [N]'
`info watchpoints [N]'
     Print a table of all breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints set
     and not deleted.  Optional argument N means print information only
     about the specified breakpoint (or watchpoint or catchpoint).  For
     each breakpoint, following columns are printed:

    _Breakpoint Numbers_

    _Type_
          Breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint.

    _Disposition_
          Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted
          when hit.

    _Enabled or Disabled_
          Enabled breakpoints are marked with `y'.  `n' marks
          breakpoints that are not enabled.

    _Address_
          Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address.
          If the breakpoint is pending (see below for details) on a
          future load of a shared library, the address will be listed
          as `<PENDING>'.

    _What_
          Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a
          file and line number.  For a pending breakpoint, the original
          string passed to the breakpoint command will be listed as it
          cannot be resolved until the appropriate shared library is
          loaded in the future.

     If a breakpoint is conditional, `info break' shows the condition on
     the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands,
     if any, are listed after that.  A pending breakpoint is allowed to
     have a condition specified for it.  The condition is not parsed
     for validity until a shared library is loaded that allows the
     pending breakpoint to resolve to a valid location.

     `info break' with a breakpoint number N as argument lists only
     that breakpoint.  The convenience variable `$_' and the default
     examining-address for the `x' command are set to the address of
     the last breakpoint listed (*note Examining memory: Memory.).

     `info break' displays a count of the number of times the breakpoint
     has been hit.  This is especially useful in conjunction with the
     `ignore' command.  You can ignore a large number of breakpoint
     hits, look at the breakpoint info to see how many times the
     breakpoint was hit, and then run again, ignoring one less than
     that number.  This will get you quickly to the last hit of that
     breakpoint.

   GDB allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
your program.  There is nothing silly or meaningless about this.  When
the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful (*note Break
conditions: Conditions.).

   If a specified breakpoint location cannot be found, it may be due to
the fact that the location is in a shared library that is yet to be
loaded.  In such a case, you may want GDB to create a special
breakpoint (known as a "pending breakpoint") that attempts to resolve
itself in the future when an appropriate shared library gets loaded.

   Pending breakpoints are useful to set at the start of your GDB
session for locations that you know will be dynamically loaded later by
the program being debugged.  When shared libraries are loaded, a check
is made to see if the load resolves any pending breakpoint locations.
If a pending breakpoint location gets resolved, a regular breakpoint is
created and the original pending breakpoint is removed.

   GDB provides some additional commands for controlling pending
breakpoint support:

`set breakpoint pending auto'
     This is the default behavior.  When GDB cannot find the breakpoint
     location, it queries you whether a pending breakpoint should be
     created.

`set breakpoint pending on'
     This indicates that an unrecognized breakpoint location should
     automatically result in a pending breakpoint being created.

`set breakpoint pending off'
     This indicates that pending breakpoints are not to be created.  Any
     unrecognized breakpoint location results in an error.  This
     setting does not affect any pending breakpoints previously created.

`show breakpoint pending'
     Show the current behavior setting for creating pending breakpoints.

   Normal breakpoint operations apply to pending breakpoints as well.
You may specify a condition for a pending breakpoint and/or commands to
run when the breakpoint is reached.  You can also enable or disable the
pending breakpoint.  When you specify a condition for a pending
breakpoint, the parsing of the condition will be deferred until the
point where the pending breakpoint location is resolved.  Disabling a
pending breakpoint tells GDB to not attempt to resolve the breakpoint
on any subsequent shared library load.  When a pending breakpoint is
re-enabled, GDB checks to see if the location is already resolved.
This is done because any number of shared library loads could have
occurred since the time the breakpoint was disabled and one or more of
these loads could resolve the location.

   GDB itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
purposes, such as proper handling of `longjmp' (in C programs).  These
internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with `-1';
`info breakpoints' does not display them.  You can see these
breakpoints with the GDB maintenance command `maint info breakpoints'
(*note maint info breakpoints::).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Set Watchpoints,  Next: Set Catchpoints,  Prev: Set Breaks,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.2 Setting watchpoints
-------------------------

You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
expression changes, without having to predict a particular place where
this may happen.  (This is sometimes called a "data breakpoint".)  The
expression may be as simple as the value of a single variable, or as
complex as many variables combined by operators.  Examples include:

   * A reference to the value of a single variable.

   * An address cast to an appropriate data type.  For example, `*(int
     *)0x12345678' will watch a 4-byte region at the specified address
     (assuming an `int' occupies 4 bytes).

   * An arbitrarily complex expression, such as `a*b + c/d'.  The
     expression can use any operators valid in the program's native
     language (*note Languages::).

   Depending on your system, watchpoints may be implemented in software
or hardware.  GDB does software watchpointing by single-stepping your
program and testing the variable's value each time, which is hundreds of
times slower than normal execution.  (But this may still be worth it, to
catch errors where you have no clue what part of your program is the
culprit.)

   On some systems, such as HP-UX, GNU/Linux and most other x86-based
targets, GDB includes support for hardware watchpoints, which do not
slow down the running of your program.

`watch EXPR'
     Set a watchpoint for an expression.  GDB will break when the
     expression EXPR is written into by the program and its value
     changes.  The simplest (and the most popular) use of this command
     is to watch the value of a single variable:

          (gdb) watch foo

`rwatch EXPR'
     Set a watchpoint that will break when the value of EXPR is read by
     the program.

`awatch EXPR'
     Set a watchpoint that will break when EXPR is either read from or
     written into by the program.

`info watchpoints'
     This command prints a list of watchpoints, breakpoints, and
     catchpoints; it is the same as `info break' (*note Set Breaks::).

   GDB sets a "hardware watchpoint" if possible.  Hardware watchpoints
execute very quickly, and the debugger reports a change in value at the
exact instruction where the change occurs.  If GDB cannot set a
hardware watchpoint, it sets a software watchpoint, which executes more
slowly and reports the change in value at the next _statement_, not the
instruction, after the change occurs.

   You can force GDB to use only software watchpoints with the `set
can-use-hw-watchpoints 0' command.  With this variable set to zero, GDB
will never try to use hardware watchpoints, even if the underlying
system supports them.  (Note that hardware-assisted watchpoints that
were set _before_ setting `can-use-hw-watchpoints' to zero will still
use the hardware mechanism of watching expressiion values.)

`set can-use-hw-watchpoints'
     Set whether or not to use hardware watchpoints.

`show can-use-hw-watchpoints'
     Show the current mode of using hardware watchpoints.

   For remote targets, you can restrict the number of hardware
watchpoints GDB will use, see *Note set remote
hardware-breakpoint-limit::.

   When you issue the `watch' command, GDB reports

     Hardware watchpoint NUM: EXPR

if it was able to set a hardware watchpoint.

   Currently, the `awatch' and `rwatch' commands can only set hardware
watchpoints, because accesses to data that don't change the value of
the watched expression cannot be detected without examining every
instruction as it is being executed, and GDB does not do that
currently.  If GDB finds that it is unable to set a hardware breakpoint
with the `awatch' or `rwatch' command, it will print a message like
this:

     Expression cannot be implemented with read/access watchpoint.

   Sometimes, GDB cannot set a hardware watchpoint because the data
type of the watched expression is wider than what a hardware watchpoint
on the target machine can handle.  For example, some systems can only
watch regions that are up to 4 bytes wide; on such systems you cannot
set hardware watchpoints for an expression that yields a
double-precision floating-point number (which is typically 8 bytes
wide).  As a work-around, it might be possible to break the large region
into a series of smaller ones and watch them with separate watchpoints.

   If you set too many hardware watchpoints, GDB might be unable to
insert all of them when you resume the execution of your program.
Since the precise number of active watchpoints is unknown until such
time as the program is about to be resumed, GDB might not be able to
warn you about this when you set the watchpoints, and the warning will
be printed only when the program is resumed:

     Hardware watchpoint NUM: Could not insert watchpoint

If this happens, delete or disable some of the watchpoints.

   Watching complex expressions that reference many variables can also
exhaust the resources available for hardware-assisted watchpoints.
That's because GDB needs to watch every variable in the expression with
separately allocated resources.

   The SPARClite DSU will generate traps when a program accesses some
data or instruction address that is assigned to the debug registers.
For the data addresses, DSU facilitates the `watch' command.  However
the hardware breakpoint registers can only take two data watchpoints,
and both watchpoints must be the same kind.  For example, you can set
two watchpoints with `watch' commands, two with `rwatch' commands, *or*
two with `awatch' commands, but you cannot set one watchpoint with one
command and the other with a different command.  GDB will reject the
command if you try to mix watchpoints.  Delete or disable unused
watchpoint commands before setting new ones.

   If you call a function interactively using `print' or `call', any
watchpoints you have set will be inactive until GDB reaches another
kind of breakpoint or the call completes.

   GDB automatically deletes watchpoints that watch local (automatic)
variables, or expressions that involve such variables, when they go out
of scope, that is, when the execution leaves the block in which these
variables were defined.  In particular, when the program being debugged
terminates, _all_ local variables go out of scope, and so only
watchpoints that watch global variables remain set.  If you rerun the
program, you will need to set all such watchpoints again.  One way of
doing that would be to set a code breakpoint at the entry to the `main'
function and when it breaks, set all the watchpoints.

     _Warning:_ In multi-thread programs, watchpoints have only limited
     usefulness.  With the current watchpoint implementation, GDB can
     only watch the value of an expression _in a single thread_.  If
     you are confident that the expression can only change due to the
     current thread's activity (and if you are also confident that no
     other thread can become current), then you can use watchpoints as
     usual.  However, GDB may not notice when a non-current thread's
     activity changes the expression.

     _HP-UX Warning:_ In multi-thread programs, software watchpoints
     have only limited usefulness.  If GDB creates a software
     watchpoint, it can only watch the value of an expression _in a
     single thread_.  If you are confident that the expression can only
     change due to the current thread's activity (and if you are also
     confident that no other thread can become current), then you can
     use software watchpoints as usual.  However, GDB may not notice
     when a non-current thread's activity changes the expression.
     (Hardware watchpoints, in contrast, watch an expression in all
     threads.)

   *Note set remote hardware-watchpoint-limit::.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Set Catchpoints,  Next: Delete Breaks,  Prev: Set Watchpoints,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.3 Setting catchpoints
-------------------------

You can use "catchpoints" to cause the debugger to stop for certain
kinds of program events, such as C++ exceptions or the loading of a
shared library.  Use the `catch' command to set a catchpoint.

`catch EVENT'
     Stop when EVENT occurs.  EVENT can be any of the following:
    `throw'
          The throwing of a C++ exception.

    `catch'
          The catching of a C++ exception.

    `exec'
          A call to `exec'.  This is currently only available for HP-UX.

    `fork'
          A call to `fork'.  This is currently only available for HP-UX.

    `vfork'
          A call to `vfork'.  This is currently only available for
          HP-UX.

    `load'
    `load LIBNAME'
          The dynamic loading of any shared library, or the loading of
          the library LIBNAME.  This is currently only available for
          HP-UX.

    `unload'
    `unload LIBNAME'
          The unloading of any dynamically loaded shared library, or
          the unloading of the library LIBNAME.  This is currently only
          available for HP-UX.

`tcatch EVENT'
     Set a catchpoint that is enabled only for one stop.  The
     catchpoint is automatically deleted after the first time the event
     is caught.


   Use the `info break' command to list the current catchpoints.

   There are currently some limitations to C++ exception handling
(`catch throw' and `catch catch') in GDB:

   * If you call a function interactively, GDB normally returns control
     to you when the function has finished executing.  If the call
     raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism
     that returns control to you and cause your program either to abort
     or to simply continue running until it hits a breakpoint, catches
     a signal that GDB is listening for, or exits.  This is the case
     even if you set a catchpoint for the exception; catchpoints on
     exceptions are disabled within interactive calls.

   * You cannot raise an exception interactively.

   * You cannot install an exception handler interactively.

   Sometimes `catch' is not the best way to debug exception handling:
if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better
to stop _before_ the exception handler is called, since that way you
can see the stack before any unwinding takes place.  If you set a
breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
out where the exception was raised.

   To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
knowledge of the implementation.  In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
raised by calling a library function named `__raise_exception' which
has the following ANSI C interface:

         /* ADDR is where the exception identifier is stored.
            ID is the exception identifier.  */
         void __raise_exception (void **addr, void *id);

To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack unwinding
takes place, set a breakpoint on `__raise_exception' (*note
Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions: Breakpoints.).

   With a conditional breakpoint (*note Break conditions: Conditions.)
that depends on the value of ID, you can stop your program when a
specific exception is raised.  You can use multiple conditional
breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
raised.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Delete Breaks,  Next: Disabling,  Prev: Set Catchpoints,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.4 Deleting breakpoints
--------------------------

It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint, watchpoint, or
catchpoint once it has done its job and you no longer want your program
to stop there.  This is called "deleting" the breakpoint.  A breakpoint
that has been deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.

   With the `clear' command you can delete breakpoints according to
where they are in your program.  With the `delete' command you can
delete individual breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints by specifying
their breakpoint numbers.

   It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it.  GDB
automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be
executed when you continue execution without changing the execution
address.

`clear'
     Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in
     the selected stack frame (*note Selecting a frame: Selection.).
     When the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete
     a breakpoint where your program just stopped.

`clear FUNCTION'
`clear FILENAME:FUNCTION'
     Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the named FUNCTION.

`clear LINENUM'
`clear FILENAME:LINENUM'
     Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified
     LINENUM of the specified FILENAME.

`delete [breakpoints] [RANGE...]'
     Delete the breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints of the
     breakpoint ranges specified as arguments.  If no argument is
     specified, delete all breakpoints (GDB asks confirmation, unless
     you have `set confirm off').  You can abbreviate this command as
     `d'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Disabling,  Next: Conditions,  Prev: Delete Breaks,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.5 Disabling breakpoints
---------------------------

Rather than deleting a breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint, you might
prefer to "disable" it.  This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it
had been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so
that you can "enable" it again later.

   You disable and enable breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints with
the `enable' and `disable' commands, optionally specifying one or more
breakpoint numbers as arguments.  Use `info break' or `info watch' to
print a list of breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints if you do not
know which numbers to use.

   A breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint can have any of four
different states of enablement:

   * Enabled.  The breakpoint stops your program.  A breakpoint set
     with the `break' command starts out in this state.

   * Disabled.  The breakpoint has no effect on your program.

   * Enabled once.  The breakpoint stops your program, but then becomes
     disabled.

   * Enabled for deletion.  The breakpoint stops your program, but
     immediately after it does so it is deleted permanently.  A
     breakpoint set with the `tbreak' command starts out in this state.

   You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints,
watchpoints, and catchpoints:

`disable [breakpoints] [RANGE...]'
     Disable the specified breakpoints--or all breakpoints, if none are
     listed.  A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten.
     All options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are
     remembered in case the breakpoint is enabled again later.  You may
     abbreviate `disable' as `dis'.

`enable [breakpoints] [RANGE...]'
     Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints).
     They become effective once again in stopping your program.

`enable [breakpoints] once RANGE...'
     Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily.  GDB disables any of
     these breakpoints immediately after stopping your program.

`enable [breakpoints] delete RANGE...'
     Enable the specified breakpoints to work once, then die.  GDB
     deletes any of these breakpoints as soon as your program stops
     there.  Breakpoints set by the `tbreak' command start out in this
     state.

   Except for a breakpoint set with `tbreak' (*note Setting
breakpoints: Set Breaks.), breakpoints that you set are initially
enabled; subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you
use one of the commands above.  (The command `until' can set and delete
a breakpoint of its own, but it does not change the state of your other
breakpoints; see *Note Continuing and stepping: Continuing and
Stepping.)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Conditions,  Next: Break Commands,  Prev: Disabling,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.6 Break conditions
----------------------

The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
specified place.  You can also specify a "condition" for a breakpoint.
A condition is just a Boolean expression in your programming language
(*note Expressions: Expressions.).  A breakpoint with a condition
evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it, and your
program stops only if the condition is _true_.

   This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in
that situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated--that
is, when the condition is false.  In C, if you want to test an
assertion expressed by the condition ASSERT, you should set the
condition `! ASSERT' on the appropriate breakpoint.

   Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow--but
it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an
interesting one.

   Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions
in your program.  This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to format
special data structures. The effects are completely predictable unless
there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address.  (In that
case, GDB might see the other breakpoint first and stop your program
without checking the condition of this one.)  Note that breakpoint
commands are usually more convenient and flexible than break conditions
for the purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
(*note Breakpoint command lists: Break Commands.).

   Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
`if' in the arguments to the `break' command.  *Note Setting
breakpoints: Set Breaks.  They can also be changed at any time with the
`condition' command.

   You can also use the `if' keyword with the `watch' command.  The
`catch' command does not recognize the `if' keyword; `condition' is the
only way to impose a further condition on a catchpoint.

`condition BNUM EXPRESSION'
     Specify EXPRESSION as the break condition for breakpoint,
     watchpoint, or catchpoint number BNUM.  After you set a condition,
     breakpoint BNUM stops your program only if the value of EXPRESSION
     is true (nonzero, in C).  When you use `condition', GDB checks
     EXPRESSION immediately for syntactic correctness, and to determine
     whether symbols in it have referents in the context of your
     breakpoint.  If EXPRESSION uses symbols not referenced in the
     context of the breakpoint, GDB prints an error message:

          No symbol "foo" in current context.

     GDB does not actually evaluate EXPRESSION at the time the
     `condition' command (or a command that sets a breakpoint with a
     condition, like `break if ...') is given, however.  *Note
     Expressions: Expressions.

`condition BNUM'
     Remove the condition from breakpoint number BNUM.  It becomes an
     ordinary unconditional breakpoint.

   A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times.  This is so
useful that there is a special way to do it, using the "ignore count"
of the breakpoint.  Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which is an
integer.  Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and therefore has
no effect.  But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose ignore count
is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements the ignore
count by one and continues.  As a result, if the ignore count value is
N, the breakpoint does not stop the next N times your program reaches
it.

`ignore BNUM COUNT'
     Set the ignore count of breakpoint number BNUM to COUNT.  The next
     COUNT times the breakpoint is reached, your program's execution
     does not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, GDB takes
     no action.

     To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify a
     count of zero.

     When you use `continue' to resume execution of your program from a
     breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an
     argument to `continue', rather than using `ignore'.  *Note
     Continuing and stepping: Continuing and Stepping.

     If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the
     condition is not checked.  Once the ignore count reaches zero, GDB
     resumes checking the condition.

     You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition
     such as `$foo-- <= 0' using a debugger convenience variable that
     is decremented each time.  *Note Convenience variables:
     Convenience Vars.

   Ignore counts apply to breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Break Commands,  Next: Breakpoint Menus,  Prev: Conditions,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.7 Breakpoint command lists
------------------------------

You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint or catchpoint) a series of
commands to execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint.  For
example, you might want to print the values of certain expressions, or
enable other breakpoints.

`commands [BNUM]'
`... COMMAND-LIST ...'
`end'
     Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number BNUM.  The
     commands themselves appear on the following lines.  Type a line
     containing just `end' to terminate the commands.

     To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type `commands' and
     follow it immediately with `end'; that is, give no commands.

     With no BNUM argument, `commands' refers to the last breakpoint,
     watchpoint, or catchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
     encountered).

   Pressing <RET> as a means of repeating the last GDB command is
disabled within a COMMAND-LIST.

   You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again.
Simply use the `continue' command, or `step', or any other command that
resumes execution.

   Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
execution, are ignored.  This is because any time you resume execution
(even with a simple `next' or `step'), you may encounter another
breakpoint--which could have its own command list, leading to
ambiguities about which list to execute.

   If the first command you specify in a command list is `silent', the
usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed.  This may
be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
then continue.  If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
see no sign that the breakpoint was reached.  `silent' is meaningful
only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.

   The commands `echo', `output', and `printf' allow you to print
precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
breakpoints.  *Note Commands for controlled output: Output.

   For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print
the value of `x' at entry to `foo' whenever `x' is positive.

     break foo if x>0
     commands
     silent
     printf "x is %d\n",x
     cont
     end

   One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug
so you can test for another.  Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous
line of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
to any variables that need them.  End with the `continue' command so
that your program does not stop, and start with the `silent' command so
that no output is produced.  Here is an example:

     break 403
     commands
     silent
     set x = y + 4
     cont
     end

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Breakpoint Menus,  Next: Error in Breakpoints,  Prev: Break Commands,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.8 Breakpoint menus
----------------------

Some programming languages (notably C++ and Objective-C) permit a
single function name to be defined several times, for application in
different contexts.  This is called "overloading".  When a function
name is overloaded, `break FUNCTION' is not enough to tell GDB where
you want a breakpoint.  If you realize this is a problem, you can use
something like `break FUNCTION(TYPES)' to specify which particular
version of the function you want.  Otherwise, GDB offers you a menu of
numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and waits for your
selection with the prompt `>'.  The first two options are always `[0]
cancel' and `[1] all'.  Typing `1' sets a breakpoint at each definition
of FUNCTION, and typing `0' aborts the `break' command without setting
any new breakpoints.

   For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
breakpoint at the overloaded symbol `String::after'.  We choose three
particular definitions of that function name:

     (gdb) b String::after
     [0] cancel
     [1] all
     [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
     [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
     [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
     [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
     [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
     [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
     > 2 4 6
     Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
     Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
     Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
     Multiple breakpoints were set.
     Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
      breakpoints.
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Error in Breakpoints,  Next: Breakpoint related warnings,  Prev: Breakpoint Menus,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.9 "Cannot insert breakpoints"
---------------------------------

Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
any other process is running that program.  In this situation,
attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes GDB to
print an error message:

     Cannot insert breakpoints.
     The same program may be running in another process.

   When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:

  1. Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.

  2. Suspend GDB, and copy the file containing your program to a new
     name.  Resume GDB and use the `exec-file' command to specify that
     GDB should run your program under that name.  Then start your
     program again.

  3. Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using
     the linker option `-N'.  The operating system limitation may not
     apply to nonsharable executables.

   A similar message can be printed if you request too many active
hardware-assisted breakpoints and watchpoints:

     Stopped; cannot insert breakpoints.
     You may have requested too many hardware breakpoints and watchpoints.

This message is printed when you attempt to resume the program, since
only then GDB knows exactly how many hardware breakpoints and
watchpoints it needs to insert.

   When this message is printed, you need to disable or remove some of
the hardware-assisted breakpoints and watchpoints, and then continue.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Breakpoint related warnings,  Prev: Error in Breakpoints,  Up: Breakpoints

5.1.10 "Breakpoint address adjusted..."
---------------------------------------

Some processor architectures place constraints on the addresses at
which breakpoints may be placed.  For architectures thus constrained,
GDB will attempt to adjust the breakpoint's address to comply with the
constraints dictated by the architecture.

   One example of such an architecture is the Fujitsu FR-V.  The FR-V is
a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like instructions may be
bundled together for parallel execution.  The FR-V architecture
constrains the location of a breakpoint instruction within such a
bundle to the instruction with the lowest address.  GDB honors this
constraint by adjusting a breakpoint's address to the first in the
bundle.

   It is not uncommon for optimized code to have bundles which contain
instructions from different source statements, thus it may happen that
a breakpoint's address will be adjusted from one source statement to
another.  Since this adjustment may significantly alter GDB's
breakpoint related behavior from what the user expects, a warning is
printed when the breakpoint is first set and also when the breakpoint
is hit.

   A warning like the one below is printed when setting a breakpoint
that's been subject to address adjustment:

     warning: Breakpoint address adjusted from 0x00010414 to 0x00010410.

   Such warnings are printed both for user settable and GDB's internal
breakpoints.  If you see one of these warnings, you should verify that
a breakpoint set at the adjusted address will have the desired affect.
If not, the breakpoint in question may be removed and other breakpoints
may be set which will have the desired behavior.  E.g., it may be
sufficient to place the breakpoint at a later instruction.  A
conditional breakpoint may also be useful in some cases to prevent the
breakpoint from triggering too often.

   GDB will also issue a warning when stopping at one of these adjusted
breakpoints:

     warning: Breakpoint 1 address previously adjusted from 0x00010414
     to 0x00010410.

   When this warning is encountered, it may be too late to take remedial
action except in cases where the breakpoint is hit earlier or more
frequently than expected.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Continuing and Stepping,  Next: Signals,  Prev: Breakpoints,  Up: Stopping

5.2 Continuing and stepping
===========================

"Continuing" means resuming program execution until your program
completes normally.  In contrast, "stepping" means executing just one
more "step" of your program, where "step" may mean either one line of
source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what particular
command you use).  Either when continuing or when stepping, your
program may stop even sooner, due to a breakpoint or a signal.  (If it
stops due to a signal, you may want to use `handle', or use `signal 0'
to resume execution.  *Note Signals: Signals.)

`continue [IGNORE-COUNT]'
`c [IGNORE-COUNT]'
`fg [IGNORE-COUNT]'
     Resume program execution, at the address where your program last
     stopped; any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed.  The
     optional argument IGNORE-COUNT allows you to specify a further
     number of times to ignore a breakpoint at this location; its
     effect is like that of `ignore' (*note Break conditions:
     Conditions.).

     The argument IGNORE-COUNT is meaningful only when your program
     stopped due to a breakpoint.  At other times, the argument to
     `continue' is ignored.

     The synonyms `c' and `fg' (for "foreground", as the debugged
     program is deemed to be the foreground program) are provided
     purely for convenience, and have exactly the same behavior as
     `continue'.

   To resume execution at a different place, you can use `return'
(*note Returning from a function: Returning.) to go back to the calling
function; or `jump' (*note Continuing at a different address: Jumping.)
to go to an arbitrary location in your program.

   A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint (*note
Breakpoints; watchpoints; and catchpoints: Breakpoints.) at the
beginning of the function or the section of your program where a problem
is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that breakpoint,
and then step through the suspect area, examining the variables that are
interesting, until you see the problem happen.

`step'
     Continue running your program until control reaches a different
     source line, then stop it and return control to GDB.  This command
     is abbreviated `s'.

          _Warning:_ If you use the `step' command while control is
          within a function that was compiled without debugging
          information, execution proceeds until control reaches a
          function that does have debugging information.  Likewise, it
          will not step into a function which is compiled without
          debugging information.  To step through functions without
          debugging information, use the `stepi' command, described
          below.

     The `step' command only stops at the first instruction of a source
     line.  This prevents the multiple stops that could otherwise occur
     in `switch' statements, `for' loops, etc.  `step' continues to
     stop if a function that has debugging information is called within
     the line.  In other words, `step' _steps inside_ any functions
     called within the line.

     Also, the `step' command only enters a function if there is line
     number information for the function.  Otherwise it acts like the
     `next' command.  This avoids problems when using `cc -gl' on MIPS
     machines.  Previously, `step' entered subroutines if there was any
     debugging information about the routine.

`step COUNT'
     Continue running as in `step', but do so COUNT times.  If a
     breakpoint is reached, or a signal not related to stepping occurs
     before COUNT steps, stepping stops right away.

`next [COUNT]'
     Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack
     frame.  This is similar to `step', but function calls that appear
     within the line of code are executed without stopping.  Execution
     stops when control reaches a different line of code at the
     original stack level that was executing when you gave the `next'
     command.  This command is abbreviated `n'.

     An argument COUNT is a repeat count, as for `step'.

     The `next' command only stops at the first instruction of a source
     line.  This prevents multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
     `switch' statements, `for' loops, etc.

`set step-mode'
`set step-mode on'
     The `set step-mode on' command causes the `step' command to stop
     at the first instruction of a function which contains no debug line
     information rather than stepping over it.

     This is useful in cases where you may be interested in inspecting
     the machine instructions of a function which has no symbolic info
     and do not want GDB to automatically skip over this function.

`set step-mode off'
     Causes the `step' command to step over any functions which
     contains no debug information.  This is the default.

`show step-mode'
     Show whether GDB will stop in or step over functions without
     source line debug information.

`finish'
     Continue running until just after function in the selected stack
     frame returns.  Print the returned value (if any).

     Contrast this with the `return' command (*note Returning from a
     function: Returning.).

`until'
`u'
     Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
     current stack frame, is reached.  This command is used to avoid
     single stepping through a loop more than once.  It is like the
     `next' command, except that when `until' encounters a jump, it
     automatically continues execution until the program counter is
     greater than the address of the jump.

     This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single
     stepping though it, `until' makes your program continue execution
     until it exits the loop.  In contrast, a `next' command at the end
     of a loop simply steps back to the beginning of the loop, which
     forces you to step through the next iteration.

     `until' always stops your program if it attempts to exit the
     current stack frame.

     `until' may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
     of machine code does not match the order of the source lines.  For
     example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the `f'
     (`frame') command shows that execution is stopped at line `206';
     yet when we use `until', we get to line `195':

          (gdb) f
          #0  main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
          206                 expand_input();
          (gdb) until
          195             for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) {

     This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
     generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than
     the start, of the loop--even though the test in a C `for'-loop is
     written before the body of the loop.  The `until' command appeared
     to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
     expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
     statement--not in terms of the actual machine code.

     `until' with no argument works by means of single instruction
     stepping, and hence is slower than `until' with an argument.

`until LOCATION'
`u LOCATION'
     Continue running your program until either the specified location
     is reached, or the current stack frame returns.  LOCATION is any of
     the forms of argument acceptable to `break' (*note Setting
     breakpoints: Set Breaks.).  This form of the command uses
     breakpoints, and hence is quicker than `until' without an
     argument.  The specified location is actually reached only if it
     is in the current frame.  This implies that `until' can be used to
     skip over recursive function invocations.  For instance in the
     code below, if the current location is line `96', issuing `until
     99' will execute the program up to line `99' in the same
     invocation of factorial, i.e. after the inner invocations have
     returned.

          94    int factorial (int value)
          95    {
          96        if (value > 1) {
          97            value *= factorial (value - 1);
          98        }
          99        return (value);
          100     }

`advance LOCATION'
     Continue running the program up to the given LOCATION.  An
     argument is required, which should be of the same form as
     arguments for the `break' command.  Execution will also stop upon
     exit from the current stack frame.  This command is similar to
     `until', but `advance' will not skip over recursive function
     calls, and the target location doesn't have to be in the same
     frame as the current one.

`stepi'
`stepi ARG'
`si'
     Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the
     debugger.

     It is often useful to do `display/i $pc' when stepping by machine
     instructions.  This makes GDB automatically display the next
     instruction to be executed, each time your program stops.  *Note
     Automatic display: Auto Display.

     An argument is a repeat count, as in `step'.

`nexti'
`nexti ARG'
`ni'
     Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
     proceed until the function returns.

     An argument is a repeat count, as in `next'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Signals,  Next: Thread Stops,  Prev: Continuing and Stepping,  Up: Stopping

5.3 Signals
===========

A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program.  The
operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
kind a name and a number.  For example, in Unix `SIGINT' is the signal
a program gets when you type an interrupt character (often `Ctrl-c');
`SIGSEGV' is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
memory far away from all the areas in use; `SIGALRM' occurs when the
alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
requested an alarm).

   Some signals, including `SIGALRM', are a normal part of the
functioning of your program.  Others, such as `SIGSEGV', indicate
errors; these signals are "fatal" (they kill your program immediately)
if the program has not specified in advance some other way to handle
the signal.  `SIGINT' does not indicate an error in your program, but
it is normally fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt:
to kill the program.

   GDB has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
program.  You can tell GDB in advance what to do for each kind of
signal.

   Normally, GDB is set up to let the non-erroneous signals like
`SIGALRM' be silently passed to your program (so as not to interfere
with their role in the program's functioning) but to stop your program
immediately whenever an error signal happens.  You can change these
settings with the `handle' command.

`info signals'
`info handle'
     Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how GDB has been
     told to handle each one.  You can use this to see the signal
     numbers of all the defined types of signals.

`info signals SIG'
     Similar, but print information only about the specified signal
     number.

     `info handle' is an alias for `info signals'.

`handle SIGNAL [KEYWORDS...]'
     Change the way GDB handles signal SIGNAL.  SIGNAL can be the
     number of a signal or its name (with or without the `SIG' at the
     beginning); a list of signal numbers of the form `LOW-HIGH'; or
     the word `all', meaning all the known signals.  Optional arguments
     KEYWORDS, described below, say what change to make.

   The keywords allowed by the `handle' command can be abbreviated.
Their full names are:

`nostop'
     GDB should not stop your program when this signal happens.  It may
     still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.

`stop'
     GDB should stop your program when this signal happens.  This
     implies the `print' keyword as well.

`print'
     GDB should print a message when this signal happens.

`noprint'
     GDB should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all.  This
     implies the `nostop' keyword as well.

`pass'
`noignore'
     GDB should allow your program to see this signal; your program can
     handle the signal, or else it may terminate if the signal is fatal
     and not handled.  `pass' and `noignore' are synonyms.

`nopass'
`ignore'
     GDB should not allow your program to see this signal.  `nopass'
     and `ignore' are synonyms.

   When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible to the
program until you continue.  Your program sees the signal then, if
`pass' is in effect for the signal in question _at that time_.  In
other words, after GDB reports a signal, you can use the `handle'
command with `pass' or `nopass' to control whether your program sees
that signal when you continue.

   The default is set to `nostop', `noprint', `pass' for non-erroneous
signals such as `SIGALRM', `SIGWINCH' and `SIGCHLD', and to `stop',
`print', `pass' for the erroneous signals.

   You can also use the `signal' command to prevent your program from
seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
or to give it any signal at any time.  For example, if your program
stopped due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store
correct values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see
more execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal.  To prevent this,
you can continue with `signal 0'.  *Note Giving your program a signal:
Signaling.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Thread Stops,  Prev: Signals,  Up: Stopping

5.4 Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
===============================================

When your program has multiple threads (*note Debugging programs with
multiple threads: Threads.), you can choose whether to set breakpoints
on all threads, or on a particular thread.

`break LINESPEC thread THREADNO'
`break LINESPEC thread THREADNO if ...'
     LINESPEC specifies source lines; there are several ways of writing
     them, but the effect is always to specify some source line.

     Use the qualifier `thread THREADNO' with a breakpoint command to
     specify that you only want GDB to stop the program when a
     particular thread reaches this breakpoint.  THREADNO is one of the
     numeric thread identifiers assigned by GDB, shown in the first
     column of the `info threads' display.

     If you do not specify `thread THREADNO' when you set a breakpoint,
     the breakpoint applies to _all_ threads of your program.

     You can use the `thread' qualifier on conditional breakpoints as
     well; in this case, place `thread THREADNO' before the breakpoint
     condition, like this:

          (gdb) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim


   Whenever your program stops under GDB for any reason, _all_ threads
of execution stop, not just the current thread.  This allows you to
examine the overall state of the program, including switching between
threads, without worrying that things may change underfoot.

   There is an unfortunate side effect.  If one thread stops for a
breakpoint, or for some other reason, and another thread is blocked in a
system call, then the system call may return prematurely.  This is a
consequence of the interaction between multiple threads and the signals
that GDB uses to implement breakpoints and other events that stop
execution.

   To handle this problem, your program should check the return value of
each system call and react appropriately.  This is good programming
style anyways.

   For example, do not write code like this:

       sleep (10);

   The call to `sleep' will return early if a different thread stops at
a breakpoint or for some other reason.

   Instead, write this:

       int unslept = 10;
       while (unslept > 0)
         unslept = sleep (unslept);

   A system call is allowed to return early, so the system is still
conforming to its specification.  But GDB does cause your
multi-threaded program to behave differently than it would without GDB.

   Also, GDB uses internal breakpoints in the thread library to monitor
certain events such as thread creation and thread destruction.  When
such an event happens, a system call in another thread may return
prematurely, even though your program does not appear to stop.

   Conversely, whenever you restart the program, _all_ threads start
executing.  _This is true even when single-stepping_ with commands like
`step' or `next'.

   In particular, GDB cannot single-step all threads in lockstep.
Since thread scheduling is up to your debugging target's operating
system (not controlled by GDB), other threads may execute more than one
statement while the current thread completes a single step.  Moreover,
in general other threads stop in the middle of a statement, rather than
at a clean statement boundary, when the program stops.

   You might even find your program stopped in another thread after
continuing or even single-stepping.  This happens whenever some other
thread runs into a breakpoint, a signal, or an exception before the
first thread completes whatever you requested.

   On some OSes, you can lock the OS scheduler and thus allow only a
single thread to run.

`set scheduler-locking MODE'
     Set the scheduler locking mode.  If it is `off', then there is no
     locking and any thread may run at any time.  If `on', then only the
     current thread may run when the inferior is resumed.  The `step'
     mode optimizes for single-stepping.  It stops other threads from
     "seizing the prompt" by preempting the current thread while you are
     stepping.  Other threads will only rarely (or never) get a chance
     to run when you step.  They are more likely to run when you `next'
     over a function call, and they are completely free to run when you
     use commands like `continue', `until', or `finish'.  However,
     unless another thread hits a breakpoint during its timeslice, they
     will never steal the GDB prompt away from the thread that you are
     debugging.

`show scheduler-locking'
     Display the current scheduler locking mode.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Stack,  Next: Source,  Prev: Stopping,  Up: Top

6 Examining the Stack
*********************

When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is
where it stopped and how it got there.

   Each time your program performs a function call, information about
the call is generated.  That information includes the location of the
call in your program, the arguments of the call, and the local
variables of the function being called.  The information is saved in a
block of data called a "stack frame".  The stack frames are allocated
in a region of memory called the "call stack".

   When your program stops, the GDB commands for examining the stack
allow you to see all of this information.

   One of the stack frames is "selected" by GDB and many GDB commands
refer implicitly to the selected frame.  In particular, whenever you
ask GDB for the value of a variable in your program, the value is found
in the selected frame.  There are special GDB commands to select
whichever frame you are interested in. *Note Selecting a frame:
Selection.

   When your program stops, GDB automatically selects the currently
executing frame and describes it briefly, similar to the `frame'
command (*note Information about a frame: Frame Info.).

* Menu:

* Frames::                      Stack frames
* Backtrace::                   Backtraces
* Selection::                   Selecting a frame
* Frame Info::                  Information on a frame

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Frames,  Next: Backtrace,  Up: Stack

6.1 Stack frames
================

The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called "stack
frames", or "frames" for short; each frame is the data associated with
one call to one function.  The frame contains the arguments given to
the function, the function's local variables, and the address at which
the function is executing.

   When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of
the function `main'.  This is called the "initial" frame or the
"outermost" frame.  Each time a function is called, a new frame is
made.  Each time a function returns, the frame for that function
invocation is eliminated.  If a function is recursive, there can be
many frames for the same function.  The frame for the function in which
execution is actually occurring is called the "innermost" frame.  This
is the most recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.

   Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses.
A stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own
address; each kind of computer has a convention for choosing one byte
whose address serves as the address of the frame.  Usually this address
is kept in a register called the "frame pointer register" (*note $fp:
Registers.) while execution is going on in that frame.

   GDB assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with zero
for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it, and so on
upward.  These numbers do not really exist in your program; they are
assigned by GDB to give you a way of designating stack frames in GDB
commands.

   Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they
operate without stack frames.  (For example, the gcc option
     `-fomit-frame-pointer'
   generates functions without a frame.)  This is occasionally done
with heavily used library functions to save the frame setup time.  GDB
has limited facilities for dealing with these function invocations.  If
the innermost function invocation has no stack frame, GDB nevertheless
regards it as though it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as
usual, allowing correct tracing of the function call chain.  However,
GDB has no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.

`frame ARGS'
     The `frame' command allows you to move from one stack frame to
     another, and to print the stack frame you select.  ARGS may be
     either the address of the frame or the stack frame number.
     Without an argument, `frame' prints the current stack frame.

`select-frame'
     The `select-frame' command allows you to move from one stack frame
     to another without printing the frame.  This is the silent version
     of `frame'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Backtrace,  Next: Selection,  Prev: Frames,  Up: Stack

6.2 Backtraces
==============

A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is.  It shows
one line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently
executing frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and
on up the stack.

`backtrace'
`bt'
     Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
     frames in the stack.

     You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system
     interrupt character, normally `Ctrl-c'.

`backtrace N'
`bt N'
     Similar, but print only the innermost N frames.

`backtrace -N'
`bt -N'
     Similar, but print only the outermost N frames.

`backtrace full'
`bt full'
`bt full N'
`bt full -N'
     Print the values of the local variables also.  N specifies the
     number of frames to print, as described above.

   The names `where' and `info stack' (abbreviated `info s') are
additional aliases for `backtrace'.

   In a multi-threaded program, GDB by default shows the backtrace only
for the current thread.  To display the backtrace for several or all of
the threads, use the command `thread apply' (*note thread apply:
Threads.).  For example, if you type `thread apply all backtrace', GDB
will display the backtrace for all the threads; this is handy when you
debug a core dump of a multi-threaded program.

   Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function
name.  The program counter value is also shown--unless you use `set
print address off'.  The backtrace also shows the source file name and
line number, as well as the arguments to the function.  The program
counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
line number.

   Here is an example of a backtrace.  It was made with the command `bt
3', so it shows the innermost three frames.

     #0  m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
         at builtin.c:993
     #1  0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
     #2  0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
         at macro.c:71
     (More stack frames follow...)

The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter value,
indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the code
for line `993' of `builtin.c'.

   If your program was compiled with optimizations, some compilers will
optimize away arguments passed to functions if those arguments are
never used after the call.  Such optimizations generate code that
passes arguments through registers, but doesn't store those arguments
in the stack frame.  GDB has no way of displaying such arguments in
stack frames other than the innermost one.  Here's what such a
backtrace might look like:

     #0  m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
         at builtin.c:993
     #1  0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=<value optimized out>) at macro.c:242
     #2  0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=<value optimized out>, td=0xf7fffb08)
         at macro.c:71
     (More stack frames follow...)

The values of arguments that were not saved in their stack frames are
shown as `<value optimized out>'.

   If you need to display the values of such optimized-out arguments,
either deduce that from other variables whose values depend on the one
you are interested in, or recompile without optimizations.

   Most programs have a standard user entry point--a place where system
libraries and startup code transition into user code.  For C this is
`main'(1).  When GDB finds the entry function in a backtrace it will
terminate the backtrace, to avoid tracing into highly system-specific
(and generally uninteresting) code.

   If you need to examine the startup code, or limit the number of
levels in a backtrace, you can change this behavior:

`set backtrace past-main'
`set backtrace past-main on'
     Backtraces will continue past the user entry point.

`set backtrace past-main off'
     Backtraces will stop when they encounter the user entry point.
     This is the default.

`show backtrace past-main'
     Display the current user entry point backtrace policy.

`set backtrace past-entry'
`set backtrace past-entry on'
     Backtraces will continue past the internal entry point of an
     application.  This entry point is encoded by the linker when the
     application is built, and is likely before the user entry point
     `main' (or equivalent) is called.

`set backtrace past-entry off'
     Backtraces will stop when they encouter the internal entry point
     of an application.  This is the default.

`show backtrace past-entry'
     Display the current internal entry point backtrace policy.

`set backtrace limit N'
`set backtrace limit 0'
     Limit the backtrace to N levels.  A value of zero means unlimited.

`show backtrace limit'
     Display the current limit on backtrace levels.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Note that embedded programs (the so-called "free-standing"
environment) are not required to have a `main' function as the entry
point.  They could even have multiple entry points.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Selection,  Next: Frame Info,  Prev: Backtrace,  Up: Stack

6.3 Selecting a frame
=====================

Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program
work on whichever stack frame is selected at the moment.  Here are the
commands for selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a
brief description of the stack frame just selected.

`frame N'
`f N'
     Select frame number N.  Recall that frame zero is the innermost
     (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
     innermost one, and so on.  The highest-numbered frame is the one
     for `main'.

`frame ADDR'
`f ADDR'
     Select the frame at address ADDR.  This is useful mainly if the
     chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
     impossible for GDB to assign numbers properly to all frames.  In
     addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks
     and switches between them.

     On the SPARC architecture, `frame' needs two addresses to select
     an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.

     On the MIPS and Alpha architecture, it needs two addresses: a stack
     pointer and a program counter.

     On the 29k architecture, it needs three addresses: a register stack
     pointer, a program counter, and a memory stack pointer.

`up N'
     Move N frames up the stack.  For positive numbers N, this advances
     toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
     that have existed longer.  N defaults to one.

`down N'
     Move N frames down the stack.  For positive numbers N, this
     advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to
     frames that were created more recently.  N defaults to one.  You
     may abbreviate `down' as `do'.

   All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing
the frame.  The first line shows the frame number, the function name,
the arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
frame.  The second line shows the text of that source line.

   For example:

     (gdb) up
     #1  0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
         at env.c:10
     10              read_input_file (argv[i]);

   After such a printout, the `list' command with no arguments prints
ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.  You can
also edit the program at the point of execution with your favorite
editing program by typing `edit'.  *Note Printing source lines: List,
for details.

`up-silently N'
`down-silently N'
     These two commands are variants of `up' and `down', respectively;
     they differ in that they do their work silently, without causing
     display of the new frame.  They are intended primarily for use in
     GDB command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
     distracting.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Frame Info,  Prev: Selection,  Up: Stack

6.4 Information about a frame
=============================

There are several other commands to print information about the selected
stack frame.

`frame'
`f'
     When used without any argument, this command does not change which
     frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
     selected stack frame.  It can be abbreviated `f'.  With an
     argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.  *Note
     Selecting a frame: Selection.

`info frame'
`info f'
     This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack
     frame, including:

        * the address of the frame

        * the address of the next frame down (called by this frame)

        * the address of the next frame up (caller of this frame)

        * the language in which the source code corresponding to this
          frame is written

        * the address of the frame's arguments

        * the address of the frame's local variables

        * the program counter saved in it (the address of execution in
          the caller frame)

        * which registers were saved in the frame

     The verbose description is useful when something has gone wrong
     that has made the stack format fail to fit the usual conventions.

`info frame ADDR'
`info f ADDR'
     Print a verbose description of the frame at address ADDR, without
     selecting that frame.  The selected frame remains unchanged by this
     command.  This requires the same kind of address (more than one
     for some architectures) that you specify in the `frame' command.
     *Note Selecting a frame: Selection.

`info args'
     Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.

`info locals'
     Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
     line.  These are all variables (declared either static or
     automatic) accessible at the point of execution of the selected
     frame.

`info catch'
     Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
     current stack frame at the current point of execution.  To see
     other exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the
     `up', `down', or `frame' commands); then type `info catch'.  *Note
     Setting catchpoints: Set Catchpoints.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Source,  Next: Data,  Prev: Stack,  Up: Top

7 Examining Source Files
************************

GDB can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
information recorded in the program tells GDB what source files were
used to build it.  When your program stops, GDB spontaneously prints
the line where it stopped.  Likewise, when you select a stack frame
(*note Selecting a frame: Selection.), GDB prints the line where
execution in that frame has stopped.  You can print other portions of
source files by explicit command.

   If you use GDB through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to
use Emacs facilities to view source; see *Note Using GDB under GNU
Emacs: Emacs.

* Menu:

* List::                        Printing source lines
* Edit::                        Editing source files
* Search::                      Searching source files
* Source Path::                 Specifying source directories
* Machine Code::                Source and machine code

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: List,  Next: Edit,  Up: Source

7.1 Printing source lines
=========================

To print lines from a source file, use the `list' command (abbreviated
`l').  By default, ten lines are printed.  There are several ways to
specify what part of the file you want to print.

   Here are the forms of the `list' command most commonly used:

`list LINENUM'
     Print lines centered around line number LINENUM in the current
     source file.

`list FUNCTION'
     Print lines centered around the beginning of function FUNCTION.

`list'
     Print more lines.  If the last lines printed were printed with a
     `list' command, this prints lines following the last lines
     printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line
     printed as part of displaying a stack frame (*note Examining the
     Stack: Stack.), this prints lines centered around that line.

`list -'
     Print lines just before the lines last printed.

   By default, GDB prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
the `list' command.  You can change this using `set listsize':

`set listsize COUNT'
     Make the `list' command display COUNT source lines (unless the
     `list' argument explicitly specifies some other number).

`show listsize'
     Display the number of lines that `list' prints.

   Repeating a `list' command with <RET> discards the argument, so it
is equivalent to typing just `list'.  This is more useful than listing
the same lines again.  An exception is made for an argument of `-';
that argument is preserved in repetition so that each repetition moves
up in the source file.

   In general, the `list' command expects you to supply zero, one or two
"linespecs".  Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways of
writing them, but the effect is always to specify some source line.
Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for `list':

`list LINESPEC'
     Print lines centered around the line specified by LINESPEC.

`list FIRST,LAST'
     Print lines from FIRST to LAST.  Both arguments are linespecs.

`list ,LAST'
     Print lines ending with LAST.

`list FIRST,'
     Print lines starting with FIRST.

`list +'
     Print lines just after the lines last printed.

`list -'
     Print lines just before the lines last printed.

`list'
     As described in the preceding table.

   Here are the ways of specifying a single source line--all the kinds
of linespec.

`NUMBER'
     Specifies line NUMBER of the current source file.  When a `list'
     command has two linespecs, this refers to the same source file as
     the first linespec.

`+OFFSET'
     Specifies the line OFFSET lines after the last line printed.  When
     used as the second linespec in a `list' command that has two, this
     specifies the line OFFSET lines down from the first linespec.

`-OFFSET'
     Specifies the line OFFSET lines before the last line printed.

`FILENAME:NUMBER'
     Specifies line NUMBER in the source file FILENAME.

`FUNCTION'
     Specifies the line that begins the body of the function FUNCTION.
     For example: in C, this is the line with the open brace.

`FILENAME:FUNCTION'
     Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
     function FUNCTION in the file FILENAME.  You only need the file
     name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
     identically named functions in different source files.

`*ADDRESS'
     Specifies the line containing the program address ADDRESS.
     ADDRESS may be any expression.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Edit,  Next: Search,  Prev: List,  Up: Source

7.2 Editing source files
========================

To edit the lines in a source file, use the `edit' command.  The
editing program of your choice is invoked with the current line set to
the active line in the program.  Alternatively, there are several ways
to specify what part of the file you want to print if you want to see
other parts of the program.

   Here are the forms of the `edit' command most commonly used:

`edit'
     Edit the current source file at the active line number in the
     program.

`edit NUMBER'
     Edit the current source file with NUMBER as the active line number.

`edit FUNCTION'
     Edit the file containing FUNCTION at the beginning of its
     definition.

`edit FILENAME:NUMBER'
     Specifies line NUMBER in the source file FILENAME.

`edit FILENAME:FUNCTION'
     Specifies the line that begins the body of the function FUNCTION
     in the file FILENAME.  You only need the file name with a function
     name to avoid ambiguity when there are identically named functions
     in different source files.

`edit *ADDRESS'
     Specifies the line containing the program address ADDRESS.
     ADDRESS may be any expression.

7.2.1 Choosing your editor
--------------------------

You can customize GDB to use any editor you want (1).  By default, it
is `/bin/ex', but you can change this by setting the environment
variable `EDITOR' before using GDB.  For example, to configure GDB to
use the `vi' editor, you could use these commands with the `sh' shell:
     EDITOR=/usr/bin/vi
     export EDITOR
     gdb ...
   or in the `csh' shell,
     setenv EDITOR /usr/bin/vi
     gdb ...

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The only restriction is that your editor (say `ex'), recognizes
the following command-line syntax:
     ex +NUMBER file
   The optional numeric value +NUMBER specifies the number of the line
in the file where to start editing.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Search,  Next: Source Path,  Prev: Edit,  Up: Source

7.3 Searching source files
==========================

There are two commands for searching through the current source file
for a regular expression.

`forward-search REGEXP'
`search REGEXP'
     The command `forward-search REGEXP' checks each line, starting
     with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
     REGEXP.  It lists the line that is found.  You can use the synonym
     `search REGEXP' or abbreviate the command name as `fo'.

`reverse-search REGEXP'
     The command `reverse-search REGEXP' checks each line, starting
     with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a
     match for REGEXP.  It lists the line that is found.  You can
     abbreviate this command as `rev'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Source Path,  Next: Machine Code,  Prev: Search,  Up: Source

7.4 Specifying source directories
=================================

Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the
source files from which they were compiled, just the names.  Even when
they do, the directories could be moved between the compilation and
your debugging session.  GDB has a list of directories to search for
source files; this is called the "source path".  Each time GDB wants a
source file, it tries all the directories in the list, in the order
they are present in the list, until it finds a file with the desired
name.

   For example, suppose an executable references the file
`/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c', and our source path is `/mnt/cross'.  The
file is first looked up literally; if this fails,
`/mnt/cross/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c' is tried; if this fails,
`/mnt/cross/foo.c' is opened; if this fails, an error message is
printed.  GDB does not look up the parts of the source file name, such
as `/mnt/cross/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c'.  Likewise, the subdirectories of
the source path are not searched: if the source path is `/mnt/cross',
and the binary refers to `foo.c', GDB would not find it under
`/mnt/cross/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib'.

   Plain file names, relative file names with leading directories, file
names containing dots, etc. are all treated as described above; for
instance, if the source path is `/mnt/cross', and the source file is
recorded as `../lib/foo.c', GDB would first try `../lib/foo.c', then
`/mnt/cross/../lib/foo.c', and after that--`/mnt/cross/foo.c'.

   Note that the executable search path is _not_ used to locate the
source files.

   Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, GDB clears out any
information it has cached about where source files are found and where
each line is in the file.

   When you start GDB, its source path includes only `cdir' and `cwd',
in that order.  To add other directories, use the `directory' command.

   The search path is used to find both program source files and GDB
script files (read using the `-command' option and `source' command).

   In addition to the source path, GDB provides a set of commands that
manage a list of source path substitution rules.  A "substitution rule"
specifies how to rewrite source directories stored in the program's
debug information in case the sources were moved to a different
directory between compilation and debugging.  A rule is made of two
strings, the first specifying what needs to be rewritten in the path,
and the second specifying how it should be rewritten.  In *Note set
substitute-path::, we name these two parts FROM and TO respectively.
GDB does a simple string replacement of FROM with TO at the start of
the directory part of the source file name, and uses that result
instead of the original file name to look up the sources.

   Using the previous example, suppose the `foo-1.0' tree has been
moved from `/usr/src' to `/mnt/cross', then you can tell GDB to replace
`/usr/src' in all source path names with `/mnt/cross'.  The first
lookup will then be `/mnt/cross/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c' in place of the
original location of `/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c'.  To define a source
path substitution rule, use the `set substitute-path' command (*note
set substitute-path::).

   To avoid unexpected substitution results, a rule is applied only if
the FROM part of the directory name ends at a directory separator.  For
instance, a rule substituting  `/usr/source' into `/mnt/cross' will be
applied to `/usr/source/foo-1.0' but not to `/usr/sourceware/foo-2.0'.
And because the substitution is applied only at the begining of the
directory name, this rule will not be applied to
`/root/usr/source/baz.c' either.

   In many cases, you can achieve the same result using the `directory'
command.  However, `set substitute-path' can be more efficient in the
case where the sources are organized in a complex tree with multiple
subdirectories.  With the `directory' command, you need to add each
subdirectory of your project.  If you moved the entire tree while
preserving its internal organization, then `set substitute-path' allows
you to direct the debugger to all the sources with one single command.

   `set substitute-path' is also more than just a shortcut command.
The source path is only used if the file at the original location no
longer exists.  On the other hand, `set substitute-path' modifies the
debugger behavior to look at the rewritten location instead.  So, if
for any reason a source file that is not relevant to your executable is
located at the original location, a substitution rule is the only
method available to point GDB at the new location.

`directory DIRNAME ...'

`dir DIRNAME ...'
     Add directory DIRNAME to the front of the source path.  Several
     directory names may be given to this command, separated by `:'
     (`;' on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, where `:' usually appears as part
     of absolute file names) or whitespace.  You may specify a
     directory that is already in the source path; this moves it
     forward, so GDB searches it sooner.

     You can use the string `$cdir' to refer to the compilation
     directory (if one is recorded), and `$cwd' to refer to the current
     working directory.  `$cwd' is not the same as `.'--the former
     tracks the current working directory as it changes during your GDB
     session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
     directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.

`directory'
     Reset the source path to its default value (`$cdir:$cwd' on Unix
     systems).  This requires confirmation.

`show directories'
     Print the source path: show which directories it contains.

`set substitute-path FROM TO'
     Define a source path substitution rule, and add it at the end of
     the current list of existing substitution rules.  If a rule with
     the same FROM was already defined, then the old rule is also
     deleted.

     For example, if the file `/foo/bar/baz.c' was moved to
     `/mnt/cross/baz.c', then the command

          (gdb) set substitute-path /usr/src /mnt/cross

     will tell GDB to replace `/usr/src' with `/mnt/cross', which will
     allow GDB to find the file `baz.c' even though it was moved.

     In the case when more than one substitution rule have been defined,
     the rules are evaluated one by one in the order where they have
     been defined.  The first one matching, if any, is selected to
     perform the substitution.

     For instance, if we had entered the following commands:

          (gdb) set substitute-path /usr/src/include /mnt/include
          (gdb) set substitute-path /usr/src /mnt/src

     GDB would then rewrite `/usr/src/include/defs.h' into
     `/mnt/include/defs.h' by using the first rule.  However, it would
     use the second rule to rewrite `/usr/src/lib/foo.c' into
     `/mnt/src/lib/foo.c'.

`unset substitute-path [path]'
     If a path is specified, search the current list of substitution
     rules for a rule that would rewrite that path.  Delete that rule
     if found.  A warning is emitted by the debugger if no rule could
     be found.

     If no path is specified, then all substitution rules are deleted.

`show substitute-path [path]'
     If a path is specified, then print the source path substitution
     rule which would rewrite that path, if any.

     If no path is specified, then print all existing source path
     substitution rules.


   If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer
of interest, GDB may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
versions of source.  You can correct the situation as follows:

  1. Use `directory' with no argument to reset the source path to its
     default value.

  2. Use `directory' with suitable arguments to reinstall the
     directories you want in the source path.  You can add all the
     directories in one command.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Machine Code,  Prev: Source Path,  Up: Source

7.5 Source and machine code
===========================

You can use the command `info line' to map source lines to program
addresses (and vice versa), and the command `disassemble' to display a
range of addresses as machine instructions.  When run under GNU Emacs
mode, the `info line' command causes the arrow to point to the line
specified.  Also, `info line' prints addresses in symbolic form as well
as hex.

`info line LINESPEC'
     Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
     source line LINESPEC.  You can specify source lines in any of the
     ways understood by the `list' command (*note Printing source
     lines: List.).

   For example, we can use `info line' to discover the location of the
object code for the first line of function `m4_changequote':

     (gdb) info line m4_changequote
     Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.

We can also inquire (using `*ADDR' as the form for LINESPEC) what
source line covers a particular address:
     (gdb) info line *0x63ff
     Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.

   After `info line', the default address for the `x' command is
changed to the starting address of the line, so that `x/i' is
sufficient to begin examining the machine code (*note Examining memory:
Memory.).  Also, this address is saved as the value of the convenience
variable `$_' (*note Convenience variables: Convenience Vars.).

`disassemble'
     This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
     instructions.  The default memory range is the function
     surrounding the program counter of the selected frame.  A single
     argument to this command is a program counter value; GDB dumps the
     function surrounding this value.  Two arguments specify a range of
     addresses (first inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.

   The following example shows the disassembly of a range of addresses
of HP PA-RISC 2.0 code:

     (gdb) disas 0x32c4 0x32e4
     Dump of assembler code from 0x32c4 to 0x32e4:
     0x32c4 <main+204>:      addil 0,dp
     0x32c8 <main+208>:      ldw 0x22c(sr0,r1),r26
     0x32cc <main+212>:      ldil 0x3000,r31
     0x32d0 <main+216>:      ble 0x3f8(sr4,r31)
     0x32d4 <main+220>:      ldo 0(r31),rp
     0x32d8 <main+224>:      addil -0x800,dp
     0x32dc <main+228>:      ldo 0x588(r1),r26
     0x32e0 <main+232>:      ldil 0x3000,r31
     End of assembler dump.

   Some architectures have more than one commonly-used set of
instruction mnemonics or other syntax.

   For programs that were dynamically linked and use shared libraries,
instructions that call functions or branch to locations in the shared
libraries might show a seemingly bogus location--it's actually a
location of the relocation table.  On some architectures, GDB might be
able to resolve these to actual function names.

`set disassembly-flavor INSTRUCTION-SET'
     Select the instruction set to use when disassembling the program
     via the `disassemble' or `x/i' commands.

     Currently this command is only defined for the Intel x86 family.
     You can set INSTRUCTION-SET to either `intel' or `att'.  The
     default is `att', the AT&T flavor used by default by Unix
     assemblers for x86-based targets.

`show disassembly-flavor'
     Show the current setting of the disassembly flavor.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Data,  Next: Macros,  Prev: Source,  Up: Top

8 Examining Data
****************

The usual way to examine data in your program is with the `print'
command (abbreviated `p'), or its synonym `inspect'.  It evaluates and
prints the value of an expression of the language your program is
written in (*note Using GDB with Different Languages: Languages.).

`print EXPR'
`print /F EXPR'
     EXPR is an expression (in the source language).  By default the
     value of EXPR is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
     you can choose a different format by specifying `/F', where F is a
     letter specifying the format; see *Note Output formats: Output
     Formats.

`print'
`print /F'
     If you omit EXPR, GDB displays the last value again (from the
     "value history"; *note Value history: Value History.).  This
     allows you to conveniently inspect the same value in an
     alternative format.

   A more low-level way of examining data is with the `x' command.  It
examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
specified format.  *Note Examining memory: Memory.

   If you are interested in information about types, or about how the
fields of a struct or a class are declared, use the `ptype EXP' command
rather than `print'.  *Note Examining the Symbol Table: Symbols.

* Menu:

* Expressions::                 Expressions
* Variables::                   Program variables
* Arrays::                      Artificial arrays
* Output Formats::              Output formats
* Memory::                      Examining memory
* Auto Display::                Automatic display
* Print Settings::              Print settings
* Value History::               Value history
* Convenience Vars::            Convenience variables
* Registers::                   Registers
* Floating Point Hardware::     Floating point hardware
* Vector Unit::                 Vector Unit
* OS Information::              Auxiliary data provided by operating system
* Memory Region Attributes::    Memory region attributes
* Dump/Restore Files::          Copy between memory and a file
* Core File Generation::        Cause a program dump its core
* Character Sets::              Debugging programs that use a different
                                character set than GDB does
* Caching Remote Data::         Data caching for remote targets

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Variables,  Up: Data

8.1 Expressions
===============

`print' and many other GDB commands accept an expression and compute
its value.  Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined by the
programming language you are using is valid in an expression in GDB.
This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts, and
string constants.  It also includes preprocessor macros, if you
compiled your program to include this information; see *Note
Compilation::.

   GDB supports array constants in expressions input by the user.  The
syntax is {ELEMENT, ELEMENT...}.  For example, you can use the command
`print {1, 2, 3}' to build up an array in memory that is `malloc'ed in
the target program.

   Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in
examples in this manual are in C.  *Note Using GDB with Different
Languages: Languages, for information on how to use expressions in other
languages.

   In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in GDB
expressions regardless of your programming language.

   Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
useful to cast a number into a pointer in order to examine a structure
at that address in memory.

   GDB supports these operators, in addition to those common to
programming languages:

`@'
     `@' is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
     *Note Artificial arrays: Arrays, for more information.

`::'
     `::' allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
     function where it is defined.  *Note Program variables: Variables.

`{TYPE} ADDR'
     Refers to an object of type TYPE stored at address ADDR in memory.
     ADDR may be any expression whose value is an integer or pointer
     (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
     a cast).  This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of
     data is normally supposed to reside at ADDR.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Variables,  Next: Arrays,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Data

8.2 Program variables
=====================

The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable in
your program.

   Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
(*note Selecting a frame: Selection.); they must be either:

   * global (or file-static)

or

   * visible according to the scope rules of the programming language
     from the point of execution in that frame

This means that in the function

     foo (a)
          int a;
     {
       bar (a);
       {
         int b = test ();
         bar (b);
       }
     }

you can examine and use the variable `a' whenever your program is
executing within the function `foo', but you can only use or examine
the variable `b' while your program is executing inside the block where
`b' is declared.

   There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
in this file.  But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
function with the same name (in different source files).  If that
happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects.  If you wish,
you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
using the colon-colon (`::') notation:

     FILE::VARIABLE
     FUNCTION::VARIABLE

Here FILE or FUNCTION is the name of the context for the static
VARIABLE.  In the case of file names, you can use quotes to make sure
GDB parses the file name as a single word--for example, to print a
global value of `x' defined in `f2.c':

     (gdb) p 'f2.c'::x

   This use of `::' is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
use of the same notation in C++.  GDB also supports use of the C++
scope resolution operator in GDB expressions.

     _Warning:_ Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
     wrong value at certain points in a function--just after entry to a
     new scope, and just before exit.
   You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine
instructions.  This is because, on most machines, it takes more than
one instruction to set up a stack frame (including local variable
definitions); if you are stepping by machine instructions, variables
may appear to have the wrong values until the stack frame is completely
built.  On exit, it usually also takes more than one machine
instruction to destroy a stack frame; after you begin stepping through
that group of instructions, local variable definitions may be gone.

   This may also happen when the compiler does significant
optimizations.  To be sure of always seeing accurate values, turn off
all optimization when compiling.

   Another possible effect of compiler optimizations is to optimize
unused variables out of existence, or assign variables to registers (as
opposed to memory addresses).  Depending on the support for such cases
offered by the debug info format used by the compiler, GDB might not be
able to display values for such local variables.  If that happens, GDB
will print a message like this:

     No symbol "foo" in current context.

   To solve such problems, either recompile without optimizations, or
use a different debug info format, if the compiler supports several such
formats.  For example, GCC, the GNU C/C++ compiler, usually supports
the `-gstabs+' option.  `-gstabs+' produces debug info in a format that
is superior to formats such as COFF.  You may be able to use DWARF 2
(`-gdwarf-2'), which is also an effective form for debug info.  *Note
Options for Debugging Your Program or GNU CC: (gcc.info)Debugging
Options.  *Note Debugging C++: C, for more info about debug info formats
that are best suited to C++ programs.

   If you ask to print an object whose contents are unknown to GDB,
e.g., because its data type is not completely specified by the debug
information, GDB will say `<incomplete type>'.  *Note incomplete type:
Symbols, for more about this.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Arrays,  Next: Output Formats,  Prev: Variables,  Up: Data

8.3 Artificial arrays
=====================

It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the same
type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of dynamically
determined size for which only a pointer exists in the program.

   You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
"artificial array", using the binary operator `@'.  The left operand of
`@' should be the first element of the desired array and be an
individual object.  The right operand should be the desired length of
the array.  The result is an array value whose elements are all of the
type of the left argument.  The first element is actually the left
argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
following those that hold the first element, and so on.  Here is an
example.  If a program says

     int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));

you can print the contents of `array' with

     p *array@len

   The left operand of `@' must reside in memory.  Array values made
with `@' in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
(*note Value history: Value History.), after printing one out.

   Another way to create an artificial array is to use a cast.  This
re-interprets a value as if it were an array.  The value need not be in
memory:
     (gdb) p/x (short[2])0x12345678
     $1 = {0x1234, 0x5678}

   As a convenience, if you leave the array length out (as in
`(TYPE[])VALUE') GDB calculates the size to fill the value (as
`sizeof(VALUE)/sizeof(TYPE)':
     (gdb) p/x (short[])0x12345678
     $2 = {0x1234, 0x5678}

   Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
actually be adjacent--for example, if you are interested in the values
of pointers in an array.  One useful work-around in this situation is
to use a convenience variable (*note Convenience variables: Convenience
Vars.) as a counter in an expression that prints the first interesting
value, and then repeat that expression via <RET>.  For instance,
suppose you have an array `dtab' of pointers to structures, and you are
interested in the values of a field `fv' in each structure.  Here is an
example of what you might type:

     set $i = 0
     p dtab[$i++]->fv
     <RET>
     <RET>
     ...

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Output Formats,  Next: Memory,  Prev: Arrays,  Up: Data

8.4 Output formats
==================

By default, GDB prints a value according to its data type.  Sometimes
this is not what you want.  For example, you might want to print a
number in hex, or a pointer in decimal.  Or you might want to view data
in memory at a certain address as a character string or as an
instruction.  To do these things, specify an "output format" when you
print a value.

   The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
already computed.  This is done by starting the arguments of the
`print' command with a slash and a format letter.  The format letters
supported are:

`x'
     Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer
     in hexadecimal.

`d'
     Print as integer in signed decimal.

`u'
     Print as integer in unsigned decimal.

`o'
     Print as integer in octal.

`t'
     Print as integer in binary.  The letter `t' stands for "two".  (1)

`a'
     Print as an address, both absolute in hexadecimal and as an offset
     from the nearest preceding symbol.  You can use this format used
     to discover where (in what function) an unknown address is located:

          (gdb) p/a 0x54320
          $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>

     The command `info symbol 0x54320' yields similar results.  *Note
     info symbol: Symbols.

`c'
     Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.  This
     prints both the numerical value and its character representation.
     The character representation is replaced with the octal escape
     `\nnn' for characters outside the 7-bit ASCII range.

`f'
     Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
     using typical floating point syntax.

   For example, to print the program counter in hex (*note
Registers::), type

     p/x $pc

Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
names in GDB cannot contain a slash.

   To reprint the last value in the value history with a different
format, you can use the `print' command with just a format and no
expression.  For example, `p/x' reprints the last value in hex.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) `b' cannot be used because these format letters are also used
with the `x' command, where `b' stands for "byte"; see *Note Examining
memory: Memory.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Memory,  Next: Auto Display,  Prev: Output Formats,  Up: Data

8.5 Examining memory
====================

You can use the command `x' (for "examine") to examine memory in any of
several formats, independently of your program's data types.

`x/NFU ADDR'
`x ADDR'
`x'
     Use the `x' command to examine memory.

   N, F, and U are all optional parameters that specify how much memory
to display and how to format it; ADDR is an expression giving the
address where you want to start displaying memory.  If you use defaults
for NFU, you need not type the slash `/'.  Several commands set
convenient defaults for ADDR.

N, the repeat count
     The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1.  It
     specifies how much memory (counting by units U) to display.

F, the display format
     The display format is one of the formats used by `print' (`x',
     `d', `u', `o', `t', `a', `c', `f'), and in addition `s' (for
     null-terminated strings) and `i' (for machine instructions).  The
     default is `x' (hexadecimal) initially.  The default changes each
     time you use either `x' or `print'.

U, the unit size
     The unit size is any of

    `b'
          Bytes.

    `h'
          Halfwords (two bytes).

    `w'
          Words (four bytes).  This is the initial default.

    `g'
          Giant words (eight bytes).

     Each time you specify a unit size with `x', that size becomes the
     default unit the next time you use `x'.  (For the `s' and `i'
     formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)

ADDR, starting display address
     ADDR is the address where you want GDB to begin displaying memory.
     The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may); it
     is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
     *Note Expressions: Expressions, for more information on
     expressions.  The default for ADDR is usually just after the last
     address examined--but several other commands also set the default
     address: `info breakpoints' (to the address of the last breakpoint
     listed), `info line' (to the starting address of a line), and
     `print' (if you use it to display a value from memory).

   For example, `x/3uh 0x54320' is a request to display three halfwords
(`h') of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (`u'), starting
at address `0x54320'.  `x/4xw $sp' prints the four words (`w') of
memory above the stack pointer (here, `$sp'; *note Registers:
Registers.) in hexadecimal (`x').

   Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
unit size or format comes first; either order works.  The output
specifications `4xw' and `4wx' mean exactly the same thing.  (However,
the count N must come first; `wx4' does not work.)

   Even though the unit size U is ignored for the formats `s' and `i',
you might still want to use a count N; for example, `3i' specifies that
you want to see three machine instructions, including any operands.
The command `disassemble' gives an alternative way of inspecting
machine instructions; see *Note Source and machine code: Machine Code.

   All the defaults for the arguments to `x' are designed to make it
easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
you use `x'.  For example, after you have inspected three machine
instructions with `x/3i ADDR', you can inspect the next seven with just
`x/7'.  If you use <RET> to repeat the `x' command, the repeat count N
is used again; the other arguments default as for successive uses of
`x'.

   The addresses and contents printed by the `x' command are not saved
in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
would get in the way.  Instead, GDB makes these values available for
subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
`$_' and `$__'.  After an `x' command, the last address examined is
available for use in expressions in the convenience variable `$_'.  The
contents of that address, as examined, are available in the convenience
variable `$__'.

   If the `x' command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
address printed if several units were printed on the last line of
output.

   When you are debugging a program running on a remote target machine
(*note Remote::), you may wish to verify the program's image in the
remote machine's memory against the executable file you downloaded to
the target.  The `compare-sections' command is provided for such
situations.

`compare-sections [SECTION-NAME]'
     Compare the data of a loadable section SECTION-NAME in the
     executable file of the program being debugged with the same
     section in the remote machine's memory, and report any mismatches.
     With no arguments, compares all loadable sections.  This command's
     availability depends on the target's support for the `"qCRC"'
     remote request.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Auto Display,  Next: Print Settings,  Prev: Memory,  Up: Data

8.6 Automatic display
=====================

If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
(to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the "automatic
display list" so that GDB prints its value each time your program stops.
Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it; to
remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.  The
automatic display looks like this:

     2: foo = 38
     3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804

This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values.
As with displays you request manually using `x' or `print', you can
specify the output format you prefer; in fact, `display' decides
whether to use `print' or `x' depending on how elaborate your format
specification is--it uses `x' if you specify a unit size, or one of the
two formats (`i' and `s') that are only supported by `x'; otherwise it
uses `print'.

`display EXPR'
     Add the expression EXPR to the list of expressions to display each
     time your program stops.  *Note Expressions: Expressions.

     `display' does not repeat if you press <RET> again after using it.

`display/FMT EXPR'
     For FMT specifying only a display format and not a size or count,
     add the expression EXPR to the auto-display list but arrange to
     display it each time in the specified format FMT.  *Note Output
     formats: Output Formats.

`display/FMT ADDR'
     For FMT `i' or `s', or including a unit-size or a number of units,
     add the expression ADDR as a memory address to be examined each
     time your program stops.  Examining means in effect doing `x/FMT
     ADDR'.  *Note Examining memory: Memory.

   For example, `display/i $pc' can be helpful, to see the machine
instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (`$pc' is a
common name for the program counter; *note Registers: Registers.).

`undisplay DNUMS...'
`delete display DNUMS...'
     Remove item numbers DNUMS from the list of expressions to display.

     `undisplay' does not repeat if you press <RET> after using it.
     (Otherwise you would just get the error `No display number ...'.)

`disable display DNUMS...'
     Disable the display of item numbers DNUMS.  A disabled display
     item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten.  It may be
     enabled again later.

`enable display DNUMS...'
     Enable display of item numbers DNUMS.  It becomes effective once
     again in auto display of its expression, until you specify
     otherwise.

`display'
     Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as
     is done when your program stops.

`info display'
     Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
     automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing
     the values.  This includes disabled expressions, which are marked
     as such.  It also includes expressions which would not be
     displayed right now because they refer to automatic variables not
     currently available.

   If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not
make sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up.  Such an
expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
variables is not defined.  For example, if you give the command
`display last_char' while inside a function with an argument
`last_char', GDB displays this argument while your program continues to
stop inside that function.  When it stops elsewhere--where there is no
variable `last_char'--the display is disabled automatically.  The next
time your program stops where `last_char' is meaningful, you can enable
the display expression once again.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Print Settings,  Next: Value History,  Prev: Auto Display,  Up: Data

8.7 Print settings
==================

GDB provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures, and
symbols are printed.

These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:

`set print address'
`set print address on'
     GDB prints memory addresses showing the location of stack traces,
     structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth, even
     when it also displays the contents of those addresses.  The default
     is `on'.  For example, this is what a stack frame display looks
     like with `set print address on':

          (gdb) f
          #0  set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
              at input.c:530
          530         if (lquote != def_lquote)

`set print address off'
     Do not print addresses when displaying their contents.  For
     example, this is the same stack frame displayed with `set print
     address off':

          (gdb) set print addr off
          (gdb) f
          #0  set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
          530         if (lquote != def_lquote)

     You can use `set print address off' to eliminate all machine
     dependent displays from the GDB interface.  For example, with
     `print address off', you should get the same text for backtraces on
     all machines--whether or not they involve pointer arguments.

`show print address'
     Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.

   When GDB prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the closest
earlier symbol plus an offset.  If that symbol does not uniquely
identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
source file), you may need to clarify.  One way to do this is with
`info line', for example `info line *0x4537'.  Alternately, you can set
GDB to print the source file and line number when it prints a symbolic
address:

`set print symbol-filename on'
     Tell GDB to print the source file name and line number of a symbol
     in the symbolic form of an address.

`set print symbol-filename off'
     Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol.  This
     is the default.

`show print symbol-filename'
     Show whether or not GDB will print the source file name and line
     number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.

   Another situation where it is helpful to show symbol filenames and
line numbers is when disassembling code; GDB shows you the line number
and source file that corresponds to each instruction.

   Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:

`set print max-symbolic-offset MAX-OFFSET'
     Tell GDB to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
     offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less
     than MAX-OFFSET.  The default is 0, which tells GDB to always
     print the symbolic form of an address if any symbol precedes it.

`show print max-symbolic-offset'
     Ask how large the maximum offset is that GDB prints in a symbolic
     address.

   If you have a pointer and you are not sure where it points, try `set
print symbol-filename on'.  Then you can determine the name and source
file location of the variable where it points, using `p/a POINTER'.
This interprets the address in symbolic form.  For example, here GDB
shows that a variable `ptt' points at another variable `t', defined in
`hi2.c':

     (gdb) set print symbol-filename on
     (gdb) p/a ptt
     $4 = 0xe008 <t in hi2.c>

     _Warning:_ For pointers that point to a local variable, `p/a' does
     not show the symbol name and filename of the referent, even with
     the appropriate `set print' options turned on.

   Other settings control how different kinds of objects are printed:

`set print array'
`set print array on'
     Pretty print arrays.  This format is more convenient to read, but
     uses more space.  The default is off.

`set print array off'
     Return to compressed format for arrays.

`show print array'
     Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
     arrays.

`set print array-indexes'
`set print array-indexes on'
     Print the index of each element when displaying arrays.  May be
     more convenient to locate a given element in the array or quickly
     find the index of a given element in that printed array.  The
     default is off.

`set print array-indexes off'
     Stop printing element indexes when displaying arrays.

`show print array-indexes'
     Show whether the index of each element is printed when displaying
     arrays.

`set print elements NUMBER-OF-ELEMENTS'
     Set a limit on how many elements of an array GDB will print.  If
     GDB is printing a large array, it stops printing after it has
     printed the number of elements set by the `set print elements'
     command.  This limit also applies to the display of strings.  When
     GDB starts, this limit is set to 200.  Setting  NUMBER-OF-ELEMENTS
     to zero means that the printing is unlimited.

`show print elements'
     Display the number of elements of a large array that GDB will
     print.  If the number is 0, then the printing is unlimited.

`set print repeats'
     Set the threshold for suppressing display of repeated array
     elelments.  When the number of consecutive identical elements of an
     array exceeds the threshold, GDB prints the string `"<repeats N
     times>"', where N is the number of identical repetitions, instead
     of displaying the identical elements themselves.  Setting the
     threshold to zero will cause all elements to be individually
     printed.  The default threshold is 10.

`show print repeats'
     Display the current threshold for printing repeated identical
     elements.

`set print null-stop'
     Cause GDB to stop printing the characters of an array when the
     first NULL is encountered.  This is useful when large arrays
     actually contain only short strings.  The default is off.

`show print null-stop'
     Show whether GDB stops printing an array on the first NULL
     character.

`set print pretty on'
     Cause GDB to print structures in an indented format with one member
     per line, like this:

          $1 = {
            next = 0x0,
            flags = {
              sweet = 1,
              sour = 1
            },
            meat = 0x54 "Pork"
          }

`set print pretty off'
     Cause GDB to print structures in a compact format, like this:

          $1 = {next = 0x0, flags = {sweet = 1, sour = 1}, \
          meat = 0x54 "Pork"}

     This is the default format.

`show print pretty'
     Show which format GDB is using to print structures.

`set print sevenbit-strings on'
     Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set, GDB
     displays any eight-bit characters (in strings or character values)
     using the notation `\'NNN.  This setting is best if you are
     working in English (ASCII) and you use the high-order bit of
     characters as a marker or "meta" bit.

`set print sevenbit-strings off'
     Print full eight-bit characters.  This allows the use of more
     international character sets, and is the default.

`show print sevenbit-strings'
     Show whether or not GDB is printing only seven-bit characters.

`set print union on'
     Tell GDB to print unions which are contained in structures and
     other unions.  This is the default setting.

`set print union off'
     Tell GDB not to print unions which are contained in structures and
     other unions.  GDB will print `"{...}"' instead.

`show print union'
     Ask GDB whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
     structures and other unions.

     For example, given the declarations

          typedef enum {Tree, Bug} Species;
          typedef enum {Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling} Tree_forms;
          typedef enum {Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly}
                        Bug_forms;

          struct thing {
            Species it;
            union {
              Tree_forms tree;
              Bug_forms bug;
            } form;
          };

          struct thing foo = {Tree, {Acorn}};

     with `set print union on' in effect `p foo' would print

          $1 = {it = Tree, form = {tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon}}

     and with `set print union off' in effect it would print

          $1 = {it = Tree, form = {...}}

     `set print union' affects programs written in C-like languages and
     in Pascal.

These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:

`set print demangle'
`set print demangle on'
     Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
     ("mangled") form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
     linkage.  The default is on.

`show print demangle'
     Show whether C++ names are printed in mangled or demangled form.

`set print asm-demangle'
`set print asm-demangle on'
     Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled
     form, even in assembler code printouts such as instruction
     disassemblies.  The default is off.

`show print asm-demangle'
     Show whether C++ names in assembly listings are printed in mangled
     or demangled form.

`set demangle-style STYLE'
     Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers
     to represent C++ names.  The choices for STYLE are currently:

    `auto'
          Allow GDB to choose a decoding style by inspecting your
          program.

    `gnu'
          Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (`g++') encoding
          algorithm.  This is the default.

    `hp'
          Decode based on the HP ANSI C++ (`aCC') encoding algorithm.

    `lucid'
          Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (`lcc') encoding
          algorithm.

    `arm'
          Decode using the algorithm in the `C++ Annotated Reference
          Manual'.  *Warning:* this setting alone is not sufficient to
          allow debugging `cfront'-generated executables.  GDB would
          require further enhancement to permit that.

     If you omit STYLE, you will see a list of possible formats.

`show demangle-style'
     Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++
     symbols.

`set print object'
`set print object on'
     When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the _actual_
     (derived) type of the object rather than the _declared_ type, using
     the virtual function table.

`set print object off'
     Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
     virtual function table.  This is the default setting.

`show print object'
     Show whether actual, or declared, object types are displayed.

`set print static-members'
`set print static-members on'
     Print static members when displaying a C++ object.  The default is
     on.

`set print static-members off'
     Do not print static members when displaying a C++ object.

`show print static-members'
     Show whether C++ static members are printed or not.

`set print pascal_static-members'
`set print pascal_static-members on'
     Print static members when displaying a Pascal object.  The default
     is on.

`set print pascal_static-members off'
     Do not print static members when displaying a Pascal object.

`show print pascal_static-members'
     Show whether Pascal static members are printed or not.

`set print vtbl'
`set print vtbl on'
     Pretty print C++ virtual function tables.  The default is off.
     (The `vtbl' commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
     ANSI C++ compiler (`aCC').)

`set print vtbl off'
     Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.

`show print vtbl'
     Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or
     not.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Value History,  Next: Convenience Vars,  Prev: Print Settings,  Up: Data

8.8 Value history
=================

Values printed by the `print' command are saved in the GDB "value
history".  This allows you to refer to them in other expressions.
Values are kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for
example with the `file' or `symbol-file' commands).  When the symbol
table changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may
contain pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.

   The values printed are given "history numbers" by which you can
refer to them.  These are successive integers starting with one.
`print' shows you the history number assigned to a value by printing
`$NUM = ' before the value; here NUM is the history number.

   To refer to any previous value, use `$' followed by the value's
history number.  The way `print' labels its output is designed to
remind you of this.  Just `$' refers to the most recent value in the
history, and `$$' refers to the value before that.  `$$N' refers to the
Nth value from the end; `$$2' is the value just prior to `$$', `$$1' is
equivalent to `$$', and `$$0' is equivalent to `$'.

   For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure
and want to see the contents of the structure.  It suffices to type

     p *$

   If you have a chain of structures where the component `next' points
to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:

     p *$.next

You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
command--which you can do by just typing <RET>.

   Note that the history records values, not expressions.  If the value
of `x' is 4 and you type these commands:

     print x
     set x=5

then the value recorded in the value history by the `print' command
remains 4 even though the value of `x' has changed.

`show values'
     Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item
     numbers.  This is like `p $$9' repeated ten times, except that
     `show values' does not change the history.

`show values N'
     Print ten history values centered on history item number N.

`show values +'
     Print ten history values just after the values last printed.  If
     no more values are available, `show values +' produces no display.

   Pressing <RET> to repeat `show values N' has exactly the same effect
as `show values +'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Convenience Vars,  Next: Registers,  Prev: Value History,  Up: Data

8.9 Convenience variables
=========================

GDB provides "convenience variables" that you can use within GDB to
hold on to a value and refer to it later.  These variables exist
entirely within GDB; they are not part of your program, and setting a
convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution of your
program.  That is why you can use them freely.

   Convenience variables are prefixed with `$'.  Any name preceded by
`$' can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of the
predefined machine-specific register names (*note Registers:
Registers.).  (Value history references, in contrast, are _numbers_
preceded by `$'.  *Note Value history: Value History.)

   You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.  For
example:

     set $foo = *object_ptr

would save in `$foo' the value contained in the object pointed to by
`object_ptr'.

   Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
value is `void' until you assign a new value.  You can alter the value
with another assignment at any time.

   Convenience variables have no fixed types.  You can assign a
convenience variable any type of value, including structures and
arrays, even if that variable already has a value of a different type.
The convenience variable, when used as an expression, has the type of
its current value.

`show convenience'
     Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their
     values.  Abbreviated `show conv'.

`init-if-undefined $VARIABLE = EXPRESSION'
     Set a convenience variable if it has not already been set.  This
     is useful for user-defined commands that keep some state.  It is
     similar, in concept, to using local static variables with
     initializers in C (except that convenience variables are global).
     It can also be used to allow users to override default values used
     in a command script.

     If the variable is already defined then the expression is not
     evaluated so any side-effects do not occur.

   One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
incremented or a pointer to be advanced.  For example, to print a field
from successive elements of an array of structures:

     set $i = 0
     print bar[$i++]->contents

Repeat that command by typing <RET>.

   Some convenience variables are created automatically by GDB and given
values likely to be useful.

`$_'
     The variable `$_' is automatically set by the `x' command to the
     last address examined (*note Examining memory: Memory.).  Other
     commands which provide a default address for `x' to examine also
     set `$_' to that address; these commands include `info line' and
     `info breakpoint'.  The type of `$_' is `void *' except when set
     by the `x' command, in which case it is a pointer to the type of
     `$__'.

`$__'
     The variable `$__' is automatically set by the `x' command to the
     value found in the last address examined.  Its type is chosen to
     match the format in which the data was printed.

`$_exitcode'
     The variable `$_exitcode' is automatically set to the exit code
     when the program being debugged terminates.

   On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
begins with a dollar sign, GDB searches for a user or system name
first, before it searches for a convenience variable.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Registers,  Next: Floating Point Hardware,  Prev: Convenience Vars,  Up: Data

8.10 Registers
==============

You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
with names starting with `$'.  The names of registers are different for
each machine; use `info registers' to see the names used on your
machine.

`info registers'
     Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
     and vector registers (in the selected stack frame).

`info all-registers'
     Print the names and values of all registers, including
     floating-point and vector registers (in the selected stack frame).

`info registers REGNAME ...'
     Print the "relativized" value of each specified register REGNAME.
     As discussed in detail below, register values are normally
     relative to the selected stack frame.  REGNAME may be any register
     name valid on the machine you are using, with or without the
     initial `$'.

   GDB has four "standard" register names that are available (in
expressions) on most machines--whenever they do not conflict with an
architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers.  The register names
`$pc' and `$sp' are used for the program counter register and the stack
pointer.  `$fp' is used for a register that contains a pointer to the
current stack frame, and `$ps' is used for a register that contains the
processor status.  For example, you could print the program counter in
hex with

     p/x $pc

or print the instruction to be executed next with

     x/i $pc

or add four to the stack pointer(1) with

     set $sp += 4

   Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available
on your machine even though the machine has different canonical
mnemonics, so long as there is no conflict.  The `info registers'
command shows the canonical names.  For example, on the SPARC, `info
registers' displays the processor status register as `$psr' but you can
also refer to it as `$ps'; and on x86-based machines `$ps' is an alias
for the EFLAGS register.

   GDB always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
integer when the register is examined in this way.  Some machines have
special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
registers are considered to have floating point values.  There is no way
to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
(although you can _print_ it as a floating point value with `print/f
$REGNAME').

   Some registers have distinct "raw" and "virtual" data formats.  This
means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
sees.  For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
coprocessor are always saved in "extended" (raw) format, but all C
programs expect to work with "double" (virtual) format.  In such cases,
GDB normally works with the virtual format only (the format that makes
sense for your program), but the `info registers' command prints the
data in both formats.

   Some machines have special registers whose contents can be
interpreted in several different ways.  For example, modern x86-based
machines have SSE and MMX registers that can hold several values packed
together in several different formats.  GDB refers to such registers in
`struct' notation:

     (gdb) print $xmm1
     $1 = {
       v4_float = {0, 3.43859137e-038, 1.54142831e-044, 1.821688e-044},
       v2_double = {9.92129282474342e-303, 2.7585945287983262e-313},
       v16_int8 = "\000\000\000\000\3706;\001\v\000\000\000\r\000\000",
       v8_int16 = {0, 0, 14072, 315, 11, 0, 13, 0},
       v4_int32 = {0, 20657912, 11, 13},
       v2_int64 = {88725056443645952, 55834574859},
       uint128 = 0x0000000d0000000b013b36f800000000
     }

To set values of such registers, you need to tell GDB which view of the
register you wish to change, as if you were assigning value to a
`struct' member:

      (gdb) set $xmm1.uint128 = 0x000000000000000000000000FFFFFFFF

   Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
(*note Selecting a frame: Selection.).  This means that you get the
value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
were exited and their saved registers restored.  In order to see the
true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
frame (with `frame 0').

   However, GDB must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
code generated by your compiler.  If some registers are not saved, or if
GDB is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack frame
makes no difference.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) This is a way of removing one word from the stack, on machines
where stacks grow downward in memory (most machines, nowadays).  This
assumes that the innermost stack frame is selected; setting `$sp' is
not allowed when other stack frames are selected.  To pop entire frames
off the stack, regardless of machine architecture, use `return'; see
*Note Returning from a function: Returning.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Floating Point Hardware,  Next: Vector Unit,  Prev: Registers,  Up: Data

8.11 Floating point hardware
============================

Depending on the configuration, GDB may be able to give you more
information about the status of the floating point hardware.

`info float'
     Display hardware-dependent information about the floating point
     unit.  The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
     floating point chip.  Currently, `info float' is supported on the
     ARM and x86 machines.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Vector Unit,  Next: OS Information,  Prev: Floating Point Hardware,  Up: Data

8.12 Vector Unit
================

Depending on the configuration, GDB may be able to give you more
information about the status of the vector unit.

`info vector'
     Display information about the vector unit.  The exact contents and
     layout vary depending on the hardware.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: OS Information,  Next: Memory Region Attributes,  Prev: Vector Unit,  Up: Data

8.13 Operating system auxiliary information
===========================================

GDB provides interfaces to useful OS facilities that can help you debug
your program.

   When GDB runs on a "Posix system" (such as GNU or Unix machines), it
interfaces with the inferior via the `ptrace' system call.  The
operating system creates a special sata structure, called `struct
user', for this interface.  You can use the command `info udot' to
display the contents of this data structure.

`info udot'
     Display the contents of the `struct user' maintained by the OS
     kernel for the program being debugged.  GDB displays the contents
     of `struct user' as a list of hex numbers, similar to the
     `examine' command.

   Some operating systems supply an "auxiliary vector" to programs at
startup.  This is akin to the arguments and environment that you
specify for a program, but contains a system-dependent variety of
binary values that tell system libraries important details about the
hardware, operating system, and process.  Each value's purpose is
identified by an integer tag; the meanings are well-known but
system-specific.  Depending on the configuration and operating system
facilities, GDB may be able to show you this information.  For remote
targets, this functionality may further depend on the remote stub's
support of the `qXfer:auxv:read' packet, see *Note qXfer auxiliary
vector read::.

`info auxv'
     Display the auxiliary vector of the inferior, which can be either a
     live process or a core dump file.  GDB prints each tag value
     numerically, and also shows names and text descriptions for
     recognized tags.  Some values in the vector are numbers, some bit
     masks, and some pointers to strings or other data.  GDB displays
     each value in the most appropriate form for a recognized tag, and
     in hexadecimal for an unrecognized tag.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Memory Region Attributes,  Next: Dump/Restore Files,  Prev: OS Information,  Up: Data

8.14 Memory region attributes
=============================

"Memory region attributes" allow you to describe special handling
required by regions of your target's memory.  GDB uses attributes to
determine whether to allow certain types of memory accesses; whether to
use specific width accesses; and whether to cache target memory.  By
default the description of memory regions is fetched from the target
(if the current target supports this), but the user can override the
fetched regions.

   Defined memory regions can be individually enabled and disabled.
When a memory region is disabled, GDB uses the default attributes when
accessing memory in that region.  Similarly, if no memory regions have
been defined, GDB uses the default attributes when accessing all memory.

   When a memory region is defined, it is given a number to identify it;
to enable, disable, or remove a memory region, you specify that number.

`mem LOWER UPPER ATTRIBUTES...'
     Define a memory region bounded by LOWER and UPPER with attributes
     ATTRIBUTES..., and add it to the list of regions monitored by GDB.
     Note that UPPER == 0 is a special case: it is treated as the the
     target's maximum memory address.  (0xffff on 16 bit targets,
     0xffffffff on 32 bit targets, etc.)

`mem auto'
     Discard any user changes to the memory regions and use
     target-supplied regions, if available, or no regions if the target
     does not support.

`delete mem NUMS...'
     Remove memory regions NUMS... from the list of regions monitored
     by GDB.

`disable mem NUMS...'
     Disable monitoring of memory regions NUMS....  A disabled memory
     region is not forgotten.  It may be enabled again later.

`enable mem NUMS...'
     Enable monitoring of memory regions NUMS....

`info mem'
     Print a table of all defined memory regions, with the following
     columns for each region:

    _Memory Region Number_

    _Enabled or Disabled._
          Enabled memory regions are marked with `y'.  Disabled memory
          regions are marked with `n'.

    _Lo Address_
          The address defining the inclusive lower bound of the memory
          region.

    _Hi Address_
          The address defining the exclusive upper bound of the memory
          region.

    _Attributes_
          The list of attributes set for this memory region.

8.14.1 Attributes
-----------------

8.14.1.1 Memory Access Mode
...........................

The access mode attributes set whether GDB may make read or write
accesses to a memory region.

   While these attributes prevent GDB from performing invalid memory
accesses, they do nothing to prevent the target system, I/O DMA, etc.
from accessing memory.

`ro'
     Memory is read only.

`wo'
     Memory is write only.

`rw'
     Memory is read/write.  This is the default.

8.14.1.2 Memory Access Size
...........................

The acccess size attributes tells GDB to use specific sized accesses in
the memory region.  Often memory mapped device registers require
specific sized accesses.  If no access size attribute is specified, GDB
may use accesses of any size.

`8'
     Use 8 bit memory accesses.

`16'
     Use 16 bit memory accesses.

`32'
     Use 32 bit memory accesses.

`64'
     Use 64 bit memory accesses.

8.14.1.3 Data Cache
...................

The data cache attributes set whether GDB will cache target memory.
While this generally improves performance by reducing debug protocol
overhead, it can lead to incorrect results because GDB does not know
about volatile variables or memory mapped device registers.

`cache'
     Enable GDB to cache target memory.

`nocache'
     Disable GDB from caching target memory.  This is the default.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Dump/Restore Files,  Next: Core File Generation,  Prev: Memory Region Attributes,  Up: Data

8.15 Copy between memory and a file
===================================

You can use the commands `dump', `append', and `restore' to copy data
between target memory and a file.  The `dump' and `append' commands
write data to a file, and the `restore' command reads data from a file
back into the inferior's memory.  Files may be in binary, Motorola
S-record, Intel hex, or Tektronix Hex format; however, GDB can only
append to binary files.

`dump [FORMAT] memory FILENAME START_ADDR END_ADDR'
`dump [FORMAT] value FILENAME EXPR'
     Dump the contents of memory from START_ADDR to END_ADDR, or the
     value of EXPR, to FILENAME in the given format.

     The FORMAT parameter may be any one of:
    `binary'
          Raw binary form.

    `ihex'
          Intel hex format.

    `srec'
          Motorola S-record format.

    `tekhex'
          Tektronix Hex format.

     GDB uses the same definitions of these formats as the GNU binary
     utilities, like `objdump' and `objcopy'.  If FORMAT is omitted,
     GDB dumps the data in raw binary form.

`append [binary] memory FILENAME START_ADDR END_ADDR'
`append [binary] value FILENAME EXPR'
     Append the contents of memory from START_ADDR to END_ADDR, or the
     value of EXPR, to the file FILENAME, in raw binary form.  (GDB can
     only append data to files in raw binary form.)

`restore FILENAME [binary] BIAS START END'
     Restore the contents of file FILENAME into memory.  The `restore'
     command can automatically recognize any known BFD file format,
     except for raw binary.  To restore a raw binary file you must
     specify the optional keyword `binary' after the filename.

     If BIAS is non-zero, its value will be added to the addresses
     contained in the file.  Binary files always start at address zero,
     so they will be restored at address BIAS.  Other bfd files have a
     built-in location; they will be restored at offset BIAS from that
     location.

     If START and/or END are non-zero, then only data between file
     offset START and file offset END will be restored.  These offsets
     are relative to the addresses in the file, before the BIAS
     argument is applied.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Core File Generation,  Next: Character Sets,  Prev: Dump/Restore Files,  Up: Data

8.16 How to Produce a Core File from Your Program
=================================================

A "core file" or "core dump" is a file that records the memory image of
a running process and its process status (register values etc.).  Its
primary use is post-mortem debugging of a program that crashed while it
ran outside a debugger.  A program that crashes automatically produces
a core file, unless this feature is disabled by the user.  *Note
Files::, for information on invoking GDB in the post-mortem debugging
mode.

   Occasionally, you may wish to produce a core file of the program you
are debugging in order to preserve a snapshot of its state.  GDB has a
special command for that.

`generate-core-file [FILE]'
`gcore [FILE]'
     Produce a core dump of the inferior process.  The optional argument
     FILE specifies the file name where to put the core dump.  If not
     specified, the file name defaults to `core.PID', where PID is the
     inferior process ID.

     Note that this command is implemented only for some systems (as of
     this writing, GNU/Linux, FreeBSD, Solaris, Unixware, and S390).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Character Sets,  Next: Caching Remote Data,  Prev: Core File Generation,  Up: Data

8.17 Character Sets
===================

If the program you are debugging uses a different character set to
represent characters and strings than the one GDB uses itself, GDB can
automatically translate between the character sets for you.  The
character set GDB uses we call the "host character set"; the one the
inferior program uses we call the "target character set".

   For example, if you are running GDB on a GNU/Linux system, which
uses the ISO Latin 1 character set, but you are using GDB's remote
protocol (*note Remote Debugging: Remote.) to debug a program running
on an IBM mainframe, which uses the EBCDIC character set, then the host
character set is Latin-1, and the target character set is EBCDIC.  If
you give GDB the command `set target-charset EBCDIC-US', then GDB
translates between EBCDIC and Latin 1 as you print character or string
values, or use character and string literals in expressions.

   GDB has no way to automatically recognize which character set the
inferior program uses; you must tell it, using the `set target-charset'
command, described below.

   Here are the commands for controlling GDB's character set support:

`set target-charset CHARSET'
     Set the current target character set to CHARSET.  We list the
     character set names GDB recognizes below, but if you type `set
     target-charset' followed by <TAB><TAB>, GDB will list the target
     character sets it supports.

`set host-charset CHARSET'
     Set the current host character set to CHARSET.

     By default, GDB uses a host character set appropriate to the
     system it is running on; you can override that default using the
     `set host-charset' command.

     GDB can only use certain character sets as its host character set.
     We list the character set names GDB recognizes below, and
     indicate which can be host character sets, but if you type `set
     target-charset' followed by <TAB><TAB>, GDB will list the host
     character sets it supports.

`set charset CHARSET'
     Set the current host and target character sets to CHARSET.  As
     above, if you type `set charset' followed by <TAB><TAB>, GDB will
     list the name of the character sets that can be used for both host
     and target.

`show charset'
     Show the names of the current host and target charsets.

`show host-charset'
     Show the name of the current host charset.

`show target-charset'
     Show the name of the current target charset.


   GDB currently includes support for the following character sets:

`ASCII'
     Seven-bit U.S. ASCII.  GDB can use this as its host character set.

`ISO-8859-1'
     The ISO Latin 1 character set.  This extends ASCII with accented
     characters needed for French, German, and Spanish.  GDB can use
     this as its host character set.

`EBCDIC-US'
`IBM1047'
     Variants of the EBCDIC character set, used on some of IBM's
     mainframe operating systems.  (GNU/Linux on the S/390 uses U.S.
     ASCII.)  GDB cannot use these as its host character set.


   Note that these are all single-byte character sets.  More work inside
GDB is needed to support multi-byte or variable-width character
encodings, like the UTF-8 and UCS-2 encodings of Unicode.

   Here is an example of GDB's character set support in action.  Assume
that the following source code has been placed in the file
`charset-test.c':

     #include <stdio.h>

     char ascii_hello[]
       = {72, 101, 108, 108, 111, 44, 32, 119,
          111, 114, 108, 100, 33, 10, 0};
     char ibm1047_hello[]
       = {200, 133, 147, 147, 150, 107, 64, 166,
          150, 153, 147, 132, 90, 37, 0};

     main ()
     {
       printf ("Hello, world!\n");
     }

   In this program, `ascii_hello' and `ibm1047_hello' are arrays
containing the string `Hello, world!' followed by a newline, encoded in
the ASCII and IBM1047 character sets.

   We compile the program, and invoke the debugger on it:

     $ gcc -g charset-test.c -o charset-test
     $ gdb -nw charset-test
     GNU gdb 2001-12-19-cvs
     Copyright 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     ...
     (gdb)

   We can use the `show charset' command to see what character sets GDB
is currently using to interpret and display characters and strings:

     (gdb) show charset
     The current host and target character set is `ISO-8859-1'.
     (gdb)

   For the sake of printing this manual, let's use ASCII as our initial
character set:
     (gdb) set charset ASCII
     (gdb) show charset
     The current host and target character set is `ASCII'.
     (gdb)

   Let's assume that ASCII is indeed the correct character set for our
host system -- in other words, let's assume that if GDB prints
characters using the ASCII character set, our terminal will display
them properly.  Since our current target character set is also ASCII,
the contents of `ascii_hello' print legibly:

     (gdb) print ascii_hello
     $1 = 0x401698 "Hello, world!\n"
     (gdb) print ascii_hello[0]
     $2 = 72 'H'
     (gdb)

   GDB uses the target character set for character and string literals
you use in expressions:

     (gdb) print '+'
     $3 = 43 '+'
     (gdb)

   The ASCII character set uses the number 43 to encode the `+'
character.

   GDB relies on the user to tell it which character set the target
program uses.  If we print `ibm1047_hello' while our target character
set is still ASCII, we get jibberish:

     (gdb) print ibm1047_hello
     $4 = 0x4016a8 "\310\205\223\223\226k@\246\226\231\223\204Z%"
     (gdb) print ibm1047_hello[0]
     $5 = 200 '\310'
     (gdb)

   If we invoke the `set target-charset' followed by <TAB><TAB>, GDB
tells us the character sets it supports:

     (gdb) set target-charset
     ASCII       EBCDIC-US   IBM1047     ISO-8859-1
     (gdb) set target-charset

   We can select IBM1047 as our target character set, and examine the
program's strings again.  Now the ASCII string is wrong, but GDB
translates the contents of `ibm1047_hello' from the target character
set, IBM1047, to the host character set, ASCII, and they display
correctly:

     (gdb) set target-charset IBM1047
     (gdb) show charset
     The current host character set is `ASCII'.
     The current target character set is `IBM1047'.
     (gdb) print ascii_hello
     $6 = 0x401698 "\110\145%%?\054\040\167?\162%\144\041\012"
     (gdb) print ascii_hello[0]
     $7 = 72 '\110'
     (gdb) print ibm1047_hello
     $8 = 0x4016a8 "Hello, world!\n"
     (gdb) print ibm1047_hello[0]
     $9 = 200 'H'
     (gdb)

   As above, GDB uses the target character set for character and string
literals you use in expressions:

     (gdb) print '+'
     $10 = 78 '+'
     (gdb)

   The IBM1047 character set uses the number 78 to encode the `+'
character.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Caching Remote Data,  Prev: Character Sets,  Up: Data

8.18 Caching Data of Remote Targets
===================================

GDB can cache data exchanged between the debugger and a remote target
(*note Remote::).  Such caching generally improves performance, because
it reduces the overhead of the remote protocol by bundling memory reads
and writes into large chunks.  Unfortunately, GDB does not currently
know anything about volatile registers, and thus data caching will
produce incorrect results when volatile registers are in use.

`set remotecache on'
`set remotecache off'
     Set caching state for remote targets.  When `ON', use data
     caching.  By default, this option is `OFF'.

`show remotecache'
     Show the current state of data caching for remote targets.

`info dcache'
     Print the information about the data cache performance.  The
     information displayed includes: the dcache width and depth; and for
     each cache line, how many times it was referenced, and its data and
     state (dirty, bad, ok, etc.).  This command is useful for debugging
     the data cache operation.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Macros,  Next: Tracepoints,  Prev: Data,  Up: Top

9 C Preprocessor Macros
***********************

Some languages, such as C and C++, provide a way to define and invoke
"preprocessor macros" which expand into strings of tokens.  GDB can
evaluate expressions containing macro invocations, show the result of
macro expansion, and show a macro's definition, including where it was
defined.

   You may need to compile your program specially to provide GDB with
information about preprocessor macros.  Most compilers do not include
macros in their debugging information, even when you compile with the
`-g' flag.  *Note Compilation::.

   A program may define a macro at one point, remove that definition
later, and then provide a different definition after that.  Thus, at
different points in the program, a macro may have different
definitions, or have no definition at all.  If there is a current stack
frame, GDB uses the macros in scope at that frame's source code line.
Otherwise, GDB uses the macros in scope at the current listing location;
see *Note List::.

   At the moment, GDB does not support the `##' token-splicing
operator, the `#' stringification operator, or variable-arity macros.

   Whenever GDB evaluates an expression, it always expands any macro
invocations present in the expression.  GDB also provides the following
commands for working with macros explicitly.

`macro expand EXPRESSION'
`macro exp EXPRESSION'
     Show the results of expanding all preprocessor macro invocations in
     EXPRESSION.  Since GDB simply expands macros, but does not parse
     the result, EXPRESSION need not be a valid expression; it can be
     any string of tokens.

`macro expand-once EXPRESSION'
`macro exp1 EXPRESSION'
     (This command is not yet implemented.)  Show the results of
     expanding those preprocessor macro invocations that appear
     explicitly in EXPRESSION.  Macro invocations appearing in that
     expansion are left unchanged.  This command allows you to see the
     effect of a particular macro more clearly, without being confused
     by further expansions.  Since GDB simply expands macros, but does
     not parse the result, EXPRESSION need not be a valid expression; it
     can be any string of tokens.

`info macro MACRO'
     Show the definition of the macro named MACRO, and describe the
     source location where that definition was established.

`macro define MACRO REPLACEMENT-LIST'
`macro define MACRO(ARGLIST) REPLACEMENT-LIST'
     (This command is not yet implemented.)  Introduce a definition for
     a preprocessor macro named MACRO, invocations of which are replaced
     by the tokens given in REPLACEMENT-LIST.  The first form of this
     command defines an "object-like" macro, which takes no arguments;
     the second form defines a "function-like" macro, which takes the
     arguments given in ARGLIST.

     A definition introduced by this command is in scope in every
     expression evaluated in GDB, until it is removed with the `macro
     undef' command, described below.  The definition overrides all
     definitions for MACRO present in the program being debugged, as
     well as any previous user-supplied definition.

`macro undef MACRO'
     (This command is not yet implemented.)  Remove any user-supplied
     definition for the macro named MACRO.  This command only affects
     definitions provided with the `macro define' command, described
     above; it cannot remove definitions present in the program being
     debugged.

`macro list'
     (This command is not yet implemented.)  List all the macros
     defined using the `macro define' command.

   Here is a transcript showing the above commands in action.  First, we
show our source files:

     $ cat sample.c
     #include <stdio.h>
     #include "sample.h"

     #define M 42
     #define ADD(x) (M + x)

     main ()
     {
     #define N 28
       printf ("Hello, world!\n");
     #undef N
       printf ("We're so creative.\n");
     #define N 1729
       printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
     }
     $ cat sample.h
     #define Q <
     $

   Now, we compile the program using the GNU C compiler, GCC.  We pass
the `-gdwarf-2' and `-g3' flags to ensure the compiler includes
information about preprocessor macros in the debugging information.

     $ gcc -gdwarf-2 -g3 sample.c -o sample
     $

   Now, we start GDB on our sample program:

     $ gdb -nw sample
     GNU gdb 2002-05-06-cvs
     Copyright 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     GDB is free software, ...
     (gdb)

   We can expand macros and examine their definitions, even when the
program is not running.  GDB uses the current listing position to
decide which macro definitions are in scope:

     (gdb) list main
     3
     4       #define M 42
     5       #define ADD(x) (M + x)
     6
     7       main ()
     8       {
     9       #define N 28
     10        printf ("Hello, world!\n");
     11      #undef N
     12        printf ("We're so creative.\n");
     (gdb) info macro ADD
     Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:5
     #define ADD(x) (M + x)
     (gdb) info macro Q
     Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.h:1
       included at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:2
     #define Q <
     (gdb) macro expand ADD(1)
     expands to: (42 + 1)
     (gdb) macro expand-once ADD(1)
     expands to: once (M + 1)
     (gdb)

   In the example above, note that `macro expand-once' expands only the
macro invocation explicit in the original text -- the invocation of
`ADD' -- but does not expand the invocation of the macro `M', which was
introduced by `ADD'.

   Once the program is running, GDB uses the macro definitions in force
at the source line of the current stack frame:

     (gdb) break main
     Breakpoint 1 at 0x8048370: file sample.c, line 10.
     (gdb) run
     Starting program: /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample

     Breakpoint 1, main () at sample.c:10
     10        printf ("Hello, world!\n");
     (gdb)

   At line 10, the definition of the macro `N' at line 9 is in force:

     (gdb) info macro N
     Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:9
     #define N 28
     (gdb) macro expand N Q M
     expands to: 28 < 42
     (gdb) print N Q M
     $1 = 1
     (gdb)

   As we step over directives that remove `N''s definition, and then
give it a new definition, GDB finds the definition (or lack thereof) in
force at each point:

     (gdb) next
     Hello, world!
     12        printf ("We're so creative.\n");
     (gdb) info macro N
     The symbol `N' has no definition as a C/C++ preprocessor macro
     at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:12
     (gdb) next
     We're so creative.
     14        printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
     (gdb) info macro N
     Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:13
     #define N 1729
     (gdb) macro expand N Q M
     expands to: 1729 < 42
     (gdb) print N Q M
     $2 = 0
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Tracepoints,  Next: Overlays,  Prev: Macros,  Up: Top

10 Tracepoints
**************

In some applications, it is not feasible for the debugger to interrupt
the program's execution long enough for the developer to learn anything
helpful about its behavior.  If the program's correctness depends on
its real-time behavior, delays introduced by a debugger might cause the
program to change its behavior drastically, or perhaps fail, even when
the code itself is correct.  It is useful to be able to observe the
program's behavior without interrupting it.

   Using GDB's `trace' and `collect' commands, you can specify
locations in the program, called "tracepoints", and arbitrary
expressions to evaluate when those tracepoints are reached.  Later,
using the `tfind' command, you can examine the values those expressions
had when the program hit the tracepoints.  The expressions may also
denote objects in memory--structures or arrays, for example--whose
values GDB should record; while visiting a particular tracepoint, you
may inspect those objects as if they were in memory at that moment.
However, because GDB records these values without interacting with you,
it can do so quickly and unobtrusively, hopefully not disturbing the
program's behavior.

   The tracepoint facility is currently available only for remote
targets.  *Note Targets::.  In addition, your remote target must know
how to collect trace data.  This functionality is implemented in the
remote stub; however, none of the stubs distributed with GDB support
tracepoints as of this writing.  The format of the remote packets used
to implement tracepoints are described in *Note Tracepoint Packets::.

   This chapter describes the tracepoint commands and features.

* Menu:

* Set Tracepoints::
* Analyze Collected Data::
* Tracepoint Variables::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Set Tracepoints,  Next: Analyze Collected Data,  Up: Tracepoints

10.1 Commands to Set Tracepoints
================================

Before running such a "trace experiment", an arbitrary number of
tracepoints can be set.  Like a breakpoint (*note Set Breaks::), a
tracepoint has a number assigned to it by GDB.  Like with breakpoints,
tracepoint numbers are successive integers starting from one.  Many of
the commands associated with tracepoints take the tracepoint number as
their argument, to identify which tracepoint to work on.

   For each tracepoint, you can specify, in advance, some arbitrary set
of data that you want the target to collect in the trace buffer when it
hits that tracepoint.  The collected data can include registers, local
variables, or global data.  Later, you can use GDB commands to examine
the values these data had at the time the tracepoint was hit.

   This section describes commands to set tracepoints and associated
conditions and actions.

* Menu:

* Create and Delete Tracepoints::
* Enable and Disable Tracepoints::
* Tracepoint Passcounts::
* Tracepoint Actions::
* Listing Tracepoints::
* Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Create and Delete Tracepoints,  Next: Enable and Disable Tracepoints,  Up: Set Tracepoints

10.1.1 Create and Delete Tracepoints
------------------------------------

`trace'
     The `trace' command is very similar to the `break' command.  Its
     argument can be a source line, a function name, or an address in
     the target program.  *Note Set Breaks::.  The `trace' command
     defines a tracepoint, which is a point in the target program where
     the debugger will briefly stop, collect some data, and then allow
     the program to continue.  Setting a tracepoint or changing its
     commands doesn't take effect until the next `tstart' command;
     thus, you cannot change the tracepoint attributes once a trace
     experiment is running.

     Here are some examples of using the `trace' command:

          (gdb) trace foo.c:121    // a source file and line number

          (gdb) trace +2           // 2 lines forward

          (gdb) trace my_function  // first source line of function

          (gdb) trace *my_function // EXACT start address of function

          (gdb) trace *0x2117c4    // an address

     You can abbreviate `trace' as `tr'.

     The convenience variable `$tpnum' records the tracepoint number of
     the most recently set tracepoint.

`delete tracepoint [NUM]'
     Permanently delete one or more tracepoints.  With no argument, the
     default is to delete all tracepoints.

     Examples:

          (gdb) delete trace 1 2 3 // remove three tracepoints

          (gdb) delete trace       // remove all tracepoints

     You can abbreviate this command as `del tr'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Enable and Disable Tracepoints,  Next: Tracepoint Passcounts,  Prev: Create and Delete Tracepoints,  Up: Set Tracepoints

10.1.2 Enable and Disable Tracepoints
-------------------------------------

`disable tracepoint [NUM]'
     Disable tracepoint NUM, or all tracepoints if no argument NUM is
     given.  A disabled tracepoint will have no effect during the next
     trace experiment, but it is not forgotten.  You can re-enable a
     disabled tracepoint using the `enable tracepoint' command.

`enable tracepoint [NUM]'
     Enable tracepoint NUM, or all tracepoints.  The enabled
     tracepoints will become effective the next time a trace experiment
     is run.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Tracepoint Passcounts,  Next: Tracepoint Actions,  Prev: Enable and Disable Tracepoints,  Up: Set Tracepoints

10.1.3 Tracepoint Passcounts
----------------------------

`passcount [N [NUM]]'
     Set the "passcount" of a tracepoint.  The passcount is a way to
     automatically stop a trace experiment.  If a tracepoint's
     passcount is N, then the trace experiment will be automatically
     stopped on the N'th time that tracepoint is hit.  If the
     tracepoint number NUM is not specified, the `passcount' command
     sets the passcount of the most recently defined tracepoint.  If no
     passcount is given, the trace experiment will run until stopped
     explicitly by the user.

     Examples:

          (gdb) passcount 5 2 // Stop on the 5th execution of
                                        `// tracepoint 2'

          (gdb) passcount 12  // Stop on the 12th execution of the
                                        `// most recently defined tracepoint.'
          (gdb) trace foo
          (gdb) pass 3
          (gdb) trace bar
          (gdb) pass 2
          (gdb) trace baz
          (gdb) pass 1        // Stop tracing when foo has been
                                         `// executed 3 times OR when bar has'
                                         `// been executed 2 times'
                                         `// OR when baz has been executed 1 time.'


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Tracepoint Actions,  Next: Listing Tracepoints,  Prev: Tracepoint Passcounts,  Up: Set Tracepoints

10.1.4 Tracepoint Action Lists
------------------------------

`actions [NUM]'
     This command will prompt for a list of actions to be taken when the
     tracepoint is hit.  If the tracepoint number NUM is not specified,
     this command sets the actions for the one that was most recently
     defined (so that you can define a tracepoint and then say
     `actions' without bothering about its number).  You specify the
     actions themselves on the following lines, one action at a time,
     and terminate the actions list with a line containing just `end'.
     So far, the only defined actions are `collect' and
     `while-stepping'.

     To remove all actions from a tracepoint, type `actions NUM' and
     follow it immediately with `end'.

          (gdb) collect DATA // collect some data

          (gdb) while-stepping 5 // single-step 5 times, collect data

          (gdb) end              // signals the end of actions.

     In the following example, the action list begins with `collect'
     commands indicating the things to be collected when the tracepoint
     is hit.  Then, in order to single-step and collect additional data
     following the tracepoint, a `while-stepping' command is used,
     followed by the list of things to be collected while stepping.  The
     `while-stepping' command is terminated by its own separate `end'
     command.  Lastly, the action list is terminated by an `end'
     command.

          (gdb) trace foo
          (gdb) actions
          Enter actions for tracepoint 1, one per line:
          > collect bar,baz
          > collect $regs
          > while-stepping 12
            > collect $fp, $sp
            > end
          end

`collect EXPR1, EXPR2, ...'
     Collect values of the given expressions when the tracepoint is hit.
     This command accepts a comma-separated list of any valid
     expressions.  In addition to global, static, or local variables,
     the following special arguments are supported:

    `$regs'
          collect all registers

    `$args'
          collect all function arguments

    `$locals'
          collect all local variables.

     You can give several consecutive `collect' commands, each one with
     a single argument, or one `collect' command with several arguments
     separated by commas: the effect is the same.

     The command `info scope' (*note info scope: Symbols.) is
     particularly useful for figuring out what data to collect.

`while-stepping N'
     Perform N single-step traces after the tracepoint, collecting new
     data at each step.  The `while-stepping' command is followed by
     the list of what to collect while stepping (followed by its own
     `end' command):

          > while-stepping 12
            > collect $regs, myglobal
            > end
          >

     You may abbreviate `while-stepping' as `ws' or `stepping'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Listing Tracepoints,  Next: Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment,  Prev: Tracepoint Actions,  Up: Set Tracepoints

10.1.5 Listing Tracepoints
--------------------------

`info tracepoints [NUM]'
     Display information about the tracepoint NUM.  If you don't specify
     a tracepoint number, displays information about all the tracepoints
     defined so far.  For each tracepoint, the following information is
     shown:

        * its number

        * whether it is enabled or disabled

        * its address

        * its passcount as given by the `passcount N' command

        * its step count as given by the `while-stepping N' command

        * where in the source files is the tracepoint set

        * its action list as given by the `actions' command

          (gdb) info trace
          Num Enb Address    PassC StepC What
          1   y   0x002117c4 0     0     <gdb_asm>
          2   y   0x0020dc64 0     0     in g_test at g_test.c:1375
          3   y   0x0020b1f4 0     0     in get_data at ../foo.c:41
          (gdb)

     This command can be abbreviated `info tp'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment,  Prev: Listing Tracepoints,  Up: Set Tracepoints

10.1.6 Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment
---------------------------------------------

`tstart'
     This command takes no arguments.  It starts the trace experiment,
     and begins collecting data.  This has the side effect of
     discarding all the data collected in the trace buffer during the
     previous trace experiment.

`tstop'
     This command takes no arguments.  It ends the trace experiment, and
     stops collecting data.

     *Note*: a trace experiment and data collection may stop
     automatically if any tracepoint's passcount is reached (*note
     Tracepoint Passcounts::), or if the trace buffer becomes full.

`tstatus'
     This command displays the status of the current trace data
     collection.

   Here is an example of the commands we described so far:

     (gdb) trace gdb_c_test
     (gdb) actions
     Enter actions for tracepoint #1, one per line.
     > collect $regs,$locals,$args
     > while-stepping 11
       > collect $regs
       > end
     > end
     (gdb) tstart
        [time passes ...]
     (gdb) tstop

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Analyze Collected Data,  Next: Tracepoint Variables,  Prev: Set Tracepoints,  Up: Tracepoints

10.2 Using the collected data
=============================

After the tracepoint experiment ends, you use GDB commands for
examining the trace data.  The basic idea is that each tracepoint
collects a trace "snapshot" every time it is hit and another snapshot
every time it single-steps.  All these snapshots are consecutively
numbered from zero and go into a buffer, and you can examine them
later.  The way you examine them is to "focus" on a specific trace
snapshot.  When the remote stub is focused on a trace snapshot, it will
respond to all GDB requests for memory and registers by reading from
the buffer which belongs to that snapshot, rather than from _real_
memory or registers of the program being debugged.  This means that
*all* GDB commands (`print', `info registers', `backtrace', etc.) will
behave as if we were currently debugging the program state as it was
when the tracepoint occurred.  Any requests for data that are not in
the buffer will fail.

* Menu:

* tfind::                       How to select a trace snapshot
* tdump::                       How to display all data for a snapshot
* save-tracepoints::            How to save tracepoints for a future run

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: tfind,  Next: tdump,  Up: Analyze Collected Data

10.2.1 `tfind N'
----------------

The basic command for selecting a trace snapshot from the buffer is
`tfind N', which finds trace snapshot number N, counting from zero.  If
no argument N is given, the next snapshot is selected.

   Here are the various forms of using the `tfind' command.

`tfind start'
     Find the first snapshot in the buffer.  This is a synonym for
     `tfind 0' (since 0 is the number of the first snapshot).

`tfind none'
     Stop debugging trace snapshots, resume _live_ debugging.

`tfind end'
     Same as `tfind none'.

`tfind'
     No argument means find the next trace snapshot.

`tfind -'
     Find the previous trace snapshot before the current one.  This
     permits retracing earlier steps.

`tfind tracepoint NUM'
     Find the next snapshot associated with tracepoint NUM.  Search
     proceeds forward from the last examined trace snapshot.  If no
     argument NUM is given, it means find the next snapshot collected
     for the same tracepoint as the current snapshot.

`tfind pc ADDR'
     Find the next snapshot associated with the value ADDR of the
     program counter.  Search proceeds forward from the last examined
     trace snapshot.  If no argument ADDR is given, it means find the
     next snapshot with the same value of PC as the current snapshot.

`tfind outside ADDR1, ADDR2'
     Find the next snapshot whose PC is outside the given range of
     addresses.

`tfind range ADDR1, ADDR2'
     Find the next snapshot whose PC is between ADDR1 and ADDR2.

`tfind line [FILE:]N'
     Find the next snapshot associated with the source line N.  If the
     optional argument FILE is given, refer to line N in that source
     file.  Search proceeds forward from the last examined trace
     snapshot.  If no argument N is given, it means find the next line
     other than the one currently being examined; thus saying `tfind
     line' repeatedly can appear to have the same effect as stepping
     from line to line in a _live_ debugging session.

   The default arguments for the `tfind' commands are specifically
designed to make it easy to scan through the trace buffer.  For
instance, `tfind' with no argument selects the next trace snapshot, and
`tfind -' with no argument selects the previous trace snapshot.  So, by
giving one `tfind' command, and then simply hitting <RET> repeatedly
you can examine all the trace snapshots in order.  Or, by saying `tfind
-' and then hitting <RET> repeatedly you can examine the snapshots in
reverse order.  The `tfind line' command with no argument selects the
snapshot for the next source line executed.  The `tfind pc' command with
no argument selects the next snapshot with the same program counter
(PC) as the current frame.  The `tfind tracepoint' command with no
argument selects the next trace snapshot collected by the same
tracepoint as the current one.

   In addition to letting you scan through the trace buffer manually,
these commands make it easy to construct GDB scripts that scan through
the trace buffer and print out whatever collected data you are
interested in.  Thus, if we want to examine the PC, FP, and SP
registers from each trace frame in the buffer, we can say this:

     (gdb) tfind start
     (gdb) while ($trace_frame != -1)
     > printf "Frame %d, PC = %08X, SP = %08X, FP = %08X\n", \
               $trace_frame, $pc, $sp, $fp
     > tfind
     > end

     Frame 0, PC = 0020DC64, SP = 0030BF3C, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 1, PC = 0020DC6C, SP = 0030BF38, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 2, PC = 0020DC70, SP = 0030BF34, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 3, PC = 0020DC74, SP = 0030BF30, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 4, PC = 0020DC78, SP = 0030BF2C, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 5, PC = 0020DC7C, SP = 0030BF28, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 6, PC = 0020DC80, SP = 0030BF24, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 7, PC = 0020DC84, SP = 0030BF20, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 8, PC = 0020DC88, SP = 0030BF1C, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 9, PC = 0020DC8E, SP = 0030BF18, FP = 0030BF44
     Frame 10, PC = 00203F6C, SP = 0030BE3C, FP = 0030BF14

   Or, if we want to examine the variable `X' at each source line in
the buffer:

     (gdb) tfind start
     (gdb) while ($trace_frame != -1)
     > printf "Frame %d, X == %d\n", $trace_frame, X
     > tfind line
     > end

     Frame 0, X = 1
     Frame 7, X = 2
     Frame 13, X = 255

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: tdump,  Next: save-tracepoints,  Prev: tfind,  Up: Analyze Collected Data

10.2.2 `tdump'
--------------

This command takes no arguments.  It prints all the data collected at
the current trace snapshot.

     (gdb) trace 444
     (gdb) actions
     Enter actions for tracepoint #2, one per line:
     > collect $regs, $locals, $args, gdb_long_test
     > end

     (gdb) tstart

     (gdb) tfind line 444
     #0  gdb_test (p1=0x11, p2=0x22, p3=0x33, p4=0x44, p5=0x55, p6=0x66)
     at gdb_test.c:444
     444        printp( "%s: arguments = 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X\n", )

     (gdb) tdump
     Data collected at tracepoint 2, trace frame 1:
     d0             0xc4aa0085       -995491707
     d1             0x18     24
     d2             0x80     128
     d3             0x33     51
     d4             0x71aea3d        119204413
     d5             0x22     34
     d6             0xe0     224
     d7             0x380035 3670069
     a0             0x19e24a 1696330
     a1             0x3000668        50333288
     a2             0x100    256
     a3             0x322000 3284992
     a4             0x3000698        50333336
     a5             0x1ad3cc 1758156
     fp             0x30bf3c 0x30bf3c
     sp             0x30bf34 0x30bf34
     ps             0x0      0
     pc             0x20b2c8 0x20b2c8
     fpcontrol      0x0      0
     fpstatus       0x0      0
     fpiaddr        0x0      0
     p = 0x20e5b4 "gdb-test"
     p1 = (void *) 0x11
     p2 = (void *) 0x22
     p3 = (void *) 0x33
     p4 = (void *) 0x44
     p5 = (void *) 0x55
     p6 = (void *) 0x66
     gdb_long_test = 17 '\021'

     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: save-tracepoints,  Prev: tdump,  Up: Analyze Collected Data

10.2.3 `save-tracepoints FILENAME'
----------------------------------

This command saves all current tracepoint definitions together with
their actions and passcounts, into a file `FILENAME' suitable for use
in a later debugging session.  To read the saved tracepoint
definitions, use the `source' command (*note Command Files::).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Tracepoint Variables,  Prev: Analyze Collected Data,  Up: Tracepoints

10.3 Convenience Variables for Tracepoints
==========================================

`(int) $trace_frame'
     The current trace snapshot (a.k.a. "frame") number, or -1 if no
     snapshot is selected.

`(int) $tracepoint'
     The tracepoint for the current trace snapshot.

`(int) $trace_line'
     The line number for the current trace snapshot.

`(char []) $trace_file'
     The source file for the current trace snapshot.

`(char []) $trace_func'
     The name of the function containing `$tracepoint'.

   Note: `$trace_file' is not suitable for use in `printf', use
`output' instead.

   Here's a simple example of using these convenience variables for
stepping through all the trace snapshots and printing some of their
data.

     (gdb) tfind start

     (gdb) while $trace_frame != -1
     > output $trace_file
     > printf ", line %d (tracepoint #%d)\n", $trace_line, $tracepoint
     > tfind
     > end

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Overlays,  Next: Languages,  Prev: Tracepoints,  Up: Top

11 Debugging Programs That Use Overlays
***************************************

If your program is too large to fit completely in your target system's
memory, you can sometimes use "overlays" to work around this problem.
GDB provides some support for debugging programs that use overlays.

* Menu:

* How Overlays Work::              A general explanation of overlays.
* Overlay Commands::               Managing overlays in GDB.
* Automatic Overlay Debugging::    GDB can find out which overlays are
                                   mapped by asking the inferior.
* Overlay Sample Program::         A sample program using overlays.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: How Overlays Work,  Next: Overlay Commands,  Up: Overlays

11.1 How Overlays Work
======================

Suppose you have a computer whose instruction address space is only 64
kilobytes long, but which has much more memory which can be accessed by
other means: special instructions, segment registers, or memory
management hardware, for example.  Suppose further that you want to
adapt a program which is larger than 64 kilobytes to run on this system.

   One solution is to identify modules of your program which are
relatively independent, and need not call each other directly; call
these modules "overlays".  Separate the overlays from the main program,
and place their machine code in the larger memory.  Place your main
program in instruction memory, but leave at least enough space there to
hold the largest overlay as well.

   Now, to call a function located in an overlay, you must first copy
that overlay's machine code from the large memory into the space set
aside for it in the instruction memory, and then jump to its entry point
there.

         Data             Instruction            Larger
     Address Space       Address Space        Address Space
     +-----------+       +-----------+        +-----------+
     |           |       |           |        |           |
     +-----------+       +-----------+        +-----------+<-- overlay 1
     | program   |       |   main    |   .----| overlay 1 | load address
     | variables |       |  program  |   |    +-----------+
     | and heap  |       |           |   |    |           |
     +-----------+       |           |   |    +-----------+<-- overlay 2
     |           |       +-----------+   |    |           | load address
     +-----------+       |           |   |  .-| overlay 2 |
                         |           |   |  | |           |
              mapped --->+-----------+   |  | +-----------+
              address    |           |   |  | |           |
                         |  overlay  | <-'  | |           |
                         |   area    |  <---' +-----------+<-- overlay 3
                         |           | <---.  |           | load address
                         +-----------+     `--| overlay 3 |
                         |           |        |           |
                         +-----------+        |           |
                                              +-----------+
                                              |           |
                                              +-----------+

                         A code overlay

   The diagram (*note A code overlay::) shows a system with separate
data and instruction address spaces.  To map an overlay, the program
copies its code from the larger address space to the instruction
address space.  Since the overlays shown here all use the same mapped
address, only one may be mapped at a time.  For a system with a single
address space for data and instructions, the diagram would be similar,
except that the program variables and heap would share an address space
with the main program and the overlay area.

   An overlay loaded into instruction memory and ready for use is
called a "mapped" overlay; its "mapped address" is its address in the
instruction memory.  An overlay not present (or only partially present)
in instruction memory is called "unmapped"; its "load address" is its
address in the larger memory.  The mapped address is also called the
"virtual memory address", or "VMA"; the load address is also called the
"load memory address", or "LMA".

   Unfortunately, overlays are not a completely transparent way to
adapt a program to limited instruction memory.  They introduce a new
set of global constraints you must keep in mind as you design your
program:

   * Before calling or returning to a function in an overlay, your
     program must make sure that overlay is actually mapped.
     Otherwise, the call or return will transfer control to the right
     address, but in the wrong overlay, and your program will probably
     crash.

   * If the process of mapping an overlay is expensive on your system,
     you will need to choose your overlays carefully to minimize their
     effect on your program's performance.

   * The executable file you load onto your system must contain each
     overlay's instructions, appearing at the overlay's load address,
     not its mapped address.  However, each overlay's instructions must
     be relocated and its symbols defined as if the overlay were at its
     mapped address.  You can use GNU linker scripts to specify
     different load and relocation addresses for pieces of your
     program; see *Note Overlay Description: (ld.info)Overlay
     Description.

   * The procedure for loading executable files onto your system must
     be able to load their contents into the larger address space as
     well as the instruction and data spaces.


   The overlay system described above is rather simple, and could be
improved in many ways:

   * If your system has suitable bank switch registers or memory
     management hardware, you could use those facilities to make an
     overlay's load area contents simply appear at their mapped address
     in instruction space.  This would probably be faster than copying
     the overlay to its mapped area in the usual way.

   * If your overlays are small enough, you could set aside more than
     one overlay area, and have more than one overlay mapped at a time.

   * You can use overlays to manage data, as well as instructions.  In
     general, data overlays are even less transparent to your design
     than code overlays: whereas code overlays only require care when
     you call or return to functions, data overlays require care every
     time you access the data.  Also, if you change the contents of a
     data overlay, you must copy its contents back out to its load
     address before you can copy a different data overlay into the same
     mapped area.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Overlay Commands,  Next: Automatic Overlay Debugging,  Prev: How Overlays Work,  Up: Overlays

11.2 Overlay Commands
=====================

To use GDB's overlay support, each overlay in your program must
correspond to a separate section of the executable file.  The section's
virtual memory address and load memory address must be the overlay's
mapped and load addresses.  Identifying overlays with sections allows
GDB to determine the appropriate address of a function or variable,
depending on whether the overlay is mapped or not.

   GDB's overlay commands all start with the word `overlay'; you can
abbreviate this as `ov' or `ovly'.  The commands are:

`overlay off'
     Disable GDB's overlay support.  When overlay support is disabled,
     GDB assumes that all functions and variables are always present at
     their mapped addresses.  By default, GDB's overlay support is
     disabled.

`overlay manual'
     Enable "manual" overlay debugging.  In this mode, GDB relies on
     you to tell it which overlays are mapped, and which are not, using
     the `overlay map-overlay' and `overlay unmap-overlay' commands
     described below.

`overlay map-overlay OVERLAY'
`overlay map OVERLAY'
     Tell GDB that OVERLAY is now mapped; OVERLAY must be the name of
     the object file section containing the overlay.  When an overlay
     is mapped, GDB assumes it can find the overlay's functions and
     variables at their mapped addresses.  GDB assumes that any other
     overlays whose mapped ranges overlap that of OVERLAY are now
     unmapped.

`overlay unmap-overlay OVERLAY'
`overlay unmap OVERLAY'
     Tell GDB that OVERLAY is no longer mapped; OVERLAY must be the
     name of the object file section containing the overlay.  When an
     overlay is unmapped, GDB assumes it can find the overlay's
     functions and variables at their load addresses.

`overlay auto'
     Enable "automatic" overlay debugging.  In this mode, GDB consults
     a data structure the overlay manager maintains in the inferior to
     see which overlays are mapped.  For details, see *Note Automatic
     Overlay Debugging::.

`overlay load-target'
`overlay load'
     Re-read the overlay table from the inferior.  Normally, GDB
     re-reads the table GDB automatically each time the inferior stops,
     so this command should only be necessary if you have changed the
     overlay mapping yourself using GDB.  This command is only useful
     when using automatic overlay debugging.

`overlay list-overlays'
`overlay list'
     Display a list of the overlays currently mapped, along with their
     mapped addresses, load addresses, and sizes.


   Normally, when GDB prints a code address, it includes the name of
the function the address falls in:

     (gdb) print main
     $3 = {int ()} 0x11a0 <main>
   When overlay debugging is enabled, GDB recognizes code in unmapped
overlays, and prints the names of unmapped functions with asterisks
around them.  For example, if `foo' is a function in an unmapped
overlay, GDB prints it this way:

     (gdb) overlay list
     No sections are mapped.
     (gdb) print foo
     $5 = {int (int)} 0x100000 <*foo*>
   When `foo''s overlay is mapped, GDB prints the function's name
normally:

     (gdb) overlay list
     Section .ov.foo.text, loaded at 0x100000 - 0x100034,
             mapped at 0x1016 - 0x104a
     (gdb) print foo
     $6 = {int (int)} 0x1016 <foo>

   When overlay debugging is enabled, GDB can find the correct address
for functions and variables in an overlay, whether or not the overlay
is mapped.  This allows most GDB commands, like `break' and
`disassemble', to work normally, even on unmapped code.  However, GDB's
breakpoint support has some limitations:

   * You can set breakpoints in functions in unmapped overlays, as long
     as GDB can write to the overlay at its load address.

   * GDB can not set hardware or simulator-based breakpoints in
     unmapped overlays.  However, if you set a breakpoint at the end of
     your overlay manager (and tell GDB which overlays are now mapped,
     if you are using manual overlay management), GDB will re-set its
     breakpoints properly.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Automatic Overlay Debugging,  Next: Overlay Sample Program,  Prev: Overlay Commands,  Up: Overlays

11.3 Automatic Overlay Debugging
================================

GDB can automatically track which overlays are mapped and which are
not, given some simple co-operation from the overlay manager in the
inferior.  If you enable automatic overlay debugging with the `overlay
auto' command (*note Overlay Commands::), GDB looks in the inferior's
memory for certain variables describing the current state of the
overlays.

   Here are the variables your overlay manager must define to support
GDB's automatic overlay debugging:

`_ovly_table':
     This variable must be an array of the following structures:

          struct
          {
            /* The overlay's mapped address.  */
            unsigned long vma;

            /* The size of the overlay, in bytes.  */
            unsigned long size;

            /* The overlay's load address.  */
            unsigned long lma;

            /* Non-zero if the overlay is currently mapped;
               zero otherwise.  */
            unsigned long mapped;
          }

`_novlys':
     This variable must be a four-byte signed integer, holding the total
     number of elements in `_ovly_table'.


   To decide whether a particular overlay is mapped or not, GDB looks
for an entry in `_ovly_table' whose `vma' and `lma' members equal the
VMA and LMA of the overlay's section in the executable file.  When GDB
finds a matching entry, it consults the entry's `mapped' member to
determine whether the overlay is currently mapped.

   In addition, your overlay manager may define a function called
`_ovly_debug_event'.  If this function is defined, GDB will silently
set a breakpoint there.  If the overlay manager then calls this
function whenever it has changed the overlay table, this will enable
GDB to accurately keep track of which overlays are in program memory,
and update any breakpoints that may be set in overlays.  This will
allow breakpoints to work even if the overlays are kept in ROM or other
non-writable memory while they are not being executed.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Overlay Sample Program,  Prev: Automatic Overlay Debugging,  Up: Overlays

11.4 Overlay Sample Program
===========================

When linking a program which uses overlays, you must place the overlays
at their load addresses, while relocating them to run at their mapped
addresses.  To do this, you must write a linker script (*note Overlay
Description: (ld.info)Overlay Description.).  Unfortunately, since
linker scripts are specific to a particular host system, target
architecture, and target memory layout, this manual cannot provide
portable sample code demonstrating GDB's overlay support.

   However, the GDB source distribution does contain an overlaid
program, with linker scripts for a few systems, as part of its test
suite.  The program consists of the following files from
`gdb/testsuite/gdb.base':

`overlays.c'
     The main program file.

`ovlymgr.c'
     A simple overlay manager, used by `overlays.c'.

`foo.c'
`bar.c'
`baz.c'
`grbx.c'
     Overlay modules, loaded and used by `overlays.c'.

`d10v.ld'
`m32r.ld'
     Linker scripts for linking the test program on the `d10v-elf' and
     `m32r-elf' targets.

   You can build the test program using the `d10v-elf' GCC
cross-compiler like this:

     $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c overlays.c
     $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c ovlymgr.c
     $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c foo.c
     $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c bar.c
     $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c baz.c
     $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c grbx.c
     $ d10v-elf-gcc -g overlays.o ovlymgr.o foo.o bar.o \
                       baz.o grbx.o -Wl,-Td10v.ld -o overlays

   The build process is identical for any other architecture, except
that you must substitute the appropriate compiler and linker script for
the target system for `d10v-elf-gcc' and `d10v.ld'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Languages,  Next: Symbols,  Prev: Overlays,  Up: Top

12 Using GDB with Different Languages
*************************************

Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
rarely expressed in the same manner.  For instance, in ANSI C,
dereferencing a pointer `p' is accomplished by `*p', but in Modula-2,
it is accomplished by `p^'.  Values can also be represented (and
displayed) differently.  Hex numbers in C appear as `0x1ae', while in
Modula-2 they appear as `1AEH'.

   Language-specific information is built into GDB for some languages,
allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
native language, and allowing GDB to output values in a manner
consistent with the syntax of your program's native language.  The
language you use to build expressions is called the "working language".

* Menu:

* Setting::                     Switching between source languages
* Show::                        Displaying the language
* Checks::                      Type and range checks
* Supported languages::         Supported languages
* Unsupported languages::       Unsupported languages

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Setting,  Next: Show,  Up: Languages

12.1 Switching between source languages
=======================================

There are two ways to control the working language--either have GDB set
it automatically, or select it manually yourself.  You can use the `set
language' command for either purpose.  On startup, GDB defaults to
setting the language automatically.  The working language is used to
determine how expressions you type are interpreted, how values are
printed, etc.

   In addition to the working language, every source file that GDB
knows about has its own working language.  For some object file
formats, the compiler might indicate which language a particular source
file is in.  However, most of the time GDB infers the language from the
name of the file.  The language of a source file controls whether C++
names are demangled--this way `backtrace' can show each frame
appropriately for its own language.  There is no way to set the
language of a source file from within GDB, but you can set the language
associated with a filename extension.  *Note Displaying the language:
Show.

   This is most commonly a problem when you use a program, such as
`cfront' or `f2c', that generates C but is written in another language.
In that case, make the program use `#line' directives in its C output;
that way GDB will know the correct language of the source code of the
original program, and will display that source code, not the generated
C code.

* Menu:

* Filenames::                   Filename extensions and languages.
* Manually::                    Setting the working language manually
* Automatically::               Having GDB infer the source language

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Filenames,  Next: Manually,  Up: Setting

12.1.1 List of filename extensions and languages
------------------------------------------------

If a source file name ends in one of the following extensions, then GDB
infers that its language is the one indicated.

`.ada'
`.ads'
`.adb'
`.a'
     Ada source file.

`.c'
     C source file

`.C'
`.cc'
`.cp'
`.cpp'
`.cxx'
`.c++'
     C++ source file

`.m'
     Objective-C source file

`.f'
`.F'
     Fortran source file

`.mod'
     Modula-2 source file

`.s'
`.S'
     Assembler source file.  This actually behaves almost like C, but
     GDB does not skip over function prologues when stepping.

   In addition, you may set the language associated with a filename
extension.  *Note Displaying the language: Show.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Manually,  Next: Automatically,  Prev: Filenames,  Up: Setting

12.1.2 Setting the working language
-----------------------------------

If you allow GDB to set the language automatically, expressions are
interpreted the same way in your debugging session and your program.

   If you wish, you may set the language manually.  To do this, issue
the command `set language LANG', where LANG is the name of a language,
such as `c' or `modula-2'.  For a list of the supported languages, type
`set language'.

   Setting the language manually prevents GDB from updating the working
language automatically.  This can lead to confusion if you try to debug
a program when the working language is not the same as the source
language, when an expression is acceptable to both languages--but means
different things.  For instance, if the current source file were
written in C, and GDB was parsing Modula-2, a command such as:

     print a = b + c

might not have the effect you intended.  In C, this means to add `b'
and `c' and place the result in `a'.  The result printed would be the
value of `a'.  In Modula-2, this means to compare `a' to the result of
`b+c', yielding a `BOOLEAN' value.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Automatically,  Prev: Manually,  Up: Setting

12.1.3 Having GDB infer the source language
-------------------------------------------

To have GDB set the working language automatically, use `set language
local' or `set language auto'.  GDB then infers the working language.
That is, when your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
breakpoint), GDB sets the working language to the language recorded for
the function in that frame.  If the language for a frame is unknown
(that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension),
the current working language is not changed, and GDB issues a warning.

   This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
entirely in one source language.  However, program modules and libraries
written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
a different source language.  Using `set language auto' in this case
frees you from having to set the working language manually.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Show,  Next: Checks,  Prev: Setting,  Up: Languages

12.2 Displaying the language
============================

The following commands help you find out which language is the working
language, and also what language source files were written in.

`show language'
     Display the current working language.  This is the language you
     can use with commands such as `print' to build and compute
     expressions that may involve variables in your program.

`info frame'
     Display the source language for this frame.  This language becomes
     the working language if you use an identifier from this frame.
     *Note Information about a frame: Frame Info, to identify the other
     information listed here.

`info source'
     Display the source language of this source file.  *Note Examining
     the Symbol Table: Symbols, to identify the other information
     listed here.

   In unusual circumstances, you may have source files with extensions
not in the standard list.  You can then set the extension associated
with a language explicitly:

`set extension-language EXT LANGUAGE'
     Tell GDB that source files with extension EXT are to be assumed as
     written in the source language LANGUAGE.

`info extensions'
     List all the filename extensions and the associated languages.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Checks,  Next: Supported languages,  Prev: Show,  Up: Languages

12.3 Type and range checking
============================

     _Warning:_ In this release, the GDB commands for type and range
     checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect.  This
     section documents the intended facilities.

   Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly
common errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks.  These
include checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and
making sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time.  Checks such
as these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been
compiled by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks
for range errors when your program is running.

   GDB can check for conditions like the above if you wish.  Although
GDB does not check the statements in your program, it can check
expressions entered directly into GDB for evaluation via the `print'
command, for example.  As with the working language, GDB can also
decide whether or not to check automatically based on your program's
source language.  *Note Supported languages: Supported languages, for
the default settings of supported languages.

* Menu:

* Type Checking::               An overview of type checking
* Range Checking::              An overview of range checking

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Type Checking,  Next: Range Checking,  Up: Checks

12.3.1 An overview of type checking
-----------------------------------

Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
otherwise an error occurs.  These checks prevent type mismatch errors
from ever causing any run-time problems.  For example,

     1 + 2 => 3
but
     error--> 1 + 2.3

   The second example fails because the `CARDINAL' 1 is not
type-compatible with the `REAL' 2.3.

   For the expressions you use in GDB commands, you can tell the GDB
type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
abandon the expression; or to only issue warnings when type mismatches
occur, but evaluate the expression anyway.  When you choose the last of
these, GDB evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
also issues a warning.

   Even if you turn type checking off, there may be other reasons
related to type that prevent GDB from evaluating an expression.  For
instance, GDB does not know how to add an `int' and a `struct foo'.
These particular type errors have nothing to do with the language in
use, and usually arise from expressions, such as the one described
above, which make little sense to evaluate anyway.

   Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type.  For
instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
operators to be numbers.  In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
operators.  *Note Supported languages: Supported languages, for further
details on specific languages.

   GDB provides some additional commands for controlling the type
checker:

`set check type auto'
     Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
     *Note Supported languages: Supported languages, for the default
     settings for each language.

`set check type on'
`set check type off'
     Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
     current working language.  Issue a warning if the setting does not
     match the language default.  If any type mismatches occur in
     evaluating an expression while type checking is on, GDB prints a
     message and aborts evaluation of the expression.

`set check type warn'
     Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
     evaluate the expression.  Evaluating the expression may still be
     impossible for other reasons.  For example, GDB cannot add numbers
     and structures.

`show type'
     Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not
     GDB is setting it automatically.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Range Checking,  Prev: Type Checking,  Up: Checks

12.3.2 An overview of range checking
------------------------------------

In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks.  Such range
checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
not exceed the bounds of the array.

   For expressions you use in GDB commands, you can tell GDB to treat
range errors in one of three ways: ignore them, always treat them as
errors and abandon the expression, or issue warnings but evaluate the
expression anyway.

   A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member of
any type.  Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an error.
In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the result
to "wrap around" to lower values--for example, if M is the largest
integer value, and S is the smallest, then

     M + 1 => S

   This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
specific to individual compilers or machines.  *Note Supported
languages: Supported languages, for further details on specific
languages.

   GDB provides some additional commands for controlling the range
checker:

`set check range auto'
     Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
     *Note Supported languages: Supported languages, for the default
     settings for each language.

`set check range on'
`set check range off'
     Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for
     the current working language.  A warning is issued if the setting
     does not match the language default.  If a range error occurs and
     range checking is on, then a message is printed and evaluation of
     the expression is aborted.

`set check range warn'
     Output messages when the GDB range checker detects a range error,
     but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway.  Evaluating the
     expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as
     accessing memory that the process does not own (a typical example
     from many Unix systems).

`show range'
     Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not
     it is being set automatically by GDB.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Supported languages,  Next: Unsupported languages,  Prev: Checks,  Up: Languages

12.4 Supported languages
========================

GDB supports C, C++, Objective-C, Fortran, Java, Pascal, assembly,
Modula-2, and Ada.  Some GDB features may be used in expressions
regardless of the language you use: the GDB `@' and `::' operators, and
the `{type}addr' construct (*note Expressions: Expressions.) can be
used with the constructs of any supported language.

   The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
supported by GDB.  These sections are not meant to be language
tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
GDB expression parser accepts, and what input and output formats should
look like for different languages.  There are many good books written
on each of these languages; please look to these for a language
reference or tutorial.

* Menu:

* C::                           C and C++
* Objective-C::                 Objective-C
* Fortran::                     Fortran
* Pascal::                      Pascal
* Modula-2::                    Modula-2
* Ada::                         Ada

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: C,  Next: Objective-C,  Up: Supported languages

12.4.1 C and C++
----------------

Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of GDB apply to
both languages.  Whenever this is the case, we discuss those languages
together.

   The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the C++
compiler and GDB.  Therefore, to debug your C++ code effectively, you
must compile your C++ programs with a supported C++ compiler, such as
GNU `g++', or the HP ANSI C++ compiler (`aCC').

   For best results when using GNU C++, use the DWARF 2 debugging
format; if it doesn't work on your system, try the stabs+ debugging
format.  You can select those formats explicitly with the `g++'
command-line options `-gdwarf-2' and `-gstabs+'.  *Note Options for
Debugging Your Program or GNU CC: (gcc.info)Debugging Options.

* Menu:

* C Operators::                 C and C++ operators
* C Constants::                 C and C++ constants
* C plus plus expressions::     C++ expressions
* C Defaults::                  Default settings for C and C++
* C Checks::                    C and C++ type and range checks
* Debugging C::                 GDB and C
* Debugging C plus plus::       GDB features for C++

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: C Operators,  Next: C Constants,  Up: C

12.4.1.1 C and C++ operators
............................

Operators must be defined on values of specific types.  For instance,
`+' is defined on numbers, but not on structures.  Operators are often
defined on groups of types.

   For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:

   * _Integral types_ include `int' with any of its storage-class
     specifiers; `char'; `enum'; and, for C++, `bool'.

   * _Floating-point types_ include `float', `double', and `long
     double' (if supported by the target platform).

   * _Pointer types_ include all types defined as `(TYPE *)'.

   * _Scalar types_ include all of the above.


The following operators are supported.  They are listed here in order
of increasing precedence:

`,'
     The comma or sequencing operator.  Expressions in a
     comma-separated list are evaluated from left to right, with the
     result of the entire expression being the last expression
     evaluated.

`='
     Assignment.  The value of an assignment expression is the value
     assigned.  Defined on scalar types.

`OP='
     Used in an expression of the form `A OP= B', and translated to
     `A = A OP B'.  `OP=' and `=' have the same precedence.  OP is any
     one of the operators `|', `^', `&', `<<', `>>', `+', `-', `*',
     `/', `%'.

`?:'
     The ternary operator.  `A ? B : C' can be thought of as:  if A
     then B else C.  A should be of an integral type.

`||'
     Logical OR.  Defined on integral types.

`&&'
     Logical AND.  Defined on integral types.

`|'
     Bitwise OR.  Defined on integral types.

`^'
     Bitwise exclusive-OR.  Defined on integral types.

`&'
     Bitwise AND.  Defined on integral types.

`==, !='
     Equality and inequality.  Defined on scalar types.  The value of
     these expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.

`<, >, <=, >='
     Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
     Defined on scalar types.  The value of these expressions is 0 for
     false and non-zero for true.

`<<, >>'
     left shift, and right shift.  Defined on integral types.

`@'
     The GDB "artificial array" operator (*note Expressions:
     Expressions.).

`+, -'
     Addition and subtraction.  Defined on integral types,
     floating-point types and pointer types.

`*, /, %'
     Multiplication, division, and modulus.  Multiplication and
     division are defined on integral and floating-point types.
     Modulus is defined on integral types.

`++, --'
     Increment and decrement.  When appearing before a variable, the
     operation is performed before the variable is used in an
     expression; when appearing after it, the variable's value is used
     before the operation takes place.

`*'
     Pointer dereferencing.  Defined on pointer types.  Same precedence
     as `++'.

`&'
     Address operator.  Defined on variables.  Same precedence as `++'.

     For debugging C++, GDB implements a use of `&' beyond what is
     allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use `&(&REF)' (or, if
     you prefer, simply `&&REF') to examine the address where a C++
     reference variable (declared with `&REF') is stored.

`-'
     Negative.  Defined on integral and floating-point types.  Same
     precedence as `++'.

`!'
     Logical negation.  Defined on integral types.  Same precedence as
     `++'.

`~'
     Bitwise complement operator.  Defined on integral types.  Same
     precedence as `++'.

`., ->'
     Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member.  For
     convenience, GDB regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether
     to dereference a pointer based on the stored type information.
     Defined on `struct' and `union' data.

`.*, ->*'
     Dereferences of pointers to members.

`[]'
     Array indexing.  `A[I]' is defined as `*(A+I)'.  Same precedence
     as `->'.

`()'
     Function parameter list.  Same precedence as `->'.

`::'
     C++ scope resolution operator.  Defined on `struct', `union', and
     `class' types.

`::'
     Doubled colons also represent the GDB scope operator (*note
     Expressions: Expressions.).  Same precedence as `::', above.

   If an operator is redefined in the user code, GDB usually attempts
to invoke the redefined version instead of using the operator's
predefined meaning.

* Menu:

* C Constants::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: C Constants,  Next: C plus plus expressions,  Prev: C Operators,  Up: C

12.4.1.2 C and C++ constants
............................

GDB allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the following
ways:

   * Integer constants are a sequence of digits.  Octal constants are
     specified by a leading `0' (i.e. zero), and hexadecimal constants
     by a leading `0x' or `0X'.  Constants may also end with a letter
     `l', specifying that the constant should be treated as a `long'
     value.

   * Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a
     decimal point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally
     followed by an exponent.  An exponent is of the form:
     `e[[+]|-]NNN', where NNN is another sequence of digits.  The `+'
     is optional for positive exponents.  A floating-point constant may
     also end with a letter `f' or `F', specifying that the constant
     should be treated as being of the `float' (as opposed to the
     default `double') type; or with a letter `l' or `L', which
     specifies a `long double' constant.

   * Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
     integral equivalents.

   * Character constants are a single character surrounded by single
     quotes (`''), or a number--the ordinal value of the corresponding
     character (usually its ASCII value).  Within quotes, the single
     character may be represented by a letter or by "escape sequences",
     which are of the form `\NNN', where NNN is the octal representation
     of the character's ordinal value; or of the form `\X', where `X'
     is a predefined special character--for example, `\n' for newline.

   * String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
     by double quotes (`"').  Any valid character constant (as described
     above) may appear.  Double quotes within the string must be
     preceded by a backslash, so for instance `"a\"b'c"' is a string of
     five characters.

   * Pointer constants are an integral value.  You can also write
     pointers to constants using the C operator `&'.

   * Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces `{'
     and `}'; for example, `{1,2,3}' is a three-element array of
     integers, `{{1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}}' is a three-by-two array, and
     `{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"}' is a three-element array of pointers.

* Menu:

* C plus plus expressions::
* C Defaults::
* C Checks::

* Debugging C::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: C plus plus expressions,  Next: C Defaults,  Prev: C Constants,  Up: C

12.4.1.3 C++ expressions
........................

GDB expression handling can interpret most C++ expressions.

     _Warning:_ GDB can only debug C++ code if you use the proper
     compiler and the proper debug format.  Currently, GDB works best
     when debugging C++ code that is compiled with GCC 2.95.3 or with
     GCC 3.1 or newer, using the options `-gdwarf-2' or `-gstabs+'.
     DWARF 2 is preferred over stabs+.  Most configurations of GCC emit
     either DWARF 2 or stabs+ as their default debug format, so you
     usually don't need to specify a debug format explicitly.  Other
     compilers and/or debug formats are likely to work badly or not at
     all when using GDB to debug C++ code.

  1. Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like

          count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)

  2. While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame),
     your expressions have the same namespace available as the member
     function; that is, GDB allows implicit references to the class
     instance pointer `this' following the same rules as C++.

  3. You can call overloaded functions; GDB resolves the function call
     to the right definition, with some restrictions.  GDB does not
     perform overload resolution involving user-defined type
     conversions, calls to constructors, or instantiations of templates
     that do not exist in the program.  It also cannot handle ellipsis
     argument lists or default arguments.

     It does perform integral conversions and promotions, floating-point
     promotions, arithmetic conversions, pointer conversions,
     conversions of class objects to base classes, and standard
     conversions such as those of functions or arrays to pointers; it
     requires an exact match on the number of function arguments.

     Overload resolution is always performed, unless you have specified
     `set overload-resolution off'.  *Note GDB features for C++:
     Debugging C plus plus.

     You must specify `set overload-resolution off' in order to use an
     explicit function signature to call an overloaded function, as in
          p 'foo(char,int)'('x', 13)

     The GDB command-completion facility can simplify this; see *Note
     Command completion: Completion.

  4. GDB understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use
     them in expressions just as you do in C++ source--they are
     automatically dereferenced.

     In the parameter list shown when GDB displays a frame, the values
     of reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables);
     this avoids clutter, since references are often used for large
     structures.  The _address_ of a reference variable is always
     shown, unless you have specified `set print address off'.

  5. GDB supports the C++ name resolution operator `::'--your
     expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do.
     Since one scope may be defined in another, you can use `::'
     repeatedly if necessary, for example in an expression like
     `SCOPE1::SCOPE2::NAME'.  GDB also allows resolving name scope by
     reference to source files, in both C and C++ debugging (*note
     Program variables: Variables.).

   In addition, when used with HP's C++ compiler, GDB supports calling
virtual functions correctly, printing out virtual bases of objects,
calling functions in a base subobject, casting objects, and invoking
user-defined operators.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: C Defaults,  Next: C Checks,  Prev: C plus plus expressions,  Up: C

12.4.1.4 C and C++ defaults
...........................

If you allow GDB to set type and range checking automatically, they
both default to `off' whenever the working language changes to C or
C++.  This happens regardless of whether you or GDB selects the working
language.

   If you allow GDB to set the language automatically, it recognizes
source files whose names end with `.c', `.C', or `.cc', etc, and when
GDB enters code compiled from one of these files, it sets the working
language to C or C++.  *Note Having GDB infer the source language:
Automatically, for further details.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: C Checks,  Next: Debugging C,  Prev: C Defaults,  Up: C

12.4.1.5 C and C++ type and range checks
........................................

By default, when GDB parses C or C++ expressions, type checking is not
used.  However, if you turn type checking on, GDB considers two
variables type equivalent if:

   * The two variables are structured and have the same structure,
     union, or enumerated tag.

   * The two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
     declared equivalent through `typedef'.


   Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations.
Array indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a
pointer that is not itself an array.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Debugging C,  Next: Debugging C plus plus,  Prev: C Checks,  Up: C

12.4.1.6 GDB and C
..................

The `set print union' and `show print union' commands apply to the
`union' type.  When set to `on', any `union' that is inside a `struct'
or `class' is also printed.  Otherwise, it appears as `{...}'.

   The `@' operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
with pointers and a memory allocation function.  *Note Expressions:
Expressions.

* Menu:

* Debugging C plus plus::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Debugging C plus plus,  Prev: Debugging C,  Up: C

12.4.1.7 GDB features for C++
.............................

Some GDB commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
designed specifically for use with C++.  Here is a summary:

`breakpoint menus'
     When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
     GDB breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
     you want.  *Note Breakpoint menus: Breakpoint Menus.

`rbreak REGEX'
     Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for
     setting breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members
     of any special classes.  *Note Setting breakpoints: Set Breaks.

`catch throw'
`catch catch'
     Debug C++ exception handling using these commands.  *Note Setting
     catchpoints: Set Catchpoints.

`ptype TYPENAME'
     Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for
     type TYPENAME.  *Note Examining the Symbol Table: Symbols.

`set print demangle'
`show print demangle'
`set print asm-demangle'
`show print asm-demangle'
     Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
     displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
     *Note Print settings: Print Settings.

`set print object'
`show print object'
     Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of
     objects.  *Note Print settings: Print Settings.

`set print vtbl'
`show print vtbl'
     Control the format for printing virtual function tables.  *Note
     Print settings: Print Settings.  (The `vtbl' commands do not work
     on programs compiled with the HP ANSI C++ compiler (`aCC').)

`set overload-resolution on'
     Enable overload resolution for C++ expression evaluation.  The
     default is on.  For overloaded functions, GDB evaluates the
     arguments and searches for a function whose signature matches the
     argument types, using the standard C++ conversion rules (see *Note
     C++ expressions: C plus plus expressions, for details).  If it
     cannot find a match, it emits a message.

`set overload-resolution off'
     Disable overload resolution for C++ expression evaluation.  For
     overloaded functions that are not class member functions, GDB
     chooses the first function of the specified name that it finds in
     the symbol table, whether or not its arguments are of the correct
     type.  For overloaded functions that are class member functions,
     GDB searches for a function whose signature _exactly_ matches the
     argument types.

`show overload-resolution'
     Show the current setting of overload resolution.

`Overloaded symbol names'
     You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol,
     using the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in
     C++: type `SYMBOL(TYPES)' rather than just SYMBOL.  You can also
     use the GDB command-line word completion facilities to list the
     available choices, or to finish the type list for you.  *Note
     Command completion: Completion, for details on how to do this.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Objective-C,  Next: Fortran,  Prev: C,  Up: Supported languages

12.4.2 Objective-C
------------------

This section provides information about some commands and command
options that are useful for debugging Objective-C code.  See also *Note
info classes: Symbols, and *Note info selectors: Symbols, for a few
more commands specific to Objective-C support.

* Menu:

* Method Names in Commands::
* The Print Command with Objective-C::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Method Names in Commands,  Next: The Print Command with Objective-C,  Prev: Objective-C,  Up: Objective-C

12.4.2.1 Method Names in Commands
.................................

The following commands have been extended to accept Objective-C method
names as line specifications:

   * `clear'

   * `break'

   * `info line'

   * `jump'

   * `list'

   A fully qualified Objective-C method name is specified as

     -[CLASS METHODNAME]

   where the minus sign is used to indicate an instance method and a
plus sign (not shown) is used to indicate a class method.  The class
name CLASS and method name METHODNAME are enclosed in brackets, similar
to the way messages are specified in Objective-C source code.  For
example, to set a breakpoint at the `create' instance method of class
`Fruit' in the program currently being debugged, enter:

     break -[Fruit create]

   To list ten program lines around the `initialize' class method,
enter:

     list +[NSText initialize]

   In the current version of GDB, the plus or minus sign is required.
In future versions of GDB, the plus or minus sign will be optional, but
you can use it to narrow the search.  It is also possible to specify
just a method name:

     break create

   You must specify the complete method name, including any colons.  If
your program's source files contain more than one `create' method,
you'll be presented with a numbered list of classes that implement that
method.  Indicate your choice by number, or type `0' to exit if none
apply.

   As another example, to clear a breakpoint established at the
`makeKeyAndOrderFront:' method of the `NSWindow' class, enter:

     clear -[NSWindow makeKeyAndOrderFront:]

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: The Print Command with Objective-C,  Prev: Method Names in Commands,  Up: Objective-C

12.4.2.2 The Print Command With Objective-C
...........................................

The print command has also been extended to accept methods.  For
example:

     print -[OBJECT hash]

will tell GDB to send the `hash' message to OBJECT and print the
result.  Also, an additional command has been added, `print-object' or
`po' for short, which is meant to print the description of an object.
However, this command may only work with certain Objective-C libraries
that have a particular hook function, `_NSPrintForDebugger', defined.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Fortran,  Next: Pascal,  Prev: Objective-C,  Up: Supported languages

12.4.3 Fortran
--------------

GDB can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, but it currently
supports only the features of Fortran 77 language.

   Some Fortran compilers (GNU Fortran 77 and Fortran 95 compilers
among them) append an underscore to the names of variables and
functions.  When you debug programs compiled by those compilers, you
will need to refer to variables and functions with a trailing
underscore.

* Menu:

* Fortran Operators::           Fortran operators and expressions
* Fortran Defaults::            Default settings for Fortran
* Special Fortran commands::    Special GDB commands for Fortran

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Fortran Operators,  Next: Fortran Defaults,  Up: Fortran

12.4.3.1 Fortran operators and expressions
..........................................

Operators must be defined on values of specific types.  For instance,
`+' is defined on numbers, but not on characters or other non-
arithmetic types.  Operators are often defined on groups of types.

`**'
     The exponentiation operator. It raises the first operand to the
     power of the second one.

`:'
     The range operator.  Normally used in the form of array(low:high)
     to represent a section of array.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Fortran Defaults,  Next: Special Fortran commands,  Prev: Fortran Operators,  Up: Fortran

12.4.3.2 Fortran Defaults
.........................

Fortran symbols are usually case-insensitive, so GDB by default uses
case-insensitive matches for Fortran symbols.  You can change that with
the `set case-insensitive' command, see *Note Symbols::, for the
details.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Special Fortran commands,  Prev: Fortran Defaults,  Up: Fortran

12.4.3.3 Special Fortran commands
.................................

GDB had some commands to support Fortran specific feature, such as
common block displaying.

`info common [COMMON-NAME]'
     This command prints the values contained in the Fortran `COMMON'
     block whose name is COMMON-NAME.  With no argument, the names of
     all `COMMON' blocks visible at current program location are
     printed.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Pascal,  Next: Modula-2,  Prev: Fortran,  Up: Supported languages

12.4.4 Pascal
-------------

Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or
nested functions does not currently work.  GDB does not support
entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal
syntax.

   The Pascal-specific command `set print pascal_static-members'
controls whether static members of Pascal objects are displayed.  *Note
pascal_static-members: Print Settings.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Modula-2,  Next: Ada,  Prev: Pascal,  Up: Supported languages

12.4.5 Modula-2
---------------

The extensions made to GDB to support Modula-2 only support output from
the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being developed).  Other
Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and attempting to debug
executables produced by them is most likely to give an error as GDB
reads in the executable's symbol table.

* Menu:

* M2 Operators::                Built-in operators
* Built-In Func/Proc::          Built-in functions and procedures
* M2 Constants::                Modula-2 constants
* M2 Types::                    Modula-2 types
* M2 Defaults::                 Default settings for Modula-2
* Deviations::                  Deviations from standard Modula-2
* M2 Checks::                   Modula-2 type and range checks
* M2 Scope::                    The scope operators `::' and `.'
* GDB/M2::                      GDB and Modula-2

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M2 Operators,  Next: Built-In Func/Proc,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.1 Operators
..................

Operators must be defined on values of specific types.  For instance,
`+' is defined on numbers, but not on structures.  Operators are often
defined on groups of types.  For the purposes of Modula-2, the
following definitions hold:

   * _Integral types_ consist of `INTEGER', `CARDINAL', and their
     subranges.

   * _Character types_ consist of `CHAR' and its subranges.

   * _Floating-point types_ consist of `REAL'.

   * _Pointer types_ consist of anything declared as `POINTER TO TYPE'.

   * _Scalar types_ consist of all of the above.

   * _Set types_ consist of `SET' and `BITSET' types.

   * _Boolean types_ consist of `BOOLEAN'.

The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
increasing precedence:

`,'
     Function argument or array index separator.

`:='
     Assignment.  The value of VAR `:=' VALUE is VALUE.

`<, >'
     Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
     types.

`<=, >='
     Less than or equal to, greater than or equal to on integral,
     floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on set
     types.  Same precedence as `<'.

`=, <>, #'
     Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar
     types.  Same precedence as `<'.  In GDB scripts, only `<>' is
     available for inequality, since `#' conflicts with the script
     comment character.

`IN'
     Set membership.  Defined on set types and the types of their
     members.  Same precedence as `<'.

`OR'
     Boolean disjunction.  Defined on boolean types.

`AND, &'
     Boolean conjunction.  Defined on boolean types.

`@'
     The GDB "artificial array" operator (*note Expressions:
     Expressions.).

`+, -'
     Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or
     union and difference on set types.

`*'
     Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set
     intersection on set types.

`/'
     Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on
     set types.  Same precedence as `*'.

`DIV, MOD'
     Integer division and remainder.  Defined on integral types.  Same
     precedence as `*'.

`-'
     Negative. Defined on `INTEGER' and `REAL' data.

`^'
     Pointer dereferencing.  Defined on pointer types.

`NOT'
     Boolean negation.  Defined on boolean types.  Same precedence as
     `^'.

`.'
     `RECORD' field selector.  Defined on `RECORD' data.  Same
     precedence as `^'.

`[]'
     Array indexing.  Defined on `ARRAY' data.  Same precedence as `^'.

`()'
     Procedure argument list.  Defined on `PROCEDURE' objects.  Same
     precedence as `^'.

`::, .'
     GDB and Modula-2 scope operators.

     _Warning:_ Set expressions and their operations are not yet
     supported, so GDB treats the use of the operator `IN', or the use
     of operators `+', `-', `*', `/', `=', , `<>', `#', `<=', and `>='
     on sets as an error.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Built-In Func/Proc,  Next: M2 Constants,  Prev: M2 Operators,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.2 Built-in functions and procedures
..........................................

Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
In describing these, the following metavariables are used:

A
     represents an `ARRAY' variable.

C
     represents a `CHAR' constant or variable.

I
     represents a variable or constant of integral type.

M
     represents an identifier that belongs to a set.  Generally used in
     the same function with the metavariable S.  The type of S should
     be `SET OF MTYPE' (where MTYPE is the type of M).

N
     represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point
     type.

R
     represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.

T
     represents a type.

V
     represents a variable.

X
     represents a variable or constant of one of many types.  See the
     explanation of the function for details.

   All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described
below.

`ABS(N)'
     Returns the absolute value of N.

`CAP(C)'
     If C is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case equivalent,
     otherwise it returns its argument.

`CHR(I)'
     Returns the character whose ordinal value is I.

`DEC(V)'
     Decrements the value in the variable V by one.  Returns the new
     value.

`DEC(V,I)'
     Decrements the value in the variable V by I.  Returns the new
     value.

`EXCL(M,S)'
     Removes the element M from the set S.  Returns the new set.

`FLOAT(I)'
     Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer I.

`HIGH(A)'
     Returns the index of the last member of A.

`INC(V)'
     Increments the value in the variable V by one.  Returns the new
     value.

`INC(V,I)'
     Increments the value in the variable V by I.  Returns the new
     value.

`INCL(M,S)'
     Adds the element M to the set S if it is not already there.
     Returns the new set.

`MAX(T)'
     Returns the maximum value of the type T.

`MIN(T)'
     Returns the minimum value of the type T.

`ODD(I)'
     Returns boolean TRUE if I is an odd number.

`ORD(X)'
     Returns the ordinal value of its argument.  For example, the
     ordinal value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines
     supporting the ASCII character set).  X must be of an ordered
     type, which include integral, character and enumerated types.

`SIZE(X)'
     Returns the size of its argument.  X can be a variable or a type.

`TRUNC(R)'
     Returns the integral part of R.

`VAL(T,I)'
     Returns the member of the type T whose ordinal value is I.

     _Warning:_  Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
     GDB treats the use of procedures `INCL' and `EXCL' as an error.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M2 Constants,  Next: M2 Types,  Prev: Built-In Func/Proc,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.3 Constants
..................

GDB allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
ways:

   * Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits.  When used in an
     expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with
     the rest of the expression.  Hexadecimal integers are specified by
     a trailing `H', and octal integers by a trailing `B'.

   * Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed
     by a decimal point and another sequence of digits.  An optional
     exponent can then be specified, in the form `E[+|-]NNN', where
     `[+|-]NNN' is the desired exponent.  All of the digits of the
     floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10) digits.

   * Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a
     pair of like quotes, either single (`'') or double (`"').  They may
     also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value,
     usually) followed by a `C'.

   * String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
     pair of like quotes, either single (`'') or double (`"').  Escape
     sequences in the style of C are also allowed.  *Note C and C++
     constants: C Constants, for a brief explanation of escape
     sequences.

   * Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.

   * Boolean constants consist of the identifiers `TRUE' and `FALSE'.

   * Pointer constants consist of integral values only.

   * Set constants are not yet supported.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M2 Types,  Next: M2 Defaults,  Prev: M2 Constants,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.4 Modula-2 Types
.......................

Currently GDB can print the following data types in Modula-2 syntax:
array types, record types, set types, pointer types, procedure types,
enumerated types, subrange types and base types.  You can also print
the contents of variables declared using these type.  This section
gives a number of simple source code examples together with sample GDB
sessions.

   The first example contains the following section of code:

     VAR
        s: SET OF CHAR ;
        r: [20..40] ;

and you can request GDB to interrogate the type and value of `r' and
`s'.

     (gdb) print s
     {'A'..'C', 'Z'}
     (gdb) ptype s
     SET OF CHAR
     (gdb) print r
     21
     (gdb) ptype r
     [20..40]

Likewise if your source code declares `s' as:

     VAR
        s: SET ['A'..'Z'] ;

then you may query the type of `s' by:

     (gdb) ptype s
     type = SET ['A'..'Z']

Note that at present you cannot interactively manipulate set
expressions using the debugger.

   The following example shows how you might declare an array in
Modula-2 and how you can interact with GDB to print its type and
contents:

     VAR
        s: ARRAY [-10..10] OF CHAR ;

     (gdb) ptype s
     ARRAY [-10..10] OF CHAR

   Note that the array handling is not yet complete and although the
type is printed correctly, expression handling still assumes that all
arrays have a lower bound of zero and not `-10' as in the example
above.  Unbounded arrays are also not yet recognized in GDB.

   Here are some more type related Modula-2 examples:

     TYPE
        colour = (blue, red, yellow, green) ;
        t = [blue..yellow] ;
     VAR
        s: t ;
     BEGIN
        s := blue ;

The GDB interaction shows how you can query the data type and value of
a variable.

     (gdb) print s
     $1 = blue
     (gdb) ptype t
     type = [blue..yellow]

In this example a Modula-2 array is declared and its contents
displayed.  Observe that the contents are written in the same way as
their `C' counterparts.

     VAR
        s: ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL ;
     BEGIN
        s[1] := 1 ;

     (gdb) print s
     $1 = {1, 0, 0, 0, 0}
     (gdb) ptype s
     type = ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL

   The Modula-2 language interface to GDB also understands pointer
types as shown in this example:

     VAR
        s: POINTER TO ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL ;
     BEGIN
        NEW(s) ;
        s^[1] := 1 ;

and you can request that GDB describes the type of `s'.

     (gdb) ptype s
     type = POINTER TO ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL

   GDB handles compound types as we can see in this example.  Here we
combine array types, record types, pointer types and subrange types:

     TYPE
        foo = RECORD
                 f1: CARDINAL ;
                 f2: CHAR ;
                 f3: myarray ;
              END ;

        myarray = ARRAY myrange OF CARDINAL ;
        myrange = [-2..2] ;
     VAR
        s: POINTER TO ARRAY myrange OF foo ;

and you can ask GDB to describe the type of `s' as shown below.

     (gdb) ptype s
     type = POINTER TO ARRAY [-2..2] OF foo = RECORD
         f1 : CARDINAL;
         f2 : CHAR;
         f3 : ARRAY [-2..2] OF CARDINAL;
     END

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M2 Defaults,  Next: Deviations,  Prev: M2 Types,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.5 Modula-2 defaults
..........................

If type and range checking are set automatically by GDB, they both
default to `on' whenever the working language changes to Modula-2.
This happens regardless of whether you or GDB selected the working
language.

   If you allow GDB to set the language automatically, then entering
code compiled from a file whose name ends with `.mod' sets the working
language to Modula-2.  *Note Having GDB set the language automatically:
Automatically, for further details.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Deviations,  Next: M2 Checks,  Prev: M2 Defaults,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.6 Deviations from standard Modula-2
..........................................

A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:

   * Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
     integers.  This allows you to modify pointer variables during
     debugging.  (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in
     a pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
     through direct assignment to another pointer variable or
     expression that returned a pointer.)

   * C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to
     represent non-printable characters.  GDB prints out strings with
     these escape sequences embedded.  Single non-printable characters
     are printed using the `CHR(NNN)' format.

   * The assignment operator (`:=') returns the value of its right-hand
     argument.

   * All built-in procedures both modify _and_ return their argument.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M2 Checks,  Next: M2 Scope,  Prev: Deviations,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.7 Modula-2 type and range checks
.......................................

     _Warning:_ in this release, GDB does not yet perform type or range
     checking.

   GDB considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:

   * They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a `TYPE
     T1 = T2' statement

   * They have been declared on the same line.  (Note:  This is true of
     the GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other
     compilers.)

   As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
whose types are not equivalent is an error.

   Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment,
array index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M2 Scope,  Next: GDB/M2,  Prev: M2 Checks,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.8 The scope operators `::' and `.'
.........................................

There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
(`.') and the GDB scope operator (`::').  The two have similar syntax:


     MODULE . ID
     SCOPE :: ID

where SCOPE is the name of a module or a procedure, MODULE the name of
a module, and ID is any declared identifier within your program, except
another module.

   Using the `::' operator makes GDB search the scope specified by
SCOPE for the identifier ID.  If it is not found in the specified
scope, then GDB searches all scopes enclosing the one specified by
SCOPE.

   Using the `.' operator makes GDB search the current scope for the
identifier specified by ID that was imported from the definition module
specified by MODULE.  With this operator, it is an error if the
identifier ID was not imported from definition module MODULE, or if ID
is not an identifier in MODULE.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/M2,  Prev: M2 Scope,  Up: Modula-2

12.4.5.9 GDB and Modula-2
.........................

Some GDB commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
Five subcommands of `set print' and `show print' apply specifically to
C and C++: `vtbl', `demangle', `asm-demangle', `object', and `union'.
The first four apply to C++, and the last to the C `union' type, which
has no direct analogue in Modula-2.

   The `@' operator (*note Expressions: Expressions.), while available
with any language, is not useful with Modula-2.  Its intent is to aid
the debugging of "dynamic arrays", which cannot be created in Modula-2
as they can in C or C++.  However, because an address can be specified
by an integral constant, the construct `{TYPE}ADREXP' is still useful.

   In GDB scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator `#' is interpreted
as the beginning of a comment.  Use `<>' instead.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Ada,  Prev: Modula-2,  Up: Supported languages

12.4.6 Ada
----------

The extensions made to GDB for Ada only support output from the GNU Ada
(GNAT) compiler.  Other Ada compilers are not currently supported, and
attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely to be
difficult.

* Menu:

* Ada Mode Intro::              General remarks on the Ada syntax
                                   and semantics supported by Ada mode
                                   in GDB.
* Omissions from Ada::          Restrictions on the Ada expression syntax.
* Additions to Ada::            Extensions of the Ada expression syntax.
* Stopping Before Main Program:: Debugging the program during elaboration.
* Ada Glitches::                Known peculiarities of Ada mode.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Ada Mode Intro,  Next: Omissions from Ada,  Up: Ada

12.4.6.1 Introduction
.....................

The Ada mode of GDB supports a fairly large subset of Ada expression
syntax, with some extensions.  The philosophy behind the design of this
subset is

   * That GDB should provide basic literals and access to operations for
     arithmetic, dereferencing, field selection, indexing, and
     subprogram calls, leaving more sophisticated computations to
     subprograms written into the program (which therefore may be
     called from GDB).

   * That type safety and strict adherence to Ada language restrictions
     are not particularly important to the GDB user.

   * That brevity is important to the GDB user.

   Thus, for brevity, the debugger acts as if there were implicit
`with' and `use' clauses in effect for all user-written packages,
making it unnecessary to fully qualify most names with their packages,
regardless of context.  Where this causes ambiguity, GDB asks the
user's intent.

   The debugger will start in Ada mode if it detects an Ada main
program.  As for other languages, it will enter Ada mode when stopped
in a program that was translated from an Ada source file.

   While in Ada mode, you may use `-' for comments.  This is useful
mostly for documenting command files.  The standard GDB comment (`#')
still works at the beginning of a line in Ada mode, but not in the
middle (to allow based literals).

   The debugger supports limited overloading.  Given a subprogram call
in which the function symbol has multiple definitions, it will use the
number of actual parameters and some information about their types to
attempt to narrow the set of definitions.  It also makes very limited
use of context, preferring procedures to functions in the context of
the `call' command, and functions to procedures elsewhere.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Omissions from Ada,  Next: Additions to Ada,  Prev: Ada Mode Intro,  Up: Ada

12.4.6.2 Omissions from Ada
...........................

Here are the notable omissions from the subset:

   * Only a subset of the attributes are supported:

        - 'First, 'Last, and 'Length  on array objects (not on types
          and subtypes).

        - 'Min and 'Max.

        - 'Pos and 'Val.

        - 'Tag.

        - 'Range on array objects (not subtypes), but only as the right
          operand of the membership (`in') operator.

        - 'Access, 'Unchecked_Access, and 'Unrestricted_Access (a GNAT
          extension).

        - 'Address.

   * The names in `Characters.Latin_1' are not available and
     concatenation is not implemented.  Thus, escape characters in
     strings are not currently available.

   * Equality tests (`=' and `/=') on arrays test for bitwise equality
     of representations.  They will generally work correctly for
     strings and arrays whose elements have integer or enumeration
     types.  They may not work correctly for arrays whose element types
     have user-defined equality, for arrays of real values (in
     particular, IEEE-conformant floating point, because of negative
     zeroes and NaNs), and for arrays whose elements contain unused
     bits with indeterminate values.

   * The other component-by-component array operations (`and', `or',
     `xor', `not', and relational tests other than equality) are not
     implemented.

   * There is limited support for array and record aggregates.  They are
     permitted only on the right sides of assignments, as in these
     examples:

          set An_Array := (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
          set An_Array := (1, others => 0)
          set An_Array := (0|4 => 1, 1..3 => 2, 5 => 6)
          set A_2D_Array := ((1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 6), (7, 8, 9))
          set A_Record := (1, "Peter", True);
          set A_Record := (Name => "Peter", Id => 1, Alive => True)

     Changing a discriminant's value by assigning an aggregate has an
     undefined effect if that discriminant is used within the record.
     However, you can first modify discriminants by directly assigning
     to them (which normally would not be allowed in Ada), and then
     performing an aggregate assignment.  For example, given a variable
     `A_Rec' declared to have a type such as:

          type Rec (Len : Small_Integer := 0) is record
              Id : Integer;
              Vals : IntArray (1 .. Len);
          end record;

     you can assign a value with a different size of `Vals' with two
     assignments:

          set A_Rec.Len := 4
          set A_Rec := (Id => 42, Vals => (1, 2, 3, 4))

     As this example also illustrates, GDB is very loose about the usual
     rules concerning aggregates.  You may leave out some of the
     components of an array or record aggregate (such as the `Len'
     component in the assignment to `A_Rec' above); they will retain
     their original values upon assignment.  You may freely use dynamic
     values as indices in component associations.  You may even use
     overlapping or redundant component associations, although which
     component values are assigned in such cases is not defined.

   * Calls to dispatching subprograms are not implemented.

   * The overloading algorithm is much more limited (i.e., less
     selective) than that of real Ada.  It makes only limited use of
     the context in which a subexpression appears to resolve its
     meaning, and it is much looser in its rules for allowing type
     matches.  As a result, some function calls will be ambiguous, and
     the user will be asked to choose the proper resolution.

   * The `new' operator is not implemented.

   * Entry calls are not implemented.

   * Aside from printing, arithmetic operations on the native VAX
     floating-point formats are not supported.

   * It is not possible to slice a packed array.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Additions to Ada,  Next: Stopping Before Main Program,  Prev: Omissions from Ada,  Up: Ada

12.4.6.3 Additions to Ada
.........................

As it does for other languages, GDB makes certain generic extensions to
Ada (*note Expressions::):

   * If the expression E is a variable residing in memory (typically a
     local variable or array element) and N is a positive integer, then
     `E@N' displays the values of E and the N-1 adjacent variables
     following it in memory as an array.  In Ada, this operator is
     generally not necessary, since its prime use is in displaying
     parts of an array, and slicing will usually do this in Ada.
     However, there are occasional uses when debugging programs in
     which certain debugging information has been optimized away.

   * `B::VAR' means "the variable named VAR that appears in function or
     file B."  When B is a file name, you must typically surround it in
     single quotes.

   * The expression `{TYPE} ADDR' means "the variable of type TYPE that
     appears at address ADDR."

   * A name starting with `$' is a convenience variable (*note
     Convenience Vars::) or a machine register (*note Registers::).

   In addition, GDB provides a few other shortcuts and outright
additions specific to Ada:

   * The assignment statement is allowed as an expression, returning
     its right-hand operand as its value.  Thus, you may enter

          set x := y + 3
          print A(tmp := y + 1)

   * The semicolon is allowed as an "operator,"  returning as its value
     the value of its right-hand operand.  This allows, for example,
     complex conditional breaks:

          break f
          condition 1 (report(i); k += 1; A(k) > 100)

   * Rather than use catenation and symbolic character names to
     introduce special characters into strings, one may instead use a
     special bracket notation, which is also used to print strings.  A
     sequence of characters of the form `["XX"]' within a string or
     character literal denotes the (single) character whose numeric
     encoding is XX in hexadecimal.  The sequence of characters `["""]'
     also denotes a single quotation mark in strings.   For example,
             "One line.["0a"]Next line.["0a"]"
     contains an ASCII newline character (`Ada.Characters.Latin_1.LF')
     after each period.

   * The subtype used as a prefix for the attributes 'Pos, 'Min, and
     'Max is optional (and is ignored in any case).  For example, it is
     valid to write

          print 'max(x, y)

   * When printing arrays, GDB uses positional notation when the array
     has a lower bound of 1, and uses a modified named notation
     otherwise.  For example, a one-dimensional array of three integers
     with a lower bound of 3 might print as

          (3 => 10, 17, 1)

     That is, in contrast to valid Ada, only the first component has a
     `=>' clause.

   * You may abbreviate attributes in expressions with any unique,
     multi-character subsequence of their names (an exact match gets
     preference).  For example, you may use a'len, a'gth, or a'lh in
     place of  a'length.

   * Since Ada is case-insensitive, the debugger normally maps
     identifiers you type to lower case.  The GNAT compiler uses
     upper-case characters for some of its internal identifiers, which
     are normally of no interest to users.  For the rare occasions when
     you actually have to look at them, enclose them in angle brackets
     to avoid the lower-case mapping.  For example,
          gdb print <JMPBUF_SAVE>[0]

   * Printing an object of class-wide type or dereferencing an
     access-to-class-wide value will display all the components of the
     object's specific type (as indicated by its run-time tag).
     Likewise, component selection on such a value will operate on the
     specific type of the object.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Stopping Before Main Program,  Next: Ada Glitches,  Prev: Additions to Ada,  Up: Ada

12.4.6.4 Stopping at the Very Beginning
.......................................

It is sometimes necessary to debug the program during elaboration, and
before reaching the main procedure.  As defined in the Ada Reference
Manual, the elaboration code is invoked from a procedure called
`adainit'.  To run your program up to the beginning of elaboration,
simply use the following two commands: `tbreak adainit' and `run'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Ada Glitches,  Prev: Stopping Before Main Program,  Up: Ada

12.4.6.5 Known Peculiarities of Ada Mode
........................................

Besides the omissions listed previously (*note Omissions from Ada::),
we know of several problems with and limitations of Ada mode in GDB,
some of which will be fixed with planned future releases of the debugger
and the GNU Ada compiler.

   * Currently, the debugger has insufficient information to determine
     whether certain pointers represent pointers to objects or the
     objects themselves.  Thus, the user may have to tack an extra
     `.all' after an expression to get it printed properly.

   * Static constants that the compiler chooses not to materialize as
     objects in storage are invisible to the debugger.

   * Named parameter associations in function argument lists are
     ignored (the argument lists are treated as positional).

   * Many useful library packages are currently invisible to the
     debugger.

   * Fixed-point arithmetic, conversions, input, and output is carried
     out using floating-point arithmetic, and may give results that
     only approximate those on the host machine.

   * The type of the 'Address attribute may not be `System.Address'.

   * The GNAT compiler never generates the prefix `Standard' for any of
     the standard symbols defined by the Ada language.  GDB knows about
     this: it will strip the prefix from names when you use it, and
     will never look for a name you have so qualified among local
     symbols, nor match against symbols in other packages or
     subprograms.  If you have defined entities anywhere in your
     program other than parameters and local variables whose simple
     names match names in `Standard', GNAT's lack of qualification here
     can cause confusion.  When this happens, you can usually resolve
     the confusion by qualifying the problematic names with package
     `Standard' explicitly.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Unsupported languages,  Prev: Supported languages,  Up: Languages

12.5 Unsupported languages
==========================

In addition to the other fully-supported programming languages, GDB
also provides a pseudo-language, called `minimal'.  It does not
represent a real programming language, but provides a set of
capabilities close to what the C or assembly languages provide.  This
should allow most simple operations to be performed while debugging an
application that uses a language currently not supported by GDB.

   If the language is set to `auto', GDB will automatically select this
language if the current frame corresponds to an unsupported language.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Altering,  Prev: Languages,  Up: Top

13 Examining the Symbol Table
*****************************

The commands described in this chapter allow you to inquire about the
symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
program.  This information is inherent in the text of your program and
does not change as your program executes.  GDB finds it in your
program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started GDB
(*note Choosing files: File Options.), or by one of the file-management
commands (*note Commands to specify files: Files.).

   Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
characters, which GDB ordinarily treats as word delimiters.  The most
frequent case is in referring to static variables in other source files
(*note Program variables: Variables.).  File names are recorded in
object files as debugging symbols, but GDB would ordinarily parse a
typical file name, like `foo.c', as the three words `foo' `.' `c'.  To
allow GDB to recognize `foo.c' as a single symbol, enclose it in single
quotes; for example,

     p 'foo.c'::x

looks up the value of `x' in the scope of the file `foo.c'.

`set case-sensitive on'
`set case-sensitive off'
`set case-sensitive auto'
     Normally, when GDB looks up symbols, it matches their names with
     case sensitivity determined by the current source language.
     Occasionally, you may wish to control that.  The command `set
     case-sensitive' lets you do that by specifying `on' for
     case-sensitive matches or `off' for case-insensitive ones.  If you
     specify `auto', case sensitivity is reset to the default suitable
     for the source language.  The default is case-sensitive matches
     for all languages except for Fortran, for which the default is
     case-insensitive matches.

`show case-sensitive'
     This command shows the current setting of case sensitivity for
     symbols lookups.

`info address SYMBOL'
     Describe where the data for SYMBOL is stored.  For a register
     variable, this says which register it is kept in.  For a
     non-register local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at
     which the variable is always stored.

     Note the contrast with `print &SYMBOL', which does not work at all
     for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints the
     exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.

`info symbol ADDR'
     Print the name of a symbol which is stored at the address ADDR.
     If no symbol is stored exactly at ADDR, GDB prints the nearest
     symbol and an offset from it:

          (gdb) info symbol 0x54320
          _initialize_vx + 396 in section .text

     This is the opposite of the `info address' command.  You can use
     it to find out the name of a variable or a function given its
     address.

`whatis [ARG]'
     Print the data type of ARG, which can be either an expression or a
     data type.  With no argument, print the data type of `$', the last
     value in the value history.  If ARG is an expression, it is not
     actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
     assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.  If
     ARG is a type name, it may be the name of a type or typedef, or
     for C code it may have the form `class CLASS-NAME', `struct
     STRUCT-TAG', `union UNION-TAG' or `enum ENUM-TAG'.  *Note
     Expressions: Expressions.

`ptype [ARG]'
     `ptype' accepts the same arguments as `whatis', but prints a
     detailed description of the type, instead of just the name of the
     type.  *Note Expressions: Expressions.

     For example, for this variable declaration:

          struct complex {double real; double imag;} v;

     the two commands give this output:

          (gdb) whatis v
          type = struct complex
          (gdb) ptype v
          type = struct complex {
              double real;
              double imag;
          }

     As with `whatis', using `ptype' without an argument refers to the
     type of `$', the last value in the value history.

     Sometimes, programs use opaque data types or incomplete
     specifications of complex data structure.  If the debug
     information included in the program does not allow GDB to display
     a full declaration of the data type, it will say `<incomplete
     type>'.  For example, given these declarations:

              struct foo;
              struct foo *fooptr;

     but no definition for `struct foo' itself, GDB will say:

            (gdb) ptype foo
            $1 = <incomplete type>

     "Incomplete type" is C terminology for data types that are not
     completely specified.

`info types REGEXP'
`info types'
     Print a brief description of all types whose names match the
     regular expression REGEXP (or all types in your program, if you
     supply no argument).  Each complete typename is matched as though
     it were a complete line; thus, `i type value' gives information on
     all types in your program whose names include the string `value',
     but `i type ^value$' gives information only on types whose complete
     name is `value'.

     This command differs from `ptype' in two ways: first, like
     `whatis', it does not print a detailed description; second, it
     lists all source files where a type is defined.

`info scope LOCATION'
     List all the variables local to a particular scope.  This command
     accepts a LOCATION argument--a function name, a source line, or an
     address preceded by a `*', and prints all the variables local to
     the scope defined by that location.  For example:

          (gdb) info scope command_line_handler
          Scope for command_line_handler:
          Symbol rl is an argument at stack/frame offset 8, length 4.
          Symbol linebuffer is in static storage at address 0x150a18, length 4.
          Symbol linelength is in static storage at address 0x150a1c, length 4.
          Symbol p is a local variable in register $esi, length 4.
          Symbol p1 is a local variable in register $ebx, length 4.
          Symbol nline is a local variable in register $edx, length 4.
          Symbol repeat is a local variable at frame offset -8, length 4.

     This command is especially useful for determining what data to
     collect during a "trace experiment", see *Note collect: Tracepoint
     Actions.

`info source'
     Show information about the current source file--that is, the
     source file for the function containing the current point of
     execution:
        * the name of the source file, and the directory containing it,

        * the directory it was compiled in,

        * its length, in lines,

        * which programming language it is written in,

        * whether the executable includes debugging information for
          that file, and if so, what format the information is in
          (e.g., STABS, Dwarf 2, etc.), and

        * whether the debugging information includes information about
          preprocessor macros.

`info sources'
     Print the names of all source files in your program for which
     there is debugging information, organized into two lists: files
     whose symbols have already been read, and files whose symbols will
     be read when needed.

`info functions'
     Print the names and data types of all defined functions.

`info functions REGEXP'
     Print the names and data types of all defined functions whose
     names contain a match for regular expression REGEXP.  Thus, `info
     fun step' finds all functions whose names include `step'; `info
     fun ^step' finds those whose names start with `step'.  If a
     function name contains characters that conflict with the regular
     expression language (e.g.  `operator*()'), they may be quoted with
     a backslash.

`info variables'
     Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
     outside of functions (i.e. excluding local variables).

`info variables REGEXP'
     Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
     variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
     REGEXP.

`info classes'
`info classes REGEXP'
     Display all Objective-C classes in your program, or (with the
     REGEXP argument) all those matching a particular regular
     expression.

`info selectors'
`info selectors REGEXP'
     Display all Objective-C selectors in your program, or (with the
     REGEXP argument) all those matching a particular regular
     expression.

     Some systems allow individual object files that make up your
     program to be replaced without stopping and restarting your
     program.  For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a
     defective object file and keep on running.  If you are running on
     one of these systems, you can allow GDB to reload the symbols for
     automatically relinked modules:

    `set symbol-reloading on'
          Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file
          when an object file with a particular name is seen again.

    `set symbol-reloading off'
          Do not replace symbol definitions when encountering object
          files of the same name more than once.  This is the default
          state; if you are not running on a system that permits
          automatic relinking of modules, you should leave
          `symbol-reloading' off, since otherwise GDB may discard
          symbols when linking large programs, that may contain several
          modules (from different directories or libraries) with the
          same name.

    `show symbol-reloading'
          Show the current `on' or `off' setting.

`set opaque-type-resolution on'
     Tell GDB to resolve opaque types.  An opaque type is a type
     declared as a pointer to a `struct', `class', or `union'--for
     example, `struct MyType *'--that is used in one source file
     although the full declaration of `struct MyType' is in another
     source file.  The default is on.

     A change in the setting of this subcommand will not take effect
     until the next time symbols for a file are loaded.

`set opaque-type-resolution off'
     Tell GDB not to resolve opaque types.  In this case, the type is
     printed as follows:
          {<no data fields>}

`show opaque-type-resolution'
     Show whether opaque types are resolved or not.

`maint print symbols FILENAME'
`maint print psymbols FILENAME'
`maint print msymbols FILENAME'
     Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file FILENAME.
     These commands are used to debug the GDB symbol-reading code.  Only
     symbols with debugging data are included.  If you use `maint print
     symbols', GDB includes all the symbols for which it has already
     collected full details: that is, FILENAME reflects symbols for
     only those files whose symbols GDB has read.  You can use the
     command `info sources' to find out which files these are.  If you
     use `maint print psymbols' instead, the dump shows information
     about symbols that GDB only knows partially--that is, symbols
     defined in files that GDB has skimmed, but not yet read
     completely.  Finally, `maint print msymbols' dumps just the
     minimal symbol information required for each object file from
     which GDB has read some symbols.  *Note Commands to specify files:
     Files, for a discussion of how GDB reads symbols (in the
     description of `symbol-file').

`maint info symtabs [ REGEXP ]'
`maint info psymtabs [ REGEXP ]'
     List the `struct symtab' or `struct partial_symtab' structures
     whose names match REGEXP.  If REGEXP is not given, list them all.
     The output includes expressions which you can copy into a GDB
     debugging this one to examine a particular structure in more
     detail.  For example:

          (gdb) maint info psymtabs dwarf2read
          { objfile /home/gnu/build/gdb/gdb
            ((struct objfile *) 0x82e69d0)
            { psymtab /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c
              ((struct partial_symtab *) 0x8474b10)
              readin no
              fullname (null)
              text addresses 0x814d3c8 -- 0x8158074
              globals (* (struct partial_symbol **) 0x8507a08 @ 9)
              statics (* (struct partial_symbol **) 0x40e95b78 @ 2882)
              dependencies (none)
            }
          }
          (gdb) maint info symtabs
          (gdb)
     We see that there is one partial symbol table whose filename
     contains the string `dwarf2read', belonging to the `gdb'
     executable; and we see that GDB has not read in any symtabs yet at
     all.  If we set a breakpoint on a function, that will cause GDB to
     read the symtab for the compilation unit containing that function:

          (gdb) break dwarf2_psymtab_to_symtab
          Breakpoint 1 at 0x814e5da: file /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c,
          line 1574.
          (gdb) maint info symtabs
          { objfile /home/gnu/build/gdb/gdb
            ((struct objfile *) 0x82e69d0)
            { symtab /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c
              ((struct symtab *) 0x86c1f38)
              dirname (null)
              fullname (null)
              blockvector ((struct blockvector *) 0x86c1bd0) (primary)
              debugformat DWARF 2
            }
          }
          (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Altering,  Next: GDB Files,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Top

14 Altering Execution
*********************

Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want
to find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would
lead to correct results in the rest of the run.  You can find the
answer by experiment, using the GDB features for altering execution of
the program.

   For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
locations, give your program a signal, restart it at a different
address, or even return prematurely from a function.

* Menu:

* Assignment::                  Assignment to variables
* Jumping::                     Continuing at a different address
* Signaling::                   Giving your program a signal
* Returning::                   Returning from a function
* Calling::                     Calling your program's functions
* Patching::                    Patching your program

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Assignment,  Next: Jumping,  Up: Altering

14.1 Assignment to variables
============================

To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
*Note Expressions: Expressions.  For example,

     print x=4

stores the value 4 into the variable `x', and then prints the value of
the assignment expression (which is 4).  *Note Using GDB with Different
Languages: Languages, for more information on operators in supported
languages.

   If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use
the `set' command instead of the `print' command.  `set' is really the
same as `print' except that the expression's value is not printed and
is not put in the value history (*note Value history: Value History.).
The expression is evaluated only for its effects.

   If the beginning of the argument string of the `set' command appears
identical to a `set' subcommand, use the `set variable' command instead
of just `set'.  This command is identical to `set' except for its lack
of subcommands.  For example, if your program has a variable `width',
you get an error if you try to set a new value with just `set
width=13', because GDB has the command `set width':

     (gdb) whatis width
     type = double
     (gdb) p width
     $4 = 13
     (gdb) set width=47
     Invalid syntax in expression.

The invalid expression, of course, is `=47'.  In order to actually set
the program's variable `width', use

     (gdb) set var width=47

   Because the `set' command has many subcommands that can conflict
with the names of program variables, it is a good idea to use the `set
variable' command instead of just `set'.  For example, if your program
has a variable `g', you run into problems if you try to set a new value
with just `set g=4', because GDB has the command `set gnutarget',
abbreviated `set g':

     (gdb) whatis g
     type = double
     (gdb) p g
     $1 = 1
     (gdb) set g=4
     (gdb) p g
     $2 = 1
     (gdb) r
     The program being debugged has been started already.
     Start it from the beginning? (y or n) y
     Starting program: /home/smith/cc_progs/a.out
     "/home/smith/cc_progs/a.out": can't open to read symbols:
                                      Invalid bfd target.
     (gdb) show g
     The current BFD target is "=4".

The program variable `g' did not change, and you silently set the
`gnutarget' to an invalid value.  In order to set the variable `g', use

     (gdb) set var g=4

   GDB allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
same length or shorter.

   To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the `{...}'
construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
(*note Expressions: Expressions.).  For example, `{int}0x83040' refers
to memory location `0x83040' as an integer (which implies a certain size
and representation in memory), and

     set {int}0x83040 = 4

stores the value 4 into that memory location.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Jumping,  Next: Signaling,  Prev: Assignment,  Up: Altering

14.2 Continuing at a different address
======================================

Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
it stopped, with the `continue' command.  You can instead continue at
an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:

`jump LINESPEC'
     Resume execution at line LINESPEC.  Execution stops again
     immediately if there is a breakpoint there.  *Note Printing source
     lines: List, for a description of the different forms of LINESPEC.
     It is common practice to use the `tbreak' command in conjunction
     with `jump'.  *Note Setting breakpoints: Set Breaks.

     The `jump' command does not change the current stack frame, or the
     stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
     register other than the program counter.  If line LINESPEC is in a
     different function from the one currently executing, the results
     may be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of
     arguments or of local variables.  For this reason, the `jump'
     command requests confirmation if the specified line is not in the
     function currently executing.  However, even bizarre results are
     predictable if you are well acquainted with the machine-language
     code of your program.

`jump *ADDRESS'
     Resume execution at the instruction at address ADDRESS.

   On many systems, you can get much the same effect as the `jump'
command by storing a new value into the register `$pc'.  The difference
is that this does not start your program running; it only changes the
address of where it _will_ run when you continue.  For example,

     set $pc = 0x485

makes the next `continue' command or stepping command execute at
address `0x485', rather than at the address where your program stopped.
*Note Continuing and stepping: Continuing and Stepping.

   The most common occasion to use the `jump' command is to back
up--perhaps with more breakpoints set--over a portion of a program that
has already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Signaling,  Next: Returning,  Prev: Jumping,  Up: Altering

14.3 Giving your program a signal
=================================

`signal SIGNAL'
     Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give
     it the signal SIGNAL.  SIGNAL can be the name or the number of a
     signal.  For example, on many systems `signal 2' and `signal
     SIGINT' are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.

     Alternatively, if SIGNAL is zero, continue execution without
     giving a signal.  This is useful when your program stopped on
     account of a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed
     with the `continue' command; `signal 0' causes it to resume
     without a signal.

     `signal' does not repeat when you press <RET> a second time after
     executing the command.

   Invoking the `signal' command is not the same as invoking the `kill'
utility from the shell.  Sending a signal with `kill' causes GDB to
decide what to do with the signal depending on the signal handling
tables (*note Signals::).  The `signal' command passes the signal
directly to your program.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Returning,  Next: Calling,  Prev: Signaling,  Up: Altering

14.4 Returning from a function
==============================

`return'
`return EXPRESSION'
     You can cancel execution of a function call with the `return'
     command.  If you give an EXPRESSION argument, its value is used as
     the function's return value.

   When you use `return', GDB discards the selected stack frame (and
all frames within it).  You can think of this as making the discarded
frame return prematurely.  If you wish to specify a value to be
returned, give that value as the argument to `return'.

   This pops the selected stack frame (*note Selecting a frame:
Selection.), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as
the innermost remaining frame.  That frame becomes selected.  The
specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values of
functions.

   The `return' command does not resume execution; it leaves the
program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
returned.  In contrast, the `finish' command (*note Continuing and
stepping: Continuing and Stepping.) resumes execution until the
selected stack frame returns naturally.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Calling,  Next: Patching,  Prev: Returning,  Up: Altering

14.5 Calling program functions
==============================

`print EXPR'
     Evaluate the expression EXPR and display the resuling value.  EXPR
     may include calls to functions in the program being debugged.

`call EXPR'
     Evaluate the expression EXPR without displaying `void' returned
     values.

     You can use this variant of the `print' command if you want to
     execute a function from your program that does not return anything
     (a.k.a. "a void function"), but without cluttering the output with
     `void' returned values that GDB will otherwise print.  If the
     result is not void, it is printed and saved in the value history.

   It is possible for the function you call via the `print' or `call'
command to generate a signal (e.g., if there's a bug in the function,
or if you passed it incorrect arguments).  What happens in that case is
controlled by the `set unwindonsignal' command.

`set unwindonsignal'
     Set unwinding of the stack if a signal is received while in a
     function that GDB called in the program being debugged.  If set to
     on, GDB unwinds the stack it created for the call and restores the
     context to what it was before the call.  If set to off (the
     default), GDB stops in the frame where the signal was received.

`show unwindonsignal'
     Show the current setting of stack unwinding in the functions
     called by GDB.

   Sometimes, a function you wish to call is actually a "weak alias"
for another function.  In such case, GDB might not pick up the type
information, including the types of the function arguments, which
causes GDB to call the inferior function incorrectly.  As a result, the
called function will function erroneously and may even crash.  A
solution to that is to use the name of the aliased function instead.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Patching,  Prev: Calling,  Up: Altering

14.6 Patching programs
======================

By default, GDB opens the file containing your program's executable
code (or the corefile) read-only.  This prevents accidental alterations
to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
your program's binary.

   If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
explicitly with the `set write' command.  For example, you might want
to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency repairs.

`set write on'
`set write off'
     If you specify `set write on', GDB opens executable and core files
     for both reading and writing; if you specify `set write off' (the
     default), GDB opens them read-only.

     If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using
     the `exec-file' or `core-file' command) after changing `set
     write', for your new setting to take effect.

`show write'
     Display whether executable files and core files are opened for
     writing as well as reading.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB Files,  Next: Targets,  Prev: Altering,  Up: Top

15 GDB Files
************

GDB needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.  To
debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell GDB the name of
the core dump file.

* Menu:

* Files::                       Commands to specify files
* Separate Debug Files::        Debugging information in separate files
* Symbol Errors::               Errors reading symbol files

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Files,  Next: Separate Debug Files,  Up: GDB Files

15.1 Commands to specify files
==============================

You may want to specify executable and core dump file names.  The usual
way to do this is at start-up time, using the arguments to GDB's
start-up commands (*note Getting In and Out of GDB: Invocation.).

   Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
GDB session.  Or you may run GDB and forget to specify a file you want
to use.  Or you are debugging a remote target via `gdbserver' (*note
file: Server.).  In these situations the GDB commands to specify new
files are useful.

`file FILENAME'
     Use FILENAME as the program to be debugged.  It is read for its
     symbols and for the contents of pure memory.  It is also the
     program executed when you use the `run' command.  If you do not
     specify a directory and the file is not found in the GDB working
     directory, GDB uses the environment variable `PATH' as a list of
     directories to search, just as the shell does when looking for a
     program to run.  You can change the value of this variable, for
     both GDB and your program, using the `path' command.

     You can load unlinked object `.o' files into GDB using the `file'
     command.  You will not be able to "run" an object file, but you
     can disassemble functions and inspect variables.  Also, if the
     underlying BFD functionality supports it, you could use `gdb
     -write' to patch object files using this technique.  Note that GDB
     can neither interpret nor modify relocations in this case, so
     branches and some initialized variables will appear to go to the
     wrong place.  But this feature is still handy from time to time.

`file'
     `file' with no argument makes GDB discard any information it has
     on both executable file and the symbol table.

`exec-file [ FILENAME ]'
     Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is
     found in FILENAME.  GDB searches the environment variable `PATH'
     if necessary to locate your program.  Omitting FILENAME means to
     discard information on the executable file.

`symbol-file [ FILENAME ]'
     Read symbol table information from file FILENAME.  `PATH' is
     searched when necessary.  Use the `file' command to get both symbol
     table and program to run from the same file.

     `symbol-file' with no argument clears out GDB information on your
     program's symbol table.

     The `symbol-file' command causes GDB to forget the contents of
     some breakpoints and auto-display expressions.  This is because
     they may contain pointers to the internal data recording symbols
     and data types, which are part of the old symbol table data being
     discarded inside GDB.

     `symbol-file' does not repeat if you press <RET> again after
     executing it once.

     When GDB is configured for a particular environment, it
     understands debugging information in whatever format is the
     standard generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU
     compiler, or other compilers that adhere to the local conventions.
     Best results are usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example,
     using `gcc' you can generate debugging information for optimized
     code.

     For most kinds of object files, with the exception of old SVR3
     systems using COFF, the `symbol-file' command does not normally
     read the symbol table in full right away.  Instead, it scans the
     symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
     are present.  The details are read later, one source file at a
     time, as they are needed.

     The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make GDB
     start up faster.  For the most part, it is invisible except for
     occasional pauses while the symbol table details for a particular
     source file are being read.  (The `set verbose' command can turn
     these pauses into messages if desired.  *Note Optional warnings
     and messages: Messages/Warnings.)

     We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet.  When
     the symbol table is stored in COFF format, `symbol-file' reads the
     symbol table data in full right away.  Note that "stabs-in-COFF"
     still does the two-stage strategy, since the debug info is actually
     in stabs format.

`symbol-file FILENAME [ -readnow ]'
`file FILENAME [ -readnow ]'
     You can override the GDB two-stage strategy for reading symbol
     tables by using the `-readnow' option with any of the commands that
     load symbol table information, if you want to be sure GDB has the
     entire symbol table available.

`core-file [FILENAME]'
`core'
     Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the
     "contents of memory".  Traditionally, core files contain only some
     parts of the address space of the process that generated them; GDB
     can access the executable file itself for other parts.

     `core-file' with no argument specifies that no core file is to be
     used.

     Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually
     running under GDB.  So, if you have been running your program and
     you wish to debug a core file instead, you must kill the
     subprocess in which the program is running.  To do this, use the
     `kill' command (*note Killing the child process: Kill Process.).

`add-symbol-file FILENAME ADDRESS'
`add-symbol-file FILENAME ADDRESS [ -readnow ]'
`add-symbol-file FILENAME -sSECTION ADDRESS ...'
     The `add-symbol-file' command reads additional symbol table
     information from the file FILENAME.  You would use this command
     when FILENAME has been dynamically loaded (by some other means)
     into the program that is running.  ADDRESS should be the memory
     address at which the file has been loaded; GDB cannot figure this
     out for itself.  You can additionally specify an arbitrary number
     of `-sSECTION ADDRESS' pairs, to give an explicit section name and
     base address for that section.  You can specify any ADDRESS as an
     expression.

     The symbol table of the file FILENAME is added to the symbol table
     originally read with the `symbol-file' command.  You can use the
     `add-symbol-file' command any number of times; the new symbol data
     thus read keeps adding to the old.  To discard all old symbol data
     instead, use the `symbol-file' command without any arguments.

     Although FILENAME is typically a shared library file, an
     executable file, or some other object file which has been fully
     relocated for loading into a process, you can also load symbolic
     information from relocatable `.o' files, as long as:

        * the file's symbolic information refers only to linker symbols
          defined in that file, not to symbols defined by other object
          files,

        * every section the file's symbolic information refers to has
          actually been loaded into the inferior, as it appears in the
          file, and

        * you can determine the address at which every section was
          loaded, and provide these to the `add-symbol-file' command.

     Some embedded operating systems, like Sun Chorus and VxWorks, can
     load relocatable files into an already running program; such
     systems typically make the requirements above easy to meet.
     However, it's important to recognize that many native systems use
     complex link procedures (`.linkonce' section factoring and C++
     constructor table assembly, for example) that make the
     requirements difficult to meet.  In general, one cannot assume
     that using `add-symbol-file' to read a relocatable object file's
     symbolic information will have the same effect as linking the
     relocatable object file into the program in the normal way.

     `add-symbol-file' does not repeat if you press <RET> after using
     it.

`add-symbol-file-from-memory ADDRESS'
     Load symbols from the given ADDRESS in a dynamically loaded object
     file whose image is mapped directly into the inferior's memory.
     For example, the Linux kernel maps a `syscall DSO' into each
     process's address space; this DSO provides kernel-specific code for
     some system calls.  The argument can be any expression whose
     evaluation yields the address of the file's shared object file
     header.  For this command to work, you must have used
     `symbol-file' or `exec-file' commands in advance.

`add-shared-symbol-files LIBRARY-FILE'
`assf LIBRARY-FILE'
     The `add-shared-symbol-files' command can currently be used only
     in the Cygwin build of GDB on MS-Windows OS, where it is an alias
     for the `dll-symbols' command (*note Cygwin Native::).  GDB
     automatically looks for shared libraries, however if GDB does not
     find yours, you can invoke `add-shared-symbol-files'.  It takes
     one argument: the shared library's file name.  `assf' is a
     shorthand alias for `add-shared-symbol-files'.

`section SECTION ADDR'
     The `section' command changes the base address of the named
     SECTION of the exec file to ADDR.  This can be used if the exec
     file does not contain section addresses, (such as in the `a.out'
     format), or when the addresses specified in the file itself are
     wrong.  Each section must be changed separately.  The `info files'
     command, described below, lists all the sections and their
     addresses.

`info files'
`info target'
     `info files' and `info target' are synonymous; both print the
     current target (*note Specifying a Debugging Target: Targets.),
     including the names of the executable and core dump files
     currently in use by GDB, and the files from which symbols were
     loaded.  The command `help target' lists all possible targets
     rather than current ones.

`maint info sections'
     Another command that can give you extra information about program
     sections is `maint info sections'.  In addition to the section
     information displayed by `info files', this command displays the
     flags and file offset of each section in the executable and core
     dump files.  In addition, `maint info sections' provides the
     following command options (which may be arbitrarily combined):

    `ALLOBJ'
          Display sections for all loaded object files, including
          shared libraries.

    `SECTIONS'
          Display info only for named SECTIONS.

    `SECTION-FLAGS'
          Display info only for sections for which SECTION-FLAGS are
          true.  The section flags that GDB currently knows about are:
         `ALLOC'
               Section will have space allocated in the process when
               loaded.  Set for all sections except those containing
               debug information.

         `LOAD'
               Section will be loaded from the file into the child
               process memory.  Set for pre-initialized code and data,
               clear for `.bss' sections.

         `RELOC'
               Section needs to be relocated before loading.

         `READONLY'
               Section cannot be modified by the child process.

         `CODE'
               Section contains executable code only.

         `DATA'
               Section contains data only (no executable code).

         `ROM'
               Section will reside in ROM.

         `CONSTRUCTOR'
               Section contains data for constructor/destructor lists.

         `HAS_CONTENTS'
               Section is not empty.

         `NEVER_LOAD'
               An instruction to the linker to not output the section.

         `COFF_SHARED_LIBRARY'
               A notification to the linker that the section contains
               COFF shared library information.

         `IS_COMMON'
               Section contains common symbols.
     
`set trust-readonly-sections on'
     Tell GDB that readonly sections in your object file really are
     read-only (i.e. that their contents will not change).  In that
     case, GDB can fetch values from these sections out of the object
     file, rather than from the target program.  For some targets
     (notably embedded ones), this can be a significant enhancement to
     debugging performance.

     The default is off.

`set trust-readonly-sections off'
     Tell GDB not to trust readonly sections.  This means that the
     contents of the section might change while the program is running,
     and must therefore be fetched from the target when needed.

`show trust-readonly-sections'
     Show the current setting of trusting readonly sections.

   All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file
names as arguments.  GDB always converts the file name to an absolute
file name and remembers it that way.

   GDB supports GNU/Linux, MS-Windows, HP-UX, SunOS, SVr4, Irix, and
IBM RS/6000 AIX shared libraries.

   GDB automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
when you use the `run' command, or when you examine a core file.
(Before you issue the `run' command, GDB does not understand references
to a function in a shared library, however--unless you are debugging a
core file).

   On HP-UX, if the program loads a library explicitly, GDB
automatically loads the symbols at the time of the `shl_load' call.

   There are times, however, when you may wish to not automatically load
symbol definitions from shared libraries, such as when they are
particularly large or there are many of them.

   To control the automatic loading of shared library symbols, use the
commands:

`set auto-solib-add MODE'
     If MODE is `on', symbols from all shared object libraries will be
     loaded automatically when the inferior begins execution, you
     attach to an independently started inferior, or when the dynamic
     linker informs GDB that a new library has been loaded.  If MODE is
     `off', symbols must be loaded manually, using the `sharedlibrary'
     command.  The default value is `on'.

     If your program uses lots of shared libraries with debug info that
     takes large amounts of memory, you can decrease the GDB memory
     footprint by preventing it from automatically loading the symbols
     from shared libraries.  To that end, type `set auto-solib-add off'
     before running the inferior, then load each library whose debug
     symbols you do need with `sharedlibrary REGEXP', where REGEXP is a
     regular expresion that matches the libraries whose symbols you
     want to be loaded.

`show auto-solib-add'
     Display the current autoloading mode.

   To explicitly load shared library symbols, use the `sharedlibrary'
command:

`info share'
`info sharedlibrary'
     Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.

`sharedlibrary REGEX'
`share REGEX'
     Load shared object library symbols for files matching a Unix
     regular expression.  As with files loaded automatically, it only
     loads shared libraries required by your program for a core file or
     after typing `run'.  If REGEX is omitted all shared libraries
     required by your program are loaded.

`nosharedlibrary'
     Unload all shared object library symbols.  This discards all
     symbols that have been loaded from all shared libraries.  Symbols
     from shared libraries that were loaded by explicit user requests
     are not discarded.

   Sometimes you may wish that GDB stops and gives you control when any
of shared library events happen.  Use the `set stop-on-solib-events'
command for this:

`set stop-on-solib-events'
     This command controls whether GDB should give you control when the
     dynamic linker notifies it about some shared library event.  The
     most common event of interest is loading or unloading of a new
     shared library.

`show stop-on-solib-events'
     Show whether GDB stops and gives you control when shared library
     events happen.

   Shared libraries are also supported in many cross or remote debugging
configurations.  A copy of the target's libraries need to be present on
the host system; they need to be the same as the target libraries,
although the copies on the target can be stripped as long as the copies
on the host are not.

   For remote debugging, you need to tell GDB where the target
libraries are, so that it can load the correct copies--otherwise, it
may try to load the host's libraries.  GDB has two variables to specify
the search directories for target libraries.

`set solib-absolute-prefix PATH'
     If this variable is set, PATH will be used as a prefix for any
     absolute shared library paths; many runtime loaders store the
     absolute paths to the shared library in the target program's
     memory.  If you use `solib-absolute-prefix' to find shared
     libraries, they need to be laid out in the same way that they are
     on the target, with e.g. a `/usr/lib' hierarchy under PATH.

     You can set the default value of `solib-absolute-prefix' by using
     the configure-time `--with-sysroot' option.

`show solib-absolute-prefix'
     Display the current shared library prefix.

`set solib-search-path PATH'
     If this variable is set, PATH is a colon-separated list of
     directories to search for shared libraries.  `solib-search-path'
     is used after `solib-absolute-prefix' fails to locate the library,
     or if the path to the library is relative instead of absolute.  If
     you want to use `solib-search-path' instead of
     `solib-absolute-prefix', be sure to set `solib-absolute-prefix' to
     a nonexistant directory to prevent GDB from finding your host's
     libraries.

`show solib-search-path'
     Display the current shared library search path.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Separate Debug Files,  Next: Symbol Errors,  Prev: Files,  Up: GDB Files

15.2 Debugging Information in Separate Files
============================================

GDB allows you to put a program's debugging information in a file
separate from the executable itself, in a way that allows GDB to find
and load the debugging information automatically.  Since debugging
information can be very large -- sometimes larger than the executable
code itself -- some systems distribute debugging information for their
executables in separate files, which users can install only when they
need to debug a problem.

   If an executable's debugging information has been extracted to a
separate file, the executable should contain a "debug link" giving the
name of the debugging information file (with no directory components),
and a checksum of its contents.  (The exact form of a debug link is
described below.)  If the full name of the directory containing the
executable is EXECDIR, and the executable has a debug link that
specifies the name DEBUGFILE, then GDB will automatically search for
the debugging information file in three places:

   * the directory containing the executable file (that is, it will look
     for a file named `EXECDIR/DEBUGFILE',

   * a subdirectory of that directory named `.debug' (that is, the file
     `EXECDIR/.debug/DEBUGFILE', and

   * a subdirectory of the global debug file directory that includes the
     executable's full path, and the name from the link (that is, the
     file `GLOBALDEBUGDIR/EXECDIR/DEBUGFILE', where GLOBALDEBUGDIR is
     the global debug file directory, and EXECDIR has been turned into
     a relative path).
   GDB checks under each of these names for a debugging information
file whose checksum matches that given in the link, and reads the
debugging information from the first one it finds.

   So, for example, if you ask GDB to debug `/usr/bin/ls', which has a
link containing the name `ls.debug', and the global debug directory is
`/usr/lib/debug', then GDB will look for debug information in
`/usr/bin/ls.debug', `/usr/bin/.debug/ls.debug', and
`/usr/lib/debug/usr/bin/ls.debug'.

   You can set the global debugging info directory's name, and view the
name GDB is currently using.

`set debug-file-directory DIRECTORY'
     Set the directory which GDB searches for separate debugging
     information files to DIRECTORY.

`show debug-file-directory'
     Show the directory GDB searches for separate debugging information
     files.


   A debug link is a special section of the executable file named
`.gnu_debuglink'.  The section must contain:

   * A filename, with any leading directory components removed,
     followed by a zero byte,

   * zero to three bytes of padding, as needed to reach the next
     four-byte boundary within the section, and

   * a four-byte CRC checksum, stored in the same endianness used for
     the executable file itself.  The checksum is computed on the
     debugging information file's full contents by the function given
     below, passing zero as the CRC argument.

   Any executable file format can carry a debug link, as long as it can
contain a section named `.gnu_debuglink' with the contents described
above.

   The debugging information file itself should be an ordinary
executable, containing a full set of linker symbols, sections, and
debugging information.  The sections of the debugging information file
should have the same names, addresses and sizes as the original file,
but they need not contain any data -- much like a `.bss' section in an
ordinary executable.

   As of December 2002, there is no standard GNU utility to produce
separated executable / debugging information file pairs.  Ulrich
Drepper's `elfutils' package, starting with version 0.53, contains a
version of the `strip' command such that the command `strip foo -f
foo.debug' removes the debugging information from the executable file
`foo', places it in the file `foo.debug', and leaves behind a debug
link in `foo'.

   Since there are many different ways to compute CRC's (different
polynomials, reversals, byte ordering, etc.), the simplest way to
describe the CRC used in `.gnu_debuglink' sections is to give the
complete code for a function that computes it:

     unsigned long
     gnu_debuglink_crc32 (unsigned long crc,
                          unsigned char *buf, size_t len)
     {
       static const unsigned long crc32_table[256] =
         {
           0x00000000, 0x77073096, 0xee0e612c, 0x990951ba, 0x076dc419,
           0x706af48f, 0xe963a535, 0x9e6495a3, 0x0edb8832, 0x79dcb8a4,
           0xe0d5e91e, 0x97d2d988, 0x09b64c2b, 0x7eb17cbd, 0xe7b82d07,
           0x90bf1d91, 0x1db71064, 0x6ab020f2, 0xf3b97148, 0x84be41de,
           0x1adad47d, 0x6ddde4eb, 0xf4d4b551, 0x83d385c7, 0x136c9856,
           0x646ba8c0, 0xfd62f97a, 0x8a65c9ec, 0x14015c4f, 0x63066cd9,
           0xfa0f3d63, 0x8d080df5, 0x3b6e20c8, 0x4c69105e, 0xd56041e4,
           0xa2677172, 0x3c03e4d1, 0x4b04d447, 0xd20d85fd, 0xa50ab56b,
           0x35b5a8fa, 0x42b2986c, 0xdbbbc9d6, 0xacbcf940, 0x32d86ce3,
           0x45df5c75, 0xdcd60dcf, 0xabd13d59, 0x26d930ac, 0x51de003a,
           0xc8d75180, 0xbfd06116, 0x21b4f4b5, 0x56b3c423, 0xcfba9599,
           0xb8bda50f, 0x2802b89e, 0x5f058808, 0xc60cd9b2, 0xb10be924,
           0x2f6f7c87, 0x58684c11, 0xc1611dab, 0xb6662d3d, 0x76dc4190,
           0x01db7106, 0x98d220bc, 0xefd5102a, 0x71b18589, 0x06b6b51f,
           0x9fbfe4a5, 0xe8b8d433, 0x7807c9a2, 0x0f00f934, 0x9609a88e,
           0xe10e9818, 0x7f6a0dbb, 0x086d3d2d, 0x91646c97, 0xe6635c01,
           0x6b6b51f4, 0x1c6c6162, 0x856530d8, 0xf262004e, 0x6c0695ed,
           0x1b01a57b, 0x8208f4c1, 0xf50fc457, 0x65b0d9c6, 0x12b7e950,
           0x8bbeb8ea, 0xfcb9887c, 0x62dd1ddf, 0x15da2d49, 0x8cd37cf3,
           0xfbd44c65, 0x4db26158, 0x3ab551ce, 0xa3bc0074, 0xd4bb30e2,
           0x4adfa541, 0x3dd895d7, 0xa4d1c46d, 0xd3d6f4fb, 0x4369e96a,
           0x346ed9fc, 0xad678846, 0xda60b8d0, 0x44042d73, 0x33031de5,
           0xaa0a4c5f, 0xdd0d7cc9, 0x5005713c, 0x270241aa, 0xbe0b1010,
           0xc90c2086, 0x5768b525, 0x206f85b3, 0xb966d409, 0xce61e49f,
           0x5edef90e, 0x29d9c998, 0xb0d09822, 0xc7d7a8b4, 0x59b33d17,
           0x2eb40d81, 0xb7bd5c3b, 0xc0ba6cad, 0xedb88320, 0x9abfb3b6,
           0x03b6e20c, 0x74b1d29a, 0xead54739, 0x9dd277af, 0x04db2615,
           0x73dc1683, 0xe3630b12, 0x94643b84, 0x0d6d6a3e, 0x7a6a5aa8,
           0xe40ecf0b, 0x9309ff9d, 0x0a00ae27, 0x7d079eb1, 0xf00f9344,
           0x8708a3d2, 0x1e01f268, 0x6906c2fe, 0xf762575d, 0x806567cb,
           0x196c3671, 0x6e6b06e7, 0xfed41b76, 0x89d32be0, 0x10da7a5a,
           0x67dd4acc, 0xf9b9df6f, 0x8ebeeff9, 0x17b7be43, 0x60b08ed5,
           0xd6d6a3e8, 0xa1d1937e, 0x38d8c2c4, 0x4fdff252, 0xd1bb67f1,
           0xa6bc5767, 0x3fb506dd, 0x48b2364b, 0xd80d2bda, 0xaf0a1b4c,
           0x36034af6, 0x41047a60, 0xdf60efc3, 0xa867df55, 0x316e8eef,
           0x4669be79, 0xcb61b38c, 0xbc66831a, 0x256fd2a0, 0x5268e236,
           0xcc0c7795, 0xbb0b4703, 0x220216b9, 0x5505262f, 0xc5ba3bbe,
           0xb2bd0b28, 0x2bb45a92, 0x5cb36a04, 0xc2d7ffa7, 0xb5d0cf31,
           0x2cd99e8b, 0x5bdeae1d, 0x9b64c2b0, 0xec63f226, 0x756aa39c,
           0x026d930a, 0x9c0906a9, 0xeb0e363f, 0x72076785, 0x05005713,
           0x95bf4a82, 0xe2b87a14, 0x7bb12bae, 0x0cb61b38, 0x92d28e9b,
           0xe5d5be0d, 0x7cdcefb7, 0x0bdbdf21, 0x86d3d2d4, 0xf1d4e242,
           0x68ddb3f8, 0x1fda836e, 0x81be16cd, 0xf6b9265b, 0x6fb077e1,
           0x18b74777, 0x88085ae6, 0xff0f6a70, 0x66063bca, 0x11010b5c,
           0x8f659eff, 0xf862ae69, 0x616bffd3, 0x166ccf45, 0xa00ae278,
           0xd70dd2ee, 0x4e048354, 0x3903b3c2, 0xa7672661, 0xd06016f7,
           0x4969474d, 0x3e6e77db, 0xaed16a4a, 0xd9d65adc, 0x40df0b66,
           0x37d83bf0, 0xa9bcae53, 0xdebb9ec5, 0x47b2cf7f, 0x30b5ffe9,
           0xbdbdf21c, 0xcabac28a, 0x53b39330, 0x24b4a3a6, 0xbad03605,
           0xcdd70693, 0x54de5729, 0x23d967bf, 0xb3667a2e, 0xc4614ab8,
           0x5d681b02, 0x2a6f2b94, 0xb40bbe37, 0xc30c8ea1, 0x5a05df1b,
           0x2d02ef8d
         };
       unsigned char *end;

       crc = ~crc & 0xffffffff;
       for (end = buf + len; buf < end; ++buf)
         crc = crc32_table[(crc ^ *buf) & 0xff] ^ (crc >> 8);
       return ~crc & 0xffffffff;
     }

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Symbol Errors,  Prev: Separate Debug Files,  Up: GDB Files

15.3 Errors reading symbol files
================================

While reading a symbol file, GDB occasionally encounters problems, such
as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
output.  By default, GDB does not notify you of such problems, since
they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
debugging compilers.  If you are interested in seeing information about
ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask GDB to print only one
message about each such type of problem, no matter how many times the
problem occurs; or you can ask GDB to print more messages, to see how
many times the problems occur, with the `set complaints' command (*note
Optional warnings and messages: Messages/Warnings.).

   The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:

`inner block not inside outer block in SYMBOL'
     The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
     (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements).
     This error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully
     contained in its outer scope blocks.

     GDB circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it
     had the same scope as the outer block.  In the error message,
     SYMBOL may be shown as "`(don't know)'" if the outer block is not a
     function.

`block at ADDRESS out of order'
     The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
     order of increasing addresses.  This error indicates that it does
     not do so.

     GDB does not circumvent this problem, and has trouble locating
     symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading.  (You can
     often determine what source file is affected by specifying `set
     verbose on'.  *Note Optional warnings and messages:
     Messages/Warnings.)

`bad block start address patched'
     The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
     smaller than the address of the preceding source line.  This is
     known to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.

     GDB circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
     starting on the previous source line.

`bad string table offset in symbol N'
     Symbol number N contains a pointer into the string table which is
     larger than the size of the string table.

     GDB circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
     name `foo', which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
     with this name.

`unknown symbol type `0xNN''
     The symbol information contains new data types that GDB does not
     yet know how to read.  `0xNN' is the symbol type of the
     uncomprehended information, in hexadecimal.

     GDB circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information.
     This usually allows you to debug your program, though certain
     symbols are not accessible.  If you encounter such a problem and
     feel like debugging it, you can debug `gdb' with itself, breakpoint
     on `complain', then go up to the function `read_dbx_symtab' and
     examine `*bufp' to see the symbol.

`stub type has NULL name'
     GDB could not find the full definition for a struct or class.

`const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got...'
     The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
     information that recent versions of the compiler should have
     output for it.

`info mismatch between compiler and debugger'
     GDB could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Targets,  Next: Remote Debugging,  Prev: GDB Files,  Up: Top

16 Specifying a Debugging Target
********************************

A "target" is the execution environment occupied by your program.

   Often, GDB runs in the same host environment as your program; in
that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
use the `file' or `core' commands.  When you need more flexibility--for
example, running GDB on a physically separate host, or controlling a
standalone system over a serial port or a realtime system over a TCP/IP
connection--you can use the `target' command to specify one of the
target types configured for GDB (*note Commands for managing targets:
Target Commands.).

   It is possible to build GDB for several different "target
architectures".  When GDB is built like that, you can choose one of the
available architectures with the `set architecture' command.

`set architecture ARCH'
     This command sets the current target architecture to ARCH.  The
     value of ARCH can be `"auto"', in addition to one of the supported
     architectures.

`show architecture'
     Show the current target architecture.

`set processor'
`processor'
     These are alias commands for, respectively, `set architecture' and
     `show architecture'.

* Menu:

* Active Targets::              Active targets
* Target Commands::             Commands for managing targets
* Byte Order::                  Choosing target byte order
* Remote::                      Remote debugging

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Active Targets,  Next: Target Commands,  Up: Targets

16.1 Active targets
===================

There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
executable files.  GDB can work concurrently on up to three active
targets, one in each class.  This allows you to (for example) start a
process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
file.

   For example, if you execute `gdb a.out', then the executable file
`a.out' is the only active target.  If you designate a core file as
well--presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped--then GDB
has two active targets and uses them in tandem, looking first in the
corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy requests for
memory addresses.  (Typically, these two classes of target are
complementary, since core files contain only a program's read-write
memory--variables and so on--plus machine status, while executable
files contain only the program text and initialized data.)

   When you type `run', your executable file becomes an active process
target as well.  When a process target is active, all GDB commands
requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
active core file or executable file target are obscured while the
process target is active.

   Use the `core-file' and `exec-file' commands to select a new core
file or executable target (*note Commands to specify files: Files.).
To specify as a target a process that is already running, use the
`attach' command (*note Debugging an already-running process: Attach.).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Target Commands,  Next: Byte Order,  Prev: Active Targets,  Up: Targets

16.2 Commands for managing targets
==================================

`target TYPE PARAMETERS'
     Connects the GDB host environment to a target machine or process.
     A target is typically a protocol for talking to debugging
     facilities.  You use the argument TYPE to specify the type or
     protocol of the target machine.

     Further PARAMETERS are interpreted by the target protocol, but
     typically include things like device names or host names to connect
     with, process numbers, and baud rates.

     The `target' command does not repeat if you press <RET> again
     after executing the command.

`help target'
     Displays the names of all targets available.  To display targets
     currently selected, use either `info target' or `info files'
     (*note Commands to specify files: Files.).

`help target NAME'
     Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
     select it.

`set gnutarget ARGS'
     GDB uses its own library BFD to read your files.  GDB knows
     whether it is reading an "executable", a "core", or a ".o" file;
     however, you can specify the file format with the `set gnutarget'
     command.  Unlike most `target' commands, with `gnutarget' the
     `target' refers to a program, not a machine.

          _Warning:_ To specify a file format with `set gnutarget', you
          must know the actual BFD name.

     *Note Commands to specify files: Files.

`show gnutarget'
     Use the `show gnutarget' command to display what file format
     `gnutarget' is set to read.  If you have not set `gnutarget', GDB
     will determine the file format for each file automatically, and
     `show gnutarget' displays `The current BDF target is "auto"'.

   Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
configuration):

`target exec PROGRAM'
     An executable file.  `target exec PROGRAM' is the same as
     `exec-file PROGRAM'.

`target core FILENAME'
     A core dump file.  `target core FILENAME' is the same as
     `core-file FILENAME'.

`target remote MEDIUM'
     A remote system connected to GDB via a serial line or network
     connection.  This command tells GDB to use its own remote protocol
     over MEDIUM for debugging.  *Note Remote Debugging::.

     For example, if you have a board connected to `/dev/ttya' on the
     machine running GDB, you could say:

          target remote /dev/ttya

     `target remote' supports the `load' command.  This is only useful
     if you have some other way of getting the stub to the target
     system, and you can put it somewhere in memory where it won't get
     clobbered by the download.

`target sim'
     Builtin CPU simulator.  GDB includes simulators for most
     architectures.  In general,
                  target sim
                  load
                  run
     works; however, you cannot assume that a specific memory map,
     device drivers, or even basic I/O is available, although some
     simulators do provide these.  For info about any
     processor-specific simulator details, see the appropriate section
     in *Note Embedded Processors: Embedded Processors.


   Some configurations may include these targets as well:

`target nrom DEV'
     NetROM ROM emulator.  This target only supports downloading.


   Different targets are available on different configurations of GDB;
your configuration may have more or fewer targets.

   Many remote targets require you to download the executable's code
once you've successfully established a connection.  You may wish to
control various aspects of this process.

`set hash'
     This command controls whether a hash mark `#' is displayed while
     downloading a file to the remote monitor.  If on, a hash mark is
     displayed after each S-record is successfully downloaded to the
     monitor.

`show hash'
     Show the current status of displaying the hash mark.

`set debug monitor'
     Enable or disable display of communications messages between GDB
     and the remote monitor.

`show debug monitor'
     Show the current status of displaying communications between GDB
     and the remote monitor.

`load FILENAME'
     Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
     GDB, the `load' command may be available.  Where it exists, it is
     meant to make FILENAME (an executable) available for debugging on
     the remote system--by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
     `load' also records the FILENAME symbol table in GDB, like the
     `add-symbol-file' command.

     If your GDB does not have a `load' command, attempting to execute
     it gets the error message "`You can't do that when your target is
     ...'"

     The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the
     executable.  For some object file formats, you can specify the
     load address when you link the program; for other formats, like
     a.out, the object file format specifies a fixed address.

     Depending on the remote side capabilities, GDB may be able to load
     programs into flash memory.

     `load' does not repeat if you press <RET> again after using it.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Byte Order,  Next: Remote,  Prev: Target Commands,  Up: Targets

16.3 Choosing target byte order
===============================

Some types of processors, such as the MIPS, PowerPC, and Renesas SH,
offer the ability to run either big-endian or little-endian byte
orders.  Usually the executable or symbol will include a bit to
designate the endian-ness, and you will not need to worry about which
to use.  However, you may still find it useful to adjust GDB's idea of
processor endian-ness manually.

`set endian big'
     Instruct GDB to assume the target is big-endian.

`set endian little'
     Instruct GDB to assume the target is little-endian.

`set endian auto'
     Instruct GDB to use the byte order associated with the executable.

`show endian'
     Display GDB's current idea of the target byte order.


   Note that these commands merely adjust interpretation of symbolic
data on the host, and that they have absolutely no effect on the target
system.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Remote,  Prev: Byte Order,  Up: Targets

16.4 Remote debugging
=====================

If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot
run GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging.
For example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system
kernel, or on a small system which does not have a general purpose
operating system powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.

   Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
to make this work with particular debugging targets.  In addition, GDB
comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but not specific
to any particular target system) which you can use if you write the
remote stubs--the code that runs on the remote system to communicate
with GDB.

   Other remote targets may be available in your configuration of GDB;
use `help target' to list them.

   Once you've connected to the remote target, GDB allows you to send
arbitrary commands to the remote monitor:

`remote COMMAND'
     Send an arbitrary COMMAND string to the remote monitor.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Remote Debugging,  Next: Configurations,  Prev: Targets,  Up: Top

17 Debugging remote programs
****************************

* Menu:

* Connecting::                  Connecting to a remote target
* Server::                      Using the gdbserver program
* Remote configuration::        Remote configuration
* remote stub::                 Implementing a remote stub

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Connecting,  Next: Server,  Up: Remote Debugging

17.1 Connecting to a remote target
==================================

On the GDB host machine, you will need an unstripped copy of your
program, since GDB needs symobl and debugging information.  Start up
GDB as usual, using the name of the local copy of your program as the
first argument.

   GDB can communicate with the target over a serial line, or over an
IP network using TCP or UDP.  In each case, GDB uses the same protocol
for debugging your program; only the medium carrying the debugging
packets varies.  The `target remote' command establishes a connection
to the target.  Its arguments indicate which medium to use:

`target remote SERIAL-DEVICE'
     Use SERIAL-DEVICE to communicate with the target.  For example, to
     use a serial line connected to the device named `/dev/ttyb':

          target remote /dev/ttyb

     If you're using a serial line, you may want to give GDB the
     `--baud' option, or use the `set remotebaud' command (*note set
     remotebaud: Remote configuration.) before the `target' command.

`target remote `HOST:PORT''
`target remote `tcp:HOST:PORT''
     Debug using a TCP connection to PORT on HOST.  The HOST may be
     either a host name or a numeric IP address; PORT must be a decimal
     number.  The HOST could be the target machine itself, if it is
     directly connected to the net, or it might be a terminal server
     which in turn has a serial line to the target.

     For example, to connect to port 2828 on a terminal server named
     `manyfarms':

          target remote manyfarms:2828

     If your remote target is actually running on the same machine as
     your debugger session (e.g. a simulator for your target running on
     the same host), you can omit the hostname.  For example, to
     connect to port 1234 on your local machine:

          target remote :1234
     Note that the colon is still required here.

`target remote `udp:HOST:PORT''
     Debug using UDP packets to PORT on HOST.  For example, to connect
     to UDP port 2828 on a terminal server named `manyfarms':

          target remote udp:manyfarms:2828

     When using a UDP connection for remote debugging, you should keep
     in mind that the `U' stands for "Unreliable".  UDP can silently
     drop packets on busy or unreliable networks, which will cause
     havoc with your debugging session.

`target remote | COMMAND'
     Run COMMAND in the background and communicate with it using a
     pipe.  The COMMAND is a shell command, to be parsed and expanded
     by the system's command shell, `/bin/sh'; it should expect remote
     protocol packets on its standard input, and send replies on its
     standard output.  You could use this to run a stand-alone simulator
     that speaks the remote debugging protocol, to make net connections
     using programs like `ssh', or for other similar tricks.

     If COMMAND closes its standard output (perhaps by exiting), GDB
     will try to send it a `SIGTERM' signal.  (If the program has
     already exited, this will have no effect.)


   Once the connection has been established, you can use all the usual
commands to examine and change data and to step and continue the remote
program.

   Whenever GDB is waiting for the remote program, if you type the
interrupt character (often `Ctrl-c'), GDB attempts to stop the program.
This may or may not succeed, depending in part on the hardware and the
serial drivers the remote system uses.  If you type the interrupt
character once again, GDB displays this prompt:

     Interrupted while waiting for the program.
     Give up (and stop debugging it)?  (y or n)

   If you type `y', GDB abandons the remote debugging session.  (If you
decide you want to try again later, you can use `target remote' again
to connect once more.)  If you type `n', GDB goes back to waiting.

`detach'
     When you have finished debugging the remote program, you can use
     the `detach' command to release it from GDB control.  Detaching
     from the target normally resumes its execution, but the results
     will depend on your particular remote stub.  After the `detach'
     command, GDB is free to connect to another target.

`disconnect'
     The `disconnect' command behaves like `detach', except that the
     target is generally not resumed.  It will wait for GDB (this
     instance or another one) to connect and continue debugging.  After
     the `disconnect' command, GDB is again free to connect to another
     target.

`monitor CMD'
     This command allows you to send arbitrary commands directly to the
     remote monitor.  Since GDB doesn't care about the commands it
     sends like this, this command is the way to extend GDB--you can
     add new commands that only the external monitor will understand
     and implement.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Server,  Next: Remote configuration,  Prev: Connecting,  Up: Remote Debugging

17.2 Using the `gdbserver' program
==================================

`gdbserver' is a control program for Unix-like systems, which allows
you to connect your program with a remote GDB via `target remote'--but
without linking in the usual debugging stub.

   `gdbserver' is not a complete replacement for the debugging stubs,
because it requires essentially the same operating-system facilities
that GDB itself does.  In fact, a system that can run `gdbserver' to
connect to a remote GDB could also run GDB locally!  `gdbserver' is
sometimes useful nevertheless, because it is a much smaller program
than GDB itself.  It is also easier to port than all of GDB, so you may
be able to get started more quickly on a new system by using
`gdbserver'.  Finally, if you develop code for real-time systems, you
may find that the tradeoffs involved in real-time operation make it
more convenient to do as much development work as possible on another
system, for example by cross-compiling.  You can use `gdbserver' to
make a similar choice for debugging.

   GDB and `gdbserver' communicate via either a serial line or a TCP
connection, using the standard GDB remote serial protocol.

_On the target machine,_
     you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
     `gdbserver' does not need your program's symbol table, so you can
     strip the program if necessary to save space.  GDB on the host
     system does all the symbol handling.

     To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with GDB;
     the name of your program; and the arguments for your program.  The
     usual syntax is:

          target> gdbserver COMM PROGRAM [ ARGS ... ]

     COMM is either a device name (to use a serial line) or a TCP
     hostname and portnumber.  For example, to debug Emacs with the
     argument `foo.txt' and communicate with GDB over the serial port
     `/dev/com1':

          target> gdbserver /dev/com1 emacs foo.txt

     `gdbserver' waits passively for the host GDB to communicate with
     it.

     To use a TCP connection instead of a serial line:

          target> gdbserver host:2345 emacs foo.txt

     The only difference from the previous example is the first
     argument, specifying that you are communicating with the host GDB
     via TCP.  The `host:2345' argument means that `gdbserver' is to
     expect a TCP connection from machine `host' to local TCP port 2345.
     (Currently, the `host' part is ignored.)  You can choose any number
     you want for the port number as long as it does not conflict with
     any TCP ports already in use on the target system (for example,
     `23' is reserved for `telnet').(1)  You must use the same port
     number with the host GDB `target remote' command.

     On some targets, `gdbserver' can also attach to running programs.
     This is accomplished via the `--attach' argument.  The syntax is:

          target> gdbserver COMM --attach PID

     PID is the process ID of a currently running process.  It isn't
     necessary to point `gdbserver' at a binary for the running process.

     You can debug processes by name instead of process ID if your
     target has the `pidof' utility:

          target> gdbserver COMM --attach `pidof PROGRAM`

     In case more than one copy of PROGRAM is running, or PROGRAM has
     multiple threads, most versions of `pidof' support the `-s' option
     to only return the first process ID.

_On the host machine,_
     connect to your target (*note Connecting to a remote target:
     Connecting.).  For TCP connections, you must start up `gdbserver'
     prior to using the `target remote' command.  Otherwise you may get
     an error whose text depends on the host system, but which usually
     looks something like `Connection refused'.  You don't need to use
     the `load' command in GDB when using `gdbserver', since the
     program is already on the target.  However, if you want to load
     the symbols (as you normally would), do that with the `file'
     command, and issue it _before_ connecting to the server;
     otherwise, you will get an error message saying `"Program is
     already running"', since the program is considered running after
     the connection.


   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) If you choose a port number that conflicts with another service,
`gdbserver' prints an error message and exits.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Remote configuration,  Next: remote stub,  Prev: Server,  Up: Remote Debugging

17.3 Remote configuration
=========================

This section documents the configuration options available when
debugging remote programs.  For the options related to the File I/O
extensions of the remote protocol, see *Note system-call-allowed:
system.

`set remoteaddresssize BITS'
     Set the maximum size of address in a memory packet to the specified
     number of bits.  GDB will mask off the address bits above that
     number, when it passes addresses to the remote target.  The
     default value is the number of bits in the target's address.

`show remoteaddresssize'
     Show the current value of remote address size in bits.

`set remotebaud N'
     Set the baud rate for the remote serial I/O to N baud.  The value
     is used to set the speed of the serial port used for debugging
     remote targets.

`show remotebaud'
     Show the current speed of the remote connection.

`set remotebreak'
     If set to on, GDB sends a `BREAK' signal to the remote when you
     type `Ctrl-c' to interrupt the program running on the remote.  If
     set to off, GDB sends the `Ctrl-C' character instead.  The default
     is off, since most remote systems expect to see `Ctrl-C' as the
     interrupt signal.

`show remotebreak'
     Show whether GDB sends `BREAK' or `Ctrl-C' to interrupt the remote
     program.

`set remotedevice DEVICE'
     Set the name of the serial port through which to communicate to the
     remote target to DEVICE.  This is the device used by GDB to open
     the serial communications line to the remote target.  There's no
     default, so you must set a valid port name for the remote serial
     communications to work.  (Some varieties of the `target' command
     accept the port name as part of their arguments.)

`show remotedevice'
     Show the current name of the serial port.

`set remotelogbase BASE'
     Set the base (a.k.a. radix) of logging serial protocol
     communications to BASE.  Supported values of BASE are: `ascii',
     `octal', and `hex'.  The default is `ascii'.

`show remotelogbase'
     Show the current setting of the radix for logging remote serial
     protocol.

`set remotelogfile FILE'
     Record remote serial communications on the named FILE.  The
     default is not to record at all.

`show remotelogfile.'
     Show the current setting  of the file name on which to record the
     serial communications.

`set remotetimeout NUM'
     Set the timeout limit to wait for the remote target to respond to
     NUM seconds.  The default is 2 seconds.

`show remotetimeout'
     Show the current number of seconds to wait for the remote target
     responses.

`set remote hardware-watchpoint-limit LIMIT'
`set remote hardware-breakpoint-limit LIMIT'
     Restrict GDB to using LIMIT remote hardware breakpoint or
     watchpoints.  A limit of -1, the default, is treated as unlimited.

   The GDB remote protocol autodetects the packets supported by your
debugging stub.  If you need to override the autodetection, you can use
these commands to enable or disable individual packets.  Each packet
can be set to `on' (the remote target supports this packet), `off' (the
remote target does not support this packet), or `auto' (detect remote
target support for this packet).  They all default to `auto'.  For more
information about each packet, see *Note Remote Protocol::.

   During normal use, you should not have to use any of these commands.
If you do, that may be a bug in your remote debugging stub, or a bug in
GDB.  You may want to report the problem to the GDB developers.

   The available settings are:

Command Name           Remote Packet  Related Features
`fetch-register-packet'`p'            `info registers'
`set-register-packet'  `P'            `set'
`binary-download-packet'`X'            `load', `set'
`read-aux-vector-packet'`qXfer:auxv:read'`info auxv'
`symbol-lookup-packet' `qSymbol'      Detecting multiple
                                      threads
`verbose-resume-packet'`vCont'        Stepping or resuming
                                      multiple threads
`software-breakpoint-packet'`Z0'           `break'
`hardware-breakpoint-packet'`Z1'           `hbreak'
`write-watchpoint-packet'`Z2'           `watch'
`read-watchpoint-packet'`Z3'           `rwatch'
`access-watchpoint-packet'`Z4'           `awatch'
`get-thread-local-storage-address-packet'`qGetTLSAddr'  Displaying `__thread'
                                      variables
`supported-packets'    `qSupported'   Remote communications
                                      parameters

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: remote stub,  Prev: Remote configuration,  Up: Remote Debugging

17.4 Implementing a remote stub
===============================

The stub files provided with GDB implement the target side of the
communication protocol, and the GDB side is implemented in the GDB
source file `remote.c'.  Normally, you can simply allow these
subroutines to communicate, and ignore the details.  (If you're
implementing your own stub file, you can still ignore the details: start
with one of the existing stub files.  `sparc-stub.c' is the best
organized, and therefore the easiest to read.)

   To debug a program running on another machine (the debugging
"target" machine), you must first arrange for all the usual
prerequisites for the program to run by itself.  For example, for a C
program, you need:

  1. A startup routine to set up the C runtime environment; these
     usually have a name like `crt0'.  The startup routine may be
     supplied by your hardware supplier, or you may have to write your
     own.

  2. A C subroutine library to support your program's subroutine calls,
     notably managing input and output.

  3. A way of getting your program to the other machine--for example, a
     download program.  These are often supplied by the hardware
     manufacturer, but you may have to write your own from hardware
     documentation.

   The next step is to arrange for your program to use a serial port to
communicate with the machine where GDB is running (the "host" machine).
In general terms, the scheme looks like this:

_On the host,_
     GDB already understands how to use this protocol; when everything
     else is set up, you can simply use the `target remote' command
     (*note Specifying a Debugging Target: Targets.).

_On the target,_
     you must link with your program a few special-purpose subroutines
     that implement the GDB remote serial protocol.  The file
     containing these subroutines is called  a "debugging stub".

     On certain remote targets, you can use an auxiliary program
     `gdbserver' instead of linking a stub into your program.  *Note
     Using the `gdbserver' program: Server, for details.

   The debugging stub is specific to the architecture of the remote
machine; for example, use `sparc-stub.c' to debug programs on SPARC
boards.

   These working remote stubs are distributed with GDB:

`i386-stub.c'
     For Intel 386 and compatible architectures.

`m68k-stub.c'
     For Motorola 680x0 architectures.

`sh-stub.c'
     For Renesas SH architectures.

`sparc-stub.c'
     For SPARC architectures.

`sparcl-stub.c'
     For Fujitsu SPARCLITE architectures.


   The `README' file in the GDB distribution may list other recently
added stubs.

* Menu:

* Stub Contents::       What the stub can do for you
* Bootstrapping::       What you must do for the stub
* Debug Session::       Putting it all together

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Stub Contents,  Next: Bootstrapping,  Up: remote stub

17.4.1 What the stub can do for you
-----------------------------------

The debugging stub for your architecture supplies these three
subroutines:

`set_debug_traps'
     This routine arranges for `handle_exception' to run when your
     program stops.  You must call this subroutine explicitly near the
     beginning of your program.

`handle_exception'
     This is the central workhorse, but your program never calls it
     explicitly--the setup code arranges for `handle_exception' to run
     when a trap is triggered.

     `handle_exception' takes control when your program stops during
     execution (for example, on a breakpoint), and mediates
     communications with GDB on the host machine.  This is where the
     communications protocol is implemented; `handle_exception' acts as
     the GDB representative on the target machine.  It begins by
     sending summary information on the state of your program, then
     continues to execute, retrieving and transmitting any information
     GDB needs, until you execute a GDB command that makes your program
     resume; at that point, `handle_exception' returns control to your
     own code on the target machine.

`breakpoint'
     Use this auxiliary subroutine to make your program contain a
     breakpoint.  Depending on the particular situation, this may be
     the only way for GDB to get control.  For instance, if your target
     machine has some sort of interrupt button, you won't need to call
     this; pressing the interrupt button transfers control to
     `handle_exception'--in effect, to GDB.  On some machines, simply
     receiving characters on the serial port may also trigger a trap;
     again, in that situation, you don't need to call `breakpoint' from
     your own program--simply running `target remote' from the host GDB
     session gets control.

     Call `breakpoint' if none of these is true, or if you simply want
     to make certain your program stops at a predetermined point for the
     start of your debugging session.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Bootstrapping,  Next: Debug Session,  Prev: Stub Contents,  Up: remote stub

17.4.2 What you must do for the stub
------------------------------------

The debugging stubs that come with GDB are set up for a particular chip
architecture, but they have no information about the rest of your
debugging target machine.

   First of all you need to tell the stub how to communicate with the
serial port.

`int getDebugChar()'
     Write this subroutine to read a single character from the serial
     port.  It may be identical to `getchar' for your target system; a
     different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you
     wish.

`void putDebugChar(int)'
     Write this subroutine to write a single character to the serial
     port.  It may be identical to `putchar' for your target system; a
     different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you
     wish.

   If you want GDB to be able to stop your program while it is running,
you need to use an interrupt-driven serial driver, and arrange for it
to stop when it receives a `^C' (`\003', the control-C character).
That is the character which GDB uses to tell the remote system to stop.

   Getting the debugging target to return the proper status to GDB
probably requires changes to the standard stub; one quick and dirty way
is to just execute a breakpoint instruction (the "dirty" part is that
GDB reports a `SIGTRAP' instead of a `SIGINT').

   Other routines you need to supply are:

`void exceptionHandler (int EXCEPTION_NUMBER, void *EXCEPTION_ADDRESS)'
     Write this function to install EXCEPTION_ADDRESS in the exception
     handling tables.  You need to do this because the stub does not
     have any way of knowing what the exception handling tables on your
     target system are like (for example, the processor's table might
     be in ROM, containing entries which point to a table in RAM).
     EXCEPTION_NUMBER is the exception number which should be changed;
     its meaning is architecture-dependent (for example, different
     numbers might represent divide by zero, misaligned access, etc).
     When this exception occurs, control should be transferred directly
     to EXCEPTION_ADDRESS, and the processor state (stack, registers,
     and so on) should be just as it is when a processor exception
     occurs.  So if you want to use a jump instruction to reach
     EXCEPTION_ADDRESS, it should be a simple jump, not a jump to
     subroutine.

     For the 386, EXCEPTION_ADDRESS should be installed as an interrupt
     gate so that interrupts are masked while the handler runs.  The
     gate should be at privilege level 0 (the most privileged level).
     The SPARC and 68k stubs are able to mask interrupts themselves
     without help from `exceptionHandler'.

`void flush_i_cache()'
     On SPARC and SPARCLITE only, write this subroutine to flush the
     instruction cache, if any, on your target machine.  If there is no
     instruction cache, this subroutine may be a no-op.

     On target machines that have instruction caches, GDB requires this
     function to make certain that the state of your program is stable.

You must also make sure this library routine is available:

`void *memset(void *, int, int)'
     This is the standard library function `memset' that sets an area of
     memory to a known value.  If you have one of the free versions of
     `libc.a', `memset' can be found there; otherwise, you must either
     obtain it from your hardware manufacturer, or write your own.

   If you do not use the GNU C compiler, you may need other standard
library subroutines as well; this varies from one stub to another, but
in general the stubs are likely to use any of the common library
subroutines which `gcc' generates as inline code.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Debug Session,  Prev: Bootstrapping,  Up: remote stub

17.4.3 Putting it all together
------------------------------

In summary, when your program is ready to debug, you must follow these
steps.

  1. Make sure you have defined the supporting low-level routines
     (*note What you must do for the stub: Bootstrapping.):
          `getDebugChar', `putDebugChar',
          `flush_i_cache', `memset', `exceptionHandler'.

  2. Insert these lines near the top of your program:

          set_debug_traps();
          breakpoint();

  3. For the 680x0 stub only, you need to provide a variable called
     `exceptionHook'.  Normally you just use:

          void (*exceptionHook)() = 0;

     but if before calling `set_debug_traps', you set it to point to a
     function in your program, that function is called when `GDB'
     continues after stopping on a trap (for example, bus error).  The
     function indicated by `exceptionHook' is called with one
     parameter: an `int' which is the exception number.

  4. Compile and link together: your program, the GDB debugging stub for
     your target architecture, and the supporting subroutines.

  5. Make sure you have a serial connection between your target machine
     and the GDB host, and identify the serial port on the host.

  6. Download your program to your target machine (or get it there by
     whatever means the manufacturer provides), and start it.

  7. Start GDB on the host, and connect to the target (*note Connecting
     to a remote target: Connecting.).


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Configurations,  Next: Controlling GDB,  Prev: Remote Debugging,  Up: Top

18 Configuration-Specific Information
*************************************

While nearly all GDB commands are available for all native and cross
versions of the debugger, there are some exceptions.  This chapter
describes things that are only available in certain configurations.

   There are three major categories of configurations: native
configurations, where the host and target are the same, embedded
operating system configurations, which are usually the same for several
different processor architectures, and bare embedded processors, which
are quite different from each other.

* Menu:

* Native::
* Embedded OS::
* Embedded Processors::
* Architectures::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Native,  Next: Embedded OS,  Up: Configurations

18.1 Native
===========

This section describes details specific to particular native
configurations.

* Menu:

* HP-UX::                       HP-UX
* BSD libkvm Interface::        Debugging BSD kernel memory images
* SVR4 Process Information::    SVR4 process information
* DJGPP Native::                Features specific to the DJGPP port
* Cygwin Native::               Features specific to the Cygwin port
* Hurd Native::                 Features specific to GNU Hurd
* Neutrino::                    Features specific to QNX Neutrino

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: HP-UX,  Next: BSD libkvm Interface,  Up: Native

18.1.1 HP-UX
------------

On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
begins with a dollar sign, GDB searches for a user or system name
first, before it searches for a convenience variable.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: BSD libkvm Interface,  Next: SVR4 Process Information,  Prev: HP-UX,  Up: Native

18.1.2 BSD libkvm Interface
---------------------------

BSD-derived systems (FreeBSD/NetBSD/OpenBSD) have a kernel memory
interface that provides a uniform interface for accessing kernel virtual
memory images, including live systems and crash dumps.  GDB uses this
interface to allow you to debug live kernels and kernel crash dumps on
many native BSD configurations.  This is implemented as a special `kvm'
debugging target.  For debugging a live system, load the currently
running kernel into GDB and connect to the `kvm' target:

     (gdb) target kvm

   For debugging crash dumps, provide the file name of the crash dump
as an argument:

     (gdb) target kvm /var/crash/bsd.0

   Once connected to the `kvm' target, the following commands are
available:

`kvm pcb'
     Set current context from the "Process Control Block" (PCB) address.

`kvm proc'
     Set current context from proc address.  This command isn't
     available on modern FreeBSD systems.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: SVR4 Process Information,  Next: DJGPP Native,  Prev: BSD libkvm Interface,  Up: Native

18.1.3 SVR4 process information
-------------------------------

Many versions of SVR4 and compatible systems provide a facility called
`/proc' that can be used to examine the image of a running process
using file-system subroutines.  If GDB is configured for an operating
system with this facility, the command `info proc' is available to
report information about the process running your program, or about any
process running on your system.  `info proc' works only on SVR4 systems
that include the `procfs' code.  This includes, as of this writing,
GNU/Linux, OSF/1 (Digital Unix), Solaris, Irix, and Unixware, but not
HP-UX, for example.

`info proc'
`info proc PROCESS-ID'
     Summarize available information about any running process.  If a
     process ID is specified by PROCESS-ID, display information about
     that process; otherwise display information about the program being
     debugged.  The summary includes the debugged process ID, the
     command line used to invoke it, its current working directory, and
     its executable file's absolute file name.

     On some systems, PROCESS-ID can be of the form `[PID]/TID' which
     specifies a certain thread ID within a process.  If the optional
     PID part is missing, it means a thread from the process being
     debugged (the leading `/' still needs to be present, or else GDB
     will interpret the number as a process ID rather than a thread ID).

`info proc mappings'
     Report the memory address space ranges accessible in the program,
     with information on whether the process has read, write, or
     execute access rights to each range.  On GNU/Linux systems, each
     memory range includes the object file which is mapped to that
     range, instead of the memory access rights to that range.

`info proc stat'
`info proc status'
     These subcommands are specific to GNU/Linux systems.  They show
     the process-related information, including the user ID and group
     ID; how many threads are there in the process; its virtual memory
     usage; the signals that are pending, blocked, and ignored; its
     TTY; its consumption of system and user time; its stack size; its
     `nice' value; etc.  For more information, see the `proc' man page
     (type `man 5 proc' from your shell prompt).

`info proc all'
     Show all the information about the process described under all of
     the above `info proc' subcommands.

`set procfs-trace'
     This command enables and disables tracing of `procfs' API calls.

`show procfs-trace'
     Show the current state of `procfs' API call tracing.

`set procfs-file FILE'
     Tell GDB to write `procfs' API trace to the named FILE.  GDB
     appends the trace info to the previous contents of the file.  The
     default is to display the trace on the standard output.

`show procfs-file'
     Show the file to which `procfs' API trace is written.

`proc-trace-entry'
`proc-trace-exit'
`proc-untrace-entry'
`proc-untrace-exit'
     These commands enable and disable tracing of entries into and exits
     from the `syscall' interface.

`info pidlist'
     For QNX Neutrino only, this command displays the list of all the
     processes and all the threads within each process.

`info meminfo'
     For QNX Neutrino only, this command displays the list of all
     mapinfos.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: DJGPP Native,  Next: Cygwin Native,  Prev: SVR4 Process Information,  Up: Native

18.1.4 Features for Debugging DJGPP Programs
--------------------------------------------

DJGPP is a port of the GNU development tools to MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
DJGPP programs are 32-bit protected-mode programs that use the "DPMI"
(DOS Protected-Mode Interface) API to run on top of real-mode DOS
systems and their emulations.

   GDB supports native debugging of DJGPP programs, and defines a few
commands specific to the DJGPP port.  This subsection describes those
commands.

`info dos'
     This is a prefix of DJGPP-specific commands which print
     information about the target system and important OS structures.

`info dos sysinfo'
     This command displays assorted information about the underlying
     platform: the CPU type and features, the OS version and flavor, the
     DPMI version, and the available conventional and DPMI memory.

`info dos gdt'
`info dos ldt'
`info dos idt'
     These 3 commands display entries from, respectively, Global, Local,
     and Interrupt Descriptor Tables (GDT, LDT, and IDT).  The
     descriptor tables are data structures which store a descriptor for
     each segment that is currently in use.  The segment's selector is
     an index into a descriptor table; the table entry for that index
     holds the descriptor's base address and limit, and its attributes
     and access rights.

     A typical DJGPP program uses 3 segments: a code segment, a data
     segment (used for both data and the stack), and a DOS segment
     (which allows access to DOS/BIOS data structures and absolute
     addresses in conventional memory).  However, the DPMI host will
     usually define additional segments in order to support the DPMI
     environment.

     These commands allow to display entries from the descriptor tables.
     Without an argument, all entries from the specified table are
     displayed.  An argument, which should be an integer expression,
     means display a single entry whose index is given by the argument.
     For example, here's a convenient way to display information about
     the debugged program's data segment:

     `(gdb) info dos ldt $ds'
     `0x13f: base=0x11970000 limit=0x0009ffff 32-Bit Data (Read/Write, Exp-up)'


     This comes in handy when you want to see whether a pointer is
     outside the data segment's limit (i.e. "garbled").

`info dos pde'
`info dos pte'
     These two commands display entries from, respectively, the Page
     Directory and the Page Tables.  Page Directories and Page Tables
     are data structures which control how virtual memory addresses are
     mapped into physical addresses.  A Page Table includes an entry
     for every page of memory that is mapped into the program's address
     space; there may be several Page Tables, each one holding up to
     4096 entries.  A Page Directory has up to 4096 entries, one each
     for every Page Table that is currently in use.

     Without an argument, `info dos pde' displays the entire Page
     Directory, and `info dos pte' displays all the entries in all of
     the Page Tables.  An argument, an integer expression, given to the
     `info dos pde' command means display only that entry from the Page
     Directory table.  An argument given to the `info dos pte' command
     means display entries from a single Page Table, the one pointed to
     by the specified entry in the Page Directory.

     These commands are useful when your program uses "DMA" (Direct
     Memory Access), which needs physical addresses to program the DMA
     controller.

     These commands are supported only with some DPMI servers.

`info dos address-pte ADDR'
     This command displays the Page Table entry for a specified linear
     address.  The argument ADDR is a linear address which should
     already have the appropriate segment's base address added to it,
     because this command accepts addresses which may belong to _any_
     segment.  For example, here's how to display the Page Table entry
     for the page where a variable `i' is stored:

     `(gdb) info dos address-pte __djgpp_base_address + (char *)&i'
     `Page Table entry for address 0x11a00d30:'
     `Base=0x02698000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0xd30'


     This says that `i' is stored at offset `0xd30' from the page whose
     physical base address is `0x02698000', and shows all the
     attributes of that page.

     Note that you must cast the addresses of variables to a `char *',
     since otherwise the value of `__djgpp_base_address', the base
     address of all variables and functions in a DJGPP program, will be
     added using the rules of C pointer arithmetics: if `i' is declared
     an `int', GDB will add 4 times the value of `__djgpp_base_address'
     to the address of `i'.

     Here's another example, it displays the Page Table entry for the
     transfer buffer:

     `(gdb) info dos address-pte *((unsigned *)&_go32_info_block + 3)'
     `Page Table entry for address 0x29110:'
     `Base=0x00029000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0x110'


     (The `+ 3' offset is because the transfer buffer's address is the
     3rd member of the `_go32_info_block' structure.)  The output
     clearly shows that this DPMI server maps the addresses in
     conventional memory 1:1, i.e. the physical (`0x00029000' +
     `0x110') and linear (`0x29110') addresses are identical.

     This command is supported only with some DPMI servers.

   In addition to native debugging, the DJGPP port supports remote
debugging via a serial data link.  The following commands are specific
to remote serial debugging in the DJGPP port of GDB.

`set com1base ADDR'
     This command sets the base I/O port address of the `COM1' serial
     port.

`set com1irq IRQ'
     This command sets the "Interrupt Request" (`IRQ') line to use for
     the `COM1' serial port.

     There are similar commands `set com2base', `set com3irq', etc. for
     setting the port address and the `IRQ' lines for the other 3 COM
     ports.

     The related commands `show com1base', `show com1irq' etc.  display
     the current settings of the base address and the `IRQ' lines used
     by the COM ports.

`info serial'
     This command prints the status of the 4 DOS serial ports.  For each
     port, it prints whether it's active or not, its I/O base address
     and IRQ number, whether it uses a 16550-style FIFO, its baudrate,
     and the counts of various errors encountered so far.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Cygwin Native,  Next: Hurd Native,  Prev: DJGPP Native,  Up: Native

18.1.5 Features for Debugging MS Windows PE executables
-------------------------------------------------------

GDB supports native debugging of MS Windows programs, including DLLs
with and without symbolic debugging information. There are various
additional Cygwin-specific commands, described in this subsection.  The
subsubsection *note Non-debug DLL symbols:: describes working with DLLs
that have no debugging symbols.

`info w32'
     This is a prefix of MS Windows specific commands which print
     information about the target system and important OS structures.

`info w32 selector'
     This command displays information returned by the Win32 API
     `GetThreadSelectorEntry' function.  It takes an optional argument
     that is evaluated to a long value to give the information about
     this given selector.  Without argument, this command displays
     information about the the six segment registers.

`info dll'
     This is a Cygwin specific alias of info shared.

`dll-symbols'
     This command loads symbols from a dll similarly to add-sym command
     but without the need to specify a base address.

`set cygwin-exceptions MODE'
     If MODE is `on', GDB will break on exceptions that happen inside
     the Cygwin DLL.  If MODE is `off', GDB will delay recognition of
     exceptions, and may ignore some exceptions which seem to be caused
     by internal Cygwin DLL "bookkeeping".  This option is meant
     primarily for debugging the Cygwin DLL itself; the default value
     is `off' to avoid annoying GDB users with false `SIGSEGV' signals.

`show cygwin-exceptions'
     Displays whether GDB will break on exceptions that happen inside
     the Cygwin DLL itself.

`set new-console MODE'
     If MODE is `on' the debuggee will be started in a new console on
     next start.  If MODE is `off'i, the debuggee will be started in
     the same console as the debugger.

`show new-console'
     Displays whether a new console is used when the debuggee is
     started.

`set new-group MODE'
     This boolean value controls whether the debuggee should start a
     new group or stay in the same group as the debugger.  This affects
     the way the Windows OS handles `Ctrl-C'.

`show new-group'
     Displays current value of new-group boolean.

`set debugevents'
     This boolean value adds debug output concerning kernel events
     related to the debuggee seen by the debugger.  This includes
     events that signal thread and process creation and exit, DLL
     loading and unloading, console interrupts, and debugging messages
     produced by the Windows `OutputDebugString' API call.

`set debugexec'
     This boolean value adds debug output concerning execute events
     (such as resume thread) seen by the debugger.

`set debugexceptions'
     This boolean value adds debug output concerning exceptions in the
     debuggee seen by the debugger.

`set debugmemory'
     This boolean value adds debug output concerning debuggee memory
     reads and writes by the debugger.

`set shell'
     This boolean values specifies whether the debuggee is called via a
     shell or directly (default value is on).

`show shell'
     Displays if the debuggee will be started with a shell.


* Menu:

* Non-debug DLL symbols::  Support for DLLs without debugging symbols

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Non-debug DLL symbols,  Up: Cygwin Native

18.1.5.1 Support for DLLs without debugging symbols
...................................................

Very often on windows, some of the DLLs that your program relies on do
not include symbolic debugging information (for example,
`kernel32.dll'). When GDB doesn't recognize any debugging symbols in a
DLL, it relies on the minimal amount of symbolic information contained
in the DLL's export table. This subsubsection describes working with
such symbols, known internally to GDB as "minimal symbols".

   Note that before the debugged program has started execution, no DLLs
will have been loaded. The easiest way around this problem is simply to
start the program -- either by setting a breakpoint or letting the
program run once to completion. It is also possible to force GDB to
load a particular DLL before starting the executable -- see the shared
library information in *note Files:: or the `dll-symbols' command in
*note Cygwin Native::. Currently, explicitly loading symbols from a DLL
with no debugging information will cause the symbol names to be
duplicated in GDB's lookup table, which may adversely affect symbol
lookup performance.

18.1.5.2 DLL name prefixes
..........................

In keeping with the naming conventions used by the Microsoft debugging
tools, DLL export symbols are made available with a prefix based on the
DLL name, for instance `KERNEL32!CreateFileA'.  The plain name is also
entered into the symbol table, so `CreateFileA' is often sufficient. In
some cases there will be name clashes within a program (particularly if
the executable itself includes full debugging symbols) necessitating
the use of the fully qualified name when referring to the contents of
the DLL. Use single-quotes around the name to avoid the exclamation
mark ("!")  being interpreted as a language operator.

   Note that the internal name of the DLL may be all upper-case, even
though the file name of the DLL is lower-case, or vice-versa. Since
symbols within GDB are _case-sensitive_ this may cause some confusion.
If in doubt, try the `info functions' and `info variables' commands or
even `maint print msymbols' (see *note Symbols::). Here's an example:

     (gdb) info function CreateFileA
     All functions matching regular expression "CreateFileA":

     Non-debugging symbols:
     0x77e885f4  CreateFileA
     0x77e885f4  KERNEL32!CreateFileA

     (gdb) info function !
     All functions matching regular expression "!":

     Non-debugging symbols:
     0x6100114c  cygwin1!__assert
     0x61004034  cygwin1!_dll_crt0@0
     0x61004240  cygwin1!dll_crt0(per_process *)
     [etc...]

18.1.5.3 Working with minimal symbols
.....................................

Symbols extracted from a DLL's export table do not contain very much
type information. All that GDB can do is guess whether a symbol refers
to a function or variable depending on the linker section that contains
the symbol. Also note that the actual contents of the memory contained
in a DLL are not available unless the program is running. This means
that you cannot examine the contents of a variable or disassemble a
function within a DLL without a running program.

   Variables are generally treated as pointers and dereferenced
automatically. For this reason, it is often necessary to prefix a
variable name with the address-of operator ("&") and provide explicit
type information in the command. Here's an example of the type of
problem:

     (gdb) print 'cygwin1!__argv'
     $1 = 268572168

     (gdb) x 'cygwin1!__argv'
     0x10021610:      "\230y\""

   And two possible solutions:

     (gdb) print ((char **)'cygwin1!__argv')[0]
     $2 = 0x22fd98 "/cygdrive/c/mydirectory/myprogram"

     (gdb) x/2x &'cygwin1!__argv'
     0x610c0aa8 <cygwin1!__argv>:    0x10021608      0x00000000
     (gdb) x/x 0x10021608
     0x10021608:     0x0022fd98
     (gdb) x/s 0x0022fd98
     0x22fd98:        "/cygdrive/c/mydirectory/myprogram"

   Setting a break point within a DLL is possible even before the
program starts execution. However, under these circumstances, GDB can't
examine the initial instructions of the function in order to skip the
function's frame set-up code. You can work around this by using "*&" to
set the breakpoint at a raw memory address:

     (gdb) break *&'python22!PyOS_Readline'
     Breakpoint 1 at 0x1e04eff0

   The author of these extensions is not entirely convinced that
setting a break point within a shared DLL like `kernel32.dll' is
completely safe.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Hurd Native,  Next: Neutrino,  Prev: Cygwin Native,  Up: Native

18.1.6 Commands specific to GNU Hurd systems
--------------------------------------------

This subsection describes GDB commands specific to the GNU Hurd native
debugging.

`set signals'
`set sigs'
     This command toggles the state of inferior signal interception by
     GDB.  Mach exceptions, such as breakpoint traps, are not affected
     by this command.  `sigs' is a shorthand alias for `signals'.

`show signals'
`show sigs'
     Show the current state of intercepting inferior's signals.

`set signal-thread'
`set sigthread'
     This command tells GDB which thread is the `libc' signal thread.
     That thread is run when a signal is delivered to a running
     process.  `set sigthread' is the shorthand alias of `set
     signal-thread'.

`show signal-thread'
`show sigthread'
     These two commands show which thread will run when the inferior is
     delivered a signal.

`set stopped'
     This commands tells GDB that the inferior process is stopped, as
     with the `SIGSTOP' signal.  The stopped process can be continued
     by delivering a signal to it.

`show stopped'
     This command shows whether GDB thinks the debuggee is stopped.

`set exceptions'
     Use this command to turn off trapping of exceptions in the
     inferior.  When exception trapping is off, neither breakpoints nor
     single-stepping will work.  To restore the default, set exception
     trapping on.

`show exceptions'
     Show the current state of trapping exceptions in the inferior.

`set task pause'
     This command toggles task suspension when GDB has control.
     Setting it to on takes effect immediately, and the task is
     suspended whenever GDB gets control.  Setting it to off will take
     effect the next time the inferior is continued.  If this option is
     set to off, you can use `set thread default pause on' or `set
     thread pause on' (see below) to pause individual threads.

`show task pause'
     Show the current state of task suspension.

`set task detach-suspend-count'
     This command sets the suspend count the task will be left with when
     GDB detaches from it.

`show task detach-suspend-count'
     Show the suspend count the task will be left with when detaching.

`set task exception-port'
`set task excp'
     This command sets the task exception port to which GDB will
     forward exceptions.  The argument should be the value of the "send
     rights" of the task.  `set task excp' is a shorthand alias.

`set noninvasive'
     This command switches GDB to a mode that is the least invasive as
     far as interfering with the inferior is concerned.  This is the
     same as using `set task pause', `set exceptions', and `set
     signals' to values opposite to the defaults.

`info send-rights'
`info receive-rights'
`info port-rights'
`info port-sets'
`info dead-names'
`info ports'
`info psets'
     These commands display information about, respectively, send
     rights, receive rights, port rights, port sets, and dead names of
     a task.  There are also shorthand aliases: `info ports' for `info
     port-rights' and `info psets' for `info port-sets'.

`set thread pause'
     This command toggles current thread suspension when GDB has
     control.  Setting it to on takes effect immediately, and the
     current thread is suspended whenever GDB gets control.  Setting it
     to off will take effect the next time the inferior is continued.
     Normally, this command has no effect, since when GDB has control,
     the whole task is suspended.  However, if you used `set task pause
     off' (see above), this command comes in handy to suspend only the
     current thread.

`show thread pause'
     This command shows the state of current thread suspension.

`set thread run'
     This comamnd sets whether the current thread is allowed to run.

`show thread run'
     Show whether the current thread is allowed to run.

`set thread detach-suspend-count'
     This command sets the suspend count GDB will leave on a thread
     when detaching.  This number is relative to the suspend count
     found by GDB when it notices the thread; use `set thread
     takeover-suspend-count' to force it to an absolute value.

`show thread detach-suspend-count'
     Show the suspend count GDB will leave on the thread when detaching.

`set thread exception-port'
`set thread excp'
     Set the thread exception port to which to forward exceptions.  This
     overrides the port set by `set task exception-port' (see above).
     `set thread excp' is the shorthand alias.

`set thread takeover-suspend-count'
     Normally, GDB's thread suspend counts are relative to the value
     GDB finds when it notices each thread.  This command changes the
     suspend counts to be absolute instead.

`set thread default'
`show thread default'
     Each of the above `set thread' commands has a `set thread default'
     counterpart (e.g., `set thread default pause', `set thread default
     exception-port', etc.).  The `thread default' variety of commands
     sets the default thread properties for all threads; you can then
     change the properties of individual threads with the non-default
     commands.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Neutrino,  Prev: Hurd Native,  Up: Native

18.1.7 QNX Neutrino
-------------------

GDB provides the following commands specific to the QNX Neutrino target:

`set debug nto-debug'
     When set to on, enables debugging messages specific to the QNX
     Neutrino support.

`show debug nto-debug'
     Show the current state of QNX Neutrino messages.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Embedded OS,  Next: Embedded Processors,  Prev: Native,  Up: Configurations

18.2 Embedded Operating Systems
===============================

This section describes configurations involving the debugging of
embedded operating systems that are available for several different
architectures.

* Menu:

* VxWorks::                     Using GDB with VxWorks

   GDB includes the ability to debug programs running on various
real-time operating systems.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: VxWorks,  Up: Embedded OS

18.2.1 Using GDB with VxWorks
-----------------------------

`target vxworks MACHINENAME'
     A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP.  The argument MACHINENAME
     is the target system's machine name or IP address.


   On VxWorks, `load' links FILENAME dynamically on the current target
system as well as adding its symbols in GDB.

   GDB enables developers to spawn and debug tasks running on networked
VxWorks targets from a Unix host.  Already-running tasks spawned from
the VxWorks shell can also be debugged.  GDB uses code that runs on
both the Unix host and on the VxWorks target.  The program `gdb' is
installed and executed on the Unix host.  (It may be installed with the
name `vxgdb', to distinguish it from a GDB for debugging programs on
the host itself.)

`VxWorks-timeout ARGS'
     All VxWorks-based targets now support the option `vxworks-timeout'.
     This option is set by the user, and  ARGS represents the number of
     seconds GDB waits for responses to rpc's.  You might use this if
     your VxWorks target is a slow software simulator or is on the far
     side of a thin network line.

   The following information on connecting to VxWorks was current when
this manual was produced; newer releases of VxWorks may use revised
procedures.

   To use GDB with VxWorks, you must rebuild your VxWorks kernel to
include the remote debugging interface routines in the VxWorks library
`rdb.a'.  To do this, define `INCLUDE_RDB' in the VxWorks configuration
file `configAll.h' and rebuild your VxWorks kernel.  The resulting
kernel contains `rdb.a', and spawns the source debugging task
`tRdbTask' when VxWorks is booted.  For more information on configuring
and remaking VxWorks, see the manufacturer's manual.

   Once you have included `rdb.a' in your VxWorks system image and set
your Unix execution search path to find GDB, you are ready to run GDB.
From your Unix host, run `gdb' (or `vxgdb', depending on your
installation).

   GDB comes up showing the prompt:

     (vxgdb)

* Menu:

* VxWorks Connection::          Connecting to VxWorks
* VxWorks Download::            VxWorks download
* VxWorks Attach::              Running tasks

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: VxWorks Connection,  Next: VxWorks Download,  Up: VxWorks

18.2.1.1 Connecting to VxWorks
..............................

The GDB command `target' lets you connect to a VxWorks target on the
network.  To connect to a target whose host name is "`tt'", type:

     (vxgdb) target vxworks tt

   GDB displays messages like these:

     Attaching remote machine across net...
     Connected to tt.

   GDB then attempts to read the symbol tables of any object modules
loaded into the VxWorks target since it was last booted.  GDB locates
these files by searching the directories listed in the command search
path (*note Your program's environment: Environment.); if it fails to
find an object file, it displays a message such as:

     prog.o: No such file or directory.

   When this happens, add the appropriate directory to the search path
with the GDB command `path', and execute the `target' command again.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: VxWorks Download,  Next: VxWorks Attach,  Prev: VxWorks Connection,  Up: VxWorks

18.2.1.2 VxWorks download
.........................

If you have connected to the VxWorks target and you want to debug an
object that has not yet been loaded, you can use the GDB `load' command
to download a file from Unix to VxWorks incrementally.  The object file
given as an argument to the `load' command is actually opened twice:
first by the VxWorks target in order to download the code, then by GDB
in order to read the symbol table.  This can lead to problems if the
current working directories on the two systems differ.  If both systems
have NFS mounted the same filesystems, you can avoid these problems by
using absolute paths.  Otherwise, it is simplest to set the working
directory on both systems to the directory in which the object file
resides, and then to reference the file by its name, without any path.
For instance, a program `prog.o' may reside in `VXPATH/vw/demo/rdb' in
VxWorks and in `HOSTPATH/vw/demo/rdb' on the host.  To load this
program, type this on VxWorks:

     -> cd "VXPATH/vw/demo/rdb"

Then, in GDB, type:

     (vxgdb) cd HOSTPATH/vw/demo/rdb
     (vxgdb) load prog.o

   GDB displays a response similar to this:

     Reading symbol data from wherever/vw/demo/rdb/prog.o... done.

   You can also use the `load' command to reload an object module after
editing and recompiling the corresponding source file.  Note that this
makes GDB delete all currently-defined breakpoints, auto-displays, and
convenience variables, and to clear the value history.  (This is
necessary in order to preserve the integrity of debugger's data
structures that reference the target system's symbol table.)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: VxWorks Attach,  Prev: VxWorks Download,  Up: VxWorks

18.2.1.3 Running tasks
......................

You can also attach to an existing task using the `attach' command as
follows:

     (vxgdb) attach TASK

where TASK is the VxWorks hexadecimal task ID.  The task can be running
or suspended when you attach to it.  Running tasks are suspended at the
time of attachment.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Embedded Processors,  Next: Architectures,  Prev: Embedded OS,  Up: Configurations

18.3 Embedded Processors
========================

This section goes into details specific to particular embedded
configurations.

   Whenever a specific embedded processor has a simulator, GDB allows
to send an arbitrary command to the simulator.

`sim COMMAND'
     Send an arbitrary COMMAND string to the simulator.  Consult the
     documentation for the specific simulator in use for information
     about acceptable commands.

* Menu:

* ARM::                         ARM RDI
* H8/300::                      Renesas H8/300
* H8/500::                      Renesas H8/500
* M32R/D::                      Renesas M32R/D
* M68K::                        Motorola M68K
* MIPS Embedded::               MIPS Embedded
* OpenRISC 1000::               OpenRisc 1000
* PA::                          HP PA Embedded
* PowerPC:                      PowerPC
* SH::                          Renesas SH
* Sparclet::                    Tsqware Sparclet
* Sparclite::                   Fujitsu Sparclite
* ST2000::                      Tandem ST2000
* Z8000::                       Zilog Z8000
* AVR::                         Atmel AVR
* CRIS::                        CRIS
* Super-H::                     Renesas Super-H
* WinCE::                       Windows CE child processes

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: H8/300,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.1 ARM
----------

`target rdi DEV'
     ARM Angel monitor, via RDI library interface to ADP protocol.  You
     may use this target to communicate with both boards running the
     Angel monitor, or with the EmbeddedICE JTAG debug device.

`target rdp DEV'
     ARM Demon monitor.


   GDB provides the following ARM-specific commands:

`set arm disassembler'
     This commands selects from a list of disassembly styles.  The
     `"std"' style is the standard style.

`show arm disassembler'
     Show the current disassembly style.

`set arm apcs32'
     This command toggles ARM operation mode between 32-bit and 26-bit.

`show arm apcs32'
     Display the current usage of the ARM 32-bit mode.

`set arm fpu FPUTYPE'
     This command sets the ARM floating-point unit (FPU) type.  The
     argument FPUTYPE can be one of these:

    `auto'
          Determine the FPU type by querying the OS ABI.

    `softfpa'
          Software FPU, with mixed-endian doubles on little-endian ARM
          processors.

    `fpa'
          GCC-compiled FPA co-processor.

    `softvfp'
          Software FPU with pure-endian doubles.

    `vfp'
          VFP co-processor.

`show arm fpu'
     Show the current type of the FPU.

`set arm abi'
     This command forces GDB to use the specified ABI.

`show arm abi'
     Show the currently used ABI.

`set debug arm'
     Toggle whether to display ARM-specific debugging messages from the
     ARM target support subsystem.

`show debug arm'
     Show whether ARM-specific debugging messages are enabled.

   The following commands are available when an ARM target is debugged
using the RDI interface:

`rdilogfile [FILE]'
     Set the filename for the ADP (Angel Debugger Protocol) packet log.
     With an argument, sets the log file to the specified FILE.  With
     no argument, show the current log file name.  The default log file
     is `rdi.log'.

`rdilogenable [ARG]'
     Control logging of ADP packets.  With an argument of 1 or `"yes"'
     enables logging, with an argument 0 or `"no"' disables it.  With
     no arguments displays the current setting.  When logging is
     enabled, ADP packets exchanged between GDB and the RDI target
     device are logged to a file.

`set rdiromatzero'
     Tell GDB whether the target has ROM at address 0.  If on, vector
     catching is disabled, so that zero address can be used.  If off
     (the default), vector catching is enabled.  For this command to
     take effect, it needs to be invoked prior to the `target rdi'
     command.

`show rdiromatzero'
     Show the current setting of ROM at zero address.

`set rdiheartbeat'
     Enable or disable RDI heartbeat packets.  It is not recommended to
     turn on this option, since it confuses ARM and EPI JTAG interface,
     as well as the Angel monitor.

`show rdiheartbeat'
     Show the setting of RDI heartbeat packets.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: H8/500,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.2 Renesas H8/300
---------------------

`target hms DEV'
     A Renesas SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to
     your host.  Use special commands `device' and `speed' to control
     the serial line and the communications speed used.

`target e7000 DEV'
     E7000 emulator for Renesas H8 and SH.

`target sh3 DEV'
`target sh3e DEV'
     Renesas SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.


   When you select remote debugging to a Renesas SH, H8/300, or H8/500
board, the `load' command downloads your program to the Renesas board
and also opens it as the current executable target for GDB on your host
(like the `file' command).

   GDB needs to know these things to talk to your Renesas SH, H8/300,
or H8/500:

  1. that you want to use `target hms', the remote debugging interface
     for Renesas microprocessors, or `target e7000', the in-circuit
     emulator for the Renesas SH and the Renesas 300H.  (`target hms' is
     the default when GDB is configured specifically for the Renesas SH,
     H8/300, or H8/500.)

  2. what serial device connects your host to your Renesas board (the
     first serial device available on your host is the default).

  3. what speed to use over the serial device.

* Menu:

* Renesas Boards::      Connecting to Renesas boards.
* Renesas ICE::         Using the E7000 In-Circuit Emulator.
* Renesas Special::     Special GDB commands for Renesas micros.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Renesas Boards,  Next: Renesas ICE,  Up: H8/300

18.3.2.1 Connecting to Renesas boards
.....................................

Use the special `GDB' command `device PORT' if you need to explicitly
set the serial device.  The default PORT is the first available port on
your host.  This is only necessary on Unix hosts, where it is typically
something like `/dev/ttya'.

   `GDB' has another special command to set the communications speed:
`speed BPS'.  This command also is only used from Unix hosts; on DOS
hosts, set the line speed as usual from outside GDB with the DOS `mode'
command (for instance, `mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p' for a 9600bps
connection).

   The `device' and `speed' commands are available only when you use a
Unix host to debug your Renesas microprocessor programs.  If you use a
DOS host, GDB depends on an auxiliary terminate-and-stay-resident
program called `asynctsr' to communicate with the development board
through a PC serial port.  You must also use the DOS `mode' command to
set up the serial port on the DOS side.

   The following sample session illustrates the steps needed to start a
program under GDB control on an H8/300.  The example uses a sample
H8/300 program called `t.x'.  The procedure is the same for the Renesas
SH and the H8/500.

   First hook up your development board.  In this example, we use a
board attached to serial port `COM2'; if you use a different serial
port, substitute its name in the argument of the `mode' command.  When
you call `asynctsr', the auxiliary comms program used by the debugger,
you give it just the numeric part of the serial port's name; for
example, `asyncstr 2' below runs `asyncstr' on `COM2'.

     C:\H8300\TEST> asynctsr 2
     C:\H8300\TEST> mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p

     Resident portion of MODE loaded

     COM2: 9600, n, 8, 1, p

     _Warning:_ We have noticed a bug in PC-NFS that conflicts with
     `asynctsr'.  If you also run PC-NFS on your DOS host, you may need
     to disable it, or even boot without it, to use `asynctsr' to
     control your development board.

   Now that serial communications are set up, and the development board
is connected, you can start up GDB.  Call `GDB' with the name of your
program as the argument.  `GDB' prompts you, as usual, with the prompt
`(gdb)'.  Use two special commands to begin your debugging session:
`target hms' to specify cross-debugging to the Renesas board, and the
`load' command to download your program to the board.  `load' displays
the names of the program's sections, and a `*' for each 2K of data
downloaded.  (If you want to refresh GDB data on symbols or on the
executable file without downloading, use the GDB commands `file' or
`symbol-file'.  These commands, and `load' itself, are described in
*Note Commands to specify files: Files.)

     (eg-C:\H8300\TEST) gdb t.x
     GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
      of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
      the conditions.
     There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
     for details.
     GDB 6.6, Copyright 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
     (gdb) target hms
     Connected to remote H8/300 HMS system.
     (gdb) load t.x
     .text   : 0x8000 .. 0xabde ***********
     .data   : 0xabde .. 0xad30 *
     .stack  : 0xf000 .. 0xf014 *

   At this point, you're ready to run or debug your program.  From here
on, you can use all the usual GDB commands.  The `break' command sets
breakpoints; the `run' command starts your program; `print' or `x'
display data; the `continue' command resumes execution after stopping
at a breakpoint.  You can use the `help' command at any time to find
out more about GDB commands.

   Remember, however, that _operating system_ facilities aren't
available on your development board; for example, if your program hangs,
you can't send an interrupt--but you can press the RESET switch!

   Use the RESET button on the development board
   * to interrupt your program (don't use `Ctrl-c' on the DOS host--it
     has no way to pass an interrupt signal to the development board);
     and

   * to return to the GDB command prompt after your program finishes
     normally.  The communications protocol provides no other way for
     GDB to detect program completion.

   In either case, GDB sees the effect of a RESET on the development
board as a "normal exit" of your program.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Renesas ICE,  Next: Renesas Special,  Prev: Renesas Boards,  Up: H8/300

18.3.2.2 Using the E7000 in-circuit emulator
............................................

You can use the E7000 in-circuit emulator to develop code for either the
Renesas SH or the H8/300H.  Use one of these forms of the `target
e7000' command to connect GDB to your E7000:

`target e7000 PORT SPEED'
     Use this form if your E7000 is connected to a serial port.  The
     PORT argument identifies what serial port to use (for example,
     `com2').  The third argument is the line speed in bits per second
     (for example, `9600').

`target e7000 HOSTNAME'
     If your E7000 is installed as a host on a TCP/IP network, you can
     just specify its hostname; GDB uses `telnet' to connect.

   The following special commands are available when debugging with the
Renesas E7000 ICE:

`e7000 COMMAND'
     This sends the specified COMMAND to the E7000 monitor.

`ftplogin MACHINE USERNAME PASSWORD DIR'
     This command records information for subsequent interface with the
     E7000 monitor via the FTP protocol: GDB will log into the named
     MACHINE using specified USERNAME and PASSWORD, and then chdir to
     the named directory DIR.

`ftpload FILE'
     This command uses credentials recorded by `ftplogin' to fetch and
     load the named FILE from the E7000 monitor.

`drain'
     This command drains any pending text buffers stored on the E7000.

`set usehardbreakpoints'
`show usehardbreakpoints'
     These commands set and show the use of hardware breakpoints for all
     breakpoints.  *Note hardware-assisted breakpoint: Set Breaks, for
     more information about using hardware breakpoints selectively.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Renesas Special,  Prev: Renesas ICE,  Up: H8/300

18.3.2.3 Special GDB commands for Renesas micros
................................................

Some GDB commands are available only for the H8/300:

`set machine h8300'
`set machine h8300h'
     Condition GDB for one of the two variants of the H8/300
     architecture with `set machine'.  You can use `show machine' to
     check which variant is currently in effect.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: H8/500,  Next: M32R/D,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.3 H8/500
-------------

`set memory MOD'
`show memory'
     Specify which H8/500 memory model (MOD) you are using with `set
     memory'; check which memory model is in effect with `show memory'.
     The accepted values for MOD are `small', `big', `medium', and
     `compact'.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M32R/D,  Next: M68K,  Prev: H8/500,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.4 Renesas M32R/D and M32R/SDI
----------------------------------

`target m32r DEV'
     Renesas M32R/D ROM monitor.

`target m32rsdi DEV'
     Renesas M32R SDI server, connected via parallel port to the board.

   The following GDB commands are specific to the M32R monitor:

`set download-path PATH'
     Set the default path for finding donwloadable SREC files.

`show download-path'
     Show the default path for downloadable SREC files.

`set board-address ADDR'
     Set the IP address for the M32R-EVA target board.

`show board-address'
     Show the current IP address of the target board.

`set server-address ADDR'
     Set the IP address for the download server, which is the GDB's
     host machine.

`show server-address'
     Display the IP address of the download server.

`upload [FILE]'
     Upload the specified SREC FILE via the monitor's Ethernet upload
     capability.  If no FILE argument is given, the current executable
     file is uploaded.

`tload [FILE]'
     Test the `upload' command.

   The following commands are available for M32R/SDI:

`sdireset'
     This command resets the SDI connection.

`sdistatus'
     This command shows the SDI connection status.

`debug_chaos'
     Instructs the remote that M32R/Chaos debugging is to be used.

`use_debug_dma'
     Instructs the remote to use the DEBUG_DMA method of accessing
     memory.

`use_mon_code'
     Instructs the remote to use the MON_CODE method of accessing
     memory.

`use_ib_break'
     Instructs the remote to set breakpoints by IB break.

`use_dbt_break'
     Instructs the remote to set breakpoints by DBT.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MIPS Embedded,  Prev: M32R/D,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.5 M68k
-----------

The Motorola m68k configuration includes ColdFire support, and target
command for the following ROM monitors.

`target abug DEV'
     ABug ROM monitor for M68K.

`target cpu32bug DEV'
     CPU32BUG monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.

`target dbug DEV'
     dBUG ROM monitor for Motorola ColdFire.

`target est DEV'
     EST-300 ICE monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.

`target rom68k DEV'
     ROM 68K monitor, running on an M68K IDP board.


`target rombug DEV'
     ROMBUG ROM monitor for OS/9000.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: MIPS Embedded,  Next: OpenRISC 1000,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.6 MIPS Embedded
--------------------

GDB can use the MIPS remote debugging protocol to talk to a MIPS board
attached to a serial line.  This is available when you configure GDB
with `--target=mips-idt-ecoff'.

   Use these GDB commands to specify the connection to your target
board:

`target mips PORT'
     To run a program on the board, start up `gdb' with the name of
     your program as the argument.  To connect to the board, use the
     command `target mips PORT', where PORT is the name of the serial
     port connected to the board.  If the program has not already been
     downloaded to the board, you may use the `load' command to
     download it.  You can then use all the usual GDB commands.

     For example, this sequence connects to the target board through a
     serial port, and loads and runs a program called PROG through the
     debugger:

          host$ gdb PROG
          GDB is free software and ...
          (gdb) target mips /dev/ttyb
          (gdb) load PROG
          (gdb) run

`target mips HOSTNAME:PORTNUMBER'
     On some GDB host configurations, you can specify a TCP connection
     (for instance, to a serial line managed by a terminal
     concentrator) instead of a serial port, using the syntax
     `HOSTNAME:PORTNUMBER'.

`target pmon PORT'
     PMON ROM monitor.

`target ddb PORT'
     NEC's DDB variant of PMON for Vr4300.

`target lsi PORT'
     LSI variant of PMON.

`target r3900 DEV'
     Densan DVE-R3900 ROM monitor for Toshiba R3900 Mips.

`target array DEV'
     Array Tech LSI33K RAID controller board.


GDB also supports these special commands for MIPS targets:

`set mipsfpu double'
`set mipsfpu single'
`set mipsfpu none'
`set mipsfpu auto'
`show mipsfpu'
     If your target board does not support the MIPS floating point
     coprocessor, you should use the command `set mipsfpu none' (if you
     need this, you may wish to put the command in your GDB init file).
     This tells GDB how to find the return value of functions which
     return floating point values.  It also allows GDB to avoid saving
     the floating point registers when calling functions on the board.
     If you are using a floating point coprocessor with only single
     precision floating point support, as on the R4650 processor, use
     the command `set mipsfpu single'.  The default double precision
     floating point coprocessor may be selected using `set mipsfpu
     double'.

     In previous versions the only choices were double precision or no
     floating point, so `set mipsfpu on' will select double precision
     and `set mipsfpu off' will select no floating point.

     As usual, you can inquire about the `mipsfpu' variable with `show
     mipsfpu'.

`set timeout SECONDS'
`set retransmit-timeout SECONDS'
`show timeout'
`show retransmit-timeout'
     You can control the timeout used while waiting for a packet, in
     the MIPS remote protocol, with the `set timeout SECONDS' command.
     The default is 5 seconds.  Similarly, you can control the timeout
     used while waiting for an acknowledgement of a packet with the `set
     retransmit-timeout SECONDS' command.  The default is 3 seconds.
     You can inspect both values with `show timeout' and `show
     retransmit-timeout'.  (These commands are _only_ available when
     GDB is configured for `--target=mips-idt-ecoff'.)

     The timeout set by `set timeout' does not apply when GDB is
     waiting for your program to stop.  In that case, GDB waits forever
     because it has no way of knowing how long the program is going to
     run before stopping.

`set syn-garbage-limit NUM'
     Limit the maximum number of characters GDB should ignore when it
     tries to synchronize with the remote target.  The default is 10
     characters.  Setting the limit to -1 means there's no limit.

`show syn-garbage-limit'
     Show the current limit on the number of characters to ignore when
     trying to synchronize with the remote system.

`set monitor-prompt PROMPT'
     Tell GDB to expect the specified PROMPT string from the remote
     monitor.  The default depends on the target:
    pmon target
          `PMON'

    ddb target
          `NEC010'

    lsi target
          `PMON>'

`show monitor-prompt'
     Show the current strings GDB expects as the prompt from the remote
     monitor.

`set monitor-warnings'
     Enable or disable monitor warnings about hardware breakpoints.
     This has effect only for the `lsi' target.  When on, GDB will
     display warning messages whose codes are returned by the `lsi'
     PMON monitor for breakpoint commands.

`show monitor-warnings'
     Show the current setting of printing monitor warnings.

`pmon COMMAND'
     This command allows sending an arbitrary COMMAND string to the
     monitor.  The monitor must be in debug mode for this to work.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: OpenRISC 1000,  Next: PA,  Prev: MIPS Embedded,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.7 OpenRISC 1000
--------------------

See OR1k Architecture document (`www.opencores.org') for more
information about platform and commands.

`target jtag jtag://HOST:PORT'
     Connects to remote JTAG server.  JTAG remote server can be either
     an or1ksim or JTAG server, connected via parallel port to the
     board.

     Example: `target jtag jtag://localhost:9999'

`or1ksim COMMAND'
     If connected to `or1ksim' OpenRISC 1000 Architectural Simulator,
     proprietary commands can be executed.

`info or1k spr'
     Displays spr groups.

`info or1k spr GROUP'
`info or1k spr GROUPNO'
     Displays register names in selected group.

`info or1k spr GROUP REGISTER'
`info or1k spr REGISTER'
`info or1k spr GROUPNO REGISTERNO'
`info or1k spr REGISTERNO'
     Shows information about specified spr register.

`spr GROUP REGISTER VALUE'
`spr REGISTER VALUE'
`spr GROUPNO REGISTERNO VALUE'
`spr REGISTERNO VALUE'
     Writes VALUE to specified spr register.

   Some implementations of OpenRISC 1000 Architecture also have
hardware trace.  It is very similar to GDB trace, except it does not
interfere with normal program execution and is thus much faster.
Hardware breakpoints/watchpoint triggers can be set using:
`$LEA/$LDATA'
     Load effective address/data

`$SEA/$SDATA'
     Store effective address/data

`$AEA/$ADATA'
     Access effective address ($SEA or $LEA) or data ($SDATA/$LDATA)

`$FETCH'
     Fetch data

   When triggered, it can capture low level data, like: `PC', `LSEA',
`LDATA', `SDATA', `READSPR', `WRITESPR', `INSTR'.

   `htrace' commands: 
`hwatch CONDITIONAL'
     Set hardware watchpoint on combination of Load/Store Effecive
     Address(es) or Data.  For example:

     `hwatch ($LEA == my_var) && ($LDATA < 50) || ($SEA == my_var) &&
     ($SDATA >= 50)'

     `hwatch ($LEA == my_var) && ($LDATA < 50) || ($SEA == my_var) &&
     ($SDATA >= 50)'

`htrace info'
     Display information about current HW trace configuration.

`htrace trigger CONDITIONAL'
     Set starting criteria for HW trace.

`htrace qualifier CONDITIONAL'
     Set acquisition qualifier for HW trace.

`htrace stop CONDITIONAL'
     Set HW trace stopping criteria.

`htrace record [DATA]*'
     Selects the data to be recorded, when qualifier is met and HW
     trace was triggered.

`htrace enable'
`htrace disable'
     Enables/disables the HW trace.

`htrace rewind [FILENAME]'
     Clears currently recorded trace data.

     If filename is specified, new trace file is made and any newly
     collected data will be written there.

`htrace print [START [LEN]]'
     Prints trace buffer, using current record configuration.

`htrace mode continuous'
     Set continuous trace mode.

`htrace mode suspend'
     Set suspend trace mode.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: PowerPC,  Next: SH,  Prev: PA,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.8 PowerPC
--------------

`target dink32 DEV'
     DINK32 ROM monitor.

`target ppcbug DEV'

`target ppcbug1 DEV'
     PPCBUG ROM monitor for PowerPC.

`target sds DEV'
     SDS monitor, running on a PowerPC board (such as Motorola's ADS).

   The following commands specifi to the SDS protocol are supported
byGDB:

`set sdstimeout NSEC'
     Set the timeout for SDS protocol reads to be NSEC seconds.  The
     default is 2 seconds.

`show sdstimeout'
     Show the current value of the SDS timeout.

`sds COMMAND'
     Send the specified COMMAND string to the SDS monitor.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: PA,  Next: PowerPC,  Prev: OpenRISC 1000,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.9 HP PA Embedded
---------------------

`target op50n DEV'
     OP50N monitor, running on an OKI HPPA board.

`target w89k DEV'
     W89K monitor, running on a Winbond HPPA board.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: SH,  Next: Sparclet,  Prev: PowerPC,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.10 Renesas SH
------------------

`target hms DEV'
     A Renesas SH board attached via serial line to your host.  Use
     special commands `device' and `speed' to control the serial line
     and the communications speed used.

`target e7000 DEV'
     E7000 emulator for Renesas SH.

`target sh3 DEV'

`target sh3e DEV'
     Renesas SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sparclet,  Next: Sparclite,  Prev: SH,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.11 Tsqware Sparclet
------------------------

GDB enables developers to debug tasks running on Sparclet targets from
a Unix host.  GDB uses code that runs on both the Unix host and on the
Sparclet target.  The program `gdb' is installed and executed on the
Unix host.

`remotetimeout ARGS'
     GDB supports the option `remotetimeout'.  This option is set by
     the user, and  ARGS represents the number of seconds GDB waits for
     responses.

   When compiling for debugging, include the options `-g' to get debug
information and `-Ttext' to relocate the program to where you wish to
load it on the target.  You may also want to add the options `-n' or
`-N' in order to reduce the size of the sections.  Example:

     sparclet-aout-gcc prog.c -Ttext 0x12010000 -g -o prog -N

   You can use `objdump' to verify that the addresses are what you
intended:

     sparclet-aout-objdump --headers --syms prog

   Once you have set your Unix execution search path to find GDB, you
are ready to run GDB.  From your Unix host, run `gdb' (or
`sparclet-aout-gdb', depending on your installation).

   GDB comes up showing the prompt:

     (gdbslet)

* Menu:

* Sparclet File::                Setting the file to debug
* Sparclet Connection::          Connecting to Sparclet
* Sparclet Download::            Sparclet download
* Sparclet Execution::           Running and debugging

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sparclet File,  Next: Sparclet Connection,  Up: Sparclet

18.3.11.1 Setting file to debug
...............................

The GDB command `file' lets you choose with program to debug.

     (gdbslet) file prog

   GDB then attempts to read the symbol table of `prog'.  GDB locates
the file by searching the directories listed in the command search path.
If the file was compiled with debug information (option "-g"), source
files will be searched as well.  GDB locates the source files by
searching the directories listed in the directory search path (*note
Your program's environment: Environment.).  If it fails to find a file,
it displays a message such as:

     prog: No such file or directory.

   When this happens, add the appropriate directories to the search
paths with the GDB commands `path' and `dir', and execute the `target'
command again.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sparclet Connection,  Next: Sparclet Download,  Prev: Sparclet File,  Up: Sparclet

18.3.11.2 Connecting to Sparclet
................................

The GDB command `target' lets you connect to a Sparclet target.  To
connect to a target on serial port "`ttya'", type:

     (gdbslet) target sparclet /dev/ttya
     Remote target sparclet connected to /dev/ttya
     main () at ../prog.c:3

   GDB displays messages like these:

     Connected to ttya.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sparclet Download,  Next: Sparclet Execution,  Prev: Sparclet Connection,  Up: Sparclet

18.3.11.3 Sparclet download
...........................

Once connected to the Sparclet target, you can use the GDB `load'
command to download the file from the host to the target.  The file
name and load offset should be given as arguments to the `load' command.
Since the file format is aout, the program must be loaded to the
starting address.  You can use `objdump' to find out what this value
is.  The load offset is an offset which is added to the VMA (virtual
memory address) of each of the file's sections.  For instance, if the
program `prog' was linked to text address 0x1201000, with data at
0x12010160 and bss at 0x12010170, in GDB, type:

     (gdbslet) load prog 0x12010000
     Loading section .text, size 0xdb0 vma 0x12010000

   If the code is loaded at a different address then what the program
was linked to, you may need to use the `section' and `add-symbol-file'
commands to tell GDB where to map the symbol table.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sparclet Execution,  Prev: Sparclet Download,  Up: Sparclet

18.3.11.4 Running and debugging
...............................

You can now begin debugging the task using GDB's execution control
commands, `b', `step', `run', etc.  See the GDB manual for the list of
commands.

     (gdbslet) b main
     Breakpoint 1 at 0x12010000: file prog.c, line 3.
     (gdbslet) run
     Starting program: prog
     Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xeffff21c) at prog.c:3
     3        char *symarg = 0;
     (gdbslet) step
     4        char *execarg = "hello!";
     (gdbslet)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sparclite,  Next: ST2000,  Prev: Sparclet,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.12 Fujitsu Sparclite
-------------------------

`target sparclite DEV'
     Fujitsu sparclite boards, used only for the purpose of loading.
     You must use an additional command to debug the program.  For
     example: target remote DEV using GDB standard remote protocol.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: ST2000,  Next: Z8000,  Prev: Sparclite,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.13 Tandem ST2000
---------------------

GDB may be used with a Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's
STDBUG protocol.

   To connect your ST2000 to the host system, see the manufacturer's
manual.  Once the ST2000 is physically attached, you can run:

     target st2000 DEV SPEED

to establish it as your debugging environment.  DEV is normally the
name of a serial device, such as `/dev/ttya', connected to the ST2000
via a serial line.  You can instead specify DEV as a TCP connection
(for example, to a serial line attached via a terminal concentrator)
using the syntax `HOSTNAME:PORTNUMBER'.

   The `load' and `attach' commands are _not_ defined for this target;
you must load your program into the ST2000 as you normally would for
standalone operation.  GDB reads debugging information (such as
symbols) from a separate, debugging version of the program available on
your host computer.

   These auxiliary GDB commands are available to help you with the
ST2000 environment:

`st2000 COMMAND'
     Send a COMMAND to the STDBUG monitor.  See the manufacturer's
     manual for available commands.

`connect'
     Connect the controlling terminal to the STDBUG command monitor.
     When you are done interacting with STDBUG, typing either of two
     character sequences gets you back to the GDB command prompt:
     `<RET> ~ .' (Return, followed by tilde and period) or `<RET> ~
     Ctrl-d' (Return, followed by tilde and control-D).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Z8000,  Next: AVR,  Prev: ST2000,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.14 Zilog Z8000
-------------------

When configured for debugging Zilog Z8000 targets, GDB includes a Z8000
simulator.

   For the Z8000 family, `target sim' simulates either the Z8002 (the
unsegmented variant of the Z8000 architecture) or the Z8001 (the
segmented variant).  The simulator recognizes which architecture is
appropriate by inspecting the object code.

`target sim ARGS'
     Debug programs on a simulated CPU.  If the simulator supports setup
     options, specify them via ARGS.

After specifying this target, you can debug programs for the simulated
CPU in the same style as programs for your host computer; use the
`file' command to load a new program image, the `run' command to run
your program, and so on.

   As well as making available all the usual machine registers (*note
Registers: Registers.), the Z8000 simulator provides three additional
items of information as specially named registers:

`cycles'
     Counts clock-ticks in the simulator.

`insts'
     Counts instructions run in the simulator.

`time'
     Execution time in 60ths of a second.


   You can refer to these values in GDB expressions with the usual
conventions; for example, `b fputc if $cycles>5000' sets a conditional
breakpoint that suspends only after at least 5000 simulated clock ticks.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: AVR,  Next: CRIS,  Prev: Z8000,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.15 Atmel AVR
-----------------

When configured for debugging the Atmel AVR, GDB supports the following
AVR-specific commands:

`info io_registers'
     This command displays information about the AVR I/O registers.  For
     each register, GDB prints its number and value.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: CRIS,  Next: Super-H,  Prev: AVR,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.16 CRIS
------------

When configured for debugging CRIS, GDB provides the following
CRIS-specific commands:

`set cris-version VER'
     Set the current CRIS version to VER, either `10' or `32'.  The
     CRIS version affects register names and sizes.  This command is
     useful in case autodetection of the CRIS version fails.

`show cris-version'
     Show the current CRIS version.

`set cris-dwarf2-cfi'
     Set the usage of DWARF-2 CFI for CRIS debugging.  The default is
     `on'.  Change to `off' when using `gcc-cris' whose version is below
     `R59'.

`show cris-dwarf2-cfi'
     Show the current state of using DWARF-2 CFI.

`set cris-mode MODE'
     Set the current CRIS mode to MODE.  It should only be changed when
     debugging in guru mode, in which case it should be set to `guru'
     (the default is `normal').

`show cris-mode'
     Show the current CRIS mode.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Super-H,  Next: WinCE,  Prev: CRIS,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.17 Renesas Super-H
-----------------------

For the Renesas Super-H processor, GDB provides these commands:

`regs'
     Show the values of all Super-H registers.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: WinCE,  Prev: Super-H,  Up: Embedded Processors

18.3.18 Windows CE
------------------

The following commands are available for Windows CE:

`set remotedirectory DIR'
     Tell GDB to upload files from the named directory DIR.  The
     default is `/gdb', i.e. the root directory on the current drive.

`show remotedirectory'
     Show the current value of the upload directory.

`set remoteupload METHOD'
     Set the method used to upload files to remote device.  Valid values
     for METHOD are `always', `newer', and `never'.  The default is
     `newer'.

`show remoteupload'
     Show the current setting of the upload method.

`set remoteaddhost'
     Tell GDB whether to add this host to the remote stub's arguments
     when you debug over a network.

`show remoteaddhost'
     Show whether to add this host to remote stub's arguments when
     debugging over a network.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Architectures,  Prev: Embedded Processors,  Up: Configurations

18.4 Architectures
==================

This section describes characteristics of architectures that affect all
uses of GDB with the architecture, both native and cross.

* Menu:

* i386::
* A29K::
* Alpha::
* MIPS::
* HPPA::               HP PA architecture

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: i386,  Next: A29K,  Up: Architectures

18.4.1 x86 Architecture-specific issues.
----------------------------------------

`set struct-convention MODE'
     Set the convention used by the inferior to return `struct's and
     `union's from functions to MODE.  Possible values of MODE are
     `"pcc"', `"reg"', and `"default"' (the default).  `"default"' or
     `"pcc"' means that `struct's are returned on the stack, while
     `"reg"' means that a `struct' or a `union' whose size is 1, 2, 4,
     or 8 bytes will be returned in a register.

`show struct-convention'
     Show the current setting of the convention to return `struct's
     from functions.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: A29K,  Next: Alpha,  Prev: i386,  Up: Architectures

18.4.2 A29K
-----------

`set rstack_high_address ADDRESS'
     On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
     "register stack".  There is no way for GDB to determine the extent
     of this stack.  Normally, GDB just assumes that the stack is
     "large enough".  This may result in GDB referencing memory
     locations that do not exist.  If necessary, you can get around
     this problem by specifying the ending address of the register
     stack with the `set rstack_high_address' command.  The argument
     should be an address, which you probably want to precede with `0x'
     to specify in hexadecimal.

`show rstack_high_address'
     Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000
     family processors.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Alpha,  Next: MIPS,  Prev: A29K,  Up: Architectures

18.4.3 Alpha
------------

See the following section.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: MIPS,  Next: HPPA,  Prev: Alpha,  Up: Architectures

18.4.4 MIPS
-----------

Alpha- and MIPS-based computers use an unusual stack frame, which
sometimes requires GDB to search backward in the object code to find
the beginning of a function.

   To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
GDB may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search) you may
want to limit the size of this search, using one of these commands:

`set heuristic-fence-post LIMIT'
     Restrict GDB to examining at most LIMIT bytes in its search for
     the beginning of a function.  A value of 0 (the default) means
     there is no limit.  However, except for 0, the larger the limit
     the more bytes `heuristic-fence-post' must search and therefore
     the longer it takes to run.  You should only need to use this
     command when debugging a stripped executable.

`show heuristic-fence-post'
     Display the current limit.

These commands are available _only_ when GDB is configured for
debugging programs on Alpha or MIPS processors.

   Several MIPS-specific commands are available when debugging MIPS
programs:

`set mips saved-gpreg-size SIZE'
     Set the size of MIPS general-purpose registers saved on the stack.
     The argument SIZE can be one of the following:

    `32'
          32-bit GP registers

    `64'
          64-bit GP registers

    `auto'
          Use the target's default setting or autodetect the saved size
          from the information contained in the executable.  This is
          the default

`show mips saved-gpreg-size'
     Show the current size of MIPS GP registers on the stack.

`set mips stack-arg-size SIZE'
     Set the amount of stack space reserved for arguments to functions.
     The argument can be one of `"32"', `"64"' or `"auto"' (the
     default).

`set mips abi ARG'
     Tell GDB which MIPS ABI is used by the inferior.  Possible values
     of ARG are:

    `auto'
          The default ABI associated with the current binary (this is
          the default).

    `o32'

    `o64'

    `n32'

    `n64'

    `eabi32'

    `eabi64'

    `auto'

`show mips abi'
     Show the MIPS ABI used by GDB to debug the inferior.

`set mipsfpu'
`show mipsfpu'
     *Note set mipsfpu: MIPS Embedded.

`set mips mask-address ARG'
     This command determines whether the most-significant 32 bits of
     64-bit MIPS addresses are masked off.  The argument ARG can be
     `on', `off', or `auto'.  The latter is the default setting, which
     lets GDB determine the correct value.

`show mips mask-address'
     Show whether the upper 32 bits of MIPS addresses are masked off or
     not.

`set remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs'
     This command controls compatibility with 64-bit MIPS targets that
     transfer data in 32-bit quantities.  If you have an old MIPS 64
     target that transfers 32 bits for some registers, like SR and FSR,
     and 64 bits for other registers, set this option to `on'.

`show remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs'
     Show the current setting of compatibility with older MIPS 64
     targets.

`set debug mips'
     This command turns on and off debugging messages for the
     MIPS-specific target code in GDB.

`show debug mips'
     Show the current setting of MIPS debugging messages.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: HPPA,  Prev: MIPS,  Up: Architectures

18.4.5 HPPA
-----------

When GDB is debugging te HP PA architecture, it provides the following
special commands:

`set debug hppa'
     THis command determines whether HPPA architecture specific
     debugging messages are to be displayed.

`show debug hppa'
     Show whether HPPA debugging messages are displayed.

`maint print unwind ADDRESS'
     This command displays the contents of the unwind table entry at the
     given ADDRESS.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Controlling GDB,  Next: Sequences,  Prev: Configurations,  Up: Top

19 Controlling GDB
******************

You can alter the way GDB interacts with you by using the `set'
command.  For commands controlling how GDB displays data, see *Note
Print settings: Print Settings.  Other settings are described here.

* Menu:

* Prompt::                      Prompt
* Editing::                     Command editing
* Command History::             Command history
* Screen Size::                 Screen size
* Numbers::                     Numbers
* ABI::                         Configuring the current ABI
* Messages/Warnings::           Optional warnings and messages
* Debugging Output::            Optional messages about internal happenings

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Prompt,  Next: Editing,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.1 Prompt
===========

GDB indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
called the "prompt".  This string is normally `(gdb)'.  You can change
the prompt string with the `set prompt' command.  For instance, when
debugging GDB with GDB, it is useful to change the prompt in one of the
GDB sessions so that you can always tell which one you are talking to.

   _Note:_  `set prompt' does not add a space for you after the prompt
you set.  This allows you to set a prompt which ends in a space or a
prompt that does not.

`set prompt NEWPROMPT'
     Directs GDB to use NEWPROMPT as its prompt string henceforth.

`show prompt'
     Prints a line of the form: `Gdb's prompt is: YOUR-PROMPT'

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Editing,  Next: Command History,  Prev: Prompt,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.2 Command editing
====================

GDB reads its input commands via the "Readline" interface.  This GNU
library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
command line interface to the user.  Advantages are GNU Emacs-style or
"vi"-style inline editing of commands, `csh'-like history substitution,
and a storage and recall of command history across debugging sessions.

   You may control the behavior of command line editing in GDB with the
command `set'.

`set editing'
`set editing on'
     Enable command line editing (enabled by default).

`set editing off'
     Disable command line editing.

`show editing'
     Show whether command line editing is enabled.

   *Note Command Line Editing::, for more details about the Readline
interface.  Users unfamiliar with GNU Emacs or `vi' are encouraged to
read that chapter.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Command History,  Next: Screen Size,  Prev: Editing,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.3 Command history
====================

GDB can keep track of the commands you type during your debugging
sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what happened.  Use
these commands to manage the GDB command history facility.

   GDB uses the GNU History library, a part of the Readline package, to
provide the history facility.  *Note Using History Interactively::, for
the detailed description of the History library.

   To issue a command to GDB without affecting certain aspects of the
state which is seen by users, prefix it with `server '.  This means
that this command will not affect the command history, nor will it
affect GDB's notion of which command to repeat if <RET> is pressed on a
line by itself.

   The server prefix does not affect the recording of values into the
value history; to print a value without recording it into the value
history, use the `output' command instead of the `print' command.

   Here is the description of GDB commands related to command history.

`set history filename FNAME'
     Set the name of the GDB command history file to FNAME.  This is
     the file where GDB reads an initial command history list, and
     where it writes the command history from this session when it
     exits.  You can access this list through history expansion or
     through the history command editing characters listed below.  This
     file defaults to the value of the environment variable
     `GDBHISTFILE', or to `./.gdb_history' (`./_gdb_history' on MS-DOS)
     if this variable is not set.

`set history save'
`set history save on'
     Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with
     the `set history filename' command.  By default, this option is
     disabled.

`set history save off'
     Stop recording command history in a file.

`set history size SIZE'
     Set the number of commands which GDB keeps in its history list.
     This defaults to the value of the environment variable `HISTSIZE',
     or to 256 if this variable is not set.

   History expansion assigns special meaning to the character `!'.
*Note Event Designators::, for more details.

   Since `!' is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
`set history expansion on' command, you may sometimes need to follow
`!' (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with a space or
a tab to prevent it from being expanded.  The readline history
facilities do not attempt substitution on the strings `!=' and `!(',
even when history expansion is enabled.

   The commands to control history expansion are:

`set history expansion on'
`set history expansion'
     Enable history expansion.  History expansion is off by default.

`set history expansion off'
     Disable history expansion.

`show history'
`show history filename'
`show history save'
`show history size'
`show history expansion'
     These commands display the state of the GDB history parameters.
     `show history' by itself displays all four states.

`show commands'
     Display the last ten commands in the command history.

`show commands N'
     Print ten commands centered on command number N.

`show commands +'
     Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Screen Size,  Next: Numbers,  Prev: Command History,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.4 Screen size
================

Certain commands to GDB may produce large amounts of information output
to the screen.  To help you read all of it, GDB pauses and asks you for
input at the end of each page of output.  Type <RET> when you want to
continue the output, or `q' to discard the remaining output.  Also, the
screen width setting determines when to wrap lines of output.
Depending on what is being printed, GDB tries to break the line at a
readable place, rather than simply letting it overflow onto the
following line.

   Normally GDB knows the size of the screen from the terminal driver
software.  For example, on Unix GDB uses the termcap data base together
with the value of the `TERM' environment variable and the `stty rows'
and `stty cols' settings.  If this is not correct, you can override it
with the `set height' and `set width' commands:

`set height LPP'
`show height'
`set width CPL'
`show width'
     These `set' commands specify a screen height of LPP lines and a
     screen width of CPL characters.  The associated `show' commands
     display the current settings.

     If you specify a height of zero lines, GDB does not pause during
     output no matter how long the output is.  This is useful if output
     is to a file or to an editor buffer.

     Likewise, you can specify `set width 0' to prevent GDB from
     wrapping its output.

`set pagination on'
`set pagination off'
     Turn the output pagination on or off; the default is on.  Turning
     pagination off is the alternative to `set height 0'.

`show pagination'
     Show the current pagination mode.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Numbers,  Next: ABI,  Prev: Screen Size,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.5 Numbers
============

You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in GDB
by the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with `0', decimal numbers
end with `.', and hexadecimal numbers begin with `0x'.  Numbers that
neither begin with `0' or `0x', nor end with a `.' are, by default,
entered in base 10; likewise, the default display for numbers--when no
particular format is specified--is base 10.  You can change the default
base for both input and output with the commands described below.

`set input-radix BASE'
     Set the default base for numeric input.  Supported choices for
     BASE are decimal 8, 10, or 16.  BASE must itself be specified
     either unambiguously or using the current input radix; for
     example, any of

          set input-radix 012
          set input-radix 10.
          set input-radix 0xa

     sets the input base to decimal.  On the other hand, `set
     input-radix 10' leaves the input radix unchanged, no matter what
     it was, since `10', being without any leading or trailing signs of
     its base, is interpreted in the current radix.  Thus, if the
     current radix is 16, `10' is interpreted in hex, i.e. as 16
     decimal, which doesn't change the radix.

`set output-radix BASE'
     Set the default base for numeric display.  Supported choices for
     BASE are decimal 8, 10, or 16.  BASE must itself be specified
     either unambiguously or using the current input radix.

`show input-radix'
     Display the current default base for numeric input.

`show output-radix'
     Display the current default base for numeric display.

`set radix [BASE]'
`show radix'
     These commands set and show the default base for both input and
     output of numbers.  `set radix' sets the radix of input and output
     to the same base; without an argument, it resets the radix back to
     its default value of 10.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: ABI,  Next: Messages/Warnings,  Prev: Numbers,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.6 Configuring the current ABI
================================

GDB can determine the "ABI" (Application Binary Interface) of your
application automatically.  However, sometimes you need to override its
conclusions.  Use these commands to manage GDB's view of the current
ABI.

   One GDB configuration can debug binaries for multiple operating
system targets, either via remote debugging or native emulation.  GDB
will autodetect the "OS ABI" (Operating System ABI) in use, but you can
override its conclusion using the `set osabi' command.  One example
where this is useful is in debugging of binaries which use an alternate
C library (e.g. UCLIBC for GNU/Linux) which does not have the same
identifying marks that the standard C library for your platform
provides.

`show osabi'
     Show the OS ABI currently in use.

`set osabi'
     With no argument, show the list of registered available OS ABI's.

`set osabi ABI'
     Set the current OS ABI to ABI.

   Generally, the way that an argument of type `float' is passed to a
function depends on whether the function is prototyped.  For a
prototyped (i.e. ANSI/ISO style) function, `float' arguments are passed
unchanged, according to the architecture's convention for `float'.  For
unprototyped (i.e. K&R style) functions, `float' arguments are first
promoted to type `double' and then passed.

   Unfortunately, some forms of debug information do not reliably
indicate whether a function is prototyped.  If GDB calls a function
that is not marked as prototyped, it consults `set
coerce-float-to-double'.

`set coerce-float-to-double'
`set coerce-float-to-double on'
     Arguments of type `float' will be promoted to `double' when passed
     to an unprototyped function.  This is the default setting.

`set coerce-float-to-double off'
     Arguments of type `float' will be passed directly to unprototyped
     functions.

`show coerce-float-to-double'
     Show the current setting of promoting `float' to `double'.

   GDB needs to know the ABI used for your program's C++ objects.  The
correct C++ ABI depends on which C++ compiler was used to build your
application.  GDB only fully supports programs with a single C++ ABI;
if your program contains code using multiple C++ ABI's or if GDB can
not identify your program's ABI correctly, you can tell GDB which ABI
to use.  Currently supported ABI's include "gnu-v2", for `g++' versions
before 3.0, "gnu-v3", for `g++' versions 3.0 and later, and "hpaCC" for
the HP ANSI C++ compiler.  Other C++ compilers may use the "gnu-v2" or
"gnu-v3" ABI's as well.  The default setting is "auto".

`show cp-abi'
     Show the C++ ABI currently in use.

`set cp-abi'
     With no argument, show the list of supported C++ ABI's.

`set cp-abi ABI'
`set cp-abi auto'
     Set the current C++ ABI to ABI, or return to automatic detection.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Messages/Warnings,  Next: Debugging Output,  Prev: ABI,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.7 Optional warnings and messages
===================================

By default, GDB is silent about its inner workings.  If you are running
on a slow machine, you may want to use the `set verbose' command.  This
makes GDB tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so you
will not think it has crashed.

   Currently, the messages controlled by `set verbose' are those which
announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read; see
`symbol-file' in *Note Commands to specify files: Files.

`set verbose on'
     Enables GDB output of certain informational messages.

`set verbose off'
     Disables GDB output of certain informational messages.

`show verbose'
     Displays whether `set verbose' is on or off.

   By default, if GDB encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
this information useful (*note Errors reading symbol files: Symbol
Errors.).

`set complaints LIMIT'
     Permits GDB to output LIMIT complaints about each type of unusual
     symbols before becoming silent about the problem.  Set LIMIT to
     zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to
     prevent complaints from being suppressed.

`show complaints'
     Displays how many symbol complaints GDB is permitted to produce.


   By default, GDB is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands.  For example, if
you try to run a program which is already running:

     (gdb) run
     The program being debugged has been started already.
     Start it from the beginning? (y or n)

   If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
commands, you can disable this "feature":

`set confirm off'
     Disables confirmation requests.

`set confirm on'
     Enables confirmation requests (the default).

`show confirm'
     Displays state of confirmation requests.


   If you need to debug user-defined commands or sourced files you may
find it useful to enable "command tracing".  In this mode each command
will be printed as it is executed, prefixed with one or more `+'
symbols, the quantity denoting the call depth of each command.

`set trace-commands on'
     Enable command tracing.

`set trace-commands off'
     Disable command tracing.

`show trace-commands'
     Display the current state of command tracing.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Debugging Output,  Prev: Messages/Warnings,  Up: Controlling GDB

19.8 Optional messages about internal happenings
================================================

GDB has commands that enable optional debugging messages from various
GDB subsystems; normally these commands are of interest to GDB
maintainers, or when reporting a bug.  This section documents those
commands.

`set exec-done-display'
     Turns on or off the notification of asynchronous commands'
     completion.  When on, GDB will print a message when an
     asynchronous command finishes its execution.  The default is off.  

`show exec-done-display'
     Displays the current setting of asynchronous command completion
     notification.  

`set debug arch'
     Turns on or off display of gdbarch debugging info.  The default is
     off 

`show debug arch'
     Displays the current state of displaying gdbarch debugging info.

`set debug aix-thread'
     Display debugging messages about inner workings of the AIX thread
     module.

`show debug aix-thread'
     Show the current state of AIX thread debugging info display.

`set debug event'
     Turns on or off display of GDB event debugging info.  The default
     is off.

`show debug event'
     Displays the current state of displaying GDB event debugging info.

`set debug expression'
     Turns on or off display of debugging info about GDB expression
     parsing.  The default is off.

`show debug expression'
     Displays the current state of displaying debugging info about GDB
     expression parsing.

`set debug frame'
     Turns on or off display of GDB frame debugging info.  The default
     is off.

`show debug frame'
     Displays the current state of displaying GDB frame debugging info.

`set debug infrun'
     Turns on or off display of GDB debugging info for running the
     inferior.  The default is off.  `infrun.c' contains GDB's runtime
     state machine used for implementing operations such as
     single-stepping the inferior.

`show debug infrun'
     Displays the current state of GDB inferior debugging.

`set debug lin-lwp'
     Turns on or off debugging messages from the Linux LWP debug
     support.

`show debug lin-lwp'
     Show the current state of Linux LWP debugging messages.

`set debug observer'
     Turns on or off display of GDB observer debugging.  This includes
     info such as the notification of observable events.

`show debug observer'
     Displays the current state of observer debugging.

`set debug overload'
     Turns on or off display of GDB C++ overload debugging info. This
     includes info such as ranking of functions, etc.  The default is
     off.

`show debug overload'
     Displays the current state of displaying GDB C++ overload
     debugging info.  

`set debug remote'
     Turns on or off display of reports on all packets sent back and
     forth across the serial line to the remote machine.  The info is
     printed on the GDB standard output stream. The default is off.

`show debug remote'
     Displays the state of display of remote packets.

`set debug serial'
     Turns on or off display of GDB serial debugging info. The default
     is off.

`show debug serial'
     Displays the current state of displaying GDB serial debugging info.

`set debug solib-frv'
     Turns on or off debugging messages for FR-V shared-library code.

`show debug solib-frv'
     Display the current state of FR-V shared-library code debugging
     messages.

`set debug target'
     Turns on or off display of GDB target debugging info. This info
     includes what is going on at the target level of GDB, as it
     happens. The default is 0.  Set it to 1 to track events, and to 2
     to also track the value of large memory transfers.  Changes to
     this flag do not take effect until the next time you connect to a
     target or use the `run' command.

`show debug target'
     Displays the current state of displaying GDB target debugging info.

`set debugvarobj'
     Turns on or off display of GDB variable object debugging info. The
     default is off.

`show debugvarobj'
     Displays the current state of displaying GDB variable object
     debugging info.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sequences,  Next: TUI,  Prev: Controlling GDB,  Up: Top

20 Canned Sequences of Commands
*******************************

Aside from breakpoint commands (*note Breakpoint command lists: Break
Commands.), GDB provides two ways to store sequences of commands for
execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.

* Menu:

* Define::             How to define your own commands
* Hooks::              Hooks for user-defined commands
* Command Files::      How to write scripts of commands to be stored in a file
* Output::             Commands for controlled output

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Define,  Next: Hooks,  Up: Sequences

20.1 User-defined commands
==========================

A "user-defined command" is a sequence of GDB commands to which you
assign a new name as a command.  This is done with the `define'
command.  User commands may accept up to 10 arguments separated by
whitespace.  Arguments are accessed within the user command via
`$arg0...$arg9'.  A trivial example:

     define adder
       print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
     end

To execute the command use:

     adder 1 2 3

This defines the command `adder', which prints the sum of its three
arguments.  Note the arguments are text substitutions, so they may
reference variables, use complex expressions, or even perform inferior
functions calls.

   In addition, `$argc' may be used to find out how many arguments have
been passed.  This expands to a number in the range 0...10.

     define adder
       if $argc == 2
         print $arg0 + $arg1
       end
       if $argc == 3
         print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
       end
     end

`define COMMANDNAME'
     Define a command named COMMANDNAME.  If there is already a command
     by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine
     it.

     The definition of the command is made up of other GDB command
     lines, which are given following the `define' command.  The end of
     these commands is marked by a line containing `end'.

`document COMMANDNAME'
     Document the user-defined command COMMANDNAME, so that it can be
     accessed by `help'.  The command COMMANDNAME must already be
     defined.  This command reads lines of documentation just as
     `define' reads the lines of the command definition, ending with
     `end'.  After the `document' command is finished, `help' on command
     COMMANDNAME displays the documentation you have written.

     You may use the `document' command again to change the
     documentation of a command.  Redefining the command with `define'
     does not change the documentation.

`dont-repeat'
     Used inside a user-defined command, this tells GDB that this
     command should not be repeated when the user hits <RET> (*note
     repeat last command: Command Syntax.).

`help user-defined'
     List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the
     documentation (if any) for each.

`show user'
`show user COMMANDNAME'
     Display the GDB commands used to define COMMANDNAME (but not its
     documentation).  If no COMMANDNAME is given, display the
     definitions for all user-defined commands.

`show max-user-call-depth'
`set max-user-call-depth'
     The value of `max-user-call-depth' controls how many recursion
     levels are allowed in user-defined commands before GDB suspects an
     infinite recursion and aborts the command.

   In addition to the above commands, user-defined commands frequently
use control flow commands, described in *Note Command Files::.

   When user-defined commands are executed, the commands of the
definition are not printed.  An error in any command stops execution of
the user-defined command.

   If used interactively, commands that would ask for confirmation
proceed without asking when used inside a user-defined command.  Many
GDB commands that normally print messages to say what they are doing
omit the messages when used in a user-defined command.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Hooks,  Next: Command Files,  Prev: Define,  Up: Sequences

20.2 User-defined command hooks
===============================

You may define "hooks", which are a special kind of user-defined
command.  Whenever you run the command `foo', if the user-defined
command `hook-foo' exists, it is executed (with no arguments) before
that command.

   A hook may also be defined which is run after the command you
executed.  Whenever you run the command `foo', if the user-defined
command `hookpost-foo' exists, it is executed (with no arguments) after
that command.  Post-execution hooks may exist simultaneously with
pre-execution hooks, for the same command.

   It is valid for a hook to call the command which it hooks.  If this
occurs, the hook is not re-executed, thereby avoiding infinite
recursion.

   In addition, a pseudo-command, `stop' exists.  Defining
(`hook-stop') makes the associated commands execute every time
execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.

   For example, to ignore `SIGALRM' signals while single-stepping, but
treat them normally during normal execution, you could define:

     define hook-stop
     handle SIGALRM nopass
     end

     define hook-run
     handle SIGALRM pass
     end

     define hook-continue
     handle SIGLARM pass
     end

   As a further example, to hook at the begining and end of the `echo'
command, and to add extra text to the beginning and end of the message,
you could define:

     define hook-echo
     echo <<<---
     end

     define hookpost-echo
     echo --->>>\n
     end

     (gdb) echo Hello World
     <<<---Hello World--->>>
     (gdb)

   You can define a hook for any single-word command in GDB, but not
for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
name, e.g.  `backtrace' rather than `bt'.  If an error occurs during
the execution of your hook, execution of GDB commands stops and GDB
issues a prompt (before the command that you actually typed had a
chance to run).

   If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command,
you get a warning from the `define' command.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Command Files,  Next: Output,  Prev: Hooks,  Up: Sequences

20.3 Command files
==================

A command file for GDB is a text file made of lines that are GDB
commands.  Comments (lines starting with `#') may also be included.  An
empty line in a command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat
the last command, as it would from the terminal.

   You can request the execution of a command file with the `source'
command:

`source [`-v'] FILENAME'
     Execute the command file FILENAME.

   The lines in a command file are generally executed sequentially,
unless the order of execution is changed by one of the _flow-control
commands_ described below.  The commands are not printed as they are
executed.  An error in any command terminates execution of the command
file and control is returned to the console.

   GDB searches for FILENAME in the current directory and then on the
search path (specified with the `directory' command).

   If `-v', for verbose mode, is given then GDB displays each command
as it is executed.  The option must be given before FILENAME, and is
interpreted as part of the filename anywhere else.

   Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively
proceed without asking when used in a command file.  Many GDB commands
that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the
messages when called from command files.

   GDB also accepts command input from standard input.  In this mode,
normal output goes to standard output and error output goes to standard
error.  Errors in a command file supplied on standard input do not
terminate execution of the command file--execution continues with the
next command.

     gdb < cmds > log 2>&1

   (The syntax above will vary depending on the shell used.) This
example will execute commands from the file `cmds'. All output and
errors would be directed to `log'.

   Since commands stored on command files tend to be more general than
commands typed interactively, they frequently need to deal with
complicated situations, such as different or unexpected values of
variables and symbols, changes in how the program being debugged is
built, etc.  GDB provides a set of flow-control commands to deal with
these complexities.  Using these commands, you can write complex
scripts that loop over data structures, execute commands conditionally,
etc.

`if'
`else'
     This command allows to include in your script conditionally
     executed commands. The `if' command takes a single argument, which
     is an expression to evaluate.  It is followed by a series of
     commands that are executed only if the expression is true (its
     value is nonzero).  There can then optionally be an `else' line,
     followed by a series of commands that are only executed if the
     expression was false.  The end of the list is marked by a line
     containing `end'.

`while'
     This command allows to write loops.  Its syntax is similar to
     `if': the command takes a single argument, which is an expression
     to evaluate, and must be followed by the commands to execute, one
     per line, terminated by an `end'.  These commands are called the
     "body" of the loop.  The commands in the body of `while' are
     executed repeatedly as long as the expression evaluates to true.

`loop_break'
     This command exits the `while' loop in whose body it is included.
     Execution of the script continues after that `while's `end' line.

`loop_continue'
     This command skips the execution of the rest of the body of
     commands in the `while' loop in whose body it is included.
     Execution branches to the beginning of the `while' loop, where it
     evaluates the controlling expression.

`end'
     Terminate the block of commands that are the body of `if', `else',
     or `while' flow-control commands.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Output,  Prev: Command Files,  Up: Sequences

20.4 Commands for controlled output
===================================

During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
GDB output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
explicitly printed by the commands in the definition.  This section
describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
want.

`echo TEXT'
     Print TEXT.  Nonprinting characters can be included in TEXT using
     C escape sequences, such as `\n' to print a newline.  *No newline
     is printed unless you specify one.* In addition to the standard C
     escape sequences, a backslash followed by a space stands for a
     space.  This is useful for displaying a string with spaces at the
     beginning or the end, since leading and trailing spaces are
     otherwise trimmed from all arguments.  To print ` and foo = ', use
     the command `echo \ and foo = \ '.

     A backslash at the end of TEXT can be used, as in C, to continue
     the command onto subsequent lines.  For example,

          echo This is some text\n\
          which is continued\n\
          onto several lines.\n

     produces the same output as

          echo This is some text\n
          echo which is continued\n
          echo onto several lines.\n

`output EXPRESSION'
     Print the value of EXPRESSION and nothing but that value: no
     newlines, no `$NN = '.  The value is not entered in the value
     history either.  *Note Expressions: Expressions, for more
     information on expressions.

`output/FMT EXPRESSION'
     Print the value of EXPRESSION in format FMT.  You can use the same
     formats as for `print'.  *Note Output formats: Output Formats, for
     more information.

`printf STRING, EXPRESSIONS...'
     Print the values of the EXPRESSIONS under the control of STRING.
     The EXPRESSIONS are separated by commas and may be either numbers
     or pointers.  Their values are printed as specified by STRING,
     exactly as if your program were to execute the C subroutine

          printf (STRING, EXPRESSIONS...);

     For example, you can print two values in hex like this:

          printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo

     The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
     string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
     letter.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Interpreters,  Next: Emacs,  Prev: TUI,  Up: Top

21 Command Interpreters
***********************

GDB supports multiple command interpreters, and some command
infrastructure to allow users or user interface writers to switch
between interpreters or run commands in other interpreters.

   GDB currently supports two command interpreters, the console
interpreter (sometimes called the command-line interpreter or CLI) and
the machine interface interpreter (or GDB/MI).  This manual describes
both of these interfaces in great detail.

   By default, GDB will start with the console interpreter.  However,
the user may choose to start GDB with another interpreter by specifying
the `-i' or `--interpreter' startup options.  Defined interpreters
include:

`console'
     The traditional console or command-line interpreter.  This is the
     most often used interpreter with GDB. With no interpreter
     specified at runtime, GDB will use this interpreter.

`mi'
     The newest GDB/MI interface (currently `mi2').  Used primarily by
     programs wishing to use GDB as a backend for a debugger GUI or an
     IDE.  For more information, see *Note The GDB/MI Interface: GDB/MI.

`mi2'
     The current GDB/MI interface.

`mi1'
     The GDB/MI interface included in GDB 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3.


   The interpreter being used by GDB may not be dynamically switched at
runtime.  Although possible, this could lead to a very precarious
situation.  Consider an IDE using GDB/MI.  If a user enters the command
"interpreter-set console" in a console view, GDB would switch to using
the console interpreter, rendering the IDE inoperable!

   Although you may only choose a single interpreter at startup, you
may execute commands in any interpreter from the current interpreter
using the appropriate command.  If you are running the console
interpreter, simply use the `interpreter-exec' command:

     interpreter-exec mi "-data-list-register-names"

   GDB/MI has a similar command, although it is only available in
versions of GDB which support GDB/MI version 2 (or greater).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: TUI,  Next: Interpreters,  Prev: Sequences,  Up: Top

22 GDB Text User Interface
**************************

* Menu:

* TUI Overview::                TUI overview
* TUI Keys::                    TUI key bindings
* TUI Single Key Mode::         TUI single key mode
* TUI Commands::                TUI specific commands
* TUI Configuration::           TUI configuration variables

   The GDB Text User Interface, TUI in short, is a terminal interface
which uses the `curses' library to show the source file, the assembly
output, the program registers and GDB commands in separate text windows.

   The TUI is enabled by invoking GDB using either `gdbtui' or `gdb
-tui'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: TUI Overview,  Next: TUI Keys,  Up: TUI

22.1 TUI overview
=================

The TUI has two display modes that can be switched while GDB runs:

   * A curses (or TUI) mode in which it displays several text windows
     on the terminal.

   * A standard mode which corresponds to the GDB configured without
     the TUI.

   In the TUI mode, GDB can display several text window on the terminal:

_command_
     This window is the GDB command window with the GDB prompt and the
     GDB outputs.  The GDB input is still managed using readline but
     through the TUI.  The _command_ window is always visible.

_source_
     The source window shows the source file of the program.  The
     current line as well as active breakpoints are displayed in this
     window.

_assembly_
     The assembly window shows the disassembly output of the program.

_register_
     This window shows the processor registers.  It detects when a
     register is changed and when this is the case, registers that have
     changed are highlighted.


   The source and assembly windows show the current program position by
highlighting the current line and marking them with the `>' marker.
Breakpoints are also indicated with two markers.  A first one indicates
the breakpoint type:

`B'
     Breakpoint which was hit at least once.

`b'
     Breakpoint which was never hit.

`H'
     Hardware breakpoint which was hit at least once.

`h'
     Hardware breakpoint which was never hit.


   The second marker indicates whether the breakpoint is enabled or not:

`+'
     Breakpoint is enabled.

`-'
     Breakpoint is disabled.


   The source, assembly and register windows are attached to the thread
and the frame position.  They are updated when the current thread
changes, when the frame changes or when the program counter changes.
These three windows are arranged by the TUI according to several
layouts.  The layout defines which of these three windows are visible.
The following layouts are available:

   * source

   * assembly

   * source and assembly

   * source and registers

   * assembly and registers


   On top of the command window a status line gives various information
concerning the current process begin debugged.  The status line is
updated when the information it shows changes.  The following fields
are displayed:

_target_
     Indicates the current gdb target (*note Specifying a Debugging
     Target: Targets.).

_process_
     Gives information about the current process or thread number.
     When no process is being debugged, this field is set to `No
     process'.

_function_
     Gives the current function name for the selected frame.  The name
     is demangled if demangling is turned on (*note Print Settings::).
     When there is no symbol corresponding to the current program
     counter the string `??' is displayed.

_line_
     Indicates the current line number for the selected frame.  When
     the current line number is not known the string `??' is displayed.

_pc_
     Indicates the current program counter address.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: TUI Keys,  Next: TUI Single Key Mode,  Prev: TUI Overview,  Up: TUI

22.2 TUI Key Bindings
=====================

The TUI installs several key bindings in the readline keymaps (*note
Command Line Editing::).  They allow to leave or enter in the TUI mode
or they operate directly on the TUI layout and windows.  The TUI also
provides a _SingleKey_ keymap which binds several keys directly to GDB
commands.  The following key bindings are installed for both TUI mode
and the GDB standard mode.

`C-x C-a'
`C-x a'
`C-x A'
     Enter or leave the TUI mode.  When the TUI mode is left, the
     curses window management is left and GDB operates using its
     standard mode writing on the terminal directly.  When the TUI mode
     is entered, the control is given back to the curses windows.  The
     screen is then refreshed.

`C-x 1'
     Use a TUI layout with only one window.  The layout will either be
     `source' or `assembly'.  When the TUI mode is not active, it will
     switch to the TUI mode.

     Think of this key binding as the Emacs `C-x 1' binding.

`C-x 2'
     Use a TUI layout with at least two windows.  When the current
     layout shows already two windows, a next layout with two windows
     is used.  When a new layout is chosen, one window will always be
     common to the previous layout and the new one.

     Think of it as the Emacs `C-x 2' binding.

`C-x o'
     Change the active window.  The TUI associates several key bindings
     (like scrolling and arrow keys) to the active window. This command
     gives the focus to the next TUI window.

     Think of it as the Emacs `C-x o' binding.

`C-x s'
     Use the TUI _SingleKey_ keymap that binds single key to gdb
     commands (*note TUI Single Key Mode::).


   The following key bindings are handled only by the TUI mode:

<PgUp>
     Scroll the active window one page up.

<PgDn>
     Scroll the active window one page down.

<Up>
     Scroll the active window one line up.

<Down>
     Scroll the active window one line down.

<Left>
     Scroll the active window one column left.

<Right>
     Scroll the active window one column right.

<C-L>
     Refresh the screen.


   In the TUI mode, the arrow keys are used by the active window for
scrolling.  This means they are available for readline when the active
window is the command window.  When the command window does not have
the focus, it is necessary to use other readline key bindings such as
`C-p', `C-n', `C-b' and `C-f'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: TUI Single Key Mode,  Next: TUI Commands,  Prev: TUI Keys,  Up: TUI

22.3 TUI Single Key Mode
========================

The TUI provides a _SingleKey_ mode in which it installs a particular
key binding in the readline keymaps to connect single keys to some gdb
commands.

`c'
     continue

`d'
     down

`f'
     finish

`n'
     next

`q'
     exit the _SingleKey_ mode.

`r'
     run

`s'
     step

`u'
     up

`v'
     info locals

`w'
     where


   Other keys temporarily switch to the GDB command prompt.  The key
that was pressed is inserted in the editing buffer so that it is
possible to type most GDB commands without interaction with the TUI
_SingleKey_ mode.  Once the command is entered the TUI _SingleKey_ mode
is restored.  The only way to permanently leave this mode is by typing
`q' or `C-x s'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: TUI Commands,  Next: TUI Configuration,  Prev: TUI Single Key Mode,  Up: TUI

22.4 TUI specific commands
==========================

The TUI has specific commands to control the text windows.  These
commands are always available, that is they do not depend on the
current terminal mode in which GDB runs.  When GDB is in the standard
mode, using these commands will automatically switch in the TUI mode.

`info win'
     List and give the size of all displayed windows.

`layout next'
     Display the next layout.

`layout prev'
     Display the previous layout.

`layout src'
     Display the source window only.

`layout asm'
     Display the assembly window only.

`layout split'
     Display the source and assembly window.

`layout regs'
     Display the register window together with the source or assembly
     window.

`focus next | prev | src | asm | regs | split'
     Set the focus to the named window.  This command allows to change
     the active window so that scrolling keys can be affected to
     another window.

`refresh'
     Refresh the screen.  This is similar to typing `C-L'.

`tui reg float'
     Show the floating point registers in the register window.

`tui reg general'
     Show the general registers in the register window.

`tui reg next'
     Show the next register group.  The list of register groups as well
     as their order is target specific.  The predefined register groups
     are the following: `general', `float', `system', `vector', `all',
     `save', `restore'.

`tui reg system'
     Show the system registers in the register window.

`update'
     Update the source window and the current execution point.

`winheight NAME +COUNT'
`winheight NAME -COUNT'
     Change the height of the window NAME by COUNT lines.  Positive
     counts increase the height, while negative counts decrease it.

`tabset'
     Set the width of tab stops to be NCHARS characters.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: TUI Configuration,  Prev: TUI Commands,  Up: TUI

22.5 TUI configuration variables
================================

The TUI has several configuration variables that control the appearance
of windows on the terminal.

`set tui border-kind KIND'
     Select the border appearance for the source, assembly and register
     windows.  The possible values are the following:
    `space'
          Use a space character to draw the border.

    `ascii'
          Use ascii characters + - and | to draw the border.

    `acs'
          Use the Alternate Character Set to draw the border.  The
          border is drawn using character line graphics if the terminal
          supports them.


`set tui active-border-mode MODE'
     Select the attributes to display the border of the active window.
     The possible values are `normal', `standout', `reverse', `half',
     `half-standout', `bold' and `bold-standout'.

`set tui border-mode MODE'
     Select the attributes to display the border of other windows.  The
     MODE can be one of the following:
    `normal'
          Use normal attributes to display the border.

    `standout'
          Use standout mode.

    `reverse'
          Use reverse video mode.

    `half'
          Use half bright mode.

    `half-standout'
          Use half bright and standout mode.

    `bold'
          Use extra bright or bold mode.

    `bold-standout'
          Use extra bright or bold and standout mode.



\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Emacs,  Next: Annotations,  Prev: Interpreters,  Up: Top

23 Using GDB under GNU Emacs
****************************

A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and edit) the
source files for the program you are debugging with GDB.

   To use this interface, use the command `M-x gdb' in Emacs.  Give the
executable file you want to debug as an argument.  This command starts
GDB as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
created Emacs buffer.

   Using GDB under Emacs is just like using GDB normally except for two
things:

   * All "terminal" input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.

   This applies both to GDB commands and their output, and to the input
and output done by the program you are debugging.

   This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of
previous commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the
output in this way.

   All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
with your program.  In particular, you can send signals the usual
way--for example, `C-c C-c' for an interrupt, `C-c C-z' for a stop.

   * GDB displays source code through Emacs.

   Each time GDB displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
source file for that frame and puts an arrow (`=>') at the left margin
of the current line.  Emacs uses a separate buffer for source display,
and splits the screen to show both your GDB session and the source.

   Explicit GDB `list' or search commands still produce output as
usual, but you probably have no reason to use them from Emacs.

   If you specify an absolute file name when prompted for the `M-x gdb'
argument, then Emacs sets your current working directory to where your
program resides.  If you only specify the file name, then Emacs sets
your current working directory to to the directory associated with the
previous buffer.  In this case, GDB may find your program by searching
your environment's `PATH' variable, but on some operating systems it
might not find the source.  So, although the GDB input and output
session proceeds normally, the auxiliary buffer does not display the
current source and line of execution.

   The initial working directory of GDB is printed on the top line of
the GDB I/O buffer and this serves as a default for the commands that
specify files for GDB to operate on.  *Note Commands to specify files:
Files.

   By default, `M-x gdb' calls the program called `gdb'.  If you need
to call GDB by a different name (for example, if you keep several
configurations around, with different names) you can customize the
Emacs variable `gud-gdb-command-name' to run the one you want.

   In the GDB I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
addition to the standard Shell mode commands:

`C-h m'
     Describe the features of Emacs' GDB Mode.

`C-c C-s'
     Execute to another source line, like the GDB `step' command; also
     update the display window to show the current file and location.

`C-c C-n'
     Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
     calls, like the GDB `next' command.  Then update the display window
     to show the current file and location.

`C-c C-i'
     Execute one instruction, like the GDB `stepi' command; update
     display window accordingly.

`C-c C-f'
     Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the GDB
     `finish' command.

`C-c C-r'
     Continue execution of your program, like the GDB `continue'
     command.

`C-c <'
     Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
     (*note Numeric Arguments: (Emacs)Arguments.), like the GDB `up'
     command.

`C-c >'
     Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument,
     like the GDB `down' command.

   In any source file, the Emacs command `C-x <SPC>' (`gud-break')
tells GDB to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.

   If you type `M-x speedbar', then Emacs displays a separate frame
which shows a backtrace when the GDB I/O buffer is current.  Move point
to any frame in the stack and type <RET> to make it become the current
frame and display the associated source in the source buffer.
Alternatively, click `Mouse-2' to make the selected frame become the
current one.

   If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to
get it back is to type the command `f' in the GDB buffer, to request a
frame display; when you run under Emacs, this recreates the source
buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current frame.

   The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
which are visiting the source files in the usual way.  You can edit the
files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that GDB
communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers.  If you add or delete
lines from the text, the line numbers that GDB knows cease to
correspond properly with the code.

   The description given here is for GNU Emacs version 21.3 and a more
detailed description of its interaction with GDB is given in the Emacs
manual (*note Debuggers: (Emacs)Debuggers.).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI,  Next: GDB Bugs,  Prev: Annotations,  Up: Top

24 The GDB/MI Interface
***********************

Function and Purpose
====================

GDB/MI is a line based machine oriented text interface to GDB and is
activated by specifying using the `--interpreter' command line option
(*note Mode Options::).  It is specifically intended to support the
development of systems which use the debugger as just one small
component of a larger system.

   This chapter is a specification of the GDB/MI interface.  It is
written in the form of a reference manual.

   Note that GDB/MI is still under construction, so some of the
features described below are incomplete and subject to change (*note
GDB/MI Development and Front Ends: GDB/MI Development and Front Ends.).

Notation and Terminology
========================

This chapter uses the following notation:

   * `|' separates two alternatives.

   * `[ SOMETHING ]' indicates that SOMETHING is optional: it may or
     may not be given.

   * `( GROUP )*' means that GROUP inside the parentheses may repeat
     zero or more times.

   * `( GROUP )+' means that GROUP inside the parentheses may repeat
     one or more times.

   * `"STRING"' means a literal STRING.

* Menu:

* GDB/MI Command Syntax::
* GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI::
* GDB/MI Development and Front Ends::
* GDB/MI Output Records::
* GDB/MI Simple Examples::
* GDB/MI Command Description Format::
* GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands::
* GDB/MI Program Context::
* GDB/MI Thread Commands::
* GDB/MI Program Execution::
* GDB/MI Stack Manipulation::
* GDB/MI Variable Objects::
* GDB/MI Data Manipulation::
* GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands::
* GDB/MI Symbol Query::
* GDB/MI File Commands::
* GDB/MI Target Manipulation::
* GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Command Syntax,  Next: GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI,  Up: GDB/MI

24.1 GDB/MI Command Syntax
==========================

* Menu:

* GDB/MI Input Syntax::
* GDB/MI Output Syntax::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Input Syntax,  Next: GDB/MI Output Syntax,  Up: GDB/MI Command Syntax

24.1.1 GDB/MI Input Syntax
--------------------------

`COMMAND ==>'
     `CLI-COMMAND | MI-COMMAND'

`CLI-COMMAND ==>'
     `[ TOKEN ] CLI-COMMAND NL', where CLI-COMMAND is any existing GDB
     CLI command.

`MI-COMMAND ==>'
     `[ TOKEN ] "-" OPERATION ( " " OPTION )* `[' " --" `]' ( " "
     PARAMETER )* NL'

`TOKEN ==>'
     "any sequence of digits"

`OPTION ==>'
     `"-" PARAMETER [ " " PARAMETER ]'

`PARAMETER ==>'
     `NON-BLANK-SEQUENCE | C-STRING'

`OPERATION ==>'
     _any of the operations described in this chapter_

`NON-BLANK-SEQUENCE ==>'
     _anything, provided it doesn't contain special characters such as
     "-", NL, """ and of course " "_

`C-STRING ==>'
     `""" SEVEN-BIT-ISO-C-STRING-CONTENT """'

`NL ==>'
     `CR | CR-LF'

Notes:

   * The CLI commands are still handled by the MI interpreter; their
     output is described below.

   * The `TOKEN', when present, is passed back when the command
     finishes.

   * Some MI commands accept optional arguments as part of the parameter
     list.  Each option is identified by a leading `-' (dash) and may be
     followed by an optional argument parameter.  Options occur first
     in the parameter list and can be delimited from normal parameters
     using `--' (this is useful when some parameters begin with a dash).

   Pragmatics:

   * We want easy access to the existing CLI syntax (for debugging).

   * We want it to be easy to spot a MI operation.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Output Syntax,  Prev: GDB/MI Input Syntax,  Up: GDB/MI Command Syntax

24.1.2 GDB/MI Output Syntax
---------------------------

The output from GDB/MI consists of zero or more out-of-band records
followed, optionally, by a single result record.  This result record is
for the most recent command.  The sequence of output records is
terminated by `(gdb)'.

   If an input command was prefixed with a `TOKEN' then the
corresponding output for that command will also be prefixed by that same
TOKEN.

`OUTPUT ==>'
     `( OUT-OF-BAND-RECORD )* [ RESULT-RECORD ] "(gdb)" NL'

`RESULT-RECORD ==>'
     ` [ TOKEN ] "^" RESULT-CLASS ( "," RESULT )* NL'

`OUT-OF-BAND-RECORD ==>'
     `ASYNC-RECORD | STREAM-RECORD'

`ASYNC-RECORD ==>'
     `EXEC-ASYNC-OUTPUT | STATUS-ASYNC-OUTPUT | NOTIFY-ASYNC-OUTPUT'

`EXEC-ASYNC-OUTPUT ==>'
     `[ TOKEN ] "*" ASYNC-OUTPUT'

`STATUS-ASYNC-OUTPUT ==>'
     `[ TOKEN ] "+" ASYNC-OUTPUT'

`NOTIFY-ASYNC-OUTPUT ==>'
     `[ TOKEN ] "=" ASYNC-OUTPUT'

`ASYNC-OUTPUT ==>'
     `ASYNC-CLASS ( "," RESULT )* NL'

`RESULT-CLASS ==>'
     `"done" | "running" | "connected" | "error" | "exit"'

`ASYNC-CLASS ==>'
     `"stopped" | OTHERS' (where OTHERS will be added depending on the
     needs--this is still in development).

`RESULT ==>'
     ` VARIABLE "=" VALUE'

`VARIABLE ==>'
     ` STRING '

`VALUE ==>'
     ` CONST | TUPLE | LIST '

`CONST ==>'
     `C-STRING'

`TUPLE ==>'
     ` "{}" | "{" RESULT ( "," RESULT )* "}" '

`LIST ==>'
     ` "[]" | "[" VALUE ( "," VALUE )* "]" | "[" RESULT ( "," RESULT )*
     "]" '

`STREAM-RECORD ==>'
     `CONSOLE-STREAM-OUTPUT | TARGET-STREAM-OUTPUT | LOG-STREAM-OUTPUT'

`CONSOLE-STREAM-OUTPUT ==>'
     `"~" C-STRING'

`TARGET-STREAM-OUTPUT ==>'
     `"@" C-STRING'

`LOG-STREAM-OUTPUT ==>'
     `"&" C-STRING'

`NL ==>'
     `CR | CR-LF'

`TOKEN ==>'
     _any sequence of digits_.

Notes:

   * All output sequences end in a single line containing a period.

   * The `TOKEN' is from the corresponding request.  If an execution
     command is interrupted by the `-exec-interrupt' command, the TOKEN
     associated with the `*stopped' message is the one of the original
     execution command, not the one of the interrupt command.

   * STATUS-ASYNC-OUTPUT contains on-going status information about the
     progress of a slow operation.  It can be discarded.  All status
     output is prefixed by `+'.

   * EXEC-ASYNC-OUTPUT contains asynchronous state change on the target
     (stopped, started, disappeared).  All async output is prefixed by
     `*'.

   * NOTIFY-ASYNC-OUTPUT contains supplementary information that the
     client should handle (e.g., a new breakpoint information).  All
     notify output is prefixed by `='.

   * CONSOLE-STREAM-OUTPUT is output that should be displayed as is in
     the console.  It is the textual response to a CLI command.  All
     the console output is prefixed by `~'.

   * TARGET-STREAM-OUTPUT is the output produced by the target program.
     All the target output is prefixed by `@'.

   * LOG-STREAM-OUTPUT is output text coming from GDB's internals, for
     instance messages that should be displayed as part of an error
     log.  All the log output is prefixed by `&'.

   * New GDB/MI commands should only output LISTS containing VALUES.


   *Note GDB/MI Stream Records: GDB/MI Stream Records, for more details
about the various output records.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI,  Next: GDB/MI Development and Front Ends,  Prev: GDB/MI Command Syntax,  Up: GDB/MI

24.2 GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI
==================================

For the developers convenience CLI commands can be entered directly,
but there may be some unexpected behaviour.  For example, commands that
query the user will behave as if the user replied yes, breakpoint
command lists are not executed and some CLI commands, such as `if',
`when' and `define', prompt for further input with `>', which is not
valid MI output.

   This feature may be removed at some stage in the future and it is
recommended that front ends use the `-interpreter-exec' command (*note
-interpreter-exec::).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Development and Front Ends,  Next: GDB/MI Output Records,  Prev: GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI,  Up: GDB/MI

24.3 GDB/MI Development and Front Ends
======================================

The application which takes the MI output and presents the state of the
program being debugged to the user is called a "front end".

   Although GDB/MI is still incomplete, it is currently being used by a
variety of front ends to GDB.  This makes it difficult to introduce new
functionality without breaking existing usage.  This section tries to
minimize the problems by describing how the protocol might change.

   Some changes in MI need not break a carefully designed front end, and
for these the MI version will remain unchanged.  The following is a
list of changes that may occur within one level, so front ends should
parse MI output in a way that can handle them:

   * New MI commands may be added.

   * New fields may be added to the output of any MI command.


   If the changes are likely to break front ends, the MI version level
will be increased by one.  This will allow the front end to parse the
output according to the MI version.  Apart from mi0, new versions of
GDB will not support old versions of MI and it will be the
responsibility of the front end to work with the new one.

   The best way to avoid unexpected changes in MI that might break your
front end is to make your project known to GDB developers and follow
development on <gdb@sourceware.org> and <gdb-patches@sourceware.org>.
There is also the mailing list <dmi-discuss@lists.freestandards.org>,
hosted by the Free Standards Group, which has the aim of creating a a
more general MI protocol called Debugger Machine Interface (DMI) that
will become a standard for all debuggers, not just GDB.  

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Output Records,  Next: GDB/MI Simple Examples,  Prev: GDB/MI Development and Front Ends,  Up: GDB/MI

24.4 GDB/MI Output Records
==========================

* Menu:

* GDB/MI Result Records::
* GDB/MI Stream Records::
* GDB/MI Out-of-band Records::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Result Records,  Next: GDB/MI Stream Records,  Up: GDB/MI Output Records

24.4.1 GDB/MI Result Records
----------------------------

In addition to a number of out-of-band notifications, the response to a
GDB/MI command includes one of the following result indications:

`"^done" [ "," RESULTS ]'
     The synchronous operation was successful, `RESULTS' are the return
     values.

`"^running"'
     The asynchronous operation was successfully started.  The target is
     running.

`"^connected"'
     GDB has connected to a remote target.

`"^error" "," C-STRING'
     The operation failed.  The `C-STRING' contains the corresponding
     error message.

`"^exit"'
     GDB has terminated.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Stream Records,  Next: GDB/MI Out-of-band Records,  Prev: GDB/MI Result Records,  Up: GDB/MI Output Records

24.4.2 GDB/MI Stream Records
----------------------------

GDB internally maintains a number of output streams: the console, the
target, and the log.  The output intended for each of these streams is
funneled through the GDB/MI interface using "stream records".

   Each stream record begins with a unique "prefix character" which
identifies its stream (*note GDB/MI Output Syntax: GDB/MI Output
Syntax.).  In addition to the prefix, each stream record contains a
`STRING-OUTPUT'.  This is either raw text (with an implicit new line)
or a quoted C string (which does not contain an implicit newline).

`"~" STRING-OUTPUT'
     The console output stream contains text that should be displayed
     in the CLI console window.  It contains the textual responses to
     CLI commands.

`"@" STRING-OUTPUT'
     The target output stream contains any textual output from the
     running target.  This is only present when GDB's event loop is
     truly asynchronous, which is currently only the case for remote
     targets.

`"&" STRING-OUTPUT'
     The log stream contains debugging messages being produced by GDB's
     internals.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Out-of-band Records,  Prev: GDB/MI Stream Records,  Up: GDB/MI Output Records

24.4.3 GDB/MI Out-of-band Records
---------------------------------

"Out-of-band" records are used to notify the GDB/MI client of
additional changes that have occurred.  Those changes can either be a
consequence of GDB/MI (e.g., a breakpoint modified) or a result of
target activity (e.g., target stopped).

   The following is a preliminary list of possible out-of-band records.
In particular, the EXEC-ASYNC-OUTPUT records.

`*stopped,reason="REASON"'

   REASON can be one of the following:

`breakpoint-hit'
     A breakpoint was reached.

`watchpoint-trigger'
     A watchpoint was triggered.

`read-watchpoint-trigger'
     A read watchpoint was triggered.

`access-watchpoint-trigger'
     An access watchpoint was triggered.

`function-finished'
     An -exec-finish or similar CLI command was accomplished.

`location-reached'
     An -exec-until or similar CLI command was accomplished.

`watchpoint-scope'
     A watchpoint has gone out of scope.

`end-stepping-range'
     An -exec-next, -exec-next-instruction, -exec-step,
     -exec-step-instruction or similar CLI command was accomplished.

`exited-signalled'
     The inferior exited because of a signal.

`exited'
     The inferior exited.

`exited-normally'
     The inferior exited normally.

`signal-received'
     A signal was received by the inferior.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Simple Examples,  Next: GDB/MI Command Description Format,  Prev: GDB/MI Output Records,  Up: GDB/MI

24.5 Simple Examples of GDB/MI Interaction
==========================================

This subsection presents several simple examples of interaction using
the GDB/MI interface.  In these examples, `->' means that the following
line is passed to GDB/MI as input, while `<-' means the output received
from GDB/MI.

   Note the the line breaks shown in the examples are here only for
readability, they don't appear in the real output.

Setting a breakpoint
--------------------

Setting a breakpoint generates synchronous output which contains
detailed information of the breakpoint.

     -> -break-insert main
     <- ^done,bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",
         enabled="y",addr="0x08048564",func="main",file="myprog.c",
         fullname="/home/nickrob/myprog.c",line="68",times="0"}
     <- (gdb)

Program Execution
-----------------

Program execution generates asynchronous records and MI gives the
reason that execution stopped.

     -> -exec-run
     <- ^running
     <- (gdb)
     <- *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",thread-id="0",
        frame={addr="0x08048564",func="main",
        args=[{name="argc",value="1"},{name="argv",value="0xbfc4d4d4"}],
        file="myprog.c",fullname="/home/nickrob/myprog.c",line="68"}
     <- (gdb)
     -> -exec-continue
     <- ^running
     <- (gdb)
     <- *stopped,reason="exited-normally"
     <- (gdb)

Quitting GDB
------------

Quitting GDB just prints the result class `^exit'.

     -> (gdb)
     <- -gdb-exit
     <- ^exit

A Bad Command
-------------

Here's what happens if you pass a non-existent command:

     -> -rubbish
     <- ^error,msg="Undefined MI command: rubbish"
     <- (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Command Description Format,  Next: GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands,  Prev: GDB/MI Simple Examples,  Up: GDB/MI

24.6 GDB/MI Command Description Format
======================================

The remaining sections describe blocks of commands.  Each block of
commands is laid out in a fashion similar to this section.

Motivation
----------

The motivation for this collection of commands.

Introduction
------------

A brief introduction to this collection of commands as a whole.

Commands
--------

For each command in the block, the following is described:

Synopsis
........

      -command ARGS...

Result
......

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB CLI command(s), if any.

Example
.......

Example(s) formatted for readability.  Some of the described commands
have not been implemented yet and these are labeled N.A. (not
available).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands,  Next: GDB/MI Program Context,  Prev: GDB/MI Command Description Format,  Up: GDB/MI

24.7 GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands
===============================

This section documents GDB/MI commands for manipulating breakpoints.

The `-break-after' Command
--------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-after NUMBER COUNT

   The breakpoint number NUMBER is not in effect until it has been hit
COUNT times.  To see how this is reflected in the output of the
`-break-list' command, see the description of the `-break-list' command
below.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `ignore'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -break-insert main
     ^done,bkpt={number="1",addr="0x000100d0",file="hello.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",line="5",times="0"}
     (gdb)
     -break-after 1 3
     ~
     ^done
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
     line="5",times="0",ignore="3"}]}
     (gdb)

The `-break-condition' Command
------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-condition NUMBER EXPR

   Breakpoint NUMBER will stop the program only if the condition in
EXPR is true.  The condition becomes part of the `-break-list' output
(see the description of the `-break-list' command below).

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `condition'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -break-condition 1 1
     ^done
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
     line="5",cond="1",times="0",ignore="3"}]}
     (gdb)

The `-break-delete' Command
---------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-delete ( BREAKPOINT )+

   Delete the breakpoint(s) whose number(s) are specified in the
argument list.  This is obviously reflected in the breakpoint list.

GDB command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `delete'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -break-delete 1
     ^done
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="0",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[]}
     (gdb)

The `-break-disable' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-disable ( BREAKPOINT )+

   Disable the named BREAKPOINT(s).  The field `enabled' in the break
list is now set to `n' for the named BREAKPOINT(s).

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `disable'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -break-disable 2
     ^done
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="n",
     addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
     line="5",times="0"}]}
     (gdb)

The `-break-enable' Command
---------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-enable ( BREAKPOINT )+

   Enable (previously disabled) BREAKPOINT(s).

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `enable'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -break-enable 2
     ^done
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
     line="5",times="0"}]}
     (gdb)

The `-break-info' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-info BREAKPOINT

   Get information about a single breakpoint.

GDB command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info break BREAKPOINT'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-break-insert' Command
---------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-insert [ -t ] [ -h ] [ -r ]
         [ -c CONDITION ] [ -i IGNORE-COUNT ]
         [ -p THREAD ] [ LINE | ADDR ]

If specified, LINE, can be one of:

   * function

   * filename:linenum

   * filename:function

   * *address

   The possible optional parameters of this command are:

`-t'
     Insert a temporary breakpoint.

`-h'
     Insert a hardware breakpoint.

`-c CONDITION'
     Make the breakpoint conditional on CONDITION.

`-i IGNORE-COUNT'
     Initialize the IGNORE-COUNT.

`-r'
     Insert a regular breakpoint in all the functions whose names match
     the given regular expression.  Other flags are not applicable to
     regular expresson.

Result
......

The result is in the form:

     ^done,bkpt={number="NUMBER",type="TYPE",disp="del"|"keep",
     enabled="y"|"n",addr="HEX",func="FUNCNAME",file="FILENAME",
     fullname="FULL_FILENAME",line="LINENO",[thread="THREADNO,]
     times="TIMES"}

where NUMBER is the GDB number for this breakpoint, FUNCNAME is the
name of the function where the breakpoint was inserted, FILENAME is the
name of the source file which contains this function, LINENO is the
source line number within that file and TIMES the number of times that
the breakpoint has been hit (always 0 for -break-insert but may be
greater for -break-info or -break-list which use the same output).

   Note: this format is open to change.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB commands are `break', `tbreak', `hbreak',
`thbreak', and `rbreak'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -break-insert main
     ^done,bkpt={number="1",addr="0x0001072c",file="recursive2.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c,line="4",times="0"}
     (gdb)
     -break-insert -t foo
     ^done,bkpt={number="2",addr="0x00010774",file="recursive2.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c,line="11",times="0"}
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x0001072c", func="main",file="recursive2.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c,"line="4",times="0"},
     bkpt={number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="del",enabled="y",
     addr="0x00010774",func="foo",file="recursive2.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c",line="11",times="0"}]}
     (gdb)
     -break-insert -r foo.*
     ~int foo(int, int);
     ^done,bkpt={number="3",addr="0x00010774",file="recursive2.c,
     "fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c",line="11",times="0"}
     (gdb)

The `-break-list' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-list

   Displays the list of inserted breakpoints, showing the following
fields:

`Number'
     number of the breakpoint

`Type'
     type of the breakpoint: `breakpoint' or `watchpoint'

`Disposition'
     should the breakpoint be deleted or disabled when it is hit: `keep'
     or `nokeep'

`Enabled'
     is the breakpoint enabled or no: `y' or `n'

`Address'
     memory location at which the breakpoint is set

`What'
     logical location of the breakpoint, expressed by function name,
     file name, line number

`Times'
     number of times the breakpoint has been hit

   If there are no breakpoints or watchpoints, the `BreakpointTable'
`body' field is an empty list.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info break'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",line="5",times="0"},
     bkpt={number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x00010114",func="foo",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
     line="13",times="0"}]}
     (gdb)

   Here's an example of the result when there are no breakpoints:

     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="0",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[]}
     (gdb)

The `-break-watch' Command
--------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -break-watch [ -a | -r ]

   Create a watchpoint.  With the `-a' option it will create an
"access" watchpoint, i.e. a watchpoint that triggers either on a read
from or on a write to the memory location.  With the `-r' option, the
watchpoint created is a "read" watchpoint, i.e. it will trigger only
when the memory location is accessed for reading.  Without either of
the options, the watchpoint created is a regular watchpoint, i.e. it
will trigger when the memory location is accessed for writing.  *Note
Setting watchpoints: Set Watchpoints.

   Note that `-break-list' will report a single list of watchpoints and
breakpoints inserted.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB commands are `watch', `awatch', and `rwatch'.

Example
.......

Setting a watchpoint on a variable in the `main' function:

     (gdb)
     -break-watch x
     ^done,wpt={number="2",exp="x"}
     (gdb)
     -exec-continue
     ^running
     ^done,reason="watchpoint-trigger",wpt={number="2",exp="x"},
     value={old="-268439212",new="55"},
     frame={func="main",args=[],file="recursive2.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="5"}
     (gdb)

   Setting a watchpoint on a variable local to a function.  GDB will
stop the program execution twice: first for the variable changing
value, then for the watchpoint going out of scope.

     (gdb)
     -break-watch C
     ^done,wpt={number="5",exp="C"}
     (gdb)
     -exec-continue
     ^running
     ^done,reason="watchpoint-trigger",
     wpt={number="5",exp="C"},value={old="-276895068",new="3"},
     frame={func="callee4",args=[],
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="13"}
     (gdb)
     -exec-continue
     ^running
     ^done,reason="watchpoint-scope",wpnum="5",
     frame={func="callee3",args=[{name="strarg",
     value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""}],
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="18"}
     (gdb)

   Listing breakpoints and watchpoints, at different points in the
program execution.  Note that once the watchpoint goes out of scope, it
is deleted.

     (gdb)
     -break-watch C
     ^done,wpt={number="2",exp="C"}
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c"line="8",times="1"},
     bkpt={number="2",type="watchpoint",disp="keep",
     enabled="y",addr="",what="C",times="0"}]}
     (gdb)
     -exec-continue
     ^running
     ^done,reason="watchpoint-trigger",wpt={number="2",exp="C"},
     value={old="-276895068",new="3"},
     frame={func="callee4",args=[],
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="13"}
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8",times="1"},
     bkpt={number="2",type="watchpoint",disp="keep",
     enabled="y",addr="",what="C",times="-5"}]}
     (gdb)
     -exec-continue
     ^running
     ^done,reason="watchpoint-scope",wpnum="2",
     frame={func="callee3",args=[{name="strarg",
     value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""}],
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="18"}
     (gdb)
     -break-list
     ^done,BreakpointTable={nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
     hdr=[{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"},
     {width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"},
     {width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"},
     {width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"},
     {width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"},
     {width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"}],
     body=[bkpt={number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
     addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8",
     times="1"}]}
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Program Context,  Next: GDB/MI Thread Commands,  Prev: GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands,  Up: GDB/MI

24.8 GDB/MI  Program Context
============================

The `-exec-arguments' Command
-----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-arguments ARGS

   Set the inferior program arguments, to be used in the next
`-exec-run'.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `set args'.

Example
.......

Don't have one around.

The `-exec-show-arguments' Command
----------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-show-arguments

   Print the arguments of the program.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `show args'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-environment-cd' Command
-----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -environment-cd PATHDIR

   Set GDB's working directory.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `cd'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -environment-cd /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-environment-directory' Command
------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -environment-directory [ -r ] [ PATHDIR ]+

   Add directories PATHDIR to beginning of search path for source files.
If the `-r' option is used, the search path is reset to the default
search path.  If directories PATHDIR are supplied in addition to the
`-r' option, the search path is first reset and then addition occurs as
normal.  Multiple directories may be specified, separated by blanks.
Specifying multiple directories in a single command results in the
directories added to the beginning of the search path in the same order
they were presented in the command.  If blanks are needed as part of a
directory name, double-quotes should be used around the name.  In the
command output, the path will show up separated by the system
directory-separator character.  The directory-seperator character must
not be used in any directory name.  If no directories are specified,
the current search path is displayed.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `dir'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -environment-directory /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb
     ^done,source-path="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb:$cdir:$cwd"
     (gdb)
     -environment-directory ""
     ^done,source-path="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb:$cdir:$cwd"
     (gdb)
     -environment-directory -r /home/jjohnstn/src/gdb /usr/src
     ^done,source-path="/home/jjohnstn/src/gdb:/usr/src:$cdir:$cwd"
     (gdb)
     -environment-directory -r
     ^done,source-path="$cdir:$cwd"
     (gdb)

The `-environment-path' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -environment-path [ -r ] [ PATHDIR ]+

   Add directories PATHDIR to beginning of search path for object files.
If the `-r' option is used, the search path is reset to the original
search path that existed at gdb start-up.  If directories PATHDIR are
supplied in addition to the `-r' option, the search path is first reset
and then addition occurs as normal.  Multiple directories may be
specified, separated by blanks.  Specifying multiple directories in a
single command results in the directories added to the beginning of the
search path in the same order they were presented in the command.  If
blanks are needed as part of a directory name, double-quotes should be
used around the name.  In the command output, the path will show up
separated by the system directory-separator character.  The
directory-seperator character must not be used in any directory name.
If no directories are specified, the current path is displayed.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `path'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -environment-path
     ^done,path="/usr/bin"
     (gdb)
     -environment-path /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/ppc-eabi/gdb /bin
     ^done,path="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/ppc-eabi/gdb:/bin:/usr/bin"
     (gdb)
     -environment-path -r /usr/local/bin
     ^done,path="/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin"
     (gdb)

The `-environment-pwd' Command
------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -environment-pwd

   Show the current working directory.

GDB command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `pwd'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -environment-pwd
     ^done,cwd="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb"
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Thread Commands,  Next: GDB/MI Program Execution,  Prev: GDB/MI Program Context,  Up: GDB/MI

24.9 GDB/MI Thread Commands
===========================

The `-thread-info' Command
--------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -thread-info

GDB command
...........

No equivalent.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-thread-list-all-threads' Command
--------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -thread-list-all-threads

GDB Command
...........

The equivalent GDB command is `info threads'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-thread-list-ids' Command
------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -thread-list-ids

   Produces a list of the currently known GDB thread ids.  At the end
of the list it also prints the total number of such threads.

GDB Command
...........

Part of `info threads' supplies the same information.

Example
.......

No threads present, besides the main process:

     (gdb)
     -thread-list-ids
     ^done,thread-ids={},number-of-threads="0"
     (gdb)

   Several threads:

     (gdb)
     -thread-list-ids
     ^done,thread-ids={thread-id="3",thread-id="2",thread-id="1"},
     number-of-threads="3"
     (gdb)

The `-thread-select' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -thread-select THREADNUM

   Make THREADNUM the current thread.  It prints the number of the new
current thread, and the topmost frame for that thread.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `thread'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -exec-next
     ^running
     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",thread-id="2",line="187",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.threads/linux-dp.c"
     (gdb)
     -thread-list-ids
     ^done,
     thread-ids={thread-id="3",thread-id="2",thread-id="1"},
     number-of-threads="3"
     (gdb)
     -thread-select 3
     ^done,new-thread-id="3",
     frame={level="0",func="vprintf",
     args=[{name="format",value="0x8048e9c \"%*s%c %d %c\\n\""},
     {name="arg",value="0x2"}],file="vprintf.c",line="31"}
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Program Execution,  Next: GDB/MI Stack Manipulation,  Prev: GDB/MI Thread Commands,  Up: GDB/MI

24.10 GDB/MI Program Execution
==============================

These are the asynchronous commands which generate the out-of-band
record `*stopped'.  Currently GDB only really executes asynchronously
with remote targets and this interaction is mimicked in other cases.

The `-exec-continue' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-continue

   Resumes the execution of the inferior program until a breakpoint is
encountered, or until the inferior exits.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB corresponding is `continue'.

Example
.......

     -exec-continue
     ^running
     (gdb)
     @Hello world
     *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="2",frame={func="foo",args=[],
     file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/hello.c",line="13"}
     (gdb)

The `-exec-finish' Command
--------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-finish

   Resumes the execution of the inferior program until the current
function is exited.  Displays the results returned by the function.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `finish'.

Example
.......

Function returning `void'.

     -exec-finish
     ^running
     (gdb)
     @hello from foo
     *stopped,reason="function-finished",frame={func="main",args=[],
     file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/hello.c",line="7"}
     (gdb)

   Function returning other than `void'.  The name of the internal GDB
variable storing the result is printed, together with the value itself.

     -exec-finish
     ^running
     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="function-finished",frame={addr="0x000107b0",func="foo",
     args=[{name="a",value="1"],{name="b",value="9"}},
     file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     gdb-result-var="$1",return-value="0"
     (gdb)

The `-exec-interrupt' Command
-----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-interrupt

   Interrupts the background execution of the target.  Note how the
token associated with the stop message is the one for the execution
command that has been interrupted.  The token for the interrupt itself
only appears in the `^done' output.  If the user is trying to interrupt
a non-running program, an error message will be printed.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `interrupt'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     111-exec-continue
     111^running

     (gdb)
     222-exec-interrupt
     222^done
     (gdb)
     111*stopped,signal-name="SIGINT",signal-meaning="Interrupt",
     frame={addr="0x00010140",func="foo",args=[],file="try.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="13"}
     (gdb)

     (gdb)
     -exec-interrupt
     ^error,msg="mi_cmd_exec_interrupt: Inferior not executing."
     (gdb)

The `-exec-next' Command
------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-next

   Resumes execution of the inferior program, stopping when the
beginning of the next source line is reached.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `next'.

Example
.......

     -exec-next
     ^running
     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",line="8",file="hello.c"
     (gdb)

The `-exec-next-instruction' Command
------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-next-instruction

   Executes one machine instruction.  If the instruction is a function
call, continues until the function returns.  If the program stops at an
instruction in the middle of a source line, the address will be printed
as well.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `nexti'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -exec-next-instruction
     ^running

     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
     addr="0x000100d4",line="5",file="hello.c"
     (gdb)

The `-exec-return' Command
--------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-return

   Makes current function return immediately.  Doesn't execute the
inferior.  Displays the new current frame.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `return'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     200-break-insert callee4
     200^done,bkpt={number="1",addr="0x00010734",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8"}
     (gdb)
     000-exec-run
     000^running
     (gdb)
     000*stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",
     frame={func="callee4",args=[],
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8"}
     (gdb)
     205-break-delete
     205^done
     (gdb)
     111-exec-return
     111^done,frame={level="0",func="callee3",
     args=[{name="strarg",
     value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""}],
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="18"}
     (gdb)

The `-exec-run' Command
-----------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-run

   Starts execution of the inferior from the beginning.  The inferior
executes until either a breakpoint is encountered or the program exits.
In the latter case the output will include an exit code, if the
program has exited exceptionally.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `run'.

Examples
........

     (gdb)
     -break-insert main
     ^done,bkpt={number="1",addr="0x0001072c",file="recursive2.c",line="4"}
     (gdb)
     -exec-run
     ^running
     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",
     frame={func="main",args=[],file="recursive2.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="4"}
     (gdb)

Program exited normally:

     (gdb)
     -exec-run
     ^running
     (gdb)
     x = 55
     *stopped,reason="exited-normally"
     (gdb)

Program exited exceptionally:

     (gdb)
     -exec-run
     ^running
     (gdb)
     x = 55
     *stopped,reason="exited",exit-code="01"
     (gdb)

   Another way the program can terminate is if it receives a signal
such as `SIGINT'.  In this case, GDB/MI displays this:

     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="exited-signalled",signal-name="SIGINT",
     signal-meaning="Interrupt"

The `-exec-step' Command
------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-step

   Resumes execution of the inferior program, stopping when the
beginning of the next source line is reached, if the next source line
is not a function call.  If it is, stop at the first instruction of the
called function.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `step'.

Example
.......

Stepping into a function:

     -exec-step
     ^running
     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
     frame={func="foo",args=[{name="a",value="10"},
     {name="b",value="0"}],file="recursive2.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="11"}
     (gdb)

   Regular stepping:

     -exec-step
     ^running
     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",line="14",file="recursive2.c"
     (gdb)

The `-exec-step-instruction' Command
------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-step-instruction

   Resumes the inferior which executes one machine instruction.  The
output, once GDB has stopped, will vary depending on whether we have
stopped in the middle of a source line or not.  In the former case, the
address at which the program stopped will be printed as well.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `stepi'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -exec-step-instruction
     ^running

     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
     frame={func="foo",args=[],file="try.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="10"}
     (gdb)
     -exec-step-instruction
     ^running

     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
     frame={addr="0x000100f4",func="foo",args=[],file="try.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="10"}
     (gdb)

The `-exec-until' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-until [ LOCATION ]

   Executes the inferior until the LOCATION specified in the argument
is reached.  If there is no argument, the inferior executes until a
source line greater than the current one is reached.  The reason for
stopping in this case will be `location-reached'.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `until'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -exec-until recursive2.c:6
     ^running
     (gdb)
     x = 55
     *stopped,reason="location-reached",frame={func="main",args=[],
     file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="6"}
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Stack Manipulation,  Next: GDB/MI Variable Objects,  Prev: GDB/MI Program Execution,  Up: GDB/MI

24.11 GDB/MI Stack Manipulation Commands
========================================

The `-stack-info-frame' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -stack-info-frame

   Get info on the selected frame.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info frame' or `frame' (without
arguments).

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -stack-info-frame
     ^done,frame={level="1",addr="0x0001076c",func="callee3",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="17"}
     (gdb)

The `-stack-info-depth' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -stack-info-depth [ MAX-DEPTH ]

   Return the depth of the stack.  If the integer argument MAX-DEPTH is
specified, do not count beyond MAX-DEPTH frames.

GDB Command
...........

There's no equivalent GDB command.

Example
.......

For a stack with frame levels 0 through 11:

     (gdb)
     -stack-info-depth
     ^done,depth="12"
     (gdb)
     -stack-info-depth 4
     ^done,depth="4"
     (gdb)
     -stack-info-depth 12
     ^done,depth="12"
     (gdb)
     -stack-info-depth 11
     ^done,depth="11"
     (gdb)
     -stack-info-depth 13
     ^done,depth="12"
     (gdb)

The `-stack-list-arguments' Command
-----------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -stack-list-arguments SHOW-VALUES
         [ LOW-FRAME HIGH-FRAME ]

   Display a list of the arguments for the frames between LOW-FRAME and
HIGH-FRAME (inclusive).  If LOW-FRAME and HIGH-FRAME are not provided,
list the arguments for the whole call stack.  If the two arguments are
equal, show the single frame at the corresponding level.  It is an
error if LOW-FRAME is larger than the actual number of frames.  On the
other hand, HIGH-FRAME may be larger than the actual number of frames,
in which case only existing frames will be returned.

   The SHOW-VALUES argument must have a value of 0 or 1.  A value of 0
means that only the names of the arguments are listed, a value of 1
means that both names and values of the arguments are printed.

GDB Command
...........

GDB does not have an equivalent command.  `gdbtk' has a `gdb_get_args'
command which partially overlaps with the functionality of
`-stack-list-arguments'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -stack-list-frames
     ^done,
     stack=[
     frame={level="0",addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8"},
     frame={level="1",addr="0x0001076c",func="callee3",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="17"},
     frame={level="2",addr="0x0001078c",func="callee2",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="22"},
     frame={level="3",addr="0x000107b4",func="callee1",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="27"},
     frame={level="4",addr="0x000107e0",func="main",
     file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
     fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="32"}]
     (gdb)
     -stack-list-arguments 0
     ^done,
     stack-args=[
     frame={level="0",args=[]},
     frame={level="1",args=[name="strarg"]},
     frame={level="2",args=[name="intarg",name="strarg"]},
     frame={level="3",args=[name="intarg",name="strarg",name="fltarg"]},
     frame={level="4",args=[]}]
     (gdb)
     -stack-list-arguments 1
     ^done,
     stack-args=[
     frame={level="0",args=[]},
     frame={level="1",
      args=[{name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""}]},
     frame={level="2",args=[
     {name="intarg",value="2"},
     {name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""}]},
     {frame={level="3",args=[
     {name="intarg",value="2"},
     {name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""},
     {name="fltarg",value="3.5"}]},
     frame={level="4",args=[]}]
     (gdb)
     -stack-list-arguments 0 2 2
     ^done,stack-args=[frame={level="2",args=[name="intarg",name="strarg"]}]
     (gdb)
     -stack-list-arguments 1 2 2
     ^done,stack-args=[frame={level="2",
     args=[{name="intarg",value="2"},
     {name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""}]}]
     (gdb)

The `-stack-list-frames' Command
--------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -stack-list-frames [ LOW-FRAME HIGH-FRAME ]

   List the frames currently on the stack.  For each frame it displays
the following info:

`LEVEL'
     The frame number, 0 being the topmost frame, i.e. the innermost
     function.

`ADDR'
     The `$pc' value for that frame.

`FUNC'
     Function name.

`FILE'
     File name of the source file where the function lives.

`LINE'
     Line number corresponding to the `$pc'.

   If invoked without arguments, this command prints a backtrace for the
whole stack.  If given two integer arguments, it shows the frames whose
levels are between the two arguments (inclusive).  If the two arguments
are equal, it shows the single frame at the corresponding level.  It is
an error if LOW-FRAME is larger than the actual number of frames.  On
the other hand, HIGH-FRAME may be larger than the actual number of
frames, in which case only existing frames will be returned.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB commands are `backtrace' and `where'.

Example
.......

Full stack backtrace:

     (gdb)
     -stack-list-frames
     ^done,stack=
     [frame={level="0",addr="0x0001076c",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="11"},
     frame={level="1",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="2",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="3",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="4",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="5",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="6",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="7",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="8",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="9",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="10",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="11",addr="0x00010738",func="main",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="4"}]
     (gdb)

   Show frames between LOW_FRAME and HIGH_FRAME:

     (gdb)
     -stack-list-frames 3 5
     ^done,stack=
     [frame={level="3",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="4",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"},
     frame={level="5",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"}]
     (gdb)

   Show a single frame:

     (gdb)
     -stack-list-frames 3 3
     ^done,stack=
     [frame={level="3",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
       file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"}]
     (gdb)

The `-stack-list-locals' Command
--------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -stack-list-locals PRINT-VALUES

   Display the local variable names for the selected frame.  If
PRINT-VALUES is 0 or `--no-values', print only the names of the
variables; if it is 1 or `--all-values', print also their values; and
if it is 2 or `--simple-values', print the name, type and value for
simple data types and the name and type for arrays, structures and
unions.  In this last case, a frontend can immediately display the
value of simple data types and create variable objects for other data
types when the the user wishes to explore their values in more detail.

GDB Command
...........

`info locals' in GDB, `gdb_get_locals' in `gdbtk'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -stack-list-locals 0
     ^done,locals=[name="A",name="B",name="C"]
     (gdb)
     -stack-list-locals --all-values
     ^done,locals=[{name="A",value="1"},{name="B",value="2"},
       {name="C",value="{1, 2, 3}"}]
     -stack-list-locals --simple-values
     ^done,locals=[{name="A",type="int",value="1"},
       {name="B",type="int",value="2"},{name="C",type="int [3]"}]
     (gdb)

The `-stack-select-frame' Command
---------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -stack-select-frame FRAMENUM

   Change the selected frame.  Select a different frame FRAMENUM on the
stack.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB commands are `frame', `up', `down',
`select-frame', `up-silent', and `down-silent'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -stack-select-frame 2
     ^done
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Variable Objects,  Next: GDB/MI Data Manipulation,  Prev: GDB/MI Stack Manipulation,  Up: GDB/MI

24.12 GDB/MI Variable Objects
=============================

Motivation for Variable Objects in GDB/MI
-----------------------------------------

For the implementation of a variable debugger window (locals, watched
expressions, etc.), we are proposing the adaptation of the existing code
used by `Insight'.

   The two main reasons for that are:

  1. It has been proven in practice (it is already on its second
     generation).

  2. It will shorten development time (needless to say how important it
     is now).

   The original interface was designed to be used by Tcl code, so it was
slightly changed so it could be used through GDB/MI.  This section
describes the GDB/MI operations that will be available and gives some
hints about their use.

   _Note_: In addition to the set of operations described here, we
expect the GUI implementation of a variable window to require, at
least, the following operations:

   * `-gdb-show' `output-radix'

   * `-stack-list-arguments'

   * `-stack-list-locals'

   * `-stack-select-frame'

Introduction to Variable Objects in GDB/MI
------------------------------------------

The basic idea behind variable objects is the creation of a named object
to represent a variable, an expression, a memory location or even a CPU
register.  For each object created, a set of operations is available for
examining or changing its properties.

   Furthermore, complex data types, such as C structures, are
represented in a tree format.  For instance, the `struct' type variable
is the root and the children will represent the struct members.  If a
child is itself of a complex type, it will also have children of its
own.  Appropriate language differences are handled for C, C++ and Java.

   When returning the actual values of the objects, this facility allows
for the individual selection of the display format used in the result
creation.  It can be chosen among: binary, decimal, hexadecimal, octal
and natural.  Natural refers to a default format automatically chosen
based on the variable type (like decimal for an `int', hex for
pointers, etc.).

   The following is the complete set of GDB/MI operations defined to
access this functionality:

*Operation*                   *Description*
`-var-create'                 create a variable object
`-var-delete'                 delete the variable object and its children
`-var-set-format'             set the display format of this variable
`-var-show-format'            show the display format of this variable
`-var-info-num-children'      tells how many children this object has
`-var-list-children'          return a list of the object's children
`-var-info-type'              show the type of this variable object
`-var-info-expression'        print what this variable object represents
`-var-show-attributes'        is this variable editable? does it exist
                              here?
`-var-evaluate-expression'    get the value of this variable
`-var-assign'                 set the value of this variable
`-var-update'                 update the variable and its children

   In the next subsection we describe each operation in detail and
suggest how it can be used.

Description And Use of Operations on Variable Objects
-----------------------------------------------------

The `-var-create' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-create {NAME | "-"}
         {FRAME-ADDR | "*"} EXPRESSION

   This operation creates a variable object, which allows the
monitoring of a variable, the result of an expression, a memory cell or
a CPU register.

   The NAME parameter is the string by which the object can be
referenced.  It must be unique.  If `-' is specified, the varobj system
will generate a string "varNNNNNN" automatically.  It will be unique
provided that one does not specify NAME on that format.  The command
fails if a duplicate name is found.

   The frame under which the expression should be evaluated can be
specified by FRAME-ADDR.  A `*' indicates that the current frame should
be used.

   EXPRESSION is any expression valid on the current language set (must
not begin with a `*'), or one of the following:

   * `*ADDR', where ADDR is the address of a memory cell

   * `*ADDR-ADDR' -- a memory address range (TBD)

   * `$REGNAME' -- a CPU register name

Result
......

This operation returns the name, number of children and the type of the
object created.  Type is returned as a string as the ones generated by
the GDB CLI:

      name="NAME",numchild="N",type="TYPE"

The `-var-delete' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-delete NAME

   Deletes a previously created variable object and all of its children.

   Returns an error if the object NAME is not found.

The `-var-set-format' Command
-----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-set-format NAME FORMAT-SPEC

   Sets the output format for the value of the object NAME to be
FORMAT-SPEC.

   The syntax for the FORMAT-SPEC is as follows:

      FORMAT-SPEC ==>
      {binary | decimal | hexadecimal | octal | natural}

The `-var-show-format' Command
------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-show-format NAME

   Returns the format used to display the value of the object NAME.

      FORMAT ==>
      FORMAT-SPEC

The `-var-info-num-children' Command
------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-info-num-children NAME

   Returns the number of children of a variable object NAME:

      numchild=N

The `-var-list-children' Command
--------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-list-children [PRINT-VALUES] NAME

   Return a list of the children of the specified variable object and
create variable objects for them, if they do not already exist.  With a
single argument or if PRINT-VALUES has a value for of 0 or
`--no-values', print only the names of the variables; if PRINT-VALUES
is 1 or `--all-values', also print their values; and if it is 2 or
`--simple-values' print the name and value for simple data types and
just the name for arrays, structures and unions.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
      -var-list-children n
      ^done,numchild=N,children=[{name=NAME,
      numchild=N,type=TYPE},(repeats N times)]
     (gdb)
      -var-list-children --all-values n
      ^done,numchild=N,children=[{name=NAME,
      numchild=N,value=VALUE,type=TYPE},(repeats N times)]

The `-var-info-type' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-info-type NAME

   Returns the type of the specified variable NAME.  The type is
returned as a string in the same format as it is output by the GDB CLI:

      type=TYPENAME

The `-var-info-expression' Command
----------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-info-expression NAME

   Returns what is represented by the variable object NAME:

      lang=LANG-SPEC,exp=EXPRESSION

where LANG-SPEC is `{"C" | "C++" | "Java"}'.

The `-var-show-attributes' Command
----------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-show-attributes NAME

   List attributes of the specified variable object NAME:

      status=ATTR [ ( ,ATTR )* ]

where ATTR is `{ { editable | noneditable } | TBD }'.

The `-var-evaluate-expression' Command
--------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-evaluate-expression NAME

   Evaluates the expression that is represented by the specified
variable object and returns its value as a string in the current format
specified for the object:

      value=VALUE

   Note that one must invoke `-var-list-children' for a variable before
the value of a child variable can be evaluated.

The `-var-assign' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-assign NAME EXPRESSION

   Assigns the value of EXPRESSION to the variable object specified by
NAME.  The object must be `editable'.  If the variable's value is
altered by the assign, the variable will show up in any subsequent
`-var-update' list.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -var-assign var1 3
     ^done,value="3"
     (gdb)
     -var-update *
     ^done,changelist=[{name="var1",in_scope="true",type_changed="false"}]
     (gdb)

The `-var-update' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -var-update [PRINT-VALUES] {NAME | "*"}

   Update the value of the variable object NAME by evaluating its
expression after fetching all the new values from memory or registers.
A `*' causes all existing variable objects to be updated.  The option
PRINT-VALUES determines whether names both and values, or just names
are printed in the manner described for `-var-list-children' (*note
-var-list-children::).

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -var-assign var1 3
     ^done,value="3"
     (gdb)
     -var-update --all-values var1
     ^done,changelist=[{name="var1",value="3",in_scope="true",
     type_changed="false"}]
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Data Manipulation,  Next: GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands,  Prev: GDB/MI Variable Objects,  Up: GDB/MI

24.13 GDB/MI Data Manipulation
==============================

This section describes the GDB/MI commands that manipulate data:
examine memory and registers, evaluate expressions, etc.

The `-data-disassemble' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -data-disassemble
         [ -s START-ADDR -e END-ADDR ]
       | [ -f FILENAME -l LINENUM [ -n LINES ] ]
       -- MODE

Where:

`START-ADDR'
     is the beginning address (or `$pc')

`END-ADDR'
     is the end address

`FILENAME'
     is the name of the file to disassemble

`LINENUM'
     is the line number to disassemble around

`LINES'
     is the the number of disassembly lines to be produced.  If it is
     -1, the whole function will be disassembled, in case no END-ADDR is
     specified.  If END-ADDR is specified as a non-zero value, and
     LINES is lower than the number of disassembly lines between
     START-ADDR and END-ADDR, only LINES lines are displayed; if LINES
     is higher than the number of lines between START-ADDR and
     END-ADDR, only the lines up to END-ADDR are displayed.

`MODE'
     is either 0 (meaning only disassembly) or 1 (meaning mixed source
     and disassembly).

Result
......

The output for each instruction is composed of four fields:

   * Address

   * Func-name

   * Offset

   * Instruction

   Note that whatever included in the instruction field, is not
manipulated directely by GDB/MI, i.e. it is not possible to adjust its
format.

GDB Command
...........

There's no direct mapping from this command to the CLI.

Example
.......

Disassemble from the current value of `$pc' to `$pc + 20':

     (gdb)
     -data-disassemble -s $pc -e "$pc + 20" -- 0
     ^done,
     asm_insns=[
     {address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
     inst="mov  2, %o0"},
     {address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
     inst="sethi  %hi(0x11800), %o2"},
     {address="0x000107c8",func-name="main",offset="12",
     inst="or  %o2, 0x140, %o1\t! 0x11940 <_lib_version+8>"},
     {address="0x000107cc",func-name="main",offset="16",
     inst="sethi  %hi(0x11800), %o2"},
     {address="0x000107d0",func-name="main",offset="20",
     inst="or  %o2, 0x168, %o4\t! 0x11968 <_lib_version+48>"}]
     (gdb)

   Disassemble the whole `main' function.  Line 32 is part of `main'.

     -data-disassemble -f basics.c -l 32 -- 0
     ^done,asm_insns=[
     {address="0x000107bc",func-name="main",offset="0",
     inst="save  %sp, -112, %sp"},
     {address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
     inst="mov   2, %o0"},
     {address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
     inst="sethi %hi(0x11800), %o2"},
     [...]
     {address="0x0001081c",func-name="main",offset="96",inst="ret "},
     {address="0x00010820",func-name="main",offset="100",inst="restore "}]
     (gdb)

   Disassemble 3 instructions from the start of `main':

     (gdb)
     -data-disassemble -f basics.c -l 32 -n 3 -- 0
     ^done,asm_insns=[
     {address="0x000107bc",func-name="main",offset="0",
     inst="save  %sp, -112, %sp"},
     {address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
     inst="mov  2, %o0"},
     {address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
     inst="sethi  %hi(0x11800), %o2"}]
     (gdb)

   Disassemble 3 instructions from the start of `main' in mixed mode:

     (gdb)
     -data-disassemble -f basics.c -l 32 -n 3 -- 1
     ^done,asm_insns=[
     src_and_asm_line={line="31",
     file="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb/ \
       testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line_asm_insn=[
     {address="0x000107bc",func-name="main",offset="0",
     inst="save  %sp, -112, %sp"}]},
     src_and_asm_line={line="32",
     file="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb/ \
       testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line_asm_insn=[
     {address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
     inst="mov  2, %o0"},
     {address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
     inst="sethi  %hi(0x11800), %o2"}]}]
     (gdb)

The `-data-evaluate-expression' Command
---------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -data-evaluate-expression EXPR

   Evaluate EXPR as an expression.  The expression could contain an
inferior function call.  The function call will execute synchronously.
If the expression contains spaces, it must be enclosed in double quotes.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB commands are `print', `output', and `call'.  In
`gdbtk' only, there's a corresponding `gdb_eval' command.

Example
.......

In the following example, the numbers that precede the commands are the
"tokens" described in *Note GDB/MI Command Syntax: GDB/MI Command
Syntax.  Notice how GDB/MI returns the same tokens in its output.

     211-data-evaluate-expression A
     211^done,value="1"
     (gdb)
     311-data-evaluate-expression &A
     311^done,value="0xefffeb7c"
     (gdb)
     411-data-evaluate-expression A+3
     411^done,value="4"
     (gdb)
     511-data-evaluate-expression "A + 3"
     511^done,value="4"
     (gdb)

The `-data-list-changed-registers' Command
------------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -data-list-changed-registers

   Display a list of the registers that have changed.

GDB Command
...........

GDB doesn't have a direct analog for this command; `gdbtk' has the
corresponding command `gdb_changed_register_list'.

Example
.......

On a PPC MBX board:

     (gdb)
     -exec-continue
     ^running

     (gdb)
     *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",frame={func="main",
     args=[],file="try.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="5"}
     (gdb)
     -data-list-changed-registers
     ^done,changed-registers=["0","1","2","4","5","6","7","8","9",
     "10","11","13","14","15","16","17","18","19","20","21","22","23",
     "24","25","26","27","28","30","31","64","65","66","67","69"]
     (gdb)

The `-data-list-register-names' Command
---------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -data-list-register-names [ ( REGNO )+ ]

   Show a list of register names for the current target.  If no
arguments are given, it shows a list of the names of all the registers.
If integer numbers are given as arguments, it will print a list of the
names of the registers corresponding to the arguments.  To ensure
consistency between a register name and its number, the output list may
include empty register names.

GDB Command
...........

GDB does not have a command which corresponds to
`-data-list-register-names'.  In `gdbtk' there is a corresponding
command `gdb_regnames'.

Example
.......

For the PPC MBX board:
     (gdb)
     -data-list-register-names
     ^done,register-names=["r0","r1","r2","r3","r4","r5","r6","r7",
     "r8","r9","r10","r11","r12","r13","r14","r15","r16","r17","r18",
     "r19","r20","r21","r22","r23","r24","r25","r26","r27","r28","r29",
     "r30","r31","f0","f1","f2","f3","f4","f5","f6","f7","f8","f9",
     "f10","f11","f12","f13","f14","f15","f16","f17","f18","f19","f20",
     "f21","f22","f23","f24","f25","f26","f27","f28","f29","f30","f31",
     "", "pc","ps","cr","lr","ctr","xer"]
     (gdb)
     -data-list-register-names 1 2 3
     ^done,register-names=["r1","r2","r3"]
     (gdb)

The `-data-list-register-values' Command
----------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -data-list-register-values FMT [ ( REGNO )*]

   Display the registers' contents.  FMT is the format according to
which the registers' contents are to be returned, followed by an
optional list of numbers specifying the registers to display.  A
missing list of numbers indicates that the contents of all the
registers must be returned.

   Allowed formats for FMT are:

`x'
     Hexadecimal

`o'
     Octal

`t'
     Binary

`d'
     Decimal

`r'
     Raw

`N'
     Natural

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB commands are `info reg', `info all-reg', and (in
`gdbtk') `gdb_fetch_registers'.

Example
.......

For a PPC MBX board (note: line breaks are for readability only, they
don't appear in the actual output):

     (gdb)
     -data-list-register-values r 64 65
     ^done,register-values=[{number="64",value="0xfe00a300"},
     {number="65",value="0x00029002"}]
     (gdb)
     -data-list-register-values x
     ^done,register-values=[{number="0",value="0xfe0043c8"},
     {number="1",value="0x3fff88"},{number="2",value="0xfffffffe"},
     {number="3",value="0x0"},{number="4",value="0xa"},
     {number="5",value="0x3fff68"},{number="6",value="0x3fff58"},
     {number="7",value="0xfe011e98"},{number="8",value="0x2"},
     {number="9",value="0xfa202820"},{number="10",value="0xfa202808"},
     {number="11",value="0x1"},{number="12",value="0x0"},
     {number="13",value="0x4544"},{number="14",value="0xffdfffff"},
     {number="15",value="0xffffffff"},{number="16",value="0xfffffeff"},
     {number="17",value="0xefffffed"},{number="18",value="0xfffffffe"},
     {number="19",value="0xffffffff"},{number="20",value="0xffffffff"},
     {number="21",value="0xffffffff"},{number="22",value="0xfffffff7"},
     {number="23",value="0xffffffff"},{number="24",value="0xffffffff"},
     {number="25",value="0xffffffff"},{number="26",value="0xfffffffb"},
     {number="27",value="0xffffffff"},{number="28",value="0xf7bfffff"},
     {number="29",value="0x0"},{number="30",value="0xfe010000"},
     {number="31",value="0x0"},{number="32",value="0x0"},
     {number="33",value="0x0"},{number="34",value="0x0"},
     {number="35",value="0x0"},{number="36",value="0x0"},
     {number="37",value="0x0"},{number="38",value="0x0"},
     {number="39",value="0x0"},{number="40",value="0x0"},
     {number="41",value="0x0"},{number="42",value="0x0"},
     {number="43",value="0x0"},{number="44",value="0x0"},
     {number="45",value="0x0"},{number="46",value="0x0"},
     {number="47",value="0x0"},{number="48",value="0x0"},
     {number="49",value="0x0"},{number="50",value="0x0"},
     {number="51",value="0x0"},{number="52",value="0x0"},
     {number="53",value="0x0"},{number="54",value="0x0"},
     {number="55",value="0x0"},{number="56",value="0x0"},
     {number="57",value="0x0"},{number="58",value="0x0"},
     {number="59",value="0x0"},{number="60",value="0x0"},
     {number="61",value="0x0"},{number="62",value="0x0"},
     {number="63",value="0x0"},{number="64",value="0xfe00a300"},
     {number="65",value="0x29002"},{number="66",value="0x202f04b5"},
     {number="67",value="0xfe0043b0"},{number="68",value="0xfe00b3e4"},
     {number="69",value="0x20002b03"}]
     (gdb)

The `-data-read-memory' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -data-read-memory [ -o BYTE-OFFSET ]
        ADDRESS WORD-FORMAT WORD-SIZE
        NR-ROWS NR-COLS [ ASCHAR ]

where:

`ADDRESS'
     An expression specifying the address of the first memory word to be
     read.  Complex expressions containing embedded white space should
     be quoted using the C convention.

`WORD-FORMAT'
     The format to be used to print the memory words.  The notation is
     the same as for GDB's `print' command (*note Output formats:
     Output Formats.).

`WORD-SIZE'
     The size of each memory word in bytes.

`NR-ROWS'
     The number of rows in the output table.

`NR-COLS'
     The number of columns in the output table.

`ASCHAR'
     If present, indicates that each row should include an ASCII dump.
     The value of ASCHAR is used as a padding character when a byte is
     not a member of the printable ASCII character set (printable ASCII
     characters are those whose code is between 32 and 126,
     inclusively).

`BYTE-OFFSET'
     An offset to add to the ADDRESS before fetching memory.

   This command displays memory contents as a table of NR-ROWS by
NR-COLS words, each word being WORD-SIZE bytes.  In total, `NR-ROWS *
NR-COLS * WORD-SIZE' bytes are read (returned as `total-bytes').
Should less than the requested number of bytes be returned by the
target, the missing words are identified using `N/A'.  The number of
bytes read from the target is returned in `nr-bytes' and the starting
address used to read memory in `addr'.

   The address of the next/previous row or page is available in
`next-row' and `prev-row', `next-page' and `prev-page'.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `x'.  `gdbtk' has `gdb_get_mem' memory
read command.

Example
.......

Read six bytes of memory starting at `bytes+6' but then offset by `-6'
bytes.  Format as three rows of two columns.  One byte per word.
Display each word in hex.

     (gdb)
     9-data-read-memory -o -6 -- bytes+6 x 1 3 2
     9^done,addr="0x00001390",nr-bytes="6",total-bytes="6",
     next-row="0x00001396",prev-row="0x0000138e",next-page="0x00001396",
     prev-page="0x0000138a",memory=[
     {addr="0x00001390",data=["0x00","0x01"]},
     {addr="0x00001392",data=["0x02","0x03"]},
     {addr="0x00001394",data=["0x04","0x05"]}]
     (gdb)

   Read two bytes of memory starting at address `shorts + 64' and
display as a single word formatted in decimal.

     (gdb)
     5-data-read-memory shorts+64 d 2 1 1
     5^done,addr="0x00001510",nr-bytes="2",total-bytes="2",
     next-row="0x00001512",prev-row="0x0000150e",
     next-page="0x00001512",prev-page="0x0000150e",memory=[
     {addr="0x00001510",data=["128"]}]
     (gdb)

   Read thirty two bytes of memory starting at `bytes+16' and format as
eight rows of four columns.  Include a string encoding with `x' used as
the non-printable character.

     (gdb)
     4-data-read-memory bytes+16 x 1 8 4 x
     4^done,addr="0x000013a0",nr-bytes="32",total-bytes="32",
     next-row="0x000013c0",prev-row="0x0000139c",
     next-page="0x000013c0",prev-page="0x00001380",memory=[
     {addr="0x000013a0",data=["0x10","0x11","0x12","0x13"],ascii="xxxx"},
     {addr="0x000013a4",data=["0x14","0x15","0x16","0x17"],ascii="xxxx"},
     {addr="0x000013a8",data=["0x18","0x19","0x1a","0x1b"],ascii="xxxx"},
     {addr="0x000013ac",data=["0x1c","0x1d","0x1e","0x1f"],ascii="xxxx"},
     {addr="0x000013b0",data=["0x20","0x21","0x22","0x23"],ascii=" !\"#"},
     {addr="0x000013b4",data=["0x24","0x25","0x26","0x27"],ascii="$%&'"},
     {addr="0x000013b8",data=["0x28","0x29","0x2a","0x2b"],ascii="()*+"},
     {addr="0x000013bc",data=["0x2c","0x2d","0x2e","0x2f"],ascii=",-./"}]
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands,  Next: GDB/MI Symbol Query,  Prev: GDB/MI Data Manipulation,  Up: GDB/MI

24.14 GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands
================================

The tracepoint commands are not yet implemented.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Symbol Query,  Next: GDB/MI File Commands,  Prev: GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands,  Up: GDB/MI

24.15 GDB/MI Symbol Query Commands
==================================

The `-symbol-info-address' Command
----------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-info-address SYMBOL

   Describe where SYMBOL is stored.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info address'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-info-file' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-info-file

   Show the file for the symbol.

GDB Command
...........

There's no equivalent GDB command.  `gdbtk' has `gdb_find_file'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-info-function' Command
-----------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-info-function

   Show which function the symbol lives in.

GDB Command
...........

`gdb_get_function' in `gdbtk'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-info-line' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-info-line

   Show the core addresses of the code for a source line.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info line'.  `gdbtk' has the
`gdb_get_line' and `gdb_get_file' commands.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-info-symbol' Command
---------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-info-symbol ADDR

   Describe what symbol is at location ADDR.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info symbol'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-list-functions' Command
------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-list-functions

   List the functions in the executable.

GDB Command
...........

`info functions' in GDB, `gdb_listfunc' and `gdb_search' in `gdbtk'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-list-lines' Command
--------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-list-lines FILENAME

   Print the list of lines that contain code and their associated
program addresses for the given source filename.  The entries are
sorted in ascending PC order.

GDB Command
...........

There is no corresponding GDB command.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -symbol-list-lines basics.c
     ^done,lines=[{pc="0x08048554",line="7"},{pc="0x0804855a",line="8"}]
     (gdb)

The `-symbol-list-types' Command
--------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-list-types

   List all the type names.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding commands are `info types' in GDB, `gdb_search' in
`gdbtk'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-list-variables' Command
------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-list-variables

   List all the global and static variable names.

GDB Command
...........

`info variables' in GDB, `gdb_search' in `gdbtk'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-locate' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-locate

GDB Command
...........

`gdb_loc' in `gdbtk'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-symbol-type' Command
--------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -symbol-type VARIABLE

   Show type of VARIABLE.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `ptype', `gdbtk' has
`gdb_obj_variable'.

Example
.......

N.A.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI File Commands,  Next: GDB/MI Target Manipulation,  Prev: GDB/MI Symbol Query,  Up: GDB/MI

24.16 GDB/MI File Commands
==========================

This section describes the GDB/MI commands to specify executable file
names and to read in and obtain symbol table information.

The `-file-exec-and-symbols' Command
------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-exec-and-symbols FILE

   Specify the executable file to be debugged.  This file is the one
from which the symbol table is also read.  If no file is specified, the
command clears the executable and symbol information.  If breakpoints
are set when using this command with no arguments, GDB will produce
error messages.  Otherwise, no output is produced, except a completion
notification.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `file'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -file-exec-and-symbols /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/TRUNK/mbx/hello.mbx
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-file-exec-file' Command
-----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-exec-file FILE

   Specify the executable file to be debugged.  Unlike
`-file-exec-and-symbols', the symbol table is _not_ read from this
file.  If used without argument, GDB clears the information about the
executable file.  No output is produced, except a completion
notification.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `exec-file'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -file-exec-file /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/TRUNK/mbx/hello.mbx
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-file-list-exec-sections' Command
--------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-list-exec-sections

   List the sections of the current executable file.

GDB Command
...........

The GDB command `info file' shows, among the rest, the same information
as this command.  `gdbtk' has a corresponding command `gdb_load_info'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-file-list-exec-source-file' Command
-----------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-list-exec-source-file

   List the line number, the current source file, and the absolute path
to the current source file for the current executable.

GDB Command
...........

The GDB equivalent is `info source'

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     123-file-list-exec-source-file
     123^done,line="1",file="foo.c",fullname="/home/bar/foo.c"
     (gdb)

The `-file-list-exec-source-files' Command
------------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-list-exec-source-files

   List the source files for the current executable.

   It will always output the filename, but only when GDB can find the
absolute file name of a source file, will it output the fullname.

GDB Command
...........

The GDB equivalent is `info sources'.  `gdbtk' has an analogous command
`gdb_listfiles'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -file-list-exec-source-files
     ^done,files=[
     {file=foo.c,fullname=/home/foo.c},
     {file=/home/bar.c,fullname=/home/bar.c},
     {file=gdb_could_not_find_fullpath.c}]
     (gdb)

The `-file-list-shared-libraries' Command
-----------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-list-shared-libraries

   List the shared libraries in the program.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info shared'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-file-list-symbol-files' Command
-------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-list-symbol-files

   List symbol files.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `info file' (part of it).

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-file-symbol-file' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -file-symbol-file FILE

   Read symbol table info from the specified FILE argument.  When used
without arguments, clears GDB's symbol table info.  No output is
produced, except for a completion notification.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `symbol-file'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -file-symbol-file /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/TRUNK/mbx/hello.mbx
     ^done
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Target Manipulation,  Next: GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: GDB/MI File Commands,  Up: GDB/MI

24.17 GDB/MI Target Manipulation Commands
=========================================

The `-target-attach' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-attach PID | FILE

   Attach to a process PID or a file FILE outside of GDB.

GDB command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `attach'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-target-compare-sections' Command
--------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-compare-sections [ SECTION ]

   Compare data of section SECTION on target to the exec file.  Without
the argument, all sections are compared.

GDB Command
...........

The GDB equivalent is `compare-sections'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-target-detach' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-detach

   Detach from the remote target which normally resumes its execution.
There's no output.

GDB command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `detach'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -target-detach
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-target-disconnect' Command
--------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-disconnect

   Disconnect from the remote target.  There's no output and the target
is generally not resumed.

GDB command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `disconnect'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -target-disconnect
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-target-download' Command
------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-download

   Loads the executable onto the remote target.  It prints out an
update message every half second, which includes the fields:

`section'
     The name of the section.

`section-sent'
     The size of what has been sent so far for that section.

`section-size'
     The size of the section.

`total-sent'
     The total size of what was sent so far (the current and the
     previous sections).

`total-size'
     The size of the overall executable to download.

Each message is sent as status record (*note GDB/MI Output Syntax:
GDB/MI Output Syntax.).

   In addition, it prints the name and size of the sections, as they are
downloaded.  These messages include the following fields:

`section'
     The name of the section.

`section-size'
     The size of the section.

`total-size'
     The size of the overall executable to download.

At the end, a summary is printed.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `load'.

Example
.......

Note: each status message appears on a single line.  Here the messages
have been broken down so that they can fit onto a page.

     (gdb)
     -target-download
     +download,{section=".text",section-size="6668",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="512",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="512",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="1024",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="1024",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="1536",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="1536",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="2048",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="2048",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="2560",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="2560",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="3072",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="3072",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="3584",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="3584",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="4096",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="4096",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="4608",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="4608",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="5120",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="5120",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="5632",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="5632",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="6144",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="6144",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".text",section-sent="6656",section-size="6668",
     total-sent="6656",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".init",section-size="28",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".fini",section-size="28",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".data",section-size="3156",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".data",section-sent="512",section-size="3156",
     total-sent="7236",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".data",section-sent="1024",section-size="3156",
     total-sent="7748",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".data",section-sent="1536",section-size="3156",
     total-sent="8260",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".data",section-sent="2048",section-size="3156",
     total-sent="8772",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".data",section-sent="2560",section-size="3156",
     total-sent="9284",total-size="9880"}
     +download,{section=".data",section-sent="3072",section-size="3156",
     total-sent="9796",total-size="9880"}
     ^done,address="0x10004",load-size="9880",transfer-rate="6586",
     write-rate="429"
     (gdb)

The `-target-exec-status' Command
---------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-exec-status

   Provide information on the state of the target (whether it is
running or not, for instance).

GDB Command
...........

There's no equivalent GDB command.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-target-list-available-targets' Command
--------------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-list-available-targets

   List the possible targets to connect to.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `help target'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-target-list-current-targets' Command
------------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-list-current-targets

   Describe the current target.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding information is printed by `info file' (among other
things).

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-target-list-parameters' Command
-------------------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-list-parameters

GDB Command
...........

No equivalent.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-target-select' Command
----------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -target-select TYPE PARAMETERS ...

   Connect GDB to the remote target.  This command takes two args:

`TYPE'
     The type of target, for instance `async', `remote', etc.

`PARAMETERS'
     Device names, host names and the like.  *Note Commands for
     managing targets: Target Commands, for more details.

   The output is a connection notification, followed by the address at
which the target program is, in the following form:

     ^connected,addr="ADDRESS",func="FUNCTION NAME",
       args=[ARG LIST]

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `target'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -target-select async /dev/ttya
     ^connected,addr="0xfe00a300",func="??",args=[]
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: GDB/MI Target Manipulation,  Up: GDB/MI

24.18 Miscellaneous GDB/MI Commands
===================================

The `-gdb-exit' Command
-----------------------

Synopsis
........

      -gdb-exit

   Exit GDB immediately.

GDB Command
...........

Approximately corresponds to `quit'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -gdb-exit
     ^exit

The `-exec-abort' Command
-------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -exec-abort

   Kill the inferior running program.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `kill'.

Example
.......

N.A.

The `-gdb-set' Command
----------------------

Synopsis
........

      -gdb-set

   Set an internal GDB variable.

GDB Command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `set'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -gdb-set $foo=3
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-gdb-show' Command
-----------------------

Synopsis
........

      -gdb-show

   Show the current value of a GDB variable.

GDB command
...........

The corresponding GDB command is `show'.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -gdb-show annotate
     ^done,value="0"
     (gdb)

The `-gdb-version' Command
--------------------------

Synopsis
........

      -gdb-version

   Show version information for GDB.  Used mostly in testing.

GDB Command
...........

The GDB equivalent is `show version'.  GDB by default shows this
information when you start an interactive session.

Example
.......

     (gdb)
     -gdb-version
     ~GNU gdb 5.2.1
     ~Copyright 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     ~GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License, and
     ~you are welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it under
     ~ certain conditions.
     ~Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
     ~There is absolutely no warranty for GDB.  Type "show warranty" for
     ~ details.
     ~This GDB was configured as
      "--host=sparc-sun-solaris2.5.1 --target=ppc-eabi".
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-interpreter-exec' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
--------

     -interpreter-exec INTERPRETER COMMAND

   Execute the specified COMMAND in the given INTERPRETER.

GDB Command
-----------

The corresponding GDB command is `interpreter-exec'.

Example
-------

     (gdb)
     -interpreter-exec console "break main"
     &"During symbol reading, couldn't parse type; debugger out of date?.\n"
     &"During symbol reading, bad structure-type format.\n"
     ~"Breakpoint 1 at 0x8074fc6: file ../../src/gdb/main.c, line 743.\n"
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-inferior-tty-set' Command
-------------------------------

Synopsis
--------

     -inferior-tty-set /dev/pts/1

   Set terminal for future runs of the program being debugged.

GDB Command
-----------

The corresponding GDB command is `set inferior-tty' /dev/pts/1.

Example
-------

     (gdb)
     -inferior-tty-set /dev/pts/1
     ^done
     (gdb)

The `-inferior-tty-show' Command
--------------------------------

Synopsis
--------

     -inferior-tty-show

   Show terminal for future runs of program being debugged.

GDB Command
-----------

The corresponding GDB command is `show inferior-tty'.

Example
-------

     (gdb)
     -inferior-tty-set /dev/pts/1
     ^done
     (gdb)
     -inferior-tty-show
     ^done,inferior_tty_terminal="/dev/pts/1"
     (gdb)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Annotations,  Next: GDB/MI,  Prev: Emacs,  Up: Top

25 GDB Annotations
******************

This chapter describes annotations in GDB.  Annotations were designed
to interface GDB to graphical user interfaces or other similar programs
which want to interact with GDB at a relatively high level.

   The annotation mechanism has largely been superseeded by GDB/MI
(*note GDB/MI::).

* Menu:

* Annotations Overview::  What annotations are; the general syntax.
* Prompting::           Annotations marking GDB's need for input.
* Errors::              Annotations for error messages.
* Invalidation::        Some annotations describe things now invalid.
* Annotations for Running::
                        Whether the program is running, how it stopped, etc.
* Source Annotations::  Annotations describing source code.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Annotations Overview,  Next: Prompting,  Up: Annotations

25.1 What is an Annotation?
===========================

Annotations start with a newline character, two `control-z' characters,
and the name of the annotation.  If there is no additional information
associated with this annotation, the name of the annotation is followed
immediately by a newline.  If there is additional information, the name
of the annotation is followed by a space, the additional information,
and a newline.  The additional information cannot contain newline
characters.

   Any output not beginning with a newline and two `control-z'
characters denotes literal output from GDB.  Currently there is no need
for GDB to output a newline followed by two `control-z' characters, but
if there was such a need, the annotations could be extended with an
`escape' annotation which means those three characters as output.

   The annotation LEVEL, which is specified using the `--annotate'
command line option (*note Mode Options::), controls how much
information GDB prints together with its prompt, values of expressions,
source lines, and other types of output.  Level 0 is for no anntations,
level 1 is for use when GDB is run as a subprocess of GNU Emacs, level
3 is the maximum annotation suitable for programs that control GDB, and
level 2 annotations have been made obsolete (*note Limitations of the
Annotation Interface: (annotate)Limitations.).

`set annotate LEVEL'
     The GDB command `set annotate' sets the level of annotations to
     the specified LEVEL.

`show annotate'
     Show the current annotation level.

   This chapter describes level 3 annotations.

   A simple example of starting up GDB with annotations is:

     $ gdb --annotate=3
     GNU gdb 6.0
     Copyright 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License,
     and you are welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it
     under certain conditions.
     Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
     There is absolutely no warranty for GDB.  Type "show warranty"
     for details.
     This GDB was configured as "i386-pc-linux-gnu"

     ^Z^Zpre-prompt
     (gdb)
     ^Z^Zprompt
     quit

     ^Z^Zpost-prompt
     $

   Here `quit' is input to GDB; the rest is output from GDB.  The three
lines beginning `^Z^Z' (where `^Z' denotes a `control-z' character) are
annotations; the rest is output from GDB.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Prompting,  Next: Errors,  Prev: Annotations Overview,  Up: Annotations

25.2 Annotation for GDB Input
=============================

When GDB prompts for input, it annotates this fact so it is possible to
know when to send output, when the output from a given command is over,
etc.

   Different kinds of input each have a different "input type".  Each
input type has three annotations: a `pre-' annotation, which denotes
the beginning of any prompt which is being output, a plain annotation,
which denotes the end of the prompt, and then a `post-' annotation
which denotes the end of any echo which may (or may not) be associated
with the input.  For example, the `prompt' input type features the
following annotations:

     ^Z^Zpre-prompt
     ^Z^Zprompt
     ^Z^Zpost-prompt

   The input types are

`prompt'
     When GDB is prompting for a command (the main GDB prompt).

`commands'
     When GDB prompts for a set of commands, like in the `commands'
     command.  The annotations are repeated for each command which is
     input.

`overload-choice'
     When GDB wants the user to select between various overloaded
     functions.

`query'
     When GDB wants the user to confirm a potentially dangerous
     operation.

`prompt-for-continue'
     When GDB is asking the user to press return to continue.  Note:
     Don't expect this to work well; instead use `set height 0' to
     disable prompting.  This is because the counting of lines is buggy
     in the presence of annotations.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Errors,  Next: Invalidation,  Prev: Prompting,  Up: Annotations

25.3 Errors
===========

     ^Z^Zquit

   This annotation occurs right before GDB responds to an interrupt.

     ^Z^Zerror

   This annotation occurs right before GDB responds to an error.

   Quit and error annotations indicate that any annotations which GDB
was in the middle of may end abruptly.  For example, if a
`value-history-begin' annotation is followed by a `error', one cannot
expect to receive the matching `value-history-end'.  One cannot expect
not to receive it either, however; an error annotation does not
necessarily mean that GDB is immediately returning all the way to the
top level.

   A quit or error annotation may be preceded by

     ^Z^Zerror-begin

   Any output between that and the quit or error annotation is the error
message.

   Warning messages are not yet annotated.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Invalidation,  Next: Annotations for Running,  Prev: Errors,  Up: Annotations

25.4 Invalidation Notices
=========================

The following annotations say that certain pieces of state may have
changed.

`^Z^Zframes-invalid'
     The frames (for example, output from the `backtrace' command) may
     have changed.

`^Z^Zbreakpoints-invalid'
     The breakpoints may have changed.  For example, the user just
     added or deleted a breakpoint.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Annotations for Running,  Next: Source Annotations,  Prev: Invalidation,  Up: Annotations

25.5 Running the Program
========================

When the program starts executing due to a GDB command such as `step'
or `continue',

     ^Z^Zstarting

   is output.  When the program stops,

     ^Z^Zstopped

   is output.  Before the `stopped' annotation, a variety of
annotations describe how the program stopped.

`^Z^Zexited EXIT-STATUS'
     The program exited, and EXIT-STATUS is the exit status (zero for
     successful exit, otherwise nonzero).

`^Z^Zsignalled'
     The program exited with a signal.  After the `^Z^Zsignalled', the
     annotation continues:

          INTRO-TEXT
          ^Z^Zsignal-name
          NAME
          ^Z^Zsignal-name-end
          MIDDLE-TEXT
          ^Z^Zsignal-string
          STRING
          ^Z^Zsignal-string-end
          END-TEXT

     where NAME is the name of the signal, such as `SIGILL' or
     `SIGSEGV', and STRING is the explanation of the signal, such as
     `Illegal Instruction' or `Segmentation fault'.  INTRO-TEXT,
     MIDDLE-TEXT, and END-TEXT are for the user's benefit and have no
     particular format.

`^Z^Zsignal'
     The syntax of this annotation is just like `signalled', but GDB is
     just saying that the program received the signal, not that it was
     terminated with it.

`^Z^Zbreakpoint NUMBER'
     The program hit breakpoint number NUMBER.

`^Z^Zwatchpoint NUMBER'
     The program hit watchpoint number NUMBER.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Source Annotations,  Prev: Annotations for Running,  Up: Annotations

25.6 Displaying Source
======================

The following annotation is used instead of displaying source code:

     ^Z^Zsource FILENAME:LINE:CHARACTER:MIDDLE:ADDR

   where FILENAME is an absolute file name indicating which source
file, LINE is the line number within that file (where 1 is the first
line in the file), CHARACTER is the character position within the file
(where 0 is the first character in the file) (for most debug formats
this will necessarily point to the beginning of a line), MIDDLE is
`middle' if ADDR is in the middle of the line, or `beg' if ADDR is at
the beginning of the line, and ADDR is the address in the target
program associated with the source which is being displayed.  ADDR is
in the form `0x' followed by one or more lowercase hex digits (note
that this does not depend on the language).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GDB Bugs,  Next: Formatting Documentation,  Prev: GDB/MI,  Up: Top

26 Reporting Bugs in GDB
************************

Your bug reports play an essential role in making GDB reliable.

   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
is to help the entire community by making the next version of GDB work
better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of GDB.

   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
information that enables us to fix the bug.

* Menu:

* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: GDB Bugs

26.1 Have you found a bug?
==========================

If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
guidelines:

   * If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that
     is a GDB bug.  Reliable debuggers never crash.

   * If GDB produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
     (Note that if you're cross debugging, the problem may also be
     somewhere in the connection to the target.)

   * If GDB does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
     is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of "invalid
     input" might be our idea of "an extension" or "support for
     traditional practice".

   * If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
     for improvement of GDB are welcome in any case.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: GDB Bugs

26.2 How to report bugs
=======================

A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
If you obtained GDB from a support organization, we recommend you
contact that organization first.

   You can find contact information for many support companies and
individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.

   In any event, we also recommend that you submit bug reports for GDB.
The prefered method is to submit them directly using GDB's Bugs web
page (http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/).  Alternatively, the
e-mail gateway <bug-gdb@gnu.org> can be used.

   *Do not send bug reports to `info-gdb', or to `help-gdb', or to any
newsgroups.*  Most users of GDB do not want to receive bug reports.
Those that do have arranged to receive `bug-gdb'.

   The mailing list `bug-gdb' has a newsgroup `gnu.gdb.bug' which
serves as a repeater.  The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
the same messages.  Often people think of posting bug reports to the
newsgroup instead of mailing them.  This appears to work, but it has one
problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
path back to the sender.  Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
we may be unable to reach you.  For this reason, it is better to send
bug reports to the mailing list.

   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
*report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
leave it out, state it!

   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not
matter.  Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps
the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
different, the contents of that location would fool the debugger into
doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
and the most helpful.

   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
the bug.  It may be that the bug has been reported previously, but
neither you nor we can know that unless your bug report is complete and
self-contained.

   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
bell?"  Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to _refuse
to respond to them_ except to chide the sender to report bugs properly.

   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:

   * The version of GDB.  GDB announces it if you start with no
     arguments; you can also print it at any time using `show version'.

     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
     looking for the bug in the current version of GDB.

   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
     and version number.

   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile GDB--e.g.
     "gcc-2.8.1".

   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program
     you are debugging--e.g.  "gcc-2.8.1", or "HP92453-01 A.10.32.03 HP
     C Compiler".  For GCC, you can say `gcc --version' to get this
     information; for other compilers, see the documentation for those
     compilers.

   * The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your
     example and observe the bug.  For example, did you use `-O'?  To
     guarantee you will not omit something important, list them all.  A
     copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.

     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.

   * A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
     reproduce the bug.

   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
     incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."

     Of course, if the bug is that GDB gets a fatal signal, then we
     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
     not give us a chance to make a mistake.

     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
     such as, your copy of GDB is out of synch, or you have encountered
     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
     observations.

     To collect all this information, you can use a session recording
     program such as `script', which is available on many Unix systems.
     Just run your GDB session inside `script' and then include the
     `typescript' file with your bug report.

     Another way to record a GDB session is to run GDB inside Emacs and
     then save the entire buffer to a file.

   * If you wish to suggest changes to the GDB source, send us context
     diffs.  If you even discuss something in the GDB source, refer to
     it by context, not by line number.

     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
     in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
     information to us.


   Here are some things that are not necessary:

   * A description of the envelope of the bug.

     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
     changes will not affect it.

     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.

     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
     of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
     less time, and so on.

     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
     used.

   * A patch for the bug.

     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
     with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
     might not understand it at all.

     Sometimes with a program as complicated as GDB it is very hard to
     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
     that the bug is fixed.

     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
     test case will help us to understand.

   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.

     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Command Line Editing,  Next: Using History Interactively,  Prev: Formatting Documentation,  Up: Top

27 Command Line Editing
***********************

This chapter describes the basic features of the GNU command line
editing interface.

* Menu:

* Introduction and Notation::   Notation used in this text.
* Readline Interaction::        The minimum set of commands for editing a line.
* Readline Init File::          Customizing Readline from a user's view.
* Bindable Readline Commands::  A description of most of the Readline commands
                                available for binding
* Readline vi Mode::            A short description of how to make Readline
                                behave like the vi editor.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Introduction and Notation,  Next: Readline Interaction,  Up: Command Line Editing

27.1 Introduction to Line Editing
=================================

The following paragraphs describe the notation used to represent
keystrokes.

   The text `C-k' is read as `Control-K' and describes the character
produced when the <k> key is pressed while the Control key is depressed.

   The text `M-k' is read as `Meta-K' and describes the character
produced when the Meta key (if you have one) is depressed, and the <k>
key is pressed.  The Meta key is labeled <ALT> on many keyboards.  On
keyboards with two keys labeled <ALT> (usually to either side of the
space bar), the <ALT> on the left side is generally set to work as a
Meta key.  The <ALT> key on the right may also be configured to work as
a Meta key or may be configured as some other modifier, such as a
Compose key for typing accented characters.

   If you do not have a Meta or <ALT> key, or another key working as a
Meta key, the identical keystroke can be generated by typing <ESC>
_first_, and then typing <k>.  Either process is known as "metafying"
the <k> key.

   The text `M-C-k' is read as `Meta-Control-k' and describes the
character produced by "metafying" `C-k'.

   In addition, several keys have their own names.  Specifically,
<DEL>, <ESC>, <LFD>, <SPC>, <RET>, and <TAB> all stand for themselves
when seen in this text, or in an init file (*note Readline Init File::).
If your keyboard lacks a <LFD> key, typing <C-j> will produce the
desired character.  The <RET> key may be labeled <Return> or <Enter> on
some keyboards.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline Interaction,  Next: Readline Init File,  Prev: Introduction and Notation,  Up: Command Line Editing

27.2 Readline Interaction
=========================

Often during an interactive session you type in a long line of text,
only to notice that the first word on the line is misspelled.  The
Readline library gives you a set of commands for manipulating the text
as you type it in, allowing you to just fix your typo, and not forcing
you to retype the majority of the line.  Using these editing commands,
you move the cursor to the place that needs correction, and delete or
insert the text of the corrections.  Then, when you are satisfied with
the line, you simply press <RET>.  You do not have to be at the end of
the line to press <RET>; the entire line is accepted regardless of the
location of the cursor within the line.

* Menu:

* Readline Bare Essentials::    The least you need to know about Readline.
* Readline Movement Commands::  Moving about the input line.
* Readline Killing Commands::   How to delete text, and how to get it back!
* Readline Arguments::          Giving numeric arguments to commands.
* Searching::                   Searching through previous lines.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline Bare Essentials,  Next: Readline Movement Commands,  Up: Readline Interaction

27.2.1 Readline Bare Essentials
-------------------------------

In order to enter characters into the line, simply type them.  The typed
character appears where the cursor was, and then the cursor moves one
space to the right.  If you mistype a character, you can use your erase
character to back up and delete the mistyped character.

   Sometimes you may mistype a character, and not notice the error
until you have typed several other characters.  In that case, you can
type `C-b' to move the cursor to the left, and then correct your
mistake.  Afterwards, you can move the cursor to the right with `C-f'.

   When you add text in the middle of a line, you will notice that
characters to the right of the cursor are `pushed over' to make room
for the text that you have inserted.  Likewise, when you delete text
behind the cursor, characters to the right of the cursor are `pulled
back' to fill in the blank space created by the removal of the text.  A
list of the bare essentials for editing the text of an input line
follows.

`C-b'
     Move back one character.

`C-f'
     Move forward one character.

<DEL> or <Backspace>
     Delete the character to the left of the cursor.

`C-d'
     Delete the character underneath the cursor.

Printing characters
     Insert the character into the line at the cursor.

`C-_' or `C-x C-u'
     Undo the last editing command.  You can undo all the way back to an
     empty line.

(Depending on your configuration, the <Backspace> key be set to delete
the character to the left of the cursor and the <DEL> key set to delete
the character underneath the cursor, like `C-d', rather than the
character to the left of the cursor.)

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline Movement Commands,  Next: Readline Killing Commands,  Prev: Readline Bare Essentials,  Up: Readline Interaction

27.2.2 Readline Movement Commands
---------------------------------

The above table describes the most basic keystrokes that you need in
order to do editing of the input line.  For your convenience, many
other commands have been added in addition to `C-b', `C-f', `C-d', and
<DEL>.  Here are some commands for moving more rapidly about the line.

`C-a'
     Move to the start of the line.

`C-e'
     Move to the end of the line.

`M-f'
     Move forward a word, where a word is composed of letters and
     digits.

`M-b'
     Move backward a word.

`C-l'
     Clear the screen, reprinting the current line at the top.

   Notice how `C-f' moves forward a character, while `M-f' moves
forward a word.  It is a loose convention that control keystrokes
operate on characters while meta keystrokes operate on words.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline Killing Commands,  Next: Readline Arguments,  Prev: Readline Movement Commands,  Up: Readline Interaction

27.2.3 Readline Killing Commands
--------------------------------

"Killing" text means to delete the text from the line, but to save it
away for later use, usually by "yanking" (re-inserting) it back into
the line.  (`Cut' and `paste' are more recent jargon for `kill' and
`yank'.)

   If the description for a command says that it `kills' text, then you
can be sure that you can get the text back in a different (or the same)
place later.

   When you use a kill command, the text is saved in a "kill-ring".
Any number of consecutive kills save all of the killed text together, so
that when you yank it back, you get it all.  The kill ring is not line
specific; the text that you killed on a previously typed line is
available to be yanked back later, when you are typing another line.  

   Here is the list of commands for killing text.

`C-k'
     Kill the text from the current cursor position to the end of the
     line.

`M-d'
     Kill from the cursor to the end of the current word, or, if between
     words, to the end of the next word.  Word boundaries are the same
     as those used by `M-f'.

`M-<DEL>'
     Kill from the cursor the start of the current word, or, if between
     words, to the start of the previous word.  Word boundaries are the
     same as those used by `M-b'.

`C-w'
     Kill from the cursor to the previous whitespace.  This is
     different than `M-<DEL>' because the word boundaries differ.


   Here is how to "yank" the text back into the line.  Yanking means to
copy the most-recently-killed text from the kill buffer.

`C-y'
     Yank the most recently killed text back into the buffer at the
     cursor.

`M-y'
     Rotate the kill-ring, and yank the new top.  You can only do this
     if the prior command is `C-y' or `M-y'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline Arguments,  Next: Searching,  Prev: Readline Killing Commands,  Up: Readline Interaction

27.2.4 Readline Arguments
-------------------------

You can pass numeric arguments to Readline commands.  Sometimes the
argument acts as a repeat count, other times it is the sign of the
argument that is significant.  If you pass a negative argument to a
command which normally acts in a forward direction, that command will
act in a backward direction.  For example, to kill text back to the
start of the line, you might type `M-- C-k'.

   The general way to pass numeric arguments to a command is to type
meta digits before the command.  If the first `digit' typed is a minus
sign (`-'), then the sign of the argument will be negative.  Once you
have typed one meta digit to get the argument started, you can type the
remainder of the digits, and then the command.  For example, to give
the `C-d' command an argument of 10, you could type `M-1 0 C-d', which
will delete the next ten characters on the input line.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Searching,  Prev: Readline Arguments,  Up: Readline Interaction

27.2.5 Searching for Commands in the History
--------------------------------------------

Readline provides commands for searching through the command history
for lines containing a specified string.  There are two search modes:
"incremental" and "non-incremental".

   Incremental searches begin before the user has finished typing the
search string.  As each character of the search string is typed,
Readline displays the next entry from the history matching the string
typed so far.  An incremental search requires only as many characters
as needed to find the desired history entry.  To search backward in the
history for a particular string, type `C-r'.  Typing `C-s' searches
forward through the history.  The characters present in the value of
the `isearch-terminators' variable are used to terminate an incremental
search.  If that variable has not been assigned a value, the <ESC> and
`C-J' characters will terminate an incremental search.  `C-g' will
abort an incremental search and restore the original line.  When the
search is terminated, the history entry containing the search string
becomes the current line.

   To find other matching entries in the history list, type `C-r' or
`C-s' as appropriate.  This will search backward or forward in the
history for the next entry matching the search string typed so far.
Any other key sequence bound to a Readline command will terminate the
search and execute that command.  For instance, a <RET> will terminate
the search and accept the line, thereby executing the command from the
history list.  A movement command will terminate the search, make the
last line found the current line, and begin editing.

   Readline remembers the last incremental search string.  If two
`C-r's are typed without any intervening characters defining a new
search string, any remembered search string is used.

   Non-incremental searches read the entire search string before
starting to search for matching history lines.  The search string may be
typed by the user or be part of the contents of the current line.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline Init File,  Next: Bindable Readline Commands,  Prev: Readline Interaction,  Up: Command Line Editing

27.3 Readline Init File
=======================

Although the Readline library comes with a set of Emacs-like
keybindings installed by default, it is possible to use a different set
of keybindings.  Any user can customize programs that use Readline by
putting commands in an "inputrc" file, conventionally in his home
directory.  The name of this file is taken from the value of the
environment variable `INPUTRC'.  If that variable is unset, the default
is `~/.inputrc'.

   When a program which uses the Readline library starts up, the init
file is read, and the key bindings are set.

   In addition, the `C-x C-r' command re-reads this init file, thus
incorporating any changes that you might have made to it.

* Menu:

* Readline Init File Syntax::   Syntax for the commands in the inputrc file.

* Conditional Init Constructs:: Conditional key bindings in the inputrc file.

* Sample Init File::            An example inputrc file.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline Init File Syntax,  Next: Conditional Init Constructs,  Up: Readline Init File

27.3.1 Readline Init File Syntax
--------------------------------

There are only a few basic constructs allowed in the Readline init
file.  Blank lines are ignored.  Lines beginning with a `#' are
comments.  Lines beginning with a `$' indicate conditional constructs
(*note Conditional Init Constructs::).  Other lines denote variable
settings and key bindings.

Variable Settings
     You can modify the run-time behavior of Readline by altering the
     values of variables in Readline using the `set' command within the
     init file.  The syntax is simple:

          set VARIABLE VALUE

     Here, for example, is how to change from the default Emacs-like
     key binding to use `vi' line editing commands:

          set editing-mode vi

     Variable names and values, where appropriate, are recognized
     without regard to case.  Unrecognized variable names are ignored.

     Boolean variables (those that can be set to on or off) are set to
     on if the value is null or empty, ON (case-insensitive), or 1.
     Any other value results in the variable being set to off.

     A great deal of run-time behavior is changeable with the following
     variables.

    `bell-style'
          Controls what happens when Readline wants to ring the
          terminal bell.  If set to `none', Readline never rings the
          bell.  If set to `visible', Readline uses a visible bell if
          one is available.  If set to `audible' (the default),
          Readline attempts to ring the terminal's bell.

    `bind-tty-special-chars'
          If set to `on', Readline attempts to bind the control
          characters treated specially by the kernel's terminal driver
          to their Readline equivalents.

    `comment-begin'
          The string to insert at the beginning of the line when the
          `insert-comment' command is executed.  The default value is
          `"#"'.

    `completion-ignore-case'
          If set to `on', Readline performs filename matching and
          completion in a case-insensitive fashion.  The default value
          is `off'.

    `completion-query-items'
          The number of possible completions that determines when the
          user is asked whether the list of possibilities should be
          displayed.  If the number of possible completions is greater
          than this value, Readline will ask the user whether or not he
          wishes to view them; otherwise, they are simply listed.  This
          variable must be set to an integer value greater than or
          equal to 0.  A negative value means Readline should never ask.
          The default limit is `100'.

    `convert-meta'
          If set to `on', Readline will convert characters with the
          eighth bit set to an ASCII key sequence by stripping the
          eighth bit and prefixing an <ESC> character, converting them
          to a meta-prefixed key sequence.  The default value is `on'.

    `disable-completion'
          If set to `On', Readline will inhibit word completion.
          Completion  characters will be inserted into the line as if
          they had been mapped to `self-insert'.  The default is `off'.

    `editing-mode'
          The `editing-mode' variable controls which default set of key
          bindings is used.  By default, Readline starts up in Emacs
          editing mode, where the keystrokes are most similar to Emacs.
          This variable can be set to either `emacs' or `vi'.

    `enable-keypad'
          When set to `on', Readline will try to enable the application
          keypad when it is called.  Some systems need this to enable
          the arrow keys.  The default is `off'.

    `expand-tilde'
          If set to `on', tilde expansion is performed when Readline
          attempts word completion.  The default is `off'.

    `history-preserve-point'
          If set to `on', the history code attempts to place point at
          the same location on each history line retrieved with
          `previous-history' or `next-history'.  The default is `off'.

    `horizontal-scroll-mode'
          This variable can be set to either `on' or `off'.  Setting it
          to `on' means that the text of the lines being edited will
          scroll horizontally on a single screen line when they are
          longer than the width of the screen, instead of wrapping onto
          a new screen line.  By default, this variable is set to `off'.

    `input-meta'
          If set to `on', Readline will enable eight-bit input (it will
          not clear the eighth bit in the characters it reads),
          regardless of what the terminal claims it can support.  The
          default value is `off'.  The name `meta-flag' is a synonym
          for this variable.

    `isearch-terminators'
          The string of characters that should terminate an incremental
          search without subsequently executing the character as a
          command (*note Searching::).  If this variable has not been
          given a value, the characters <ESC> and `C-J' will terminate
          an incremental search.

    `keymap'
          Sets Readline's idea of the current keymap for key binding
          commands.  Acceptable `keymap' names are `emacs',
          `emacs-standard', `emacs-meta', `emacs-ctlx', `vi', `vi-move',
          `vi-command', and `vi-insert'.  `vi' is equivalent to
          `vi-command'; `emacs' is equivalent to `emacs-standard'.  The
          default value is `emacs'.  The value of the `editing-mode'
          variable also affects the default keymap.

    `mark-directories'
          If set to `on', completed directory names have a slash
          appended.  The default is `on'.

    `mark-modified-lines'
          This variable, when set to `on', causes Readline to display an
          asterisk (`*') at the start of history lines which have been
          modified.  This variable is `off' by default.

    `mark-symlinked-directories'
          If set to `on', completed names which are symbolic links to
          directories have a slash appended (subject to the value of
          `mark-directories').  The default is `off'.

    `match-hidden-files'
          This variable, when set to `on', causes Readline to match
          files whose names begin with a `.' (hidden files) when
          performing filename completion, unless the leading `.' is
          supplied by the user in the filename to be completed.  This
          variable is `on' by default.

    `output-meta'
          If set to `on', Readline will display characters with the
          eighth bit set directly rather than as a meta-prefixed escape
          sequence.  The default is `off'.

    `page-completions'
          If set to `on', Readline uses an internal `more'-like pager
          to display a screenful of possible completions at a time.
          This variable is `on' by default.

    `print-completions-horizontally'
          If set to `on', Readline will display completions with matches
          sorted horizontally in alphabetical order, rather than down
          the screen.  The default is `off'.

    `show-all-if-ambiguous'
          This alters the default behavior of the completion functions.
          If set to `on', words which have more than one possible
          completion cause the matches to be listed immediately instead
          of ringing the bell.  The default value is `off'.

    `show-all-if-unmodified'
          This alters the default behavior of the completion functions
          in a fashion similar to SHOW-ALL-IF-AMBIGUOUS.  If set to
          `on', words which have more than one possible completion
          without any possible partial completion (the possible
          completions don't share a common prefix) cause the matches to
          be listed immediately instead of ringing the bell.  The
          default value is `off'.

    `visible-stats'
          If set to `on', a character denoting a file's type is
          appended to the filename when listing possible completions.
          The default is `off'.


Key Bindings
     The syntax for controlling key bindings in the init file is
     simple.  First you need to find the name of the command that you
     want to change.  The following sections contain tables of the
     command name, the default keybinding, if any, and a short
     description of what the command does.

     Once you know the name of the command, simply place on a line in
     the init file the name of the key you wish to bind the command to,
     a colon, and then the name of the command.  The name of the key
     can be expressed in different ways, depending on what you find most
     comfortable.

     In addition to command names, readline allows keys to be bound to
     a string that is inserted when the key is pressed (a MACRO).

    KEYNAME: FUNCTION-NAME or MACRO
          KEYNAME is the name of a key spelled out in English.  For
          example:
               Control-u: universal-argument
               Meta-Rubout: backward-kill-word
               Control-o: "> output"

          In the above example, `C-u' is bound to the function
          `universal-argument', `M-DEL' is bound to the function
          `backward-kill-word', and `C-o' is bound to run the macro
          expressed on the right hand side (that is, to insert the text
          `> output' into the line).

          A number of symbolic character names are recognized while
          processing this key binding syntax: DEL, ESC, ESCAPE, LFD,
          NEWLINE, RET, RETURN, RUBOUT, SPACE, SPC, and TAB.

    "KEYSEQ": FUNCTION-NAME or MACRO
          KEYSEQ differs from KEYNAME above in that strings denoting an
          entire key sequence can be specified, by placing the key
          sequence in double quotes.  Some GNU Emacs style key escapes
          can be used, as in the following example, but the special
          character names are not recognized.

               "\C-u": universal-argument
               "\C-x\C-r": re-read-init-file
               "\e[11~": "Function Key 1"

          In the above example, `C-u' is again bound to the function
          `universal-argument' (just as it was in the first example),
          `C-x C-r' is bound to the function `re-read-init-file', and
          `<ESC> <[> <1> <1> <~>' is bound to insert the text `Function
          Key 1'.


     The following GNU Emacs style escape sequences are available when
     specifying key sequences:

    `\C-'
          control prefix

    `\M-'
          meta prefix

    `\e'
          an escape character

    `\\'
          backslash

    `\"'
          <">, a double quotation mark

    `\''
          <'>, a single quote or apostrophe

     In addition to the GNU Emacs style escape sequences, a second set
     of backslash escapes is available:

    `\a'
          alert (bell)

    `\b'
          backspace

    `\d'
          delete

    `\f'
          form feed

    `\n'
          newline

    `\r'
          carriage return

    `\t'
          horizontal tab

    `\v'
          vertical tab

    `\NNN'
          the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value NNN
          (one to three digits)

    `\xHH'
          the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value
          HH (one or two hex digits)

     When entering the text of a macro, single or double quotes must be
     used to indicate a macro definition.  Unquoted text is assumed to
     be a function name.  In the macro body, the backslash escapes
     described above are expanded.  Backslash will quote any other
     character in the macro text, including `"' and `''.  For example,
     the following binding will make `C-x \' insert a single `\' into
     the line:
          "\C-x\\": "\\"


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Conditional Init Constructs,  Next: Sample Init File,  Prev: Readline Init File Syntax,  Up: Readline Init File

27.3.2 Conditional Init Constructs
----------------------------------

Readline implements a facility similar in spirit to the conditional
compilation features of the C preprocessor which allows key bindings
and variable settings to be performed as the result of tests.  There
are four parser directives used.

`$if'
     The `$if' construct allows bindings to be made based on the
     editing mode, the terminal being used, or the application using
     Readline.  The text of the test extends to the end of the line; no
     characters are required to isolate it.

    `mode'
          The `mode=' form of the `$if' directive is used to test
          whether Readline is in `emacs' or `vi' mode.  This may be
          used in conjunction with the `set keymap' command, for
          instance, to set bindings in the `emacs-standard' and
          `emacs-ctlx' keymaps only if Readline is starting out in
          `emacs' mode.

    `term'
          The `term=' form may be used to include terminal-specific key
          bindings, perhaps to bind the key sequences output by the
          terminal's function keys.  The word on the right side of the
          `=' is tested against both the full name of the terminal and
          the portion of the terminal name before the first `-'.  This
          allows `sun' to match both `sun' and `sun-cmd', for instance.

    `application'
          The APPLICATION construct is used to include
          application-specific settings.  Each program using the
          Readline library sets the APPLICATION NAME, and you can test
          for a particular value.  This could be used to bind key
          sequences to functions useful for a specific program.  For
          instance, the following command adds a key sequence that
          quotes the current or previous word in Bash:
               $if Bash
               # Quote the current or previous word
               "\C-xq": "\eb\"\ef\""
               $endif

`$endif'
     This command, as seen in the previous example, terminates an `$if'
     command.

`$else'
     Commands in this branch of the `$if' directive are executed if the
     test fails.

`$include'
     This directive takes a single filename as an argument and reads
     commands and bindings from that file.  For example, the following
     directive reads from `/etc/inputrc':
          $include /etc/inputrc

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Sample Init File,  Prev: Conditional Init Constructs,  Up: Readline Init File

27.3.3 Sample Init File
-----------------------

Here is an example of an INPUTRC file.  This illustrates key binding,
variable assignment, and conditional syntax.


     # This file controls the behaviour of line input editing for
     # programs that use the GNU Readline library.  Existing
     # programs include FTP, Bash, and GDB.
     #
     # You can re-read the inputrc file with C-x C-r.
     # Lines beginning with '#' are comments.
     #
     # First, include any systemwide bindings and variable
     # assignments from /etc/Inputrc
     $include /etc/Inputrc

     #
     # Set various bindings for emacs mode.

     set editing-mode emacs

     $if mode=emacs

     Meta-Control-h:    backward-kill-word      Text after the function name is ignored

     #
     # Arrow keys in keypad mode
     #
     #"\M-OD":        backward-char
     #"\M-OC":        forward-char
     #"\M-OA":        previous-history
     #"\M-OB":        next-history
     #
     # Arrow keys in ANSI mode
     #
     "\M-[D":        backward-char
     "\M-[C":        forward-char
     "\M-[A":        previous-history
     "\M-[B":        next-history
     #
     # Arrow keys in 8 bit keypad mode
     #
     #"\M-\C-OD":       backward-char
     #"\M-\C-OC":       forward-char
     #"\M-\C-OA":       previous-history
     #"\M-\C-OB":       next-history
     #
     # Arrow keys in 8 bit ANSI mode
     #
     #"\M-\C-[D":       backward-char
     #"\M-\C-[C":       forward-char
     #"\M-\C-[A":       previous-history
     #"\M-\C-[B":       next-history

     C-q: quoted-insert

     $endif

     # An old-style binding.  This happens to be the default.
     TAB: complete

     # Macros that are convenient for shell interaction
     $if Bash
     # edit the path
     "\C-xp": "PATH=${PATH}\e\C-e\C-a\ef\C-f"
     # prepare to type a quoted word --
     # insert open and close double quotes
     # and move to just after the open quote
     "\C-x\"": "\"\"\C-b"
     # insert a backslash (testing backslash escapes
     # in sequences and macros)
     "\C-x\\": "\\"
     # Quote the current or previous word
     "\C-xq": "\eb\"\ef\""
     # Add a binding to refresh the line, which is unbound
     "\C-xr": redraw-current-line
     # Edit variable on current line.
     "\M-\C-v": "\C-a\C-k$\C-y\M-\C-e\C-a\C-y="
     $endif

     # use a visible bell if one is available
     set bell-style visible

     # don't strip characters to 7 bits when reading
     set input-meta on

     # allow iso-latin1 characters to be inserted rather
     # than converted to prefix-meta sequences
     set convert-meta off

     # display characters with the eighth bit set directly
     # rather than as meta-prefixed characters
     set output-meta on

     # if there are more than 150 possible completions for
     # a word, ask the user if he wants to see all of them
     set completion-query-items 150

     # For FTP
     $if Ftp
     "\C-xg": "get \M-?"
     "\C-xt": "put \M-?"
     "\M-.": yank-last-arg
     $endif

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Bindable Readline Commands,  Next: Readline vi Mode,  Prev: Readline Init File,  Up: Command Line Editing

27.4 Bindable Readline Commands
===============================

* Menu:

* Commands For Moving::         Moving about the line.
* Commands For History::        Getting at previous lines.
* Commands For Text::           Commands for changing text.
* Commands For Killing::        Commands for killing and yanking.
* Numeric Arguments::           Specifying numeric arguments, repeat counts.
* Commands For Completion::     Getting Readline to do the typing for you.
* Keyboard Macros::             Saving and re-executing typed characters
* Miscellaneous Commands::      Other miscellaneous commands.

   This section describes Readline commands that may be bound to key
sequences.  Command names without an accompanying key sequence are
unbound by default.

   In the following descriptions, "point" refers to the current cursor
position, and "mark" refers to a cursor position saved by the
`set-mark' command.  The text between the point and mark is referred to
as the "region".

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Commands For Moving,  Next: Commands For History,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.1 Commands For Moving
--------------------------

`beginning-of-line (C-a)'
     Move to the start of the current line.

`end-of-line (C-e)'
     Move to the end of the line.

`forward-char (C-f)'
     Move forward a character.

`backward-char (C-b)'
     Move back a character.

`forward-word (M-f)'
     Move forward to the end of the next word.  Words are composed of
     letters and digits.

`backward-word (M-b)'
     Move back to the start of the current or previous word.  Words are
     composed of letters and digits.

`clear-screen (C-l)'
     Clear the screen and redraw the current line, leaving the current
     line at the top of the screen.

`redraw-current-line ()'
     Refresh the current line.  By default, this is unbound.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Commands For History,  Next: Commands For Text,  Prev: Commands For Moving,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.2 Commands For Manipulating The History
--------------------------------------------

`accept-line (Newline or Return)'
     Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is.  If this line is
     non-empty, it may be added to the history list for future recall
     with `add_history()'.  If this line is a modified history line,
     the history line is restored to its original state.

`previous-history (C-p)'
     Move `back' through the history list, fetching the previous
     command.

`next-history (C-n)'
     Move `forward' through the history list, fetching the next command.

`beginning-of-history (M-<)'
     Move to the first line in the history.

`end-of-history (M->)'
     Move to the end of the input history, i.e., the line currently
     being entered.

`reverse-search-history (C-r)'
     Search backward starting at the current line and moving `up'
     through the history as necessary.  This is an incremental search.

`forward-search-history (C-s)'
     Search forward starting at the current line and moving `down'
     through the the history as necessary.  This is an incremental
     search.

`non-incremental-reverse-search-history (M-p)'
     Search backward starting at the current line and moving `up'
     through the history as necessary using a non-incremental search
     for a string supplied by the user.

`non-incremental-forward-search-history (M-n)'
     Search forward starting at the current line and moving `down'
     through the the history as necessary using a non-incremental search
     for a string supplied by the user.

`history-search-forward ()'
     Search forward through the history for the string of characters
     between the start of the current line and the point.  This is a
     non-incremental search.  By default, this command is unbound.

`history-search-backward ()'
     Search backward through the history for the string of characters
     between the start of the current line and the point.  This is a
     non-incremental search.  By default, this command is unbound.

`yank-nth-arg (M-C-y)'
     Insert the first argument to the previous command (usually the
     second word on the previous line) at point.  With an argument N,
     insert the Nth word from the previous command (the words in the
     previous command begin with word 0).  A negative argument inserts
     the Nth word from the end of the previous command.  Once the
     argument N is computed, the argument is extracted as if the `!N'
     history expansion had been specified.

`yank-last-arg (M-. or M-_)'
     Insert last argument to the previous command (the last word of the
     previous history entry).  With an argument, behave exactly like
     `yank-nth-arg'.  Successive calls to `yank-last-arg' move back
     through the history list, inserting the last argument of each line
     in turn.  The history expansion facilities are used to extract the
     last argument, as if the `!$' history expansion had been specified.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Commands For Text,  Next: Commands For Killing,  Prev: Commands For History,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.3 Commands For Changing Text
---------------------------------

`delete-char (C-d)'
     Delete the character at point.  If point is at the beginning of
     the line, there are no characters in the line, and the last
     character typed was not bound to `delete-char', then return EOF.

`backward-delete-char (Rubout)'
     Delete the character behind the cursor.  A numeric argument means
     to kill the characters instead of deleting them.

`forward-backward-delete-char ()'
     Delete the character under the cursor, unless the cursor is at the
     end of the line, in which case the character behind the cursor is
     deleted.  By default, this is not bound to a key.

`quoted-insert (C-q or C-v)'
     Add the next character typed to the line verbatim.  This is how to
     insert key sequences like `C-q', for example.

`tab-insert (M-<TAB>)'
     Insert a tab character.

`self-insert (a, b, A, 1, !, ...)'
     Insert yourself.

`transpose-chars (C-t)'
     Drag the character before the cursor forward over the character at
     the cursor, moving the cursor forward as well.  If the insertion
     point is at the end of the line, then this transposes the last two
     characters of the line.  Negative arguments have no effect.

`transpose-words (M-t)'
     Drag the word before point past the word after point, moving point
     past that word as well.  If the insertion point is at the end of
     the line, this transposes the last two words on the line.

`upcase-word (M-u)'
     Uppercase the current (or following) word.  With a negative
     argument, uppercase the previous word, but do not move the cursor.

`downcase-word (M-l)'
     Lowercase the current (or following) word.  With a negative
     argument, lowercase the previous word, but do not move the cursor.

`capitalize-word (M-c)'
     Capitalize the current (or following) word.  With a negative
     argument, capitalize the previous word, but do not move the cursor.

`overwrite-mode ()'
     Toggle overwrite mode.  With an explicit positive numeric argument,
     switches to overwrite mode.  With an explicit non-positive numeric
     argument, switches to insert mode.  This command affects only
     `emacs' mode; `vi' mode does overwrite differently.  Each call to
     `readline()' starts in insert mode.

     In overwrite mode, characters bound to `self-insert' replace the
     text at point rather than pushing the text to the right.
     Characters bound to `backward-delete-char' replace the character
     before point with a space.

     By default, this command is unbound.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Commands For Killing,  Next: Numeric Arguments,  Prev: Commands For Text,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.4 Killing And Yanking
--------------------------

`kill-line (C-k)'
     Kill the text from point to the end of the line.

`backward-kill-line (C-x Rubout)'
     Kill backward to the beginning of the line.

`unix-line-discard (C-u)'
     Kill backward from the cursor to the beginning of the current line.

`kill-whole-line ()'
     Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where point is.
     By default, this is unbound.

`kill-word (M-d)'
     Kill from point to the end of the current word, or if between
     words, to the end of the next word.  Word boundaries are the same
     as `forward-word'.

`backward-kill-word (M-<DEL>)'
     Kill the word behind point.  Word boundaries are the same as
     `backward-word'.

`unix-word-rubout (C-w)'
     Kill the word behind point, using white space as a word boundary.
     The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.

`unix-filename-rubout ()'
     Kill the word behind point, using white space and the slash
     character as the word boundaries.  The killed text is saved on the
     kill-ring.

`delete-horizontal-space ()'
     Delete all spaces and tabs around point.  By default, this is
     unbound.

`kill-region ()'
     Kill the text in the current region.  By default, this command is
     unbound.

`copy-region-as-kill ()'
     Copy the text in the region to the kill buffer, so it can be yanked
     right away.  By default, this command is unbound.

`copy-backward-word ()'
     Copy the word before point to the kill buffer.  The word
     boundaries are the same as `backward-word'.  By default, this
     command is unbound.

`copy-forward-word ()'
     Copy the word following point to the kill buffer.  The word
     boundaries are the same as `forward-word'.  By default, this
     command is unbound.

`yank (C-y)'
     Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point.

`yank-pop (M-y)'
     Rotate the kill-ring, and yank the new top.  You can only do this
     if the prior command is `yank' or `yank-pop'.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Numeric Arguments,  Next: Commands For Completion,  Prev: Commands For Killing,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.5 Specifying Numeric Arguments
-----------------------------------

`digit-argument (M-0, M-1, ... M--)'
     Add this digit to the argument already accumulating, or start a new
     argument.  `M--' starts a negative argument.

`universal-argument ()'
     This is another way to specify an argument.  If this command is
     followed by one or more digits, optionally with a leading minus
     sign, those digits define the argument.  If the command is
     followed by digits, executing `universal-argument' again ends the
     numeric argument, but is otherwise ignored.  As a special case, if
     this command is immediately followed by a character that is
     neither a digit or minus sign, the argument count for the next
     command is multiplied by four.  The argument count is initially
     one, so executing this function the first time makes the argument
     count four, a second time makes the argument count sixteen, and so
     on.  By default, this is not bound to a key.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Commands For Completion,  Next: Keyboard Macros,  Prev: Numeric Arguments,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.6 Letting Readline Type For You
------------------------------------

`complete (<TAB>)'
     Attempt to perform completion on the text before point.  The
     actual completion performed is application-specific.  The default
     is filename completion.

`possible-completions (M-?)'
     List the possible completions of the text before point.

`insert-completions (M-*)'
     Insert all completions of the text before point that would have
     been generated by `possible-completions'.

`menu-complete ()'
     Similar to `complete', but replaces the word to be completed with
     a single match from the list of possible completions.  Repeated
     execution of `menu-complete' steps through the list of possible
     completions, inserting each match in turn.  At the end of the list
     of completions, the bell is rung (subject to the setting of
     `bell-style') and the original text is restored.  An argument of N
     moves N positions forward in the list of matches; a negative
     argument may be used to move backward through the list.  This
     command is intended to be bound to <TAB>, but is unbound by
     default.

`delete-char-or-list ()'
     Deletes the character under the cursor if not at the beginning or
     end of the line (like `delete-char').  If at the end of the line,
     behaves identically to `possible-completions'.  This command is
     unbound by default.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Keyboard Macros,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Commands For Completion,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.7 Keyboard Macros
----------------------

`start-kbd-macro (C-x ()'
     Begin saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro.

`end-kbd-macro (C-x ))'
     Stop saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro
     and save the definition.

`call-last-kbd-macro (C-x e)'
     Re-execute the last keyboard macro defined, by making the
     characters in the macro appear as if typed at the keyboard.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Keyboard Macros,  Up: Bindable Readline Commands

27.4.8 Some Miscellaneous Commands
----------------------------------

`re-read-init-file (C-x C-r)'
     Read in the contents of the INPUTRC file, and incorporate any
     bindings or variable assignments found there.

`abort (C-g)'
     Abort the current editing command and ring the terminal's bell
     (subject to the setting of `bell-style').

`do-uppercase-version (M-a, M-b, M-X, ...)'
     If the metafied character X is lowercase, run the command that is
     bound to the corresponding uppercase character.

`prefix-meta (<ESC>)'
     Metafy the next character typed.  This is for keyboards without a
     meta key.  Typing `<ESC> f' is equivalent to typing `M-f'.

`undo (C-_ or C-x C-u)'
     Incremental undo, separately remembered for each line.

`revert-line (M-r)'
     Undo all changes made to this line.  This is like executing the
     `undo' command enough times to get back to the beginning.

`tilde-expand (M-~)'
     Perform tilde expansion on the current word.

`set-mark (C-@)'
     Set the mark to the point.  If a numeric argument is supplied, the
     mark is set to that position.

`exchange-point-and-mark (C-x C-x)'
     Swap the point with the mark.  The current cursor position is set
     to the saved position, and the old cursor position is saved as the
     mark.

`character-search (C-])'
     A character is read and point is moved to the next occurrence of
     that character.  A negative count searches for previous
     occurrences.

`character-search-backward (M-C-])'
     A character is read and point is moved to the previous occurrence
     of that character.  A negative count searches for subsequent
     occurrences.

`insert-comment (M-#)'
     Without a numeric argument, the value of the `comment-begin'
     variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line.  If a
     numeric argument is supplied, this command acts as a toggle:  if
     the characters at the beginning of the line do not match the value
     of `comment-begin', the value is inserted, otherwise the
     characters in `comment-begin' are deleted from the beginning of
     the line.  In either case, the line is accepted as if a newline
     had been typed.

`dump-functions ()'
     Print all of the functions and their key bindings to the Readline
     output stream.  If a numeric argument is supplied, the output is
     formatted in such a way that it can be made part of an INPUTRC
     file.  This command is unbound by default.

`dump-variables ()'
     Print all of the settable variables and their values to the
     Readline output stream.  If a numeric argument is supplied, the
     output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part of an
     INPUTRC file.  This command is unbound by default.

`dump-macros ()'
     Print all of the Readline key sequences bound to macros and the
     strings they output.  If a numeric argument is supplied, the
     output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part of an
     INPUTRC file.  This command is unbound by default.

`emacs-editing-mode (C-e)'
     When in `vi' command mode, this causes a switch to `emacs' editing
     mode.

`vi-editing-mode (M-C-j)'
     When in `emacs' editing mode, this causes a switch to `vi' editing
     mode.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Readline vi Mode,  Prev: Bindable Readline Commands,  Up: Command Line Editing

27.5 Readline vi Mode
=====================

While the Readline library does not have a full set of `vi' editing
functions, it does contain enough to allow simple editing of the line.
The Readline `vi' mode behaves as specified in the POSIX 1003.2
standard.

   In order to switch interactively between `emacs' and `vi' editing
modes, use the command `M-C-j' (bound to emacs-editing-mode when in
`vi' mode and to vi-editing-mode in `emacs' mode).  The Readline
default is `emacs' mode.

   When you enter a line in `vi' mode, you are already placed in
`insertion' mode, as if you had typed an `i'.  Pressing <ESC> switches
you into `command' mode, where you can edit the text of the line with
the standard `vi' movement keys, move to previous history lines with
`k' and subsequent lines with `j', and so forth.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Using History Interactively,  Next: Installing GDB,  Prev: Command Line Editing,  Up: Top

28 Using History Interactively
******************************

This chapter describes how to use the GNU History Library interactively,
from a user's standpoint.  It should be considered a user's guide.  For
information on using the GNU History Library in other programs, see the
GNU Readline Library Manual.

* Menu:

* History Interaction::         What it feels like using History as a user.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: History Interaction,  Up: Using History Interactively

28.1 History Expansion
======================

The History library provides a history expansion feature that is similar
to the history expansion provided by `csh'.  This section describes the
syntax used to manipulate the history information.

   History expansions introduce words from the history list into the
input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the arguments
to a previous command into the current input line, or fix errors in
previous commands quickly.

   History expansion takes place in two parts.  The first is to
determine which line from the history list should be used during
substitution.  The second is to select portions of that line for
inclusion into the current one.  The line selected from the history is
called the "event", and the portions of that line that are acted upon
are called "words".  Various "modifiers" are available to manipulate
the selected words.  The line is broken into words in the same fashion
that Bash does, so that several words surrounded by quotes are
considered one word.  History expansions are introduced by the
appearance of the history expansion character, which is `!' by default.

* Menu:

* Event Designators::   How to specify which history line to use.
* Word Designators::    Specifying which words are of interest.
* Modifiers::           Modifying the results of substitution.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Event Designators,  Next: Word Designators,  Up: History Interaction

28.1.1 Event Designators
------------------------

An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the
history list.  

`!'
     Start a history substitution, except when followed by a space, tab,
     the end of the line, or `='.

`!N'
     Refer to command line N.

`!-N'
     Refer to the command N lines back.

`!!'
     Refer to the previous command.  This is a synonym for `!-1'.

`!STRING'
     Refer to the most recent command starting with STRING.

`!?STRING[?]'
     Refer to the most recent command containing STRING.  The trailing
     `?' may be omitted if the STRING is followed immediately by a
     newline.

`^STRING1^STRING2^'
     Quick Substitution.  Repeat the last command, replacing STRING1
     with STRING2.  Equivalent to `!!:s/STRING1/STRING2/'.

`!#'
     The entire command line typed so far.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Word Designators,  Next: Modifiers,  Prev: Event Designators,  Up: History Interaction

28.1.2 Word Designators
-----------------------

Word designators are used to select desired words from the event.  A
`:' separates the event specification from the word designator.  It may
be omitted if the word designator begins with a `^', `$', `*', `-', or
`%'.  Words are numbered from the beginning of the line, with the first
word being denoted by 0 (zero).  Words are inserted into the current
line separated by single spaces.

   For example,

`!!'
     designates the preceding command.  When you type this, the
     preceding command is repeated in toto.

`!!:$'
     designates the last argument of the preceding command.  This may be
     shortened to `!$'.

`!fi:2'
     designates the second argument of the most recent command starting
     with the letters `fi'.

   Here are the word designators:

`0 (zero)'
     The `0'th word.  For many applications, this is the command word.

`N'
     The Nth word.

`^'
     The first argument; that is, word 1.

`$'
     The last argument.

`%'
     The word matched by the most recent `?STRING?' search.

`X-Y'
     A range of words; `-Y' abbreviates `0-Y'.

`*'
     All of the words, except the `0'th.  This is a synonym for `1-$'.
     It is not an error to use `*' if there is just one word in the
     event; the empty string is returned in that case.

`X*'
     Abbreviates `X-$'

`X-'
     Abbreviates `X-$' like `X*', but omits the last word.


   If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the
previous command is used as the event.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Modifiers,  Prev: Word Designators,  Up: History Interaction

28.1.3 Modifiers
----------------

After the optional word designator, you can add a sequence of one or
more of the following modifiers, each preceded by a `:'.

`h'
     Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving only the head.

`t'
     Remove all leading  pathname  components, leaving the tail.

`r'
     Remove a trailing suffix of the form `.SUFFIX', leaving the
     basename.

`e'
     Remove all but the trailing suffix.

`p'
     Print the new command but do not execute it.

`s/OLD/NEW/'
     Substitute NEW for the first occurrence of OLD in the event line.
     Any delimiter may be used in place of `/'.  The delimiter may be
     quoted in OLD and NEW with a single backslash.  If `&' appears in
     NEW, it is replaced by OLD.  A single backslash will quote the
     `&'.  The final delimiter is optional if it is the last character
     on the input line.

`&'
     Repeat the previous substitution.

`g'
`a'
     Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line.  Used in
     conjunction with `s', as in `gs/OLD/NEW/', or with `&'.

`G'
     Apply the following `s' modifier once to each word in the event.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Formatting Documentation,  Next: Command Line Editing,  Prev: GDB Bugs,  Up: Top

Appendix A Formatting Documentation
***********************************

The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
for printing with PostScript or Ghostscript, in the `gdb' subdirectory
of the main source directory(1).  If you can use PostScript or
Ghostscript with your printer, you can print the reference card
immediately with `refcard.ps'.

   The release also includes the source for the reference card.  You
can format it, using TeX, by typing:

     make refcard.dvi

   The GDB reference card is designed to print in "landscape" mode on
US "letter" size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
high.  You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
your DVI output program.

   All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
distribution.  The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
on-line information and a printed manual.  You can use one of the Info
formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
and TeX (or `texi2roff') to typeset the printed version.

   GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version
of this manual in the `gdb' subdirectory.  The main Info file is
`gdb-6.6/gdb/gdb.info', and it refers to subordinate files matching
`gdb.info*' in the same directory.  If necessary, you can print out
these files, or read them with any editor; but they are easier to read
using the `info' subsystem in GNU Emacs or the standalone `info'
program, available as part of the GNU Texinfo distribution.

   If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
Info formatting programs, such as `texinfo-format-buffer' or `makeinfo'.

   If you have `makeinfo' installed, and are in the top level GDB
source directory (`gdb-6.6', in the case of version 6.6), you can make
the Info file by typing:

     cd gdb
     make gdb.info

   If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need TeX,
a program to print its DVI output files, and `texinfo.tex', the Texinfo
definitions file.

   TeX is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
produces output files called DVI files.  To print a typeset document,
you need a program to print DVI files.  If your system has TeX
installed, chances are it has such a program.  The precise command to
use depends on your system; `lpr -d' is common; another (for PostScript
devices) is `dvips'.  The DVI print command may require a file name
without any extension or a `.dvi' extension.

   TeX also requires a macro definitions file called `texinfo.tex'.
This file tells TeX how to typeset a document written in Texinfo
format.  On its own, TeX cannot either read or typeset a Texinfo file.
`texinfo.tex' is distributed with GDB and is located in the
`gdb-VERSION-NUMBER/texinfo' directory.

   If you have TeX and a DVI printer program installed, you can typeset
and print this manual.  First switch to the the `gdb' subdirectory of
the main source directory (for example, to `gdb-6.6/gdb') and type:

     make gdb.dvi

   Then give `gdb.dvi' to your DVI printing program.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) In `gdb-6.6/gdb/refcard.ps' of the version 6.6 release.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Installing GDB,  Next: Maintenance Commands,  Prev: Using History Interactively,  Up: Top

Appendix B Installing GDB
*************************

* Menu:

* Requirements::                Requirements for building GDB
* Running Configure::           Invoking the GDB `configure' script
* Separate Objdir::             Compiling GDB in another directory
* Config Names::                Specifying names for hosts and targets
* Configure Options::           Summary of options for configure

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Requirements,  Next: Running Configure,  Up: Installing GDB

B.1 Requirements for building GDB
=================================

Building GDB requires various tools and packages to be available.
Other packages will be used only if they are found.

Tools/packages necessary for building GDB
=========================================

ISO C90 compiler
     GDB is written in ISO C90.  It should be buildable with any
     working C90 compiler, e.g. GCC.


Tools/packages optional for building GDB
========================================

Expat
     GDB can use the Expat XML parsing library.  This library may be
     included with your operating system distribution; if it is not, you
     can get the latest version from `http://expat.sourceforge.net'.
     The `configure' script will search for this library in several
     standard locations; if it is installed in an unusual path, you can
     use the `--with-libexpat-prefix' option to specify its location.

     Expat is used currently only used to implement some remote-specific
     features.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Running Configure,  Next: Separate Objdir,  Prev: Requirements,  Up: Installing GDB

B.2 Invoking the GDB `configure' script
=======================================

GDB comes with a `configure' script that automates the process of
preparing GDB for installation; you can then use `make' to build the
`gdb' program.

   The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB
in a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
version number to `gdb'.

   For example, the GDB version 6.6 distribution is in the `gdb-6.6'
directory.  That directory contains:

`gdb-6.6/configure (and supporting files)'
     script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries

`gdb-6.6/gdb'
     the source specific to GDB itself

`gdb-6.6/bfd'
     source for the Binary File Descriptor library

`gdb-6.6/include'
     GNU include files

`gdb-6.6/libiberty'
     source for the `-liberty' free software library

`gdb-6.6/opcodes'
     source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers

`gdb-6.6/readline'
     source for the GNU command-line interface

`gdb-6.6/glob'
     source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine

`gdb-6.6/mmalloc'
     source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package

   The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run `configure'
from the `gdb-VERSION-NUMBER' source directory, which in this example
is the `gdb-6.6' directory.

   First switch to the `gdb-VERSION-NUMBER' source directory if you are
not already in it; then run `configure'.  Pass the identifier for the
platform on which GDB will run as an argument.

   For example:

     cd gdb-6.6
     ./configure HOST
     make

where HOST is an identifier such as `sun4' or `decstation', that
identifies the platform where GDB will run.  (You can often leave off
HOST; `configure' tries to guess the correct value by examining your
system.)

   Running `configure HOST' and then running `make' builds the `bfd',
`readline', `mmalloc', and `libiberty' libraries, then `gdb' itself.
The configured source files, and the binaries, are left in the
corresponding source directories.

   `configure' is a Bourne-shell (`/bin/sh') script; if your system
does not recognize this automatically when you run a different shell,
you may need to run `sh' on it explicitly:

     sh configure HOST

   If you run `configure' from a directory that contains source
directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the `gdb-6.6'
source directory for version 6.6, `configure' creates configuration
files for every directory level underneath (unless you tell it not to,
with the `--norecursion' option).

   You should run the `configure' script from the top directory in the
source tree, the `gdb-VERSION-NUMBER' directory.  If you run
`configure' from one of the subdirectories, you will configure only
that subdirectory.  That is usually not what you want.  In particular,
if you run the first `configure' from the `gdb' subdirectory of the
`gdb-VERSION-NUMBER' directory, you will omit the configuration of
`bfd', `readline', and other sibling directories of the `gdb'
subdirectory.  This leads to build errors about missing include files
such as `bfd/bfd.h'.

   You can install `gdb' anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.  However,
you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by the `SHELL'
environment variable) is publicly readable.  Remember that GDB uses the
shell to start your program--some systems refuse to let GDB debug child
processes whose programs are not readable.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Separate Objdir,  Next: Config Names,  Prev: Running Configure,  Up: Installing GDB

B.3 Compiling GDB in another directory
======================================

If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
you need a different `gdb' compiled for each combination of host and
target.  `configure' is designed to make this easy by allowing you to
generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory, rather than in
the source directory.  If your `make' program handles the `VPATH'
feature (GNU `make' does), running `make' in each of these directories
builds the `gdb' program specified there.

   To build `gdb' in a separate directory, run `configure' with the
`--srcdir' option to specify where to find the source.  (You also need
to specify a path to find `configure' itself from your working
directory.  If the path to `configure' would be the same as the
argument to `--srcdir', you can leave out the `--srcdir' option; it is
assumed.)

   For example, with version 6.6, you can build GDB in a separate
directory for a Sun 4 like this:

     cd gdb-6.6
     mkdir ../gdb-sun4
     cd ../gdb-sun4
     ../gdb-6.6/configure sun4
     make

   When `configure' builds a configuration using a remote source
directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
(and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory.  In
the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library `libiberty.a' in the
directory `gdb-sun4/libiberty', and GDB itself in `gdb-sun4/gdb'.

   Make sure that your path to the `configure' script has just one
instance of `gdb' in it.  If your path to `configure' looks like
`../gdb-6.6/gdb/configure', you are configuring only one subdirectory
of GDB, not the whole package.  This leads to build errors about
missing include files such as `bfd/bfd.h'.

   One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB runs on
one machine--the "host"--while debugging programs that run on another
machine--the "target").  You specify a cross-debugging target by giving
the `--target=TARGET' option to `configure'.

   When you run `make' to build a program or library, you must run it
in a configured directory--whatever directory you were in when you
called `configure' (or one of its subdirectories).

   The `Makefile' that `configure' generates in each source directory
also runs recursively.  If you type `make' in a source directory such
as `gdb-6.6' (or in a separate configured directory configured with
`--srcdir=DIRNAME/gdb-6.6'), you will build all the required libraries,
and then build GDB.

   When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
directories, you can run `make' on them in parallel (for example, if
they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
with each other.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Config Names,  Next: Configure Options,  Prev: Separate Objdir,  Up: Installing GDB

B.4 Specifying names for hosts and targets
==========================================

The specifications used for hosts and targets in the `configure' script
are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
aliases are also supported.  The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
of information in the following pattern:

     ARCHITECTURE-VENDOR-OS

   For example, you can use the alias `sun4' as a HOST argument, or as
the value for TARGET in a `--target=TARGET' option.  The equivalent
full name is `sparc-sun-sunos4'.

   The `configure' script accompanying GDB does not provide any query
facility to list all supported host and target names or aliases.
`configure' calls the Bourne shell script `config.sub' to map
abbreviations to full names; you can read the script, if you wish, or
you can use it to test your guesses on abbreviations--for example:

     % sh config.sub i386-linux
     i386-pc-linux-gnu
     % sh config.sub alpha-linux
     alpha-unknown-linux-gnu
     % sh config.sub hp9k700
     hppa1.1-hp-hpux
     % sh config.sub sun4
     sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
     % sh config.sub sun3
     m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
     % sh config.sub i986v
     Invalid configuration `i986v': machine `i986v' not recognized

`config.sub' is also distributed in the GDB source directory
(`gdb-6.6', for version 6.6).

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Configure Options,  Prev: Config Names,  Up: Installing GDB

B.5 `configure' options
=======================

Here is a summary of the `configure' options and arguments that are
most often useful for building GDB.  `configure' also has several other
options not listed here.  *note (configure.info)What Configure Does::,
for a full explanation of `configure'.

     configure [--help]
               [--prefix=DIR]
               [--exec-prefix=DIR]
               [--srcdir=DIRNAME]
               [--norecursion] [--rm]
               [--target=TARGET]
               HOST

You may introduce options with a single `-' rather than `--' if you
prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use `--'.

`--help'
     Display a quick summary of how to invoke `configure'.

`--prefix=DIR'
     Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
     `DIR'.

`--exec-prefix=DIR'
     Configure the source to install programs under directory `DIR'.

`--srcdir=DIRNAME'
     *Warning: using this option requires GNU `make', or another `make'
     that implements the `VPATH' feature.*
     Use this option to make configurations in directories separate
     from the GDB source directories.  Among other things, you can use
     this to build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously,
     in separate directories.  `configure' writes configuration
     specific files in the current directory, but arranges for them to
     use the source in the directory DIRNAME.  `configure' creates
     directories under the working directory in parallel to the source
     directories below DIRNAME.

`--norecursion'
     Configure only the directory level where `configure' is executed;
     do not propagate configuration to subdirectories.

`--target=TARGET'
     Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
     TARGET.  Without this option, GDB is configured to debug programs
     that run on the same machine (HOST) as GDB itself.

     There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available
     targets.

`HOST ...'
     Configure GDB to run on the specified HOST.

     There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available
     hosts.

   There are many other options available as well, but they are
generally needed for special purposes only.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Maintenance Commands,  Next: Remote Protocol,  Prev: Installing GDB,  Up: Top

Appendix C Maintenance Commands
*******************************

In addition to commands intended for GDB users, GDB includes a number
of commands intended for GDB developers, that are not documented
elsewhere in this manual.  These commands are provided here for
reference.  (For commands that turn on debugging messages, see *Note
Debugging Output::.)

`maint agent EXPRESSION'
     Translate the given EXPRESSION into remote agent bytecodes.  This
     command is useful for debugging the Agent Expression mechanism
     (*note Agent Expressions::).

`maint info breakpoints'
     Using the same format as `info breakpoints', display both the
     breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those GDB is using for
     internal purposes.  Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
     breakpoint numbers.  The type column identifies what kind of
     breakpoint is shown:

    `breakpoint'
          Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.

    `watchpoint'
          Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.

    `longjmp'
          Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
          `longjmp' calls.

    `longjmp resume'
          Internal breakpoint at the target of a `longjmp'.

    `until'
          Temporary internal breakpoint used by the GDB `until' command.

    `finish'
          Temporary internal breakpoint used by the GDB `finish'
          command.

    `shlib events'
          Shared library events.


`maint check-symtabs'
     Check the consistency of psymtabs and symtabs.

`maint cplus first_component NAME'
     Print the first C++ class/namespace component of NAME.

`maint cplus namespace'
     Print the list of possible C++ namespaces.

`maint demangle NAME'
     Demangle a C++ or Objective-C manled NAME.

`maint deprecate COMMAND [REPLACEMENT]'
`maint undeprecate COMMAND'
     Deprecate or undeprecate the named COMMAND.  Deprecated commands
     cause GDB to issue a warning when you use them.  The optional
     argument REPLACEMENT says which newer command should be used in
     favor of the deprecated one; if it is given, GDB will mention the
     replacement as part of the warning.

`maint dump-me'
     Cause a fatal signal in the debugger and force it to dump its core.
     This is supported only on systems which support aborting a program
     with the `SIGQUIT' signal.

`maint internal-error [MESSAGE-TEXT]'
`maint internal-warning [MESSAGE-TEXT]'
     Cause GDB to call the internal function `internal_error' or
     `internal_warning' and hence behave as though an internal error or
     internal warning has been detected.  In addition to reporting the
     internal problem, these functions give the user the opportunity to
     either quit GDB or create a core file of the current GDB session.

     These commands take an optional parameter MESSAGE-TEXT that is
     used as the text of the error or warning message.

     Here's an example of using `indernal-error':

          (gdb) maint internal-error testing, 1, 2
          .../maint.c:121: internal-error: testing, 1, 2
          A problem internal to GDB has been detected.  Further
          debugging may prove unreliable.
          Quit this debugging session? (y or n) n
          Create a core file? (y or n) n
          (gdb)

`maint packet TEXT'
     If GDB is talking to an inferior via the serial protocol, then
     this command sends the string TEXT to the inferior, and displays
     the response packet.  GDB supplies the initial `$' character, the
     terminating `#' character, and the checksum.

`maint print architecture [FILE]'
     Print the entire architecture configuration.  The optional argument
     FILE names the file where the output goes.

`maint print dummy-frames'
     Prints the contents of GDB's internal dummy-frame stack.

          (gdb) b add
          ...
          (gdb) print add(2,3)
          Breakpoint 2, add (a=2, b=3) at ...
          58      return (a + b);
          The program being debugged stopped while in a function called from GDB.
          ...
          (gdb) maint print dummy-frames
          0x1a57c80: pc=0x01014068 fp=0x0200bddc sp=0x0200bdd6
           top=0x0200bdd4 id={stack=0x200bddc,code=0x101405c}
           call_lo=0x01014000 call_hi=0x01014001
          (gdb)

     Takes an optional file parameter.

`maint print registers [FILE]'
`maint print raw-registers [FILE]'
`maint print cooked-registers [FILE]'
`maint print register-groups [FILE]'
     Print GDB's internal register data structures.

     The command `maint print raw-registers' includes the contents of
     the raw register cache; the command `maint print cooked-registers'
     includes the (cooked) value of all registers; and the command
     `maint print register-groups' includes the groups that each
     register is a member of.  *Note Registers: (gdbint)Registers.

     These commands take an optional parameter, a file name to which to
     write the information.

`maint print reggroups [FILE]'
     Print GDB's internal register group data structures.  The optional
     argument FILE tells to what file to write the information.

     The register groups info looks like this:

          (gdb) maint print reggroups
           Group      Type
           general    user
           float      user
           all        user
           vector     user
           system     user
           save       internal
           restore    internal

`flushregs'
     This command forces GDB to flush its internal register cache.

`maint print objfiles'
     Print a dump of all known object files.  For each object file, this
     command prints its name, address in memory, and all of its psymtabs
     and symtabs.

`maint print statistics'
     This command prints, for each object file in the program, various
     data about that object file followed by the byte cache ("bcache")
     statistics for the object file.  The objfile data includes the
     number of minimal, partical, full, and stabs symbols, the number
     of types defined by the objfile, the number of as yet unexpanded
     psym tables, the number of line tables and string tables, and the
     amount of memory used by the various tables.  The bcache
     statistics include the counts, sizes, and counts of duplicates of
     all and unique objects, max, average, and median entry size, total
     memory used and its overhead and savings, and various measures of
     the hash table size and chain lengths.

`maint print type EXPR'
     Print the type chain for a type specified by EXPR.  The argument
     can be either a type name or a symbol.  If it is a symbol, the
     type of that symbol is described.  The type chain produced by this
     command is a recursive definition of the data type as stored in
     GDB's data structures, including its flags and contained types.

`maint set dwarf2 max-cache-age'
`maint show dwarf2 max-cache-age'
     Control the DWARF 2 compilation unit cache.

     In object files with inter-compilation-unit references, such as
     those produced by the GCC option `-feliminate-dwarf2-dups', the
     DWARF 2 reader needs to frequently refer to previously read
     compilation units.  This setting controls how long a compilation
     unit will remain in the cache if it is not referenced.  A higher
     limit means that cached compilation units will be stored in memory
     longer, and more total memory will be used.  Setting it to zero
     disables caching, which will slow down GDB startup, but reduce
     memory consumption.

`maint set profile'
`maint show profile'
     Control profiling of GDB.

     Profiling will be disabled until you use the `maint set profile'
     command to enable it.  When you enable profiling, the system will
     begin collecting timing and execution count data; when you disable
     profiling or exit GDB, the results will be written to a log file.
     Remember that if you use profiling, GDB will overwrite the
     profiling log file (often called `gmon.out').  If you have a
     record of important profiling data in a `gmon.out' file, be sure
     to move it to a safe location.

     Configuring with `--enable-profiling' arranges for GDB to be
     compiled with the `-pg' compiler option.

`maint show-debug-regs'
     Control whether to show variables that mirror the x86 hardware
     debug registers.  Use `ON' to enable, `OFF' to disable.  If
     enabled, the debug registers values are shown when GDB inserts or
     removes a hardware breakpoint or watchpoint, and when the inferior
     triggers a hardware-assisted breakpoint or watchpoint.

`maint space'
     Control whether to display memory usage for each command.  If set
     to a nonzero value, GDB will display how much memory each command
     took, following the command's own output.  This can also be
     requested by invoking GDB with the `--statistics' command-line
     switch (*note Mode Options::).

`maint time'
     Control whether to display the execution time for each command.  If
     set to a nonzero value, GDB will display how much time it took to
     execute each command, following the command's own output.  This
     can also be requested by invoking GDB with the `--statistics'
     command-line switch (*note Mode Options::).

`maint translate-address [SECTION] ADDR'
     Find the symbol stored at the location specified by the address
     ADDR and an optional section name SECTION.  If found, GDB prints
     the name of the closest symbol and an offset from the symbol's
     location to the specified address.  This is similar to the `info
     address' command (*note Symbols::), except that this command also
     allows to find symbols in other sections.


   The following command is useful for non-interactive invocations of
GDB, such as in the test suite.

`set watchdog NSEC'
     Set the maximum number of seconds GDB will wait for the target
     operation to finish.  If this time expires, GDB reports and error
     and the command is aborted.

`show watchdog'
     Show the current setting of the target wait timeout.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Remote Protocol,  Next: Agent Expressions,  Prev: Maintenance Commands,  Up: Top

Appendix D GDB Remote Serial Protocol
*************************************

* Menu:

* Overview::
* Packets::
* Stop Reply Packets::
* General Query Packets::
* Register Packet Format::
* Tracepoint Packets::
* Interrupts::
* Examples::
* File-I/O remote protocol extension::
* Memory map format::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Packets,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.1 Overview
============

There may be occasions when you need to know something about the
protocol--for example, if there is only one serial port to your target
machine, you might want your program to do something special if it
recognizes a packet meant for GDB.

   In the examples below, `->' and `<-' are used to indicate
transmitted and received data respectfully.

   All GDB commands and responses (other than acknowledgments) are sent
as a PACKET.  A PACKET is introduced with the character `$', the actual
PACKET-DATA, and the terminating character `#' followed by a two-digit
CHECKSUM:

     `$'PACKET-DATA`#'CHECKSUM
   The two-digit CHECKSUM is computed as the modulo 256 sum of all
characters between the leading `$' and the trailing `#' (an eight bit
unsigned checksum).

   Implementors should note that prior to GDB 5.0 the protocol
specification also included an optional two-digit SEQUENCE-ID:

     `$'SEQUENCE-ID`:'PACKET-DATA`#'CHECKSUM

That SEQUENCE-ID was appended to the acknowledgment.  GDB has never
output SEQUENCE-IDs.  Stubs that handle packets added since GDB 5.0
must not accept SEQUENCE-ID.

   When either the host or the target machine receives a packet, the
first response expected is an acknowledgment: either `+' (to indicate
the package was received correctly) or `-' (to request retransmission):

     -> `$'PACKET-DATA`#'CHECKSUM
     <- `+'
   The host (GDB) sends COMMANDs, and the target (the debugging stub
incorporated in your program) sends a RESPONSE.  In the case of step
and continue COMMANDs, the response is only sent when the operation has
completed (the target has again stopped).

   PACKET-DATA consists of a sequence of characters with the exception
of `#' and `$' (see `X' packet for additional exceptions).

   Fields within the packet should be separated using `,' `;' or `:'.
Except where otherwise noted all numbers are represented in HEX with
leading zeros suppressed.

   Implementors should note that prior to GDB 5.0, the character `:'
could not appear as the third character in a packet (as it would
potentially conflict with the SEQUENCE-ID).

   Binary data in most packets is encoded either as two hexadecimal
digits per byte of binary data.  This allowed the traditional remote
protocol to work over connections which were only seven-bit clean.
Some packets designed more recently assume an eight-bit clean
connection, and use a more efficient encoding to send and receive
binary data.

   The binary data representation uses `7d' (ASCII `}') as an escape
character.  Any escaped byte is transmitted as the escape character
followed by the original character XORed with `0x20'.  For example, the
byte `0x7d' would be transmitted as the two bytes `0x7d 0x5d'.  The
bytes `0x23' (ASCII `#'), `0x24' (ASCII `$'), and `0x7d' (ASCII `}')
must always be escaped.  Responses sent by the stub must also escape
`0x2a' (ASCII `*'), so that it is not interpreted as the start of a
run-length encoded sequence (described next).

   Response DATA can be run-length encoded to save space.  A `*' means
that the next character is an ASCII encoding giving a repeat count
which stands for that many repetitions of the character preceding the
`*'.  The encoding is `n+29', yielding a printable character where `n
>=3' (which is where rle starts to win).  The printable characters `$',
`#', `+' and `-' or with a numeric value greater than 126 should not be
used.

   So:
     "`0* '"
   means the same as "0000".

   The error response returned for some packets includes a two character
error number.  That number is not well defined.

   For any COMMAND not supported by the stub, an empty response
(`$#00') should be returned.  That way it is possible to extend the
protocol.  A newer GDB can tell if a packet is supported based on that
response.

   A stub is required to support the `g', `G', `m', `M', `c', and `s'
COMMANDs.  All other COMMANDs are optional.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Packets,  Next: Stop Reply Packets,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.2 Packets
===========

The following table provides a complete list of all currently defined
COMMANDs and their corresponding response DATA.  *Note File-I/O remote
protocol extension::, for details about the File I/O extension of the
remote protocol.

   Each packet's description has a template showing the packet's overall
syntax, followed by an explanation of the packet's meaning.  We include
spaces in some of the templates for clarity; these are not part of the
packet's syntax.  No GDB packet uses spaces to separate its components.
For example, a template like `foo BAR BAZ' describes a packet
beginning with the three ASCII bytes `foo', followed by a BAR, followed
directly by a BAZ.  GDB does not transmit a space character between the
`foo' and the BAR, or between the BAR and the BAZ.

   Note that all packet forms beginning with an upper- or lower-case
letter, other than those described here, are reserved for future use.

   Here are the packet descriptions.

`!'
     Enable extended mode.  In extended mode, the remote server is made
     persistent.  The `R' packet is used to restart the program being
     debugged.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          The remote target both supports and has enabled extended mode.

`?'
     Indicate the reason the target halted.  The reply is the same as
     for step and continue.

     Reply: *Note Stop Reply Packets::, for the reply specifications.

`A ARGLEN,ARGNUM,ARG,...'
     Initialized `argv[]' array passed into program. ARGLEN specifies
     the number of bytes in the hex encoded byte stream ARG.  See
     `gdbserver' for more details.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          The arguments were set.

    `E NN'
          An error occurred.

`b BAUD'
     (Don't use this packet; its behavior is not well-defined.)  Change
     the serial line speed to BAUD.

     JTC: _When does the transport layer state change?  When it's
     received, or after the ACK is transmitted.  In either case, there
     are problems if the command or the acknowledgment packet is
     dropped._

     Stan: _If people really wanted to add something like this, and get
     it working for the first time, they ought to modify ser-unix.c to
     send some kind of out-of-band message to a specially-setup stub
     and have the switch happen "in between" packets, so that from
     remote protocol's point of view, nothing actually happened._

`B ADDR,MODE'
     Set (MODE is `S') or clear (MODE is `C') a breakpoint at ADDR.

     Don't use this packet.  Use the `Z' and `z' packets instead (*note
     insert breakpoint or watchpoint packet::).

`c [ADDR]'
     Continue.  ADDR is address to resume.  If ADDR is omitted, resume
     at current address.

     Reply: *Note Stop Reply Packets::, for the reply specifications.

`C SIG[;ADDR]'
     Continue with signal SIG (hex signal number).  If `;ADDR' is
     omitted, resume at same address.

     Reply: *Note Stop Reply Packets::, for the reply specifications.

`d'
     Toggle debug flag.

     Don't use this packet; instead, define a general set packet (*note
     General Query Packets::).

`D'
     Detach GDB from the remote system.  Sent to the remote target
     before GDB disconnects via the `detach' command.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E NN'
          for an error

`F RC,EE,CF;XX'
     A reply from GDB to an `F' packet sent by the target.  This is
     part of the File-I/O protocol extension.  *Note File-I/O remote
     protocol extension::, for the specification.

`g'
     Read general registers.

     Reply:
    `XX...'
          Each byte of register data is described by two hex digits.
          The bytes with the register are transmitted in target byte
          order.  The size of each register and their position within
          the `g' packet are determined by the GDB internal macros
          `DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE' and `REGISTER_NAME' macros.
          The specification of several standard `g' packets is
          specified below.

    `E NN'
          for an error.

`G XX...'
     Write general registers.  *Note read registers packet::, for a
     description of the XX... data.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E NN'
          for an error

`H C T'
     Set thread for subsequent operations (`m', `M', `g', `G', et.al.).
     C depends on the operation to be performed: it should be `c' for
     step and continue operations, `g' for other operations.  The
     thread designator T may be `-1', meaning all the threads, a thread
     number, or `0' which means pick any thread.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E NN'
          for an error

`i [ADDR[,NNN]]'
     Step the remote target by a single clock cycle.  If `,NNN' is
     present, cycle step NNN cycles.  If ADDR is present, cycle step
     starting at that address.

`I'
     Signal, then cycle step.  *Note step with signal packet::.  *Note
     cycle step packet::.

`k'
     Kill request.

     FIXME: _There is no description of how to operate when a specific
     thread context has been selected (i.e. does 'k' kill only that
     thread?)_.

`m ADDR,LENGTH'
     Read LENGTH bytes of memory starting at address ADDR.  Note that
     ADDR may not be aligned to any particular boundary.

     The stub need not use any particular size or alignment when
     gathering data from memory for the response; even if ADDR is
     word-aligned and LENGTH is a multiple of the word size, the stub
     is free to use byte accesses, or not.  For this reason, this
     packet may not be suitable for accessing memory-mapped I/O devices.  

     Reply:
    `XX...'
          Memory contents; each byte is transmitted as a two-digit
          hexadecimal number.  The reply may contain fewer bytes than
          requested if the server was able to read only part of the
          region of memory.

    `E NN'
          NN is errno

`M ADDR,LENGTH:XX...'
     Write LENGTH bytes of memory starting at address ADDR.  XX... is
     the data; each byte is transmitted as a two-digit hexadecimal
     number.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E NN'
          for an error (this includes the case where only part of the
          data was written).

`p N'
     Read the value of register N; N is in hex.  *Note read registers
     packet::, for a description of how the returned register value is
     encoded.

     Reply:
    `XX...'
          the register's value

    `E NN'
          for an error

    `'
          Indicating an unrecognized QUERY.

`P N...=R...'
     Write register N... with value R....  The register number N is in
     hexadecimal, and R... contains two hex digits for each byte in the
     register (target byte order).

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E NN'
          for an error

`q NAME PARAMS...'
`Q NAME PARAMS...'
     General query (`q') and set (`Q').  These packets are described
     fully in *Note General Query Packets::.

`r'
     Reset the entire system.

     Don't use this packet; use the `R' packet instead.

`R XX'
     Restart the program being debugged.  XX, while needed, is ignored.
     This packet is only available in extended mode.

     The `R' packet has no reply.

`s [ADDR]'
     Single step.  ADDR is the address at which to resume.  If ADDR is
     omitted, resume at same address.

     Reply: *Note Stop Reply Packets::, for the reply specifications.

`S SIG[;ADDR]'
     Step with signal.  This is analogous to the `C' packet, but
     requests a single-step, rather than a normal resumption of
     execution.

     Reply: *Note Stop Reply Packets::, for the reply specifications.

`t ADDR:PP,MM'
     Search backwards starting at address ADDR for a match with pattern
     PP and mask MM.  PP and MM are 4 bytes.  ADDR must be at least 3
     digits.

`T XX'
     Find out if the thread XX is alive.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          thread is still alive

    `E NN'
          thread is dead

`v'
     Packets starting with `v' are identified by a multi-letter name,
     up to the first `;' or `?' (or the end of the packet).

`vCont[;ACTION[:TID]]...'
     Resume the inferior, specifying different actions for each thread.
     If an action is specified with no TID, then it is applied to any
     threads that don't have a specific action specified; if no default
     action is specified then other threads should remain stopped.
     Specifying multiple default actions is an error; specifying no
     actions is also an error.  Thread IDs are specified in
     hexadecimal.  Currently supported actions are:

    `c'
          Continue.

    `C SIG'
          Continue with signal SIG.  SIG should be two hex digits.

    `s'
          Step.

    `S SIG'
          Step with signal SIG.  SIG should be two hex digits.

     The optional ADDR argument normally associated with these packets
     is not supported in `vCont'.

     Reply: *Note Stop Reply Packets::, for the reply specifications.

`vCont?'
     Request a list of actions supporetd by the `vCont' packet.

     Reply:
    `vCont[;ACTION...]'
          The `vCont' packet is supported.  Each ACTION is a supported
          command in the `vCont' packet.

    `'
          The `vCont' packet is not supported.

`vFlashErase:ADDR,LENGTH'
     Direct the stub to erase LENGTH bytes of flash starting at ADDR.
     The region may enclose any number of flash blocks, but its start
     and end must fall on block boundaries, as indicated by the flash
     block size appearing in the memory map (*note Memory map
     format::).  GDB groups flash memory programming operations
     together, and sends a `vFlashDone' request after each group; the
     stub is allowed to delay erase operation until the `vFlashDone'
     packet is received.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E NN'
          for an error

`vFlashWrite:ADDR:XX...'
     Direct the stub to write data to flash address ADDR.  The data is
     passed in binary form using the same encoding as for the `X'
     packet (*note Binary Data::).  The memory ranges specified by
     `vFlashWrite' packets preceding a `vFlashDone' packet must not
     overlap, and must appear in order of increasing addresses
     (although `vFlashErase' packets for higher addresses may already
     have been received; the ordering is guaranteed only between
     `vFlashWrite' packets).  If a packet writes to an address that was
     neither erased by a preceding `vFlashErase' packet nor by some
     other target-specific method, the results are unpredictable.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E.memtype'
          for vFlashWrite addressing non-flash memory

    `E NN'
          for an error

`vFlashDone'
     Indicate to the stub that flash programming operation is finished.
     The stub is permitted to delay or batch the effects of a group of
     `vFlashErase' and `vFlashWrite' packets until a `vFlashDone'
     packet is received.  The contents of the affected regions of flash
     memory are unpredictable until the `vFlashDone' request is
     completed.

`X ADDR,LENGTH:XX...'
     Write data to memory, where the data is transmitted in binary.
     ADDR is address, LENGTH is number of bytes, `XX...' is binary data
     (*note Binary Data::).

     Reply:
    `OK'
          for success

    `E NN'
          for an error

`z TYPE,ADDR,LENGTH'
`Z TYPE,ADDR,LENGTH'
     Insert (`Z') or remove (`z') a TYPE breakpoint or watchpoint
     starting at address ADDRESS and covering the next LENGTH bytes.

     Each breakpoint and watchpoint packet TYPE is documented
     separately.

     _Implementation notes: A remote target shall return an empty string
     for an unrecognized breakpoint or watchpoint packet TYPE.  A
     remote target shall support either both or neither of a given
     `ZTYPE...' and `zTYPE...' packet pair.  To avoid potential
     problems with duplicate packets, the operations should be
     implemented in an idempotent way._

`z0,ADDR,LENGTH'
`Z0,ADDR,LENGTH'
     Insert (`Z0') or remove (`z0') a memory breakpoint at address ADDR
     of size LENGTH.

     A memory breakpoint is implemented by replacing the instruction at
     ADDR with a software breakpoint or trap instruction.  The LENGTH
     is used by targets that indicates the size of the breakpoint (in
     bytes) that should be inserted (e.g., the ARM and MIPS can insert
     either a 2 or 4 byte breakpoint).

     _Implementation note: It is possible for a target to copy or move
     code that contains memory breakpoints (e.g., when implementing
     overlays).  The behavior of this packet, in the presence of such a
     target, is not defined._

     Reply:
    `OK'
          success

    `'
          not supported

    `E NN'
          for an error

`z1,ADDR,LENGTH'
`Z1,ADDR,LENGTH'
     Insert (`Z1') or remove (`z1') a hardware breakpoint at address
     ADDR of size LENGTH.

     A hardware breakpoint is implemented using a mechanism that is not
     dependant on being able to modify the target's memory.

     _Implementation note: A hardware breakpoint is not affected by code
     movement._

     Reply:
    `OK'
          success

    `'
          not supported

    `E NN'
          for an error

`z2,ADDR,LENGTH'
`Z2,ADDR,LENGTH'
     Insert (`Z2') or remove (`z2') a write watchpoint.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          success

    `'
          not supported

    `E NN'
          for an error

`z3,ADDR,LENGTH'
`Z3,ADDR,LENGTH'
     Insert (`Z3') or remove (`z3') a read watchpoint.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          success

    `'
          not supported

    `E NN'
          for an error

`z4,ADDR,LENGTH'
`Z4,ADDR,LENGTH'
     Insert (`Z4') or remove (`z4') an access watchpoint.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          success

    `'
          not supported

    `E NN'
          for an error


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Stop Reply Packets,  Next: General Query Packets,  Prev: Packets,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.3 Stop Reply Packets
======================

The `C', `c', `S', `s' and `?' packets can receive any of the below as
a reply.  In the case of the `C', `c', `S' and `s' packets, that reply
is only returned when the target halts.  In the below the exact meaning
of "signal number" is poorly defined.  In general one of the UNIX signal
numbering conventions is used.

   As in the description of request packets, we include spaces in the
reply templates for clarity; these are not part of the reply packet's
syntax.  No GDB stop reply packet uses spaces to separate its
components.

`S AA'
     The program received signal number AA (a two-digit hexadecimal
     number).  This is equivalent to a `T' response with no N:R pairs.

`T AA N1:R1;N2:R2;...'
     The program received signal number AA (a two-digit hexadecimal
     number).  This is equivalent to an `S' response, except that the
     `N:R' pairs can carry values of important registers and other
     information directly in the stop reply packet, reducing round-trip
     latency.  Single-step and breakpoint traps are reported this way.
     Each `N:R' pair is interpreted as follows:
       1. If N is a hexadecimal number, it is a register number, and the
          corresponding R gives that register's value.  R is a series
          of bytes in target byte order, with each byte given by a
          two-digit hex number.

       2. If N is `thread', then R is the thread process ID, in hex.

       3. If N is `watch', `rwatch', or `awatch', then the packet
          indicates a watchpoint hit, and R is the data address, in hex.

       4. Otherwise, GDB should ignore this `N:R' pair and go on to the
          next; this allows us to extend the protocol in the future.

`W AA'
     The process exited, and AA is the exit status.  This is only
     applicable to certain targets.

`X AA'
     The process terminated with signal AA.

`O XX...'
     `XX...' is hex encoding of ASCII data, to be written as the
     program's console output.  This can happen at any time while the
     program is running and the debugger should continue to wait for
     `W', `T', etc.

`F CALL-ID,PARAMETER...'
     CALL-ID is the identifier which says which host system call should
     be called.  This is just the name of the function.  Translation
     into the correct system call is only applicable as it's defined in
     GDB.  *Note File-I/O remote protocol extension::, for a list of
     implemented system calls.

     `PARAMETER...' is a list of parameters as defined for this very
     system call.

     The target replies with this packet when it expects GDB to call a
     host system call on behalf of the target.  GDB replies with an
     appropriate `F' packet and keeps up waiting for the next reply
     packet from the target.  The latest `C', `c', `S' or `s' action is
     expected to be continued.  *Note File-I/O remote protocol
     extension::, for more details.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: General Query Packets,  Next: Register Packet Format,  Prev: Stop Reply Packets,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.4 General Query Packets
=========================

Packets starting with `q' are "general query packets"; packets starting
with `Q' are "general set packets".  General query and set packets are
a semi-unified form for retrieving and sending information to and from
the stub.

   The initial letter of a query or set packet is followed by a name
indicating what sort of thing the packet applies to.  For example, GDB
may use a `qSymbol' packet to exchange symbol definitions with the
stub.  These packet names follow some conventions:

   * The name must not contain commas, colons or semicolons.

   * Most GDB query and set packets have a leading upper case letter.

   * The names of custom vendor packets should use a company prefix, in
     lower case, followed by a period.  For example, packets designed at
     the Acme Corporation might begin with `qacme.foo' (for querying
     foos) or `Qacme.bar' (for setting bars).

   The name of a query or set packet should be separated from any
parameters by a `:'; the parameters themselves should be separated by
`,' or `;'.  Stubs must be careful to match the full packet name, and
check for a separator or the end of the packet, in case two packet
names share a common prefix.  New packets should not begin with `qC',
`qP', or `qL'(1).

   Like the descriptions of the other packets, each description here
has a template showing the packet's overall syntax, followed by an
explanation of the packet's meaning.  We include spaces in some of the
templates for clarity; these are not part of the packet's syntax.  No
GDB packet uses spaces to separate its components.

   Here are the currently defined query and set packets:

`qC'
     Return the current thread id.

     Reply:
    `QC PID'
          Where PID is an unsigned hexadecimal process id.

    `(anything else)'
          Any other reply implies the old pid.

`qCRC:ADDR,LENGTH'
     Compute the CRC checksum of a block of memory.  Reply:
    `E NN'
          An error (such as memory fault)

    `C CRC32'
          The specified memory region's checksum is CRC32.

`qfThreadInfo'
`qsThreadInfo'
     Obtain a list of all active thread ids from the target (OS).
     Since there may be too many active threads to fit into one reply
     packet, this query works iteratively: it may require more than one
     query/reply sequence to obtain the entire list of threads.  The
     first query of the sequence will be the `qfThreadInfo' query;
     subsequent queries in the sequence will be the `qsThreadInfo'
     query.

     NOTE: This packet replaces the `qL' query (see below).

     Reply:
    `m ID'
          A single thread id

    `m ID,ID...'
          a comma-separated list of thread ids

    `l'
          (lower case letter `L') denotes end of list.

     In response to each query, the target will reply with a list of
     one or more thread ids, in big-endian unsigned hex, separated by
     commas.  GDB will respond to each reply with a request for more
     thread ids (using the `qs' form of the query), until the target
     responds with `l' (lower-case el, for "last").

`qGetTLSAddr:THREAD-ID,OFFSET,LM'
     Fetch the address associated with thread local storage specified
     by THREAD-ID, OFFSET, and LM.

     THREAD-ID is the (big endian, hex encoded) thread id associated
     with the thread for which to fetch the TLS address.

     OFFSET is the (big endian, hex encoded) offset associated with the
     thread local variable.  (This offset is obtained from the debug
     information associated with the variable.)

     LM is the (big endian, hex encoded) OS/ABI specific encoding of the
     the load module associated with the thread local storage.  For
     example, a GNU/Linux system will pass the link map address of the
     shared object associated with the thread local storage under
     consideration.  Other operating environments may choose to
     represent the load module differently, so the precise meaning of
     this parameter will vary.

     Reply:
    `XX...'
          Hex encoded (big endian) bytes representing the address of
          the thread local storage requested.

    `E NN'
          An error occurred.  NN are hex digits.

    `'
          An empty reply indicates that `qGetTLSAddr' is not supported
          by the stub.

`qL STARTFLAG THREADCOUNT NEXTTHREAD'
     Obtain thread information from RTOS.  Where: STARTFLAG (one hex
     digit) is one to indicate the first query and zero to indicate a
     subsequent query; THREADCOUNT (two hex digits) is the maximum
     number of threads the response packet can contain; and NEXTTHREAD
     (eight hex digits), for subsequent queries (STARTFLAG is zero), is
     returned in the response as ARGTHREAD.

     Don't use this packet; use the `qfThreadInfo' query instead (see
     above).

     Reply:
    `qM COUNT DONE ARGTHREAD THREAD...'
          Where: COUNT (two hex digits) is the number of threads being
          returned; DONE (one hex digit) is zero to indicate more
          threads and one indicates no further threads; ARGTHREADID
          (eight hex digits) is NEXTTHREAD from the request packet;
          THREAD...  is a sequence of thread IDs from the target.
          THREADID (eight hex digits).  See
          `remote.c:parse_threadlist_response()'.

`qOffsets'
     Get section offsets that the target used when re-locating the
     downloaded image.  _Note: while a `Bss' offset is included in the
     response, GDB ignores this and instead applies the `Data' offset
     to the `Bss' section._

     Reply:
    `Text=XXX;Data=YYY;Bss=ZZZ'

`qP MODE THREADID'
     Returns information on THREADID.  Where: MODE is a hex encoded 32
     bit mode; THREADID is a hex encoded 64 bit thread ID.

     Don't use this packet; use the `qThreadExtraInfo' query instead
     (see below).

     Reply: see `remote.c:remote_unpack_thread_info_response()'.

`qRcmd,COMMAND'
     COMMAND (hex encoded) is passed to the local interpreter for
     execution.  Invalid commands should be reported using the output
     string.  Before the final result packet, the target may also
     respond with a number of intermediate `OOUTPUT' console output
     packets.  _Implementors should note that providing access to a
     stubs's interpreter may have security implications_.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          A command response with no output.

    `OUTPUT'
          A command response with the hex encoded output string OUTPUT.

    `E NN'
          Indicate a badly formed request.

    `'
          An empty reply indicates that `qRcmd' is not recognized.

     (Note that the `qRcmd' packet's name is separated from the command
     by a `,', not a `:', contrary to the naming conventions above.
     Please don't use this packet as a model for new packets.)

`qSupported [:GDBFEATURE [;GDBFEATURE]... ]'
     Tell the remote stub about features supported by GDB, and query
     the stub for features it supports.  This packet allows GDB and the
     remote stub to take advantage of each others' features.
     `qSupported' also consolidates multiple feature probes at startup,
     to improve GDB performance--a single larger packet performs better
     than multiple smaller probe packets on high-latency links.  Some
     features may enable behavior which must not be on by default, e.g.
     because it would confuse older clients or stubs.  Other features
     may describe packets which could be automatically probed for, but
     are not.  These features must be reported before GDB will use
     them.  This "default unsupported" behavior is not appropriate for
     all packets, but it helps to keep the initial connection time
     under control with new versions of GDB which support increasing
     numbers of packets.

     Reply:
    `STUBFEATURE [;STUBFEATURE]...'
          The stub supports or does not support each returned
          STUBFEATURE, depending on the form of each STUBFEATURE (see
          below for the possible forms).

    `'
          An empty reply indicates that `qSupported' is not recognized,
          or that no features needed to be reported to GDB.

     The allowed forms for each feature (either a GDBFEATURE in the
     `qSupported' packet, or a STUBFEATURE in the response) are:

    `NAME=VALUE'
          The remote protocol feature NAME is supported, and associated
          with the specified VALUE.  The format of VALUE depends on the
          feature, but it must not include a semicolon.

    `NAME+'
          The remote protocol feature NAME is supported, and does not
          need an associated value.

    `NAME-'
          The remote protocol feature NAME is not supported.

    `NAME?'
          The remote protocol feature NAME may be supported, and GDB
          should auto-detect support in some other way when it is
          needed.  This form will not be used for GDBFEATURE
          notifications, but may be used for STUBFEATURE responses.

     Whenever the stub receives a `qSupported' request, the supplied
     set of GDB features should override any previous request.  This
     allows GDB to put the stub in a known state, even if the stub had
     previously been communicating with a different version of GDB.

     No values of GDBFEATURE (for the packet sent by GDB) are defined
     yet.  Stubs should ignore any unknown values for GDBFEATURE.  Any
     GDB which sends a `qSupported' packet supports receiving packets
     of unlimited length (earlier versions of GDB may reject overly
     long responses).  Values for GDBFEATURE may be defined in the
     future to let the stub take advantage of new features in GDB, e.g.
     incompatible improvements in the remote protocol--support for
     unlimited length responses would be a GDBFEATURE example, if it
     were not implied by the `qSupported' query.  The stub's reply
     should be independent of the GDBFEATURE entries sent by GDB; first
     GDB describes all the features it supports, and then the stub
     replies with all the features it supports.

     Similarly, GDB will silently ignore unrecognized stub feature
     responses, as long as each response uses one of the standard forms.

     Some features are flags.  A stub which supports a flag feature
     should respond with a `+' form response.  Other features require
     values, and the stub should respond with an `=' form response.

     Each feature has a default value, which GDB will use if
     `qSupported' is not available or if the feature is not mentioned
     in the `qSupported' response.  The default values are fixed; a
     stub is free to omit any feature responses that match the defaults.

     Not all features can be probed, but for those which can, the
     probing mechanism is useful: in some cases, a stub's internal
     architecture may not allow the protocol layer to know some
     information about the underlying target in advance.  This is
     especially common in stubs which may be configured for multiple
     targets.

     These are the currently defined stub features and their properties:

     Feature Name      Value         Default       Probe Allowed
                       Required                    
     `PacketSize'      Yes           `-'           No
     `qXfer:auxv:read' No            `-'           Yes
     `qXfer:memory-map:read'No            `-'           Yes

     These are the currently defined stub features, in more detail:

    `PacketSize=BYTES'
          The remote stub can accept packets up to at least BYTES in
          length.  GDB will send packets up to this size for bulk
          transfers, and will never send larger packets.  This is a
          limit on the data characters in the packet, including the
          frame and checksum.  There is no trailing NUL byte in a
          remote protocol packet; if the stub stores packets in a
          NUL-terminated format, it should allow an extra byte in its
          buffer for the NUL.  If this stub feature is not supported,
          GDB guesses based on the size of the `g' packet response.

    `qXfer:auxv:read'
          The remote stub understands the `qXfer:auxv:read' packet
          (*note qXfer auxiliary vector read::).


`qSymbol::'
     Notify the target that GDB is prepared to serve symbol lookup
     requests.  Accept requests from the target for the values of
     symbols.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.

    `qSymbol:SYM_NAME'
          The target requests the value of symbol SYM_NAME (hex
          encoded).  GDB may provide the value by using the
          `qSymbol:SYM_VALUE:SYM_NAME' message, described below.

`qSymbol:SYM_VALUE:SYM_NAME'
     Set the value of SYM_NAME to SYM_VALUE.

     SYM_NAME (hex encoded) is the name of a symbol whose value the
     target has previously requested.

     SYM_VALUE (hex) is the value for symbol SYM_NAME.  If GDB cannot
     supply a value for SYM_NAME, then this field will be empty.

     Reply:
    `OK'
          The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.

    `qSymbol:SYM_NAME'
          The target requests the value of a new symbol SYM_NAME (hex
          encoded).  GDB will continue to supply the values of symbols
          (if available), until the target ceases to request them.

`QTDP'
`QTFrame'
     *Note Tracepoint Packets::.

`qThreadExtraInfo,ID'
     Obtain a printable string description of a thread's attributes from
     the target OS.  ID is a thread-id in big-endian hex.  This string
     may contain anything that the target OS thinks is interesting for
     GDB to tell the user about the thread.  The string is displayed in
     GDB's `info threads' display.  Some examples of possible thread
     extra info strings are `Runnable', or `Blocked on Mutex'.

     Reply:
    `XX...'
          Where `XX...' is a hex encoding of ASCII data, comprising the
          printable string containing the extra information about the
          thread's attributes.

     (Note that the `qThreadExtraInfo' packet's name is separated from
     the command by a `,', not a `:', contrary to the naming
     conventions above.  Please don't use this packet as a model for new
     packets.)

`QTStart'
`QTStop'
`QTinit'
`QTro'
`qTStatus'
     *Note Tracepoint Packets::.

`qXfer:OBJECT:read:ANNEX:OFFSET,LENGTH'
     Read uninterpreted bytes from the target's special data area
     identified by the keyword OBJECT.  Request LENGTH bytes starting
     at OFFSET bytes into the data.  The content and encoding of ANNEX
     is specific to the object; it can supply additional details about
     what data to access.

     Here are the specific requests of this form defined so far.  All
     `qXfer:OBJECT:read:...' requests use the same reply formats,
     listed below.

    `qXfer:auxv:read::OFFSET,LENGTH'
          Access the target's "auxiliary vector".  *Note auxiliary
          vector: OS Information.  Note ANNEX must be empty.

          This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must
          request it, by suppling an appropriate `qSupported' response
          (*note qSupported::).

    `qXfer:memory-map:read::OFFSET,LENGTH'
          Access the target's "memory-map".  *Note Memory map format::.
          The annex part of the generic `qXfer' packet must be empty
          (*note qXfer read::).

          This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must
          request it, by supplying an appropriate `qSupported' response
          (*note qSupported::).

     Reply:
    `m DATA'
          Data DATA (*note Binary Data::) has been read from the
          target.  There may be more data at a higher address (although
          it is permitted to return `m' even for the last valid block
          of data, as long as at least one byte of data was read).
          DATA may have fewer bytes than the LENGTH in the request.

    `l DATA'
          Data DATA (*note Binary Data::) has been read from the target.
          There is no more data to be read.  DATA may have fewer bytes
          than the LENGTH in the request.

    `l'
          The OFFSET in the request is at the end of the data.  There
          is no more data to be read.

    `E00'
          The request was malformed, or ANNEX was invalid.

    `E NN'
          The offset was invalid, or there was an error encountered
          reading the data.  NN is a hex-encoded `errno' value.

    `'
          An empty reply indicates the OBJECT string was not recognized
          by the stub, or that the object does not support reading.

`qXfer:OBJECT:write:ANNEX:OFFSET:DATA...'
     Write uninterpreted bytes into the target's special data area
     identified by the keyword OBJECT, starting at OFFSET bytes into
     the data.  `DATA...' is the binary-encoded data (*note Binary
     Data::) to be written.  The content and encoding of ANNEX is
     specific to the object; it can supply additional details about
     what data to access.

     No requests of this form are presently in use.  This specification
     serves as a placeholder to document the common format that new
     specific request specifications ought to use.

     Reply:
    `NN'
          NN (hex encoded) is the number of bytes written.  This may be
          fewer bytes than supplied in the request.

    `E00'
          The request was malformed, or ANNEX was invalid.

    `E NN'
          The offset was invalid, or there was an error encountered
          writing the data.  NN is a hex-encoded `errno' value.

    `'
          An empty reply indicates the OBJECT string was not recognized
          by the stub, or that the object does not support writing.

`qXfer:OBJECT:OPERATION:...'
     Requests of this form may be added in the future.  When a stub does
     not recognize the OBJECT keyword, or its support for OBJECT does
     not recognize the OPERATION keyword, the stub must respond with an
     empty packet.


   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) The `qP' and `qL' packets predate these conventions, and have
arguments without any terminator for the packet name; we suspect they
are in widespread use in places that are difficult to upgrade.  The
`qC' packet has no arguments, but some existing stubs (e.g. RedBoot)
are known to not check for the end of the packet.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Register Packet Format,  Next: Tracepoint Packets,  Prev: General Query Packets,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.5 Register Packet Format
==========================

The following `g'/`G' packets have previously been defined.  In the
below, some thirty-two bit registers are transferred as sixty-four
bits.  Those registers should be zero/sign extended (which?)  to fill
the space allocated.  Register bytes are transferred in target byte
order.  The two nibbles within a register byte are transferred
most-significant - least-significant.

MIPS32
     All registers are transferred as thirty-two bit quantities in the
     order: 32 general-purpose; sr; lo; hi; bad; cause; pc; 32
     floating-point registers; fsr; fir; fp.

MIPS64
     All registers are transferred as sixty-four bit quantities
     (including thirty-two bit registers such as `sr').  The ordering
     is the same as `MIPS32'.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Tracepoint Packets,  Next: Interrupts,  Prev: Register Packet Format,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.6 Tracepoint Packets
======================

Here we describe the packets GDB uses to implement tracepoints (*note
Tracepoints::).

`QTDP:N:ADDR:ENA:STEP:PASS[-]'
     Create a new tracepoint, number N, at ADDR.  If ENA is `E', then
     the tracepoint is enabled; if it is `D', then the tracepoint is
     disabled.  STEP is the tracepoint's step count, and PASS is its
     pass count.  If the trailing `-' is present, further `QTDP'
     packets will follow to specify this tracepoint's actions.

     Replies:
    `OK'
          The packet was understood and carried out.

    `'
          The packet was not recognized.

`QTDP:-N:ADDR:[S]ACTION...[-]'
     Define actions to be taken when a tracepoint is hit.  N and ADDR
     must be the same as in the initial `QTDP' packet for this
     tracepoint.  This packet may only be sent immediately after
     another `QTDP' packet that ended with a `-'.  If the trailing `-'
     is present, further `QTDP' packets will follow, specifying more
     actions for this tracepoint.

     In the series of action packets for a given tracepoint, at most one
     can have an `S' before its first ACTION.  If such a packet is
     sent, it and the following packets define "while-stepping"
     actions.  Any prior packets define ordinary actions -- that is,
     those taken when the tracepoint is first hit.  If no action packet
     has an `S', then all the packets in the series specify ordinary
     tracepoint actions.

     The `ACTION...' portion of the packet is a series of actions,
     concatenated without separators.  Each action has one of the
     following forms:

    `R MASK'
          Collect the registers whose bits are set in MASK.  MASK is a
          hexadecimal number whose I'th bit is set if register number I
          should be collected.  (The least significant bit is numbered
          zero.)  Note that MASK may be any number of digits long; it
          may not fit in a 32-bit word.

    `M BASEREG,OFFSET,LEN'
          Collect LEN bytes of memory starting at the address in
          register number BASEREG, plus OFFSET.  If BASEREG is `-1',
          then the range has a fixed address: OFFSET is the address of
          the lowest byte to collect.  The BASEREG, OFFSET, and LEN
          parameters are all unsigned hexadecimal values (the `-1'
          value for BASEREG is a special case).

    `X LEN,EXPR'
          Evaluate EXPR, whose length is LEN, and collect memory as it
          directs.  EXPR is an agent expression, as described in *Note
          Agent Expressions::.  Each byte of the expression is encoded
          as a two-digit hex number in the packet; LEN is the number of
          bytes in the expression (and thus one-half the number of hex
          digits in the packet).


     Any number of actions may be packed together in a single `QTDP'
     packet, as long as the packet does not exceed the maximum packet
     length (400 bytes, for many stubs).  There may be only one `R'
     action per tracepoint, and it must precede any `M' or `X' actions.
     Any registers referred to by `M' and `X' actions must be
     collected by a preceding `R' action.  (The "while-stepping"
     actions are treated as if they were attached to a separate
     tracepoint, as far as these restrictions are concerned.)

     Replies:
    `OK'
          The packet was understood and carried out.

    `'
          The packet was not recognized.

`QTFrame:N'
     Select the N'th tracepoint frame from the buffer, and use the
     register and memory contents recorded there to answer subsequent
     request packets from GDB.

     A successful reply from the stub indicates that the stub has found
     the requested frame.  The response is a series of parts,
     concatenated without separators, describing the frame we selected.
     Each part has one of the following forms:

    `F F'
          The selected frame is number N in the trace frame buffer; F
          is a hexadecimal number.  If F is `-1', then there was no
          frame matching the criteria in the request packet.

    `T T'
          The selected trace frame records a hit of tracepoint number T;
          T is a hexadecimal number.


`QTFrame:pc:ADDR'
     Like `QTFrame:N', but select the first tracepoint frame after the
     currently selected frame whose PC is ADDR; ADDR is a hexadecimal
     number.

`QTFrame:tdp:T'
     Like `QTFrame:N', but select the first tracepoint frame after the
     currently selected frame that is a hit of tracepoint T; T is a
     hexadecimal number.

`QTFrame:range:START:END'
     Like `QTFrame:N', but select the first tracepoint frame after the
     currently selected frame whose PC is between START (inclusive) and
     END (exclusive); START and END are hexadecimal numbers.

`QTFrame:outside:START:END'
     Like `QTFrame:range:START:END', but select the first frame
     _outside_ the given range of addresses.

`QTStart'
     Begin the tracepoint experiment.  Begin collecting data from
     tracepoint hits in the trace frame buffer.

`QTStop'
     End the tracepoint experiment.  Stop collecting trace frames.

`QTinit'
     Clear the table of tracepoints, and empty the trace frame buffer.

`QTro:START1,END1:START2,END2:...'
     Establish the given ranges of memory as "transparent".  The stub
     will answer requests for these ranges from memory's current
     contents, if they were not collected as part of the tracepoint hit.

     GDB uses this to mark read-only regions of memory, like those
     containing program code.  Since these areas never change, they
     should still have the same contents they did when the tracepoint
     was hit, so there's no reason for the stub to refuse to provide
     their contents.

`qTStatus'
     Ask the stub if there is a trace experiment running right now.

     Replies:
    `T0'
          There is no trace experiment running.

    `T1'
          There is a trace experiment running.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Interrupts,  Next: Examples,  Prev: Tracepoint Packets,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.7 Interrupts
==============

When a program on the remote target is running, GDB may attempt to
interrupt it by sending a `Ctrl-C' or a `BREAK', control of which is
specified via GDB's `remotebreak' setting (*note set remotebreak::).

   The precise meaning of `BREAK' is defined by the transport mechanism
and may, in fact, be undefined.  GDB does not currently define a
`BREAK' mechanism for any of the network interfaces.

   `Ctrl-C', on the other hand, is defined and implemented for all
transport mechanisms.  It is represented by sending the single byte
`0x03' without any of the usual packet overhead described in the
Overview section (*note Overview::).  When a `0x03' byte is transmitted
as part of a packet, it is considered to be packet data and does _not_
represent an interrupt.  E.g., an `X' packet (*note X packet::), used
for binary downloads, may include an unescaped `0x03' as part of its
packet.

   Stubs are not required to recognize these interrupt mechanisms and
the precise meaning associated with receipt of the interrupt is
implementation defined.  If the stub is successful at interrupting the
running program, it is expected that it will send one of the Stop Reply
Packets (*note Stop Reply Packets::) to GDB as a result of successfully
stopping the program.  Interrupts received while the program is stopped
will be discarded.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Examples,  Next: File-I/O remote protocol extension,  Prev: Interrupts,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.8 Examples
============

Example sequence of a target being re-started.  Notice how the restart
does not get any direct output:

     -> `R00'
     <- `+'
     _target restarts_
     -> `?'
     <- `+'
     <- `T001:1234123412341234'
     -> `+'

   Example sequence of a target being stepped by a single instruction:

     -> `G1445...'
     <- `+'
     -> `s'
     <- `+'
     _time passes_
     <- `T001:1234123412341234'
     -> `+'
     -> `g'
     <- `+'
     <- `1455...'
     -> `+'

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: File-I/O remote protocol extension,  Next: Memory map format,  Prev: Examples,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.9 File-I/O remote protocol extension
======================================

* Menu:

* File-I/O Overview::
* Protocol basics::
* The F request packet::
* The F reply packet::
* The Ctrl-C message::
* Console I/O::
* List of supported calls::
* Protocol specific representation of datatypes::
* Constants::
* File-I/O Examples::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: File-I/O Overview,  Next: Protocol basics,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.1 File-I/O Overview
-----------------------

The "File I/O remote protocol extension" (short: File-I/O) allows the
target to use the host's file system and console I/O to perform various
system calls.  System calls on the target system are translated into a
remote protocol packet to the host system, which then performs the
needed actions and returns a response packet to the target system.
This simulates file system operations even on targets that lack file
systems.

   The protocol is defined to be independent of both the host and
target systems.  It uses its own internal representation of datatypes
and values.  Both GDB and the target's GDB stub are responsible for
translating the system-dependent value representations into the internal
protocol representations when data is transmitted.

   The communication is synchronous.  A system call is possible only
when GDB is waiting for a response from the `C', `c', `S' or `s'
packets.  While GDB handles the request for a system call, the target
is stopped to allow deterministic access to the target's memory.
Therefore File-I/O is not interruptible by target signals.  On the
other hand, it is possible to interrupt File-I/O by a user interrupt
(`Ctrl-C') within GDB.

   The target's request to perform a host system call does not finish
the latest `C', `c', `S' or `s' action.  That means, after finishing
the system call, the target returns to continuing the previous activity
(continue, step).  No additional continue or step request from GDB is
required.

     (gdb) continue
       <- target requests 'system call X'
       target is stopped, GDB executes system call
       -> GDB returns result
       ... target continues, GDB returns to wait for the target
       <- target hits breakpoint and sends a Txx packet

   The protocol only supports I/O on the console and to regular files on
the host file system.  Character or block special devices, pipes, named
pipes, sockets or any other communication method on the host system are
not supported by this protocol.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Protocol basics,  Next: The F request packet,  Prev: File-I/O Overview,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.2 Protocol basics
---------------------

The File-I/O protocol uses the `F' packet as the request as well as
reply packet.  Since a File-I/O system call can only occur when GDB is
waiting for a response from the continuing or stepping target, the
File-I/O request is a reply that GDB has to expect as a result of a
previous `C', `c', `S' or `s' packet.  This `F' packet contains all
information needed to allow GDB to call the appropriate host system
call:

   * A unique identifier for the requested system call.

   * All parameters to the system call.  Pointers are given as addresses
     in the target memory address space.  Pointers to strings are given
     as pointer/length pair.  Numerical values are given as they are.
     Numerical control flags are given in a protocol specific
     representation.


   At this point, GDB has to perform the following actions.

   * If the parameters include pointer values to data needed as input
     to a system call, GDB requests this data from the target with a
     standard `m' packet request.  This additional communication has to
     be expected by the target implementation and is handled as any
     other `m' packet.

   * GDB translates all value from protocol representation to host
     representation as needed.  Datatypes are coerced into the host
     types.

   * GDB calls the system call.

   * It then coerces datatypes back to protocol representation.

   * If the system call is expected to return data in buffer space
     specified by pointer parameters to the call, the data is
     transmitted to the target using a `M' or `X' packet.  This packet
     has to be expected by the target implementation and is handled as
     any other `M' or `X' packet.


   Eventually GDB replies with another `F' packet which contains all
necessary information for the target to continue.  This at least
contains

   * Return value.

   * `errno', if has been changed by the system call.

   * "Ctrl-C" flag.


   After having done the needed type and value coercion, the target
continues the latest continue or step action.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: The F request packet,  Next: The F reply packet,  Prev: Protocol basics,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.3 The `F' request packet
----------------------------

The `F' request packet has the following format:

`FCALL-ID,PARAMETER...'
     CALL-ID is the identifier to indicate the host system call to be
     called.  This is just the name of the function.

     PARAMETER... are the parameters to the system call.  Parameters
     are hexadecimal integer values, either the actual values in case
     of scalar datatypes, pointers to target buffer space in case of
     compound datatypes and unspecified memory areas, or pointer/length
     pairs in case of string parameters.  These are appended to the
     CALL-ID as a comma-delimited list.  All values are transmitted in
     ASCII string representation, pointer/length pairs separated by a
     slash.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: The F reply packet,  Next: The Ctrl-C message,  Prev: The F request packet,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.4 The `F' reply packet
--------------------------

The `F' reply packet has the following format:

`FRETCODE,ERRNO,CTRL-C FLAG;CALL SPECIFIC ATTACHMENT'
     RETCODE is the return code of the system call as hexadecimal value.

     ERRNO is the `errno' set by the call, in protocol specific
     representation.  This parameter can be omitted if the call was
     successful.

     CTRL-C FLAG is only sent if the user requested a break.  In this
     case, ERRNO must be sent as well, even if the call was successful.
     The CTRL-C FLAG itself consists of the character `C':

          F0,0,C

     or, if the call was interrupted before the host call has been
     performed:

          F-1,4,C

     assuming 4 is the protocol specific representation of `EINTR'.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: The Ctrl-C message,  Next: Console I/O,  Prev: The F reply packet,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.5 The `Ctrl-C' message
--------------------------

If the `Ctrl-C' flag is set in the GDB reply packet (*note The F reply
packet::), the target should behave as if it had gotten a break
message.  The meaning for the target is "system call interrupted by
`SIGINT'".  Consequentially, the target should actually stop (as with a
break message) and return to GDB with a `T02' packet.

   It's important for the target to know in which state the system call
was interrupted.  There are two possible cases:

   * The system call hasn't been performed on the host yet.

   * The system call on the host has been finished.


   These two states can be distinguished by the target by the value of
the returned `errno'.  If it's the protocol representation of `EINTR',
the system call hasn't been performed.  This is equivalent to the
`EINTR' handling on POSIX systems.  In any other case, the target may
presume that the system call has been finished -- successfully or not
-- and should behave as if the break message arrived right after the
system call.

   GDB must behave reliably.  If the system call has not been called
yet, GDB may send the `F' reply immediately, setting `EINTR' as `errno'
in the packet.  If the system call on the host has been finished before
the user requests a break, the full action must be finished by GDB.
This requires sending `M' or `X' packets as necessary.  The `F' packet
may only be sent when either nothing has happened or the full action
has been completed.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Console I/O,  Next: List of supported calls,  Prev: The Ctrl-C message,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.6 Console I/O
-----------------

By default and if not explicitely closed by the target system, the file
descriptors 0, 1 and 2 are connected to the GDB console.  Output on the
GDB console is handled as any other file output operation (`write(1,
...)' or `write(2, ...)').  Console input is handled by GDB so that
after the target read request from file descriptor 0 all following
typing is buffered until either one of the following conditions is met:

   * The user types `Ctrl-c'.  The behaviour is as explained above, and
     the `read' system call is treated as finished.

   * The user presses <RET>.  This is treated as end of input with a
     trailing newline.

   * The user types `Ctrl-d'.  This is treated as end of input.  No
     trailing character (neither newline nor `Ctrl-D') is appended to
     the input.


   If the user has typed more characters than fit in the buffer given to
the `read' call, the trailing characters are buffered in GDB until
either another `read(0, ...)' is requested by the target, or debugging
is stopped at the user's request.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: List of supported calls,  Next: Protocol specific representation of datatypes,  Prev: Console I/O,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.7 List of supported calls
-----------------------------

* Menu:

* open::
* close::
* read::
* write::
* lseek::
* rename::
* unlink::
* stat/fstat::
* gettimeofday::
* isatty::
* system::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: open,  Next: close,  Up: List of supported calls

open
....

Synopsis:
          int open(const char *pathname, int flags);
          int open(const char *pathname, int flags, mode_t mode);

Request:
     `Fopen,PATHPTR/LEN,FLAGS,MODE'

     FLAGS is the bitwise `OR' of the following values:

    `O_CREAT'
          If the file does not exist it will be created.  The host
          rules apply as far as file ownership and time stamps are
          concerned.

    `O_EXCL'
          When used with `O_CREAT', if the file already exists it is an
          error and open() fails.

    `O_TRUNC'
          If the file already exists and the open mode allows writing
          (`O_RDWR' or `O_WRONLY' is given) it will be truncated to
          zero length.

    `O_APPEND'
          The file is opened in append mode.

    `O_RDONLY'
          The file is opened for reading only.

    `O_WRONLY'
          The file is opened for writing only.

    `O_RDWR'
          The file is opened for reading and writing.

     Other bits are silently ignored.

     MODE is the bitwise `OR' of the following values:

    `S_IRUSR'
          User has read permission.

    `S_IWUSR'
          User has write permission.

    `S_IRGRP'
          Group has read permission.

    `S_IWGRP'
          Group has write permission.

    `S_IROTH'
          Others have read permission.

    `S_IWOTH'
          Others have write permission.

     Other bits are silently ignored.

Return value:
     `open' returns the new file descriptor or -1 if an error occurred.

Errors:

    `EEXIST'
          PATHNAME already exists and `O_CREAT' and `O_EXCL' were used.

    `EISDIR'
          PATHNAME refers to a directory.

    `EACCES'
          The requested access is not allowed.

    `ENAMETOOLONG'
          PATHNAME was too long.

    `ENOENT'
          A directory component in PATHNAME does not exist.

    `ENODEV'
          PATHNAME refers to a device, pipe, named pipe or socket.

    `EROFS'
          PATHNAME refers to a file on a read-only filesystem and write
          access was requested.

    `EFAULT'
          PATHNAME is an invalid pointer value.

    `ENOSPC'
          No space on device to create the file.

    `EMFILE'
          The process already has the maximum number of files open.

    `ENFILE'
          The limit on the total number of files open on the system has
          been reached.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: close,  Next: read,  Prev: open,  Up: List of supported calls

close
.....

Synopsis:
          int close(int fd);

Request:
     `Fclose,FD'

Return value:
     `close' returns zero on success, or -1 if an error occurred.

Errors:

    `EBADF'
          FD isn't a valid open file descriptor.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: read,  Next: write,  Prev: close,  Up: List of supported calls

read
....

Synopsis:
          int read(int fd, void *buf, unsigned int count);

Request:
     `Fread,FD,BUFPTR,COUNT'

Return value:
     On success, the number of bytes read is returned.  Zero indicates
     end of file.  If count is zero, read returns zero as well.  On
     error, -1 is returned.

Errors:

    `EBADF'
          FD is not a valid file descriptor or is not open for reading.

    `EFAULT'
          BUFPTR is an invalid pointer value.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: write,  Next: lseek,  Prev: read,  Up: List of supported calls

write
.....

Synopsis:
          int write(int fd, const void *buf, unsigned int count);

Request:
     `Fwrite,FD,BUFPTR,COUNT'

Return value:
     On success, the number of bytes written are returned.  Zero
     indicates nothing was written.  On error, -1 is returned.

Errors:

    `EBADF'
          FD is not a valid file descriptor or is not open for writing.

    `EFAULT'
          BUFPTR is an invalid pointer value.

    `EFBIG'
          An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the host
          specific maximum file size allowed.

    `ENOSPC'
          No space on device to write the data.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: lseek,  Next: rename,  Prev: write,  Up: List of supported calls

lseek
.....

Synopsis:
          long lseek (int fd, long offset, int flag);

Request:
     `Flseek,FD,OFFSET,FLAG'

     FLAG is one of:

    `SEEK_SET'
          The offset is set to OFFSET bytes.

    `SEEK_CUR'
          The offset is set to its current location plus OFFSET bytes.

    `SEEK_END'
          The offset is set to the size of the file plus OFFSET bytes.

Return value:
     On success, the resulting unsigned offset in bytes from the
     beginning of the file is returned.  Otherwise, a value of -1 is
     returned.

Errors:

    `EBADF'
          FD is not a valid open file descriptor.

    `ESPIPE'
          FD is associated with the GDB console.

    `EINVAL'
          FLAG is not a proper value.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: rename,  Next: unlink,  Prev: lseek,  Up: List of supported calls

rename
......

Synopsis:
          int rename(const char *oldpath, const char *newpath);

Request:
     `Frename,OLDPATHPTR/LEN,NEWPATHPTR/LEN'

Return value:
     On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned.

Errors:

    `EISDIR'
          NEWPATH is an existing directory, but OLDPATH is not a
          directory.

    `EEXIST'
          NEWPATH is a non-empty directory.

    `EBUSY'
          OLDPATH or NEWPATH is a directory that is in use by some
          process.

    `EINVAL'
          An attempt was made to make a directory a subdirectory of
          itself.

    `ENOTDIR'
          A  component used as a directory in OLDPATH or new path is
          not a directory.  Or OLDPATH is a directory and NEWPATH
          exists but is not a directory.

    `EFAULT'
          OLDPATHPTR or NEWPATHPTR are invalid pointer values.

    `EACCES'
          No access to the file or the path of the file.

    `ENAMETOOLONG'
          OLDPATH or NEWPATH was too long.

    `ENOENT'
          A directory component in OLDPATH or NEWPATH does not exist.

    `EROFS'
          The file is on a read-only filesystem.

    `ENOSPC'
          The device containing the file has no room for the new
          directory entry.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: unlink,  Next: stat/fstat,  Prev: rename,  Up: List of supported calls

unlink
......

Synopsis:
          int unlink(const char *pathname);

Request:
     `Funlink,PATHNAMEPTR/LEN'

Return value:
     On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned.

Errors:

    `EACCES'
          No access to the file or the path of the file.

    `EPERM'
          The system does not allow unlinking of directories.

    `EBUSY'
          The file PATHNAME cannot be unlinked because it's being used
          by another process.

    `EFAULT'
          PATHNAMEPTR is an invalid pointer value.

    `ENAMETOOLONG'
          PATHNAME was too long.

    `ENOENT'
          A directory component in PATHNAME does not exist.

    `ENOTDIR'
          A component of the path is not a directory.

    `EROFS'
          The file is on a read-only filesystem.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: stat/fstat,  Next: gettimeofday,  Prev: unlink,  Up: List of supported calls

stat/fstat
..........

Synopsis:
          int stat(const char *pathname, struct stat *buf);
          int fstat(int fd, struct stat *buf);

Request:
     `Fstat,PATHNAMEPTR/LEN,BUFPTR'
     `Ffstat,FD,BUFPTR'

Return value:
     On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned.

Errors:

    `EBADF'
          FD is not a valid open file.

    `ENOENT'
          A directory component in PATHNAME does not exist or the path
          is an empty string.

    `ENOTDIR'
          A component of the path is not a directory.

    `EFAULT'
          PATHNAMEPTR is an invalid pointer value.

    `EACCES'
          No access to the file or the path of the file.

    `ENAMETOOLONG'
          PATHNAME was too long.

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: gettimeofday,  Next: isatty,  Prev: stat/fstat,  Up: List of supported calls

gettimeofday
............

Synopsis:
          int gettimeofday(struct timeval *tv, void *tz);

Request:
     `Fgettimeofday,TVPTR,TZPTR'

Return value:
     On success, 0 is returned, -1 otherwise.

Errors:

    `EINVAL'
          TZ is a non-NULL pointer.

    `EFAULT'
          TVPTR and/or TZPTR is an invalid pointer value.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: isatty,  Next: system,  Prev: gettimeofday,  Up: List of supported calls

isatty
......

Synopsis:
          int isatty(int fd);

Request:
     `Fisatty,FD'

Return value:
     Returns 1 if FD refers to the GDB console, 0 otherwise.

Errors:

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


   Note that the `isatty' call is treated as a special case: it returns
1 to the target if the file descriptor is attached to the GDB console,
0 otherwise.  Implementing through system calls would require
implementing `ioctl' and would be more complex than needed.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: system,  Prev: isatty,  Up: List of supported calls

system
......

Synopsis:
          int system(const char *command);

Request:
     `Fsystem,COMMANDPTR/LEN'

Return value:
     If LEN is zero, the return value indicates whether a shell is
     available.  A zero return value indicates a shell is not available.
     For non-zero LEN, the value returned is -1 on error and the return
     status of the command otherwise.  Only the exit status of the
     command is returned, which is extracted from the host's `system'
     return value by calling `WEXITSTATUS(retval)'.  In case `/bin/sh'
     could not be executed, 127 is returned.

Errors:

    `EINTR'
          The call was interrupted by the user.


   GDB takes over the full task of calling the necessary host calls to
perform the `system' call.  The return value of `system' on the host is
simplified before it's returned to the target.  Any termination signal
information from the child process is discarded, and the return value
consists entirely of the exit status of the called command.

   Due to security concerns, the `system' call is by default refused by
GDB.  The user has to allow this call explicitly with the `set remote
system-call-allowed 1' command.

`set remote system-call-allowed'
     Control whether to allow the `system' calls in the File I/O
     protocol for the remote target.  The default is zero (disabled).

`show remote system-call-allowed'
     Show whether the `system' calls are allowed in the File I/O
     protocol.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Protocol specific representation of datatypes,  Next: Constants,  Prev: List of supported calls,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.8 Protocol specific representation of datatypes
---------------------------------------------------

* Menu:

* Integral datatypes::
* Pointer values::
* Memory transfer::
* struct stat::
* struct timeval::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Integral datatypes,  Next: Pointer values,  Up: Protocol specific representation of datatypes

Integral datatypes
..................

The integral datatypes used in the system calls are `int', `unsigned
int', `long', `unsigned long', `mode_t', and `time_t'.

   `int', `unsigned int', `mode_t' and `time_t' are implemented as 32
bit values in this protocol.

   `long' and `unsigned long' are implemented as 64 bit types.

   *Note Limits::, for corresponding MIN and MAX values (similar to
those in `limits.h') to allow range checking on host and target.

   `time_t' datatypes are defined as seconds since the Epoch.

   All integral datatypes transferred as part of a memory read or write
of a structured datatype e.g. a `struct stat' have to be given in big
endian byte order.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Pointer values,  Next: Memory transfer,  Prev: Integral datatypes,  Up: Protocol specific representation of datatypes

Pointer values
..............

Pointers to target data are transmitted as they are.  An exception is
made for pointers to buffers for which the length isn't transmitted as
part of the function call, namely strings.  Strings are transmitted as
a pointer/length pair, both as hex values, e.g.

     `1aaf/12'

which is a pointer to data of length 18 bytes at position 0x1aaf.  The
length is defined as the full string length in bytes, including the
trailing null byte.  For example, the string `"hello world"' at address
0x123456 is transmitted as

     `123456/d'

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Memory transfer,  Next: struct stat,  Prev: Pointer values,  Up: Protocol specific representation of datatypes

Memory transfer
...............

Structured data which is transferred using a memory read or write (for
example, a `struct stat') is expected to be in a protocol specific
format with all scalar multibyte datatypes being big endian.
Translation to this representation needs to be done both by the target
before the `F' packet is sent, and by GDB before it transfers memory to
the target.  Transferred pointers to structured data should point to
the already-coerced data at any time.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: struct stat,  Next: struct timeval,  Prev: Memory transfer,  Up: Protocol specific representation of datatypes

struct stat
...........

The buffer of type `struct stat' used by the target and GDB is defined
as follows:

     struct stat {
         unsigned int  st_dev;      /* device */
         unsigned int  st_ino;      /* inode */
         mode_t        st_mode;     /* protection */
         unsigned int  st_nlink;    /* number of hard links */
         unsigned int  st_uid;      /* user ID of owner */
         unsigned int  st_gid;      /* group ID of owner */
         unsigned int  st_rdev;     /* device type (if inode device) */
         unsigned long st_size;     /* total size, in bytes */
         unsigned long st_blksize;  /* blocksize for filesystem I/O */
         unsigned long st_blocks;   /* number of blocks allocated */
         time_t        st_atime;    /* time of last access */
         time_t        st_mtime;    /* time of last modification */
         time_t        st_ctime;    /* time of last change */
     };

   The integral datatypes conform to the definitions given in the
appropriate section (see *Note Integral datatypes::, for details) so
this structure is of size 64 bytes.

   The values of several fields have a restricted meaning and/or range
of values.

`st_dev'
     A value of 0 represents a file, 1 the console.

`st_ino'
     No valid meaning for the target.  Transmitted unchanged.

`st_mode'
     Valid mode bits are described in *Note Constants::.  Any other
     bits have currently no meaning for the target.

`st_uid'
`st_gid'
`st_rdev'
     No valid meaning for the target.  Transmitted unchanged.

`st_atime'
`st_mtime'
`st_ctime'
     These values have a host and file system dependent accuracy.
     Especially on Windows hosts, the file system may not support exact
     timing values.

   The target gets a `struct stat' of the above representation and is
responsible for coercing it to the target representation before
continuing.

   Note that due to size differences between the host, target, and
protocol representations of `struct stat' members, these members could
eventually get truncated on the target.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: struct timeval,  Prev: struct stat,  Up: Protocol specific representation of datatypes

struct timeval
..............

The buffer of type `struct timeval' used by the File-I/O protocol is
defined as follows:

     struct timeval {
         time_t tv_sec;  /* second */
         long   tv_usec; /* microsecond */
     };

   The integral datatypes conform to the definitions given in the
appropriate section (see *Note Integral datatypes::, for details) so
this structure is of size 8 bytes.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: File-I/O Examples,  Prev: Protocol specific representation of datatypes,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.9 Constants
---------------

The following values are used for the constants inside of the protocol.
GDB and target are responsible for translating these values before and
after the call as needed.

* Menu:

* Open flags::
* mode_t values::
* Errno values::
* Lseek flags::
* Limits::

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Open flags,  Next: mode_t values,  Up: Constants

Open flags
..........

All values are given in hexadecimal representation.

       O_RDONLY        0x0
       O_WRONLY        0x1
       O_RDWR          0x2
       O_APPEND        0x8
       O_CREAT       0x200
       O_TRUNC       0x400
       O_EXCL        0x800

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: mode_t values,  Next: Errno values,  Prev: Open flags,  Up: Constants

mode_t values
.............

All values are given in octal representation.

       S_IFREG       0100000
       S_IFDIR        040000
       S_IRUSR          0400
       S_IWUSR          0200
       S_IXUSR          0100
       S_IRGRP           040
       S_IWGRP           020
       S_IXGRP           010
       S_IROTH            04
       S_IWOTH            02
       S_IXOTH            01

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Errno values,  Next: Lseek flags,  Prev: mode_t values,  Up: Constants

Errno values
............

All values are given in decimal representation.

       EPERM           1
       ENOENT          2
       EINTR           4
       EBADF           9
       EACCES         13
       EFAULT         14
       EBUSY          16
       EEXIST         17
       ENODEV         19
       ENOTDIR        20
       EISDIR         21
       EINVAL         22
       ENFILE         23
       EMFILE         24
       EFBIG          27
       ENOSPC         28
       ESPIPE         29
       EROFS          30
       ENAMETOOLONG   91
       EUNKNOWN       9999

   `EUNKNOWN' is used as a fallback error value if a host system returns
 any error value not in the list of supported error numbers.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Lseek flags,  Next: Limits,  Prev: Errno values,  Up: Constants

Lseek flags
...........

       SEEK_SET      0
       SEEK_CUR      1
       SEEK_END      2

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Limits,  Prev: Lseek flags,  Up: Constants

Limits
......

All values are given in decimal representation.

       INT_MIN       -2147483648
       INT_MAX        2147483647
       UINT_MAX       4294967295
       LONG_MIN      -9223372036854775808
       LONG_MAX       9223372036854775807
       ULONG_MAX      18446744073709551615

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: File-I/O Examples,  Prev: Constants,  Up: File-I/O remote protocol extension

D.9.10 File-I/O Examples
------------------------

Example sequence of a write call, file descriptor 3, buffer is at target
address 0x1234, 6 bytes should be written:

     <- `Fwrite,3,1234,6'
     _request memory read from target_
     -> `m1234,6'
     <- XXXXXX
     _return "6 bytes written"_
     -> `F6'

   Example sequence of a read call, file descriptor 3, buffer is at
target address 0x1234, 6 bytes should be read:

     <- `Fread,3,1234,6'
     _request memory write to target_
     -> `X1234,6:XXXXXX'
     _return "6 bytes read"_
     -> `F6'

   Example sequence of a read call, call fails on the host due to
invalid file descriptor (`EBADF'):

     <- `Fread,3,1234,6'
     -> `F-1,9'

   Example sequence of a read call, user presses `Ctrl-c' before
syscall on host is called:

     <- `Fread,3,1234,6'
     -> `F-1,4,C'
     <- `T02'

   Example sequence of a read call, user presses `Ctrl-c' after syscall
on host is called:

     <- `Fread,3,1234,6'
     -> `X1234,6:XXXXXX'
     <- `T02'

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Memory map format,  Prev: File-I/O remote protocol extension,  Up: Remote Protocol

D.10 Memory map format
======================

To be able to write into flash memory, GDB needs to obtain a memory map
from the target.  This section describes the format of the memory map.

   The memory map is obtained using the `qXfer:memory-map:read' (*note
qXfer memory map read::) packet and is an XML document that lists
memory regions.  The top-level structure of the document is shown below:

     <?xml version="1.0"?>
     <!DOCTYPE memory-map
               PUBLIC "+//IDN gnu.org//DTD GDB Memory Map V1.0//EN"
                      "http://sourceware.org/gdb/gdb-memory-map.dtd">
     <memory-map>
         region...
     </memory-map>

   Each region can be either:

   * A region of RAM starting at ADDR and extending for LENGTH bytes
     from there:

          <memory type="ram" start="ADDR" length="LENGTH"/>

   * A region of read-only memory:

          <memory type="rom" start="ADDR" length="LENGTH"/>

   * A region of flash memory, with erasure blocks BLOCKSIZE bytes in
     length:

          <memory type="flash" start="ADDR" length="LENGTH">
            <property name="blocksize">BLOCKSIZE</property>
          </memory>


   Regions must not overlap.  GDB assumes that areas of memory not
covered by the memory map are RAM, and uses the ordinary `M' and `X'
packets to write to addresses in such ranges.

   The formal DTD for memory map format is given below:

     <!-- ................................................... -->
     <!-- Memory Map XML DTD ................................ -->
     <!-- File: memory-map.dtd .............................. -->
     <!-- .................................... .............. -->
     <!-- memory-map.dtd -->
     <!-- memory-map: Root element with versioning -->
     <!ELEMENT memory-map (memory | property)>
     <!ATTLIST memory-map    version CDATA   #FIXED  "1.0.0">
     <!ELEMENT memory (property)>
     <!-- memory: Specifies a memory region,
                  and its type, or device. -->
     <!ATTLIST memory        type    CDATA   #REQUIRED
                             start   CDATA   #REQUIRED
                             length  CDATA   #REQUIRED
                             device  CDATA   #IMPLIED>
     <!-- property: Generic attribute tag -->
     <!ELEMENT property (#PCDATA | property)*>
     <!ATTLIST property      name    CDATA   #REQUIRED>

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Agent Expressions,  Next: Copying,  Prev: Remote Protocol,  Up: Top

Appendix E The GDB Agent Expression Mechanism
*********************************************

In some applications, it is not feasable for the debugger to interrupt
the program's execution long enough for the developer to learn anything
helpful about its behavior.  If the program's correctness depends on its
real-time behavior, delays introduced by a debugger might cause the
program to fail, even when the code itself is correct.  It is useful to
be able to observe the program's behavior without interrupting it.

   Using GDB's `trace' and `collect' commands, the user can specify
locations in the program, and arbitrary expressions to evaluate when
those locations are reached.  Later, using the `tfind' command, she can
examine the values those expressions had when the program hit the trace
points.  The expressions may also denote objects in memory --
structures or arrays, for example -- whose values GDB should record;
while visiting a particular tracepoint, the user may inspect those
objects as if they were in memory at that moment.  However, because GDB
records these values without interacting with the user, it can do so
quickly and unobtrusively, hopefully not disturbing the program's
behavior.

   When GDB is debugging a remote target, the GDB "agent" code running
on the target computes the values of the expressions itself.  To avoid
having a full symbolic expression evaluator on the agent, GDB translates
expressions in the source language into a simpler bytecode language, and
then sends the bytecode to the agent; the agent then executes the
bytecode, and records the values for GDB to retrieve later.

   The bytecode language is simple; there are forty-odd opcodes, the
bulk of which are the usual vocabulary of C operands (addition,
subtraction, shifts, and so on) and various sizes of literals and
memory reference operations.  The bytecode interpreter operates
strictly on machine-level values -- various sizes of integers and
floating point numbers -- and requires no information about types or
symbols; thus, the interpreter's internal data structures are simple,
and each bytecode requires only a few native machine instructions to
implement it.  The interpreter is small, and strict limits on the
memory and time required to evaluate an expression are easy to
determine, making it suitable for use by the debugging agent in
real-time applications.

* Menu:

* General Bytecode Design::     Overview of the interpreter.
* Bytecode Descriptions::       What each one does.
* Using Agent Expressions::     How agent expressions fit into the big picture.
* Varying Target Capabilities:: How to discover what the target can do.
* Tracing on Symmetrix::        Special info for implementation on EMC's
                                boxes.
* Rationale::                   Why we did it this way.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: General Bytecode Design,  Next: Bytecode Descriptions,  Up: Agent Expressions

E.1 General Bytecode Design
===========================

The agent represents bytecode expressions as an array of bytes.  Each
instruction is one byte long (thus the term "bytecode").  Some
instructions are followed by operand bytes; for example, the `goto'
instruction is followed by a destination for the jump.

   The bytecode interpreter is a stack-based machine; most instructions
pop their operands off the stack, perform some operation, and push the
result back on the stack for the next instruction to consume.  Each
element of the stack may contain either a integer or a floating point
value; these values are as many bits wide as the largest integer that
can be directly manipulated in the source language.  Stack elements
carry no record of their type; bytecode could push a value as an
integer, then pop it as a floating point value.  However, GDB will not
generate code which does this.  In C, one might define the type of a
stack element as follows:
     union agent_val {
       LONGEST l;
       DOUBLEST d;
     };
   where `LONGEST' and `DOUBLEST' are `typedef' names for the largest
integer and floating point types on the machine.

   By the time the bytecode interpreter reaches the end of the
expression, the value of the expression should be the only value left
on the stack.  For tracing applications, `trace' bytecodes in the
expression will have recorded the necessary data, and the value on the
stack may be discarded.  For other applications, like conditional
breakpoints, the value may be useful.

   Separate from the stack, the interpreter has two registers:
`pc'
     The address of the next bytecode to execute.

`start'
     The address of the start of the bytecode expression, necessary for
     interpreting the `goto' and `if_goto' instructions.

   Neither of these registers is directly visible to the bytecode
language itself, but they are useful for defining the meanings of the
bytecode operations.

   There are no instructions to perform side effects on the running
program, or call the program's functions; we assume that these
expressions are only used for unobtrusive debugging, not for patching
the running code.

   Most bytecode instructions do not distinguish between the various
sizes of values, and operate on full-width values; the upper bits of the
values are simply ignored, since they do not usually make a difference
to the value computed.  The exceptions to this rule are:
memory reference instructions (`ref'N)
     There are distinct instructions to fetch different word sizes from
     memory.  Once on the stack, however, the values are treated as
     full-size integers.  They may need to be sign-extended; the `ext'
     instruction exists for this purpose.

the sign-extension instruction (`ext' N)
     These clearly need to know which portion of their operand is to be
     extended to occupy the full length of the word.


   If the interpreter is unable to evaluate an expression completely for
some reason (a memory location is inaccessible, or a divisor is zero,
for example), we say that interpretation "terminates with an error".
This means that the problem is reported back to the interpreter's caller
in some helpful way.  In general, code using agent expressions should
assume that they may attempt to divide by zero, fetch arbitrary memory
locations, and misbehave in other ways.

   Even complicated C expressions compile to a few bytecode
instructions; for example, the expression `x + y * z' would typically
produce code like the following, assuming that `x' and `y' live in
registers, and `z' is a global variable holding a 32-bit `int':
     reg 1
     reg 2
     const32 address of z
     ref32
     ext 32
     mul
     add
     end

   In detail, these mean:
`reg 1'
     Push the value of register 1 (presumably holding `x') onto the
     stack.

`reg 2'
     Push the value of register 2 (holding `y').

`const32 address of z'
     Push the address of `z' onto the stack.

`ref32'
     Fetch a 32-bit word from the address at the top of the stack;
     replace the address on the stack with the value.  Thus, we replace
     the address of `z' with `z''s value.

`ext 32'
     Sign-extend the value on the top of the stack from 32 bits to full
     length.  This is necessary because `z' is a signed integer.

`mul'
     Pop the top two numbers on the stack, multiply them, and push their
     product.  Now the top of the stack contains the value of the
     expression `y * z'.

`add'
     Pop the top two numbers, add them, and push the sum.  Now the top
     of the stack contains the value of `x + y * z'.

`end'
     Stop executing; the value left on the stack top is the value to be
     recorded.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Bytecode Descriptions,  Next: Using Agent Expressions,  Prev: General Bytecode Design,  Up: Agent Expressions

E.2 Bytecode Descriptions
=========================

Each bytecode description has the following form:

`add' (0x02): A B => A+B
     Pop the top two stack items, A and B, as integers; push their sum,
     as an integer.


   In this example, `add' is the name of the bytecode, and `(0x02)' is
the one-byte value used to encode the bytecode, in hexidecimal.  The
phrase "A B => A+B" shows the stack before and after the bytecode
executes.  Beforehand, the stack must contain at least two values, A
and B; since the top of the stack is to the right, B is on the top of
the stack, and A is underneath it.  After execution, the bytecode will
have popped A and B from the stack, and replaced them with a single
value, A+B.  There may be other values on the stack below those shown,
but the bytecode affects only those shown.

   Here is another example:

`const8' (0x22) N: => N
     Push the 8-bit integer constant N on the stack, without sign
     extension.


   In this example, the bytecode `const8' takes an operand N directly
from the bytecode stream; the operand follows the `const8' bytecode
itself.  We write any such operands immediately after the name of the
bytecode, before the colon, and describe the exact encoding of the
operand in the bytecode stream in the body of the bytecode description.

   For the `const8' bytecode, there are no stack items given before the
=>; this simply means that the bytecode consumes no values from the
stack.  If a bytecode consumes no values, or produces no values, the
list on either side of the => may be empty.

   If a value is written as A, B, or N, then the bytecode treats it as
an integer.  If a value is written is ADDR, then the bytecode treats it
as an address.

   We do not fully describe the floating point operations here; although
this design can be extended in a clean way to handle floating point
values, they are not of immediate interest to the customer, so we avoid
describing them, to save time.

`float' (0x01): =>
     Prefix for floating-point bytecodes.  Not implemented yet.

`add' (0x02): A B => A+B
     Pop two integers from the stack, and push their sum, as an integer.

`sub' (0x03): A B => A-B
     Pop two integers from the stack, subtract the top value from the
     next-to-top value, and push the difference.

`mul' (0x04): A B => A*B
     Pop two integers from the stack, multiply them, and push the
     product on the stack.  Note that, when one multiplies two N-bit
     numbers yielding another N-bit number, it is irrelevant whether the
     numbers are signed or not; the results are the same.

`div_signed' (0x05): A B => A/B
     Pop two signed integers from the stack; divide the next-to-top
     value by the top value, and push the quotient.  If the divisor is
     zero, terminate with an error.

`div_unsigned' (0x06): A B => A/B
     Pop two unsigned integers from the stack; divide the next-to-top
     value by the top value, and push the quotient.  If the divisor is
     zero, terminate with an error.

`rem_signed' (0x07): A B => A MODULO B
     Pop two signed integers from the stack; divide the next-to-top
     value by the top value, and push the remainder.  If the divisor is
     zero, terminate with an error.

`rem_unsigned' (0x08): A B => A MODULO B
     Pop two unsigned integers from the stack; divide the next-to-top
     value by the top value, and push the remainder.  If the divisor is
     zero, terminate with an error.

`lsh' (0x09): A B => A<<B
     Pop two integers from the stack; let A be the next-to-top value,
     and B be the top value.  Shift A left by B bits, and push the
     result.

`rsh_signed' (0x0a): A B => `(signed)'A>>B
     Pop two integers from the stack; let A be the next-to-top value,
     and B be the top value.  Shift A right by B bits, inserting copies
     of the top bit at the high end, and push the result.

`rsh_unsigned' (0x0b): A B => A>>B
     Pop two integers from the stack; let A be the next-to-top value,
     and B be the top value.  Shift A right by B bits, inserting zero
     bits at the high end, and push the result.

`log_not' (0x0e): A => !A
     Pop an integer from the stack; if it is zero, push the value one;
     otherwise, push the value zero.

`bit_and' (0x0f): A B => A&B
     Pop two integers from the stack, and push their bitwise `and'.

`bit_or' (0x10): A B => A|B
     Pop two integers from the stack, and push their bitwise `or'.

`bit_xor' (0x11): A B => A^B
     Pop two integers from the stack, and push their bitwise
     exclusive-`or'.

`bit_not' (0x12): A => ~A
     Pop an integer from the stack, and push its bitwise complement.

`equal' (0x13): A B => A=B
     Pop two integers from the stack; if they are equal, push the value
     one; otherwise, push the value zero.

`less_signed' (0x14): A B => A<B
     Pop two signed integers from the stack; if the next-to-top value
     is less than the top value, push the value one; otherwise, push
     the value zero.

`less_unsigned' (0x15): A B => A<B
     Pop two unsigned integers from the stack; if the next-to-top value
     is less than the top value, push the value one; otherwise, push
     the value zero.

`ext' (0x16) N: A => A, sign-extended from N bits
     Pop an unsigned value from the stack; treating it as an N-bit
     twos-complement value, extend it to full length.  This means that
     all bits to the left of bit N-1 (where the least significant bit
     is bit 0) are set to the value of bit N-1.  Note that N may be
     larger than or equal to the width of the stack elements of the
     bytecode engine; in this case, the bytecode should have no effect.

     The number of source bits to preserve, N, is encoded as a single
     byte unsigned integer following the `ext' bytecode.

`zero_ext' (0x2a) N: A => A, zero-extended from N bits
     Pop an unsigned value from the stack; zero all but the bottom N
     bits.  This means that all bits to the left of bit N-1 (where the
     least significant bit is bit 0) are set to the value of bit N-1.

     The number of source bits to preserve, N, is encoded as a single
     byte unsigned integer following the `zero_ext' bytecode.

`ref8' (0x17): ADDR => A
`ref16' (0x18): ADDR => A
`ref32' (0x19): ADDR => A
`ref64' (0x1a): ADDR => A
     Pop an address ADDR from the stack.  For bytecode `ref'N, fetch an
     N-bit value from ADDR, using the natural target endianness.  Push
     the fetched value as an unsigned integer.

     Note that ADDR may not be aligned in any particular way; the
     `refN' bytecodes should operate correctly for any address.

     If attempting to access memory at ADDR would cause a processor
     exception of some sort, terminate with an error.

`ref_float' (0x1b): ADDR => D
`ref_double' (0x1c): ADDR => D
`ref_long_double' (0x1d): ADDR => D
`l_to_d' (0x1e): A => D
`d_to_l' (0x1f): D => A
     Not implemented yet.

`dup' (0x28): A => A A
     Push another copy of the stack's top element.

`swap' (0x2b): A B => B A
     Exchange the top two items on the stack.

`pop' (0x29): A =>
     Discard the top value on the stack.

`if_goto' (0x20) OFFSET: A =>
     Pop an integer off the stack; if it is non-zero, branch to the
     given offset in the bytecode string.  Otherwise, continue to the
     next instruction in the bytecode stream.  In other words, if A is
     non-zero, set the `pc' register to `start' + OFFSET.  Thus, an
     offset of zero denotes the beginning of the expression.

     The OFFSET is stored as a sixteen-bit unsigned value, stored
     immediately following the `if_goto' bytecode.  It is always stored
     most significant byte first, regardless of the target's normal
     endianness.  The offset is not guaranteed to fall at any particular
     alignment within the bytecode stream; thus, on machines where
     fetching a 16-bit on an unaligned address raises an exception, you
     should fetch the offset one byte at a time.

`goto' (0x21) OFFSET: =>
     Branch unconditionally to OFFSET; in other words, set the `pc'
     register to `start' + OFFSET.

     The offset is stored in the same way as for the `if_goto' bytecode.

`const8' (0x22) N: => N
`const16' (0x23) N: => N
`const32' (0x24) N: => N
`const64' (0x25) N: => N
     Push the integer constant N on the stack, without sign extension.
     To produce a small negative value, push a small twos-complement
     value, and then sign-extend it using the `ext' bytecode.

     The constant N is stored in the appropriate number of bytes
     following the `const'B bytecode.  The constant N is always stored
     most significant byte first, regardless of the target's normal
     endianness.  The constant is not guaranteed to fall at any
     particular alignment within the bytecode stream; thus, on machines
     where fetching a 16-bit on an unaligned address raises an
     exception, you should fetch N one byte at a time.

`reg' (0x26) N: => A
     Push the value of register number N, without sign extension.  The
     registers are numbered following GDB's conventions.

     The register number N is encoded as a 16-bit unsigned integer
     immediately following the `reg' bytecode.  It is always stored most
     significant byte first, regardless of the target's normal
     endianness.  The register number is not guaranteed to fall at any
     particular alignment within the bytecode stream; thus, on machines
     where fetching a 16-bit on an unaligned address raises an
     exception, you should fetch the register number one byte at a time.

`trace' (0x0c): ADDR SIZE =>
     Record the contents of the SIZE bytes at ADDR in a trace buffer,
     for later retrieval by GDB.

`trace_quick' (0x0d) SIZE: ADDR => ADDR
     Record the contents of the SIZE bytes at ADDR in a trace buffer,
     for later retrieval by GDB.  SIZE is a single byte unsigned
     integer following the `trace' opcode.

     This bytecode is equivalent to the sequence `dup const8 SIZE
     trace', but we provide it anyway to save space in bytecode strings.

`trace16' (0x30) SIZE: ADDR => ADDR
     Identical to trace_quick, except that SIZE is a 16-bit big-endian
     unsigned integer, not a single byte.  This should probably have
     been named `trace_quick16', for consistency.

`end' (0x27): =>
     Stop executing bytecode; the result should be the top element of
     the stack.  If the purpose of the expression was to compute an
     lvalue or a range of memory, then the next-to-top of the stack is
     the lvalue's address, and the top of the stack is the lvalue's
     size, in bytes.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Using Agent Expressions,  Next: Varying Target Capabilities,  Prev: Bytecode Descriptions,  Up: Agent Expressions

E.3 Using Agent Expressions
===========================

Here is a sketch of a full non-stop debugging cycle, showing how agent
expressions fit into the process.

   * The user selects trace points in the program's code at which GDB
     should collect data.

   * The user specifies expressions to evaluate at each trace point.
     These expressions may denote objects in memory, in which case
     those objects' contents are recorded as the program runs, or
     computed values, in which case the values themselves are recorded.

   * GDB transmits the tracepoints and their associated expressions to
     the GDB agent, running on the debugging target.

   * The agent arranges to be notified when a trace point is hit.  Note
     that, on some systems, the target operating system is completely
     responsible for collecting the data; see *Note Tracing on
     Symmetrix::.

   * When execution on the target reaches a trace point, the agent
     evaluates the expressions associated with that trace point, and
     records the resulting values and memory ranges.

   * Later, when the user selects a given trace event and inspects the
     objects and expression values recorded, GDB talks to the agent to
     retrieve recorded data as necessary to meet the user's requests.
     If the user asks to see an object whose contents have not been
     recorded, GDB reports an error.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Varying Target Capabilities,  Next: Tracing on Symmetrix,  Prev: Using Agent Expressions,  Up: Agent Expressions

E.4 Varying Target Capabilities
===============================

Some targets don't support floating-point, and some would rather not
have to deal with `long long' operations.  Also, different targets will
have different stack sizes, and different bytecode buffer lengths.

   Thus, GDB needs a way to ask the target about itself.  We haven't
worked out the details yet, but in general, GDB should be able to send
the target a packet asking it to describe itself.  The reply should be a
packet whose length is explicit, so we can add new information to the
packet in future revisions of the agent, without confusing old versions
of GDB, and it should contain a version number.  It should contain at
least the following information:

   * whether floating point is supported

   * whether `long long' is supported

   * maximum acceptable size of bytecode stack

   * maximum acceptable length of bytecode expressions

   * which registers are actually available for collection

   * whether the target supports disabled tracepoints


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Tracing on Symmetrix,  Next: Rationale,  Prev: Varying Target Capabilities,  Up: Agent Expressions

E.5 Tracing on Symmetrix
========================

This section documents the API used by the GDB agent to collect data on
Symmetrix systems.

   Cygnus originally implemented these tracing features to help EMC
Corporation debug their Symmetrix high-availability disk drives.  The
Symmetrix application code already includes substantial tracing
facilities; the GDB agent for the Symmetrix system uses those facilities
for its own data collection, via the API described here.

 -- Function: DTC_RESPONSE adbg_find_memory_in_frame (FRAME_DEF *FRAME,
          char *ADDRESS, char **BUFFER, unsigned int *SIZE)
     Search the trace frame FRAME for memory saved from ADDRESS.  If
     the memory is available, provide the address of the buffer holding
     it; otherwise, provide the address of the next saved area.

        * If the memory at ADDRESS was saved in FRAME, set `*BUFFER' to
          point to the buffer in which that memory was saved, set
          `*SIZE' to the number of bytes from ADDRESS that are saved at
          `*BUFFER', and return `OK_TARGET_RESPONSE'.  (Clearly, in
          this case, the function will always set `*SIZE' to a value
          greater than zero.)

        * If FRAME does not record any memory at ADDRESS, set `*SIZE'
          to the distance from ADDRESS to the start of the saved region
          with the lowest address higher than ADDRESS.  If there is no
          memory saved from any higher address, set `*SIZE' to zero.
          Return `NOT_FOUND_TARGET_RESPONSE'.

     These two possibilities allow the caller to either retrieve the
     data, or walk the address space to the next saved area.

   This function allows the GDB agent to map the regions of memory
saved in a particular frame, and retrieve their contents efficiently.

   This function also provides a clean interface between the GDB agent
and the Symmetrix tracing structures, making it easier to adapt the GDB
agent to future versions of the Symmetrix system, and vice versa.  This
function searches all data saved in FRAME, whether the data is there at
the request of a bytecode expression, or because it falls in one of the
format's memory ranges, or because it was saved from the top of the
stack.  EMC can arbitrarily change and enhance the tracing mechanism,
but as long as this function works properly, all collected memory is
visible to GDB.

   The function itself is straightforward to implement.  A single pass
over the trace frame's stack area, memory ranges, and expression blocks
can yield the address of the buffer (if the requested address was
saved), and also note the address of the next higher range of memory,
to be returned when the search fails.

   As an example, suppose the trace frame `f' has saved sixteen bytes
from address `0x8000' in a buffer at `0x1000', and thirty-two bytes
from address `0xc000' in a buffer at `0x1010'.  Here are some sample
calls, and the effect each would have:

`adbg_find_memory_in_frame (f, (char*) 0x8000, &buffer, &size)'
     This would set `buffer' to `0x1000', set `size' to sixteen, and
     return `OK_TARGET_RESPONSE', since `f' saves sixteen bytes from
     `0x8000' at `0x1000'.

`adbg_find_memory_in_frame (f, (char *) 0x8004, &buffer, &size)'
     This would set `buffer' to `0x1004', set `size' to twelve, and
     return `OK_TARGET_RESPONSE', since `f' saves the twelve bytes from
     `0x8004' starting four bytes into the buffer at `0x1000'.  This
     shows that request addresses may fall in the middle of saved
     areas; the function should return the address and size of the
     remainder of the buffer.

`adbg_find_memory_in_frame (f, (char *) 0x8100, &buffer, &size)'
     This would set `size' to `0x3f00' and return
     `NOT_FOUND_TARGET_RESPONSE', since there is no memory saved in `f'
     from the address `0x8100', and the next memory available is at
     `0x8100 + 0x3f00', or `0xc000'.  This shows that request addresses
     may fall outside of all saved memory ranges; the function should
     indicate the next saved area, if any.

`adbg_find_memory_in_frame (f, (char *) 0x7000, &buffer, &size)'
     This would set `size' to `0x1000' and return
     `NOT_FOUND_TARGET_RESPONSE', since the next saved memory is at
     `0x7000 + 0x1000', or `0x8000'.

`adbg_find_memory_in_frame (f, (char *) 0xf000, &buffer, &size)'
     This would set `size' to zero, and return
     `NOT_FOUND_TARGET_RESPONSE'.  This shows how the function tells the
     caller that no further memory ranges have been saved.


   As another example, here is a function which will print out the
addresses of all memory saved in the trace frame `frame' on the
Symmetrix INLINES console:
     void
     print_frame_addresses (FRAME_DEF *frame)
     {
       char *addr;
       char *buffer;
       unsigned long size;

       addr = 0;
       for (;;)
         {
           /* Either find out how much memory we have here, or discover
              where the next saved region is.  */
           if (adbg_find_memory_in_frame (frame, addr, &buffer, &size)
               == OK_TARGET_RESPONSE)
             printp ("saved %x to %x\n", addr, addr + size);
           if (size == 0)
             break;
           addr += size;
         }
     }

   Note that there is not necessarily any connection between the order
in which the data is saved in the trace frame, and the order in which
`adbg_find_memory_in_frame' will return those memory ranges.  The code
above will always print the saved memory regions in order of increasing
address, while the underlying frame structure might store the data in a
random order.

   [[This section should cover the rest of the Symmetrix functions the
stub relies upon, too.]]

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Rationale,  Prev: Tracing on Symmetrix,  Up: Agent Expressions

E.6 Rationale
=============

Some of the design decisions apparent above are arguable.

What about stack overflow/underflow?
     GDB should be able to query the target to discover its stack size.
     Given that information, GDB can determine at translation time
     whether a given expression will overflow the stack.  But this spec
     isn't about what kinds of error-checking GDB ought to do.

Why are you doing everything in LONGEST?
     Speed isn't important, but agent code size is; using LONGEST
     brings in a bunch of support code to do things like division, etc.
     So this is a serious concern.

     First, note that you don't need different bytecodes for different
     operand sizes.  You can generate code without _knowing_ how big the
     stack elements actually are on the target.  If the target only
     supports 32-bit ints, and you don't send any 64-bit bytecodes,
     everything just works.  The observation here is that the MIPS and
     the Alpha have only fixed-size registers, and you can still get
     C's semantics even though most instructions only operate on
     full-sized words.  You just need to make sure everything is
     properly sign-extended at the right times.  So there is no need
     for 32- and 64-bit variants of the bytecodes.  Just implement
     everything using the largest size you support.

     GDB should certainly check to see what sizes the target supports,
     so the user can get an error earlier, rather than later.  But this
     information is not necessary for correctness.

Why don't you have `>' or `<=' operators?
     I want to keep the interpreter small, and we don't need them.  We
     can combine the `less_' opcodes with `log_not', and swap the order
     of the operands, yielding all four asymmetrical comparison
     operators.  For example, `(x <= y)' is `! (x > y)', which is `! (y
     < x)'.

Why do you have `log_not'?
Why do you have `ext'?
Why do you have `zero_ext'?
     These are all easily synthesized from other instructions, but I
     expect them to be used frequently, and they're simple, so I
     include them to keep bytecode strings short.

     `log_not' is equivalent to `const8 0 equal'; it's used in half the
     relational operators.

     `ext N' is equivalent to `const8 S-N lsh const8 S-N rsh_signed',
     where S is the size of the stack elements; it follows `refM' and
     REG bytecodes when the value should be signed.  See the next
     bulleted item.

     `zero_ext N' is equivalent to `constM MASK log_and'; it's used
     whenever we push the value of a register, because we can't assume
     the upper bits of the register aren't garbage.

Why not have sign-extending variants of the `ref' operators?
     Because that would double the number of `ref' operators, and we
     need the `ext' bytecode anyway for accessing bitfields.

Why not have constant-address variants of the `ref' operators?
     Because that would double the number of `ref' operators again, and
     `const32 ADDRESS ref32' is only one byte longer.

Why do the `refN' operators have to support unaligned fetches?
     GDB will generate bytecode that fetches multi-byte values at
     unaligned addresses whenever the executable's debugging
     information tells it to.  Furthermore, GDB does not know the value
     the pointer will have when GDB generates the bytecode, so it
     cannot determine whether a particular fetch will be aligned or not.

     In particular, structure bitfields may be several bytes long, but
     follow no alignment rules; members of packed structures are not
     necessarily aligned either.

     In general, there are many cases where unaligned references occur
     in correct C code, either at the programmer's explicit request, or
     at the compiler's discretion.  Thus, it is simpler to make the GDB
     agent bytecodes work correctly in all circumstances than to make
     GDB guess in each case whether the compiler did the usual thing.

Why are there no side-effecting operators?
     Because our current client doesn't want them?  That's a cheap
     answer.  I think the real answer is that I'm afraid of
     implementing function calls.  We should re-visit this issue after
     the present contract is delivered.

Why aren't the `goto' ops PC-relative?
     The interpreter has the base address around anyway for PC bounds
     checking, and it seemed simpler.

Why is there only one offset size for the `goto' ops?
     Offsets are currently sixteen bits.  I'm not happy with this
     situation either:

     Suppose we have multiple branch ops with different offset sizes.
     As I generate code left-to-right, all my jumps are forward jumps
     (there are no loops in expressions), so I never know the target
     when I emit the jump opcode.  Thus, I have to either always assume
     the largest offset size, or do jump relaxation on the code after I
     generate it, which seems like a big waste of time.

     I can imagine a reasonable expression being longer than 256 bytes.
     I can't imagine one being longer than 64k.  Thus, we need 16-bit
     offsets.  This kind of reasoning is so bogus, but relaxation is
     pathetic.

     The other approach would be to generate code right-to-left.  Then
     I'd always know my offset size.  That might be fun.

Where is the function call bytecode?
     When we add side-effects, we should add this.

Why does the `reg' bytecode take a 16-bit register number?
     Intel's IA-64 architecture has 128 general-purpose registers, and
     128 floating-point registers, and I'm sure it has some random
     control registers.

Why do we need `trace' and `trace_quick'?
     Because GDB needs to record all the memory contents and registers
     an expression touches.  If the user wants to evaluate an expression
     `x->y->z', the agent must record the values of `x' and `x->y' as
     well as the value of `x->y->z'.

Don't the `trace' bytecodes make the interpreter less general?
     They do mean that the interpreter contains special-purpose code,
     but that doesn't mean the interpreter can only be used for that
     purpose.  If an expression doesn't use the `trace' bytecodes, they
     don't get in its way.

Why doesn't `trace_quick' consume its arguments the way everything else does?
     In general, you do want your operators to consume their arguments;
     it's consistent, and generally reduces the amount of stack
     rearrangement necessary.  However, `trace_quick' is a kludge to
     save space; it only exists so we needn't write `dup const8 SIZE
     trace' before every memory reference.  Therefore, it's okay for it
     not to consume its arguments; it's meant for a specific context in
     which we know exactly what it should do with the stack.  If we're
     going to have a kludge, it should be an effective kludge.

Why does `trace16' exist?
     That opcode was added by the customer that contracted Cygnus for
     the data tracing work.  I personally think it is unnecessary;
     objects that large will be quite rare, so it is okay to use `dup
     const16 SIZE trace' in those cases.

     Whatever we decide to do with `trace16', we should at least leave
     opcode 0x30 reserved, to remain compatible with the customer who
     added it.


\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Copying,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Agent Expressions,  Up: Top

Appendix F GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
*************************************

                         Version 2, June 1991

     Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble
========

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom
to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
your programs, too.

   When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

   To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

   For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.

   We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software,
and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.

   Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.

   Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

   The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.

    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
     notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
     under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program",
     below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on
     the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under
     copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
     portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
     translated into another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is
     included without limitation in the term "modification".)  Each
     licensee is addressed as "you".

     Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
     not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act
     of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
     Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
     the Program (independent of having been made by running the
     Program).  Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
     source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
     conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
     copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
     notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
     warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
     this License along with the Program.

     You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
     and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
     for a fee.

  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
     of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
     distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
     above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

       a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
          stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

       b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that
          in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program
          or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge
          to all third parties under the terms of this License.

       c. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
          when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
          interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
          an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and
          a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
          provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
          program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
          view a copy of this License.  (Exception: if the Program
          itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
          announcement, your work based on the Program is not required
          to print an announcement.)

     These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
     identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
     Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
     works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
     apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
     works.  But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
     whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of
     the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions
     for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
     and every part regardless of who wrote it.

     Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
     contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
     intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
     derivative or collective works based on the Program.

     In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
     Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on
     a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
     other work under the scope of this License.

  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
     under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms
     of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
     following:

       a. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
          source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
          Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
          software interchange; or,

       b. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
          years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
          cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
          machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
          distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
          medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

       c. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
          to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
          allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
          received the program in object code or executable form with
          such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

     The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
     making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete
     source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
     plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
     used to control compilation and installation of the executable.
     However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need
     not include anything that is normally distributed (in either
     source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
     kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable
     runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

     If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
     access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
     access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
     distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
     compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
     from you under this License will not have their licenses
     terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
     signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify
     or distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions
     are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
     Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
     based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this
     License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
     distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
     Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
     original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
     subject to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any
     further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
     granted herein.  You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
     by third parties to this License.

  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
     infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
     issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
     agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
     License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
     License.  If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
     your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
     obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
     Program at all.  For example, if a patent license would not permit
     royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who
     receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only
     way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain
     entirely from distribution of the Program.

     If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable
     under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
     intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply
     in other circumstances.

     It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
     patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
     any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
     the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
     implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
     generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
     through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
     system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is
     willing to distribute software through any other system and a
     licensee cannot impose that choice.

     This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed
     to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
     certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
     the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
     License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
     excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only
     in or among countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this
     License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of
     this License.

  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
     versions of the General Public License from time to time.  Such
     new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
     may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

     Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
     Program specifies a version number of this License which applies
     to it and "any later version", you have the option of following
     the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
     version published by the Free Software Foundation.  If the Program
     does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose
     any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
     programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the
     author to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted
     by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
     Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our decision
     will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of
     all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
     and reuse of software generally.

                                NO WARRANTY
 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
     WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
     LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
     HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT
     WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
     NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
     FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
     QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
     PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
     SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
     WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
     MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
     LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
     INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
     INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
     DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
     OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY
     OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
     ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

                      END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
=============================================

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms.

   To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

     ONE LINE TO GIVE THE PROGRAM'S NAME AND A BRIEF IDEA OF WHAT IT DOES.
     Copyright (C) YEAR  NAME OF AUTHOR

     This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
     it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
     (at your option) any later version.

     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     GNU General Public License for more details.

     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
     Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.

   Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
mail.

   If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like
this when it starts in an interactive mode:

     Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) YEAR NAME OF AUTHOR
     Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
     type `show w'.
     This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
     under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.

   The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the
commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show
c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your
program.

   You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program,
if necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:

     Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
     `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

     SIGNATURE OF TY COON, 1 April 1989
     Ty Coon, President of Vice

   This General Public License does not permit incorporating your
program into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the
GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: Index,  Prev: Copying,  Up: Top

Appendix G GNU Free Documentation License
*****************************************

                      Version 1.2, November 2002

     Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

  0. PREAMBLE

     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
     functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
     license designed for free software.

     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
     We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
     instruction or reference.

  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
     can be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
     "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".  You
     accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a
     way requiring permission under copyright law.

     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
     modifications and/or translated into another language.

     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
     regarding them.

     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
     the notice that says that the Document is released under this
     License.  If a section does not fit the above definition of
     Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
     The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document
     does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.

     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
     be at most 25 words.

     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
     markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
     modification by readers is not Transparent.  An image format is
     not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text.  A
     copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".

     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
     standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for
     human modification.  Examples of transparent image formats include
     PNG, XCF and JPG.  Opaque formats include proprietary formats that
     can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
     XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
     available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF
     produced by some word processors for output purposes only.

     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

     A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
     "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
     To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
     Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
     to this definition.

     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
     has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  2. VERBATIM COPYING

     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
     the conditions in section 3.

     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
     and you may publicly display copies.

  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY

     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
     the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
     front cover must present the full title with all words of the
     title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
     on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
     covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
     satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
     other respects.

     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
     adjacent pages.

     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
     numbering more than 100, you must either include a
     machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
     state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from
     which the general network-using public has access to download
     using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
     copy of the Document, free of added material.  If you use the
     latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
     begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
     this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
     location until at least one year after the last time you
     distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
     retailers) of that edition to the public.

     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
     the Document well before redistributing any large number of
     copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
     version of the Document.

  4. MODIFICATIONS

     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
     the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
     licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
     whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
     things in the Modified Version:

       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of
          previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed
          in the History section of the Document).  You may use the
          same title as a previous version if the original publisher of
          that version gives permission.

       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
          from this requirement.

       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
          Modified Version, as the publisher.

       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.

       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
          adjacent to the other copyright notices.

       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
          the Addendum below.

       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
          license notice.

       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.

       I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on
          the Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled "History" in
          the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors,
          and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page,
          then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in
          the previous sentence.

       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in
          the "History" section.  You may omit a network location for a
          work that was published at least four years before the
          Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version
          it refers to gives permission.

       K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the
          section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.

       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
          unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
          or the equivalent are not considered part of the section
          titles.

       M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section
          may not be included in the Modified Version.

       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
          "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
          Section.

       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
     material copied from the Document, you may at your option
     designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
     add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
     Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
     other section titles.

     You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
     parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
     has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
     definition of a standard.

     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
     of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
     passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
     added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
     Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
     previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
     you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
     replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
     publisher that added the old one.

     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
     all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
     their Warranty Disclaimers.

     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
     combined work.

     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
     Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
     "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications".  You
     must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."

  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
     documents in all other respects.

     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
     this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
     that document.

  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
     a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
     legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
     of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
     the whole aggregate.

  8. TRANSLATION

     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
     include the original English version of this License and the
     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
     prevail.

     If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
     "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
     actual title.

  9. TERMINATION

     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
     except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
     attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
     from you under this License will not have their licenses
     terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
     `http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/'.

     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that specified version or of any later version that has been
     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
     the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
     you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
     Free Software Foundation.

G.1 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
========================================================

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
notices just after the title page:

       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
       Free Documentation License''.

   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:

         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
         being LIST.

   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.

   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
permit their use in free software.

\1f
File: gdb.info,  Node: Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top

Index
*****

\0\b[index\0\b]
* Menu:

* ! packet:                              Packets.             (line  26)
* "No symbol "foo" in current context":  Variables.           (line  74)
* # (a comment):                         Command Syntax.      (line  38)
* # in Modula-2:                         GDB/M2.              (line  18)
* $:                                     Value History.       (line  13)
* $$:                                    Value History.       (line  13)
* $_ and info breakpoints:               Set Breaks.          (line 136)
* $_ and info line:                      Machine Code.        (line  30)
* $_, $__, and value history:            Memory.              (line  87)
* $_, convenience variable:              Convenience Vars.    (line  64)
* $__, convenience variable:             Convenience Vars.    (line  73)
* $_exitcode, convenience variable:      Convenience Vars.    (line  79)
* $bpnum, convenience variable:          Set Breaks.          (line   6)
* $cdir, convenience variable:           Source Path.         (line  99)
* $cwdr, convenience variable:           Source Path.         (line  99)
* $tpnum:                                Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line  31)
* $trace_file:                           Tracepoint Variables.
                                                              (line  16)
* $trace_frame:                          Tracepoint Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* $trace_func:                           Tracepoint Variables.
                                                              (line  19)
* $trace_line:                           Tracepoint Variables.
                                                              (line  13)
* $tracepoint:                           Tracepoint Variables.
                                                              (line  10)
* --annotate:                            Mode Options.        (line 101)
* --args:                                Mode Options.        (line 114)
* --batch:                               Mode Options.        (line  23)
* --batch-silent:                        Mode Options.        (line  39)
* --baud:                                Mode Options.        (line 120)
* --cd:                                  Mode Options.        (line  80)
* --command:                             File Options.        (line  55)
* --core:                                File Options.        (line  43)
* --directory:                           File Options.        (line  70)
* --epoch:                               Mode Options.        (line  96)
* --eval-command:                        File Options.        (line  60)
* --exec:                                File Options.        (line  35)
* --fullname:                            Mode Options.        (line  85)
* --interpreter:                         Mode Options.        (line 141)
* --nowindows:                           Mode Options.        (line  70)
* --nx:                                  Mode Options.        (line  11)
* --pid:                                 File Options.        (line  49)
* --quiet:                               Mode Options.        (line  19)
* --readnow:                             File Options.        (line  74)
* --return-child-result:                 Mode Options.        (line  51)
* --se:                                  File Options.        (line  39)
* --silent:                              Mode Options.        (line  19)
* --statistics:                          Mode Options.        (line 158)
* --symbols:                             File Options.        (line  31)
* --tty:                                 Mode Options.        (line 129)
* --tui:                                 Mode Options.        (line 132)
* --version:                             Mode Options.        (line 162)
* --windows:                             Mode Options.        (line  76)
* --with-sysroot:                        Files.               (line 374)
* --write:                               Mode Options.        (line 153)
* -b:                                    Mode Options.        (line 120)
* -break-after:                          GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line  11)
* -break-condition:                      GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line  54)
* -break-delete:                         GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line  91)
* -break-disable:                        GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line 125)
* -break-enable:                         GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line 161)
* -break-info:                           GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line 196)
* -break-insert:                         GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line 216)
* -break-list:                           GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line 313)
* -break-watch:                          GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line 388)
* -c:                                    File Options.        (line  43)
* -d:                                    File Options.        (line  70)
* -data-disassemble:                     GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line  12)
* -data-evaluate-expression:             GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line 140)
* -data-list-changed-registers:          GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line 178)
* -data-list-register-names:             GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line 213)
* -data-list-register-values:            GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line 253)
* -data-read-memory:                     GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line 343)
* -e:                                    File Options.        (line  35)
* -environment-cd:                       GDB/MI Program Context.
                                                              (line  50)
* -environment-directory:                GDB/MI Program Context.
                                                              (line  73)
* -environment-path:                     GDB/MI Program Context.
                                                              (line 117)
* -environment-pwd:                      GDB/MI Program Context.
                                                              (line 158)
* -ex:                                   File Options.        (line  60)
* -exec-abort:                           GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  31)
* -exec-arguments:                       GDB/MI Program Context.
                                                              (line   9)
* -exec-continue:                        GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line  13)
* -exec-finish:                          GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line  40)
* -exec-interrupt:                       GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line  81)
* -exec-next:                            GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line 121)
* -exec-next-instruction:                GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line 146)
* -exec-return:                          GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line 176)
* -exec-run:                             GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line 219)
* -exec-show-arguments:                  GDB/MI Program Context.
                                                              (line  30)
* -exec-step:                            GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line 279)
* -exec-step-instruction:                GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line 319)
* -exec-until:                           GDB/MI Program Execution.
                                                              (line 358)
* -f:                                    Mode Options.        (line  85)
* -file-exec-and-symbols:                GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line  12)
* -file-exec-file:                       GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line  40)
* -file-list-exec-sections:              GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line  67)
* -file-list-exec-source-file:           GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line  88)
* -file-list-exec-source-files:          GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line 112)
* -file-list-shared-libraries:           GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line 142)
* -file-list-symbol-files:               GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line 162)
* -file-symbol-file:                     GDB/MI File Commands.
                                                              (line 182)
* -gdb-exit:                             GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* -gdb-set:                              GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  51)
* -gdb-show:                             GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  74)
* -gdb-version:                          GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  97)
* -inferior-tty-set:                     GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line 157)
* -inferior-tty-show:                    GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line 180)
* -interpreter-exec:                     GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line 131)
* -l:                                    Mode Options.        (line 124)
* -n:                                    Mode Options.        (line  11)
* -nw:                                   Mode Options.        (line  70)
* -p:                                    File Options.        (line  49)
* -q:                                    Mode Options.        (line  19)
* -r:                                    File Options.        (line  74)
* -s:                                    File Options.        (line  31)
* -stack-info-depth:                     GDB/MI Stack Manipulation.
                                                              (line  35)
* -stack-info-frame:                     GDB/MI Stack Manipulation.
                                                              (line   9)
* -stack-list-arguments:                 GDB/MI Stack Manipulation.
                                                              (line  73)
* -stack-list-frames:                    GDB/MI Stack Manipulation.
                                                              (line 157)
* -stack-list-locals:                    GDB/MI Stack Manipulation.
                                                              (line 253)
* -stack-select-frame:                   GDB/MI Stack Manipulation.
                                                              (line 290)
* -symbol-info-address:                  GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line   9)
* -symbol-info-file:                     GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line  29)
* -symbol-info-function:                 GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line  49)
* -symbol-info-line:                     GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line  69)
* -symbol-info-symbol:                   GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line  90)
* -symbol-list-functions:                GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line 110)
* -symbol-list-lines:                    GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line 130)
* -symbol-list-types:                    GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line 155)
* -symbol-list-variables:                GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line 176)
* -symbol-locate:                        GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line 196)
* -symbol-type:                          GDB/MI Symbol Query. (line 214)
* -t:                                    Mode Options.        (line 129)
* -target-attach:                        GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line   9)
* -target-compare-sections:              GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line  29)
* -target-detach:                        GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line  50)
* -target-disconnect:                    GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line  74)
* -target-download:                      GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line  98)
* -target-exec-status:                   GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line 201)
* -target-list-available-targets:        GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line 222)
* -target-list-current-targets:          GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line 242)
* -target-list-parameters:               GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line 263)
* -target-select:                        GDB/MI Target Manipulation.
                                                              (line 281)
* -thread-info:                          GDB/MI Thread Commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* -thread-list-all-threads:              GDB/MI Thread Commands.
                                                              (line  27)
* -thread-list-ids:                      GDB/MI Thread Commands.
                                                              (line  45)
* -thread-select:                        GDB/MI Thread Commands.
                                                              (line  79)
* -var-assign:                           GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 266)
* -var-create:                           GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line  86)
* -var-delete:                           GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 127)
* -var-evaluate-expression:              GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 249)
* -var-info-expression:                  GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 221)
* -var-info-num-children:                GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 168)
* -var-info-type:                        GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 208)
* -var-list-children:                    GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 180)
* -var-set-format:                       GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 139)
* -var-show-attributes:                  GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 235)
* -var-show-format:                      GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 155)
* -var-update:                           GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line 290)
* -w:                                    Mode Options.        (line  76)
* -x:                                    File Options.        (line  55)
* ., Modula-2 scope operator:            M2 Scope.            (line   6)
* .debug subdirectories:                 Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* .esgdbinit:                            Startup.             (line  54)
* .gdbinit:                              Startup.             (line  37)
* .gnu_debuglink sections:               Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line  56)
* .o files, reading symbols from:        Files.               (line 132)
* .os68gdbinit:                          Startup.             (line  52)
* .vxgdbinit:                            Startup.             (line  50)
* /proc:                                 SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line   6)
* ? packet:                              Packets.             (line  35)
* @, referencing memory as an array:     Arrays.              (line   6)
* ^connected:                            GDB/MI Result Records.
                                                              (line  18)
* ^done:                                 GDB/MI Result Records.
                                                              (line   9)
* ^error:                                GDB/MI Result Records.
                                                              (line  21)
* ^exit:                                 GDB/MI Result Records.
                                                              (line  25)
* ^running:                              GDB/MI Result Records.
                                                              (line  14)
* _NSPrintForDebugger, and printing Objective-C objects: The Print Command with Objective-C.
                                                              (line  11)
* A packet:                              Packets.             (line  41)
* abbreviation:                          Command Syntax.      (line  13)
* abort (C-g):                           Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  10)
* accept-line (Newline or Return):       Commands For History.
                                                              (line   6)
* acknowledgment, for GDB remote:        Overview.            (line  33)
* actions:                               Tracepoint Actions.  (line   6)
* active targets:                        Active Targets.      (line   6)
* Ada:                                   Ada.                 (line   6)
* Ada mode, general:                     Ada Mode Intro.      (line   6)
* Ada, deviations from:                  Additions to Ada.    (line   6)
* Ada, omissions from:                   Omissions from Ada.  (line   6)
* Ada, problems:                         Ada Glitches.        (line   6)
* adbg_find_memory_in_frame:             Tracing on Symmetrix.
                                                              (line  17)
* add new commands for external monitor: Connecting.          (line 104)
* add-shared-symbol-files:               Files.               (line 172)
* add-symbol-file:                       Files.               (line 113)
* add-symbol-file-from-memory:           Files.               (line 162)
* address of a symbol:                   Symbols.             (line  44)
* ADP (Angel Debugger Protocol) logging: ARM.                 (line  70)
* adress size for remote targets:        Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  12)
* advance LOCATION:                      Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 181)
* aggregates (Ada):                      Omissions from Ada.  (line  44)
* AIX threads:                           Debugging Output.    (line  28)
* alignment of remote memory accesses:   Packets.             (line 172)
* Alpha stack:                           MIPS.                (line   6)
* AMD 29K register stack:                A29K.                (line   6)
* annotations:                           Annotations Overview.
                                                              (line   6)
* annotations for errors, warnings and interrupts: Errors.    (line   6)
* annotations for invalidation messages: Invalidation.        (line   6)
* annotations for prompts:               Prompting.           (line   6)
* annotations for running programs:      Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line   6)
* annotations for source display:        Source Annotations.  (line   6)
* append:                                Dump/Restore Files.  (line  35)
* append data to a file:                 Dump/Restore Files.  (line   6)
* apply command to several threads:      Threads.             (line 143)
* apropos:                               Help.                (line  63)
* architecture debugging info:           Debugging Output.    (line  18)
* argument count in user-defined commands: Define.            (line  25)
* arguments (to your program):           Arguments.           (line   6)
* arguments, to user-defined commands:   Define.              (line   6)
* ARM 32-bit mode:                       ARM.                 (line  25)
* ARM RDI:                               ARM.                 (line   6)
* array aggregates (Ada):                Omissions from Ada.  (line  44)
* arrays:                                Arrays.              (line   6)
* arrays in expressions:                 Expressions.         (line  14)
* artificial array:                      Arrays.              (line   6)
* ASCII character set:                   Character Sets.      (line  65)
* assembly instructions:                 Machine Code.        (line  36)
* assf:                                  Files.               (line 172)
* assignment:                            Assignment.          (line   6)
* async output in GDB/MI:                GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line  96)
* AT&T disassembly flavor:               Machine Code.        (line  68)
* attach:                                Attach.              (line   6)
* attach to a program by name:           Server.              (line  70)
* automatic display:                     Auto Display.        (line   6)
* automatic overlay debugging:           Automatic Overlay Debugging.
                                                              (line   6)
* automatic thread selection:            Threads.             (line 152)
* auxiliary vector:                      OS Information.      (line  21)
* AVR:                                   AVR.                 (line   6)
* awatch:                                Set Watchpoints.     (line  45)
* b (break):                             Set Breaks.          (line   6)
* B packet:                              Packets.             (line  68)
* b packet:                              Packets.             (line  53)
* backtrace:                             Backtrace.           (line  11)
* backtrace beyond main function:        Backtrace.           (line  87)
* backtrace limit:                       Backtrace.           (line 123)
* backward-char (C-b):                   Commands For Moving. (line  15)
* backward-delete-char (Rubout):         Commands For Text.   (line  11)
* backward-kill-line (C-x Rubout):       Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line   9)
* backward-kill-word (M-<DEL>):          Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  24)
* backward-word (M-b):                   Commands For Moving. (line  22)
* baud rate for remote targets:          Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  21)
* bcache statistics:                     Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 161)
* beginning-of-history (M-<):            Commands For History.
                                                              (line  19)
* beginning-of-line (C-a):               Commands For Moving. (line   6)
* bell-style:                            Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  35)
* bind-tty-special-chars:                Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  42)
* bits in remote address:                Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  12)
* bookmark:                              Checkpoint/Restart.  (line   6)
* break:                                 Set Breaks.          (line   6)
* break ... thread THREADNO:             Thread Stops.        (line  10)
* break in overloaded functions:         Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line   9)
* break on fork/exec:                    Set Catchpoints.     (line  19)
* break on load/unload of shared library: Set Catchpoints.    (line  30)
* BREAK signal instead of Ctrl-C:        Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  29)
* break, and Objective-C:                Method Names in Commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* breakpoint address adjusted:           Breakpoint related warnings.
                                                              (line   6)
* breakpoint annotation:                 Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  47)
* breakpoint commands:                   Break Commands.      (line   6)
* breakpoint commands for GDB/MI:        GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* breakpoint conditions:                 Conditions.          (line   6)
* breakpoint numbers:                    Breakpoints.         (line  41)
* breakpoint on events:                  Breakpoints.         (line  33)
* breakpoint on memory address:          Breakpoints.         (line  20)
* breakpoint on variable modification:   Breakpoints.         (line  20)
* breakpoint ranges:                     Breakpoints.         (line  48)
* breakpoint subroutine, remote:         Stub Contents.       (line  31)
* breakpointing Ada elaboration code:    Stopping Before Main Program.
                                                              (line   6)
* breakpoints:                           Breakpoints.         (line   6)
* breakpoints and threads:               Thread Stops.        (line  10)
* breakpoints in functions matching a regexp: Set Breaks.     (line 111)
* breakpoints in overlays:               Overlay Commands.    (line  93)
* breakpoints-invalid annotation:        Invalidation.        (line  13)
* bt (backtrace):                        Backtrace.           (line  11)
* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.        (line   6)
* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.       (line   6)
* bugs in GDB:                           GDB Bugs.            (line   6)
* building GDB, requirements for:        Requirements.        (line   6)
* built-in simulator target:             Target Commands.     (line  73)
* c (continue):                          Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  15)
* c (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  10)
* C and C++:                             C.                   (line   6)
* C and C++ checks:                      C Checks.            (line   6)
* C and C++ constants:                   C Constants.         (line   6)
* C and C++ defaults:                    C Defaults.          (line   6)
* C and C++ operators:                   C Operators.         (line   6)
* c packet:                              Packets.             (line  74)
* C packet:                              Packets.             (line  80)
* C++:                                   C.                   (line  10)
* C++ compilers:                         C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line   8)
* C++ exception handling:                Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line  19)
* C++ overload debugging info:           Debugging Output.    (line  80)
* C++ scope resolution:                  Variables.           (line  54)
* C++ symbol decoding style:             Print Settings.      (line 255)
* C++ symbol display:                    Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line  28)
* C-L:                                   TUI Keys.            (line  69)
* C-x 1:                                 TUI Keys.            (line  22)
* C-x 2:                                 TUI Keys.            (line  29)
* C-x A:                                 TUI Keys.            (line  15)
* C-x a:                                 TUI Keys.            (line  14)
* C-x C-a:                               TUI Keys.            (line  13)
* C-x o:                                 TUI Keys.            (line  37)
* C-x s:                                 TUI Keys.            (line  44)
* caching data of remote targets:        Caching Remote Data. (line   6)
* call:                                  Calling.             (line  10)
* call dummy stack unwinding:            Calling.             (line  26)
* call overloaded functions:             C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line  27)
* call stack:                            Stack.               (line   9)
* call stack traces:                     Backtrace.           (line   6)
* call-last-kbd-macro (C-x e):           Keyboard Macros.     (line  13)
* calling functions:                     Calling.             (line   6)
* calling make:                          Shell Commands.      (line  19)
* capitalize-word (M-c):                 Commands For Text.   (line  49)
* case sensitivity in symbol names:      Symbols.             (line  27)
* case-insensitive symbol names:         Symbols.             (line  27)
* casts, in expressions:                 Expressions.         (line  27)
* casts, to view memory:                 Expressions.         (line  42)
* catch:                                 Set Catchpoints.     (line  10)
* catch exceptions, list active handlers: Frame Info.         (line  60)
* catchpoints:                           Breakpoints.         (line  33)
* catchpoints, setting:                  Set Catchpoints.     (line   6)
* cd:                                    Working Directory.   (line  16)
* cdir:                                  Source Path.         (line  99)
* change working directory:              Working Directory.   (line  16)
* character sets:                        Character Sets.      (line   6)
* character-search (C-]):                Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  41)
* character-search-backward (M-C-]):     Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  46)
* charset:                               Character Sets.      (line   6)
* checkpoint:                            Checkpoint/Restart.  (line   6)
* checkpoints and process id:            Checkpoint/Restart.  (line  80)
* checks, range:                         Type Checking.       (line  65)
* checks, type:                          Checks.              (line  31)
* checksum, for GDB remote:              Overview.            (line  20)
* choosing target byte order:            Byte Order.          (line   6)
* clear:                                 Delete Breaks.       (line  21)
* clear, and Objective-C:                Method Names in Commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* clear-screen (C-l):                    Commands For Moving. (line  26)
* clearing breakpoints, watchpoints, catchpoints: Delete Breaks.
                                                              (line   6)
* close, file-i/o system call:           close.               (line   6)
* closest symbol and offset for an address: Symbols.          (line  54)
* code address and its source line:      Machine Code.        (line  25)
* collect (tracepoints):                 Tracepoint Actions.  (line  45)
* collected data discarded:              Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line   6)
* colon, doubled as scope operator:      M2 Scope.            (line   6)
* colon-colon, context for variables/functions: Variables.    (line  44)
* colon-colon, in Modula-2:              M2 Scope.            (line   6)
* command editing:                       Readline Bare Essentials.
                                                              (line   6)
* command files:                         Command Files.       (line   6)
* command history:                       Command History.     (line   6)
* command hooks:                         Hooks.               (line   6)
* command interpreters:                  Interpreters.        (line   6)
* command line editing:                  Editing.             (line   6)
* command scripts, debugging:            Messages/Warnings.   (line  65)
* command tracing:                       Messages/Warnings.   (line  60)
* commands:                              Break Commands.      (line  11)
* commands annotation:                   Prompting.           (line  27)
* commands for C++:                      Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line   6)
* commands to STDBUG (ST2000):           ST2000.              (line  30)
* comment:                               Command Syntax.      (line  38)
* comment-begin:                         Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  47)
* COMMON blocks, Fortran:                Special Fortran commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* common targets:                        Target Commands.     (line  46)
* compare-sections:                      Memory.              (line 107)
* compatibility, GDB/MI and CLI:         GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI.
                                                              (line   6)
* compilation directory:                 Source Path.         (line  99)
* compiling, on Sparclet:                Sparclet.            (line  16)
* complete:                              Help.                (line  77)
* complete (<TAB>):                      Commands For Completion.
                                                              (line   6)
* completion:                            Completion.          (line   6)
* completion of quoted strings:          Completion.          (line  57)
* completion-query-items:                Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  57)
* condition:                             Conditions.          (line  45)
* conditional breakpoints:               Conditions.          (line   6)
* configuring GDB:                       Running Configure.   (line   6)
* confirmation:                          Messages/Warnings.   (line  50)
* connect (to STDBUG):                   ST2000.              (line  34)
* console i/o as part of file-i/o:       Console I/O.         (line   6)
* console interpreter:                   Interpreters.        (line  21)
* console output in GDB/MI:              GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line 104)
* constants, in file-i/o protocol:       Constants.           (line   6)
* continue:                              Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  15)
* continuing:                            Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line   6)
* continuing threads:                    Thread Stops.        (line  69)
* control C, and remote debugging:       Bootstrapping.       (line  25)
* controlling terminal:                  Input/Output.        (line  23)
* convenience variables:                 Convenience Vars.    (line   6)
* convenience variables for tracepoints: Tracepoint Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* convenience variables, initializing:   Convenience Vars.    (line  41)
* convert-meta:                          Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  67)
* copy-backward-word ():                 Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  49)
* copy-forward-word ():                  Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  54)
* copy-region-as-kill ():                Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  45)
* core dump file:                        Files.               (line   6)
* core dump file target:                 Target Commands.     (line  54)
* core-file:                             Files.               (line  97)
* crash of debugger:                     Bug Criteria.        (line   9)
* CRC of memory block, remote request:   General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  51)
* CRIS:                                  CRIS.                (line   6)
* CRIS mode:                             CRIS.                (line  26)
* CRIS version:                          CRIS.                (line  10)
* ctrl-c message, in file-i/o protocol:  The Ctrl-C message.  (line   6)
* Ctrl-o (operate-and-get-next):         Command Syntax.      (line  42)
* current directory:                     Source Path.         (line  99)
* current stack frame:                   Frames.              (line  45)
* current thread:                        Threads.             (line  38)
* current thread, remote request:        General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  41)
* cwd:                                   Source Path.         (line  99)
* Cygwin DLL, debugging:                 Cygwin Native.       (line  30)
* Cygwin-specific commands:              Cygwin Native.       (line   6)
* d (delete):                            Delete Breaks.       (line  36)
* d (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  13)
* d packet:                              Packets.             (line  86)
* D packet:                              Packets.             (line  92)
* data breakpoints:                      Breakpoints.         (line  20)
* data manipulation, in GDB/MI:          GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line   6)
* dead names, GNU Hurd:                  Hurd Native.         (line  85)
* debug formats and C++:                 C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line   8)
* debug links:                           Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line  56)
* debug remote protocol:                 Debugging Output.    (line  86)
* debug_chaos:                           M32R/D.              (line  50)
* debugger crash:                        Bug Criteria.        (line   9)
* debugging C++ programs:                C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line   8)
* debugging information directory, global: Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* debugging information in separate files: Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* debugging multiple processes:          Processes.           (line  52)
* debugging multithreaded programs (on HP-UX): Threads.       (line  82)
* debugging optimized code:              Compilation.         (line  26)
* debugging stub, example:               remote stub.         (line   6)
* debugging target:                      Targets.             (line   6)
* debugging the Cygwin DLL:              Cygwin Native.       (line  30)
* default value of solib-absolute-prefix: Files.              (line 374)
* define:                                Define.              (line  37)
* defining macros interactively:         Macros.              (line  54)
* definition, showing a macro's:         Macros.              (line  50)
* delete:                                Delete Breaks.       (line  36)
* delete breakpoints:                    Delete Breaks.       (line  36)
* delete checkpoint CHECKPOINT-ID:       Checkpoint/Restart.  (line  56)
* delete display:                        Auto Display.        (line  46)
* delete fork FORK-ID:                   Processes.           (line 100)
* delete mem:                            Memory Region Attributes.
                                                              (line  34)
* delete tracepoint:                     Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line  34)
* delete-char (C-d):                     Commands For Text.   (line   6)
* delete-char-or-list ():                Commands For Completion.
                                                              (line  30)
* delete-horizontal-space ():            Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  37)
* deleting breakpoints, watchpoints, catchpoints: Delete Breaks.
                                                              (line   6)
* deliver a signal to a program:         Signaling.           (line   6)
* demangling C++ names:                  Print Settings.      (line 236)
* deprecated commands:                   Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  60)
* derived type of an object, printing:   Print Settings.      (line 288)
* descriptor tables display:             DJGPP Native.        (line  24)
* detach:                                Attach.              (line  36)
* detach (remote):                       Connecting.          (line  90)
* detach fork FORK-ID:                   Processes.           (line  95)
* detach from task, GNU Hurd:            Hurd Native.         (line  60)
* detach from thread, GNU Hurd:          Hurd Native.         (line 110)
* device:                                Renesas Boards.      (line   6)
* digit-argument (M-0, M-1, ... M--):    Numeric Arguments.   (line   6)
* dir:                                   Source Path.         (line  39)
* direct memory access (DMA) on MS-DOS:  DJGPP Native.        (line  75)
* directories for source files:          Source Path.         (line   6)
* directory:                             Source Path.         (line  39)
* directory, compilation:                Source Path.         (line  99)
* directory, current:                    Source Path.         (line  99)
* dis (disable):                         Disabling.           (line  35)
* disable:                               Disabling.           (line  35)
* disable display:                       Auto Display.        (line  53)
* disable mem:                           Memory Region Attributes.
                                                              (line  38)
* disable tracepoint:                    Enable and Disable Tracepoints.
                                                              (line   6)
* disable-completion:                    Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  73)
* disassemble:                           Machine Code.        (line  36)
* disconnect:                            Connecting.          (line  97)
* display:                               Auto Display.        (line  24)
* display command history:               Command History.     (line  78)
* display derived types:                 Print Settings.      (line 288)
* display disabled out of scope:         Auto Display.        (line  75)
* display GDB copyright:                 Help.                (line 137)
* display of expressions:                Auto Display.        (line   6)
* display remote monitor communications: Target Commands.     (line 108)
* display remote packets:                Debugging Output.    (line  86)
* DJGPP debugging:                       DJGPP Native.        (line   6)
* dll-symbols:                           Cygwin Native.       (line  26)
* DLLs with no debugging symbols:        Non-debug DLL symbols.
                                                              (line   6)
* do (down):                             Selection.           (line  40)
* do-uppercase-version (M-a, M-b, M-X, ...): Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  14)
* document:                              Define.              (line  46)
* documentation:                         Formatting Documentation.
                                                              (line  22)
* don't repeat command:                  Define.              (line  58)
* dont-repeat:                           Define.              (line  58)
* DOS serial data link, remote debugging: DJGPP Native.       (line 121)
* DOS serial port status:                DJGPP Native.        (line 142)
* down:                                  Selection.           (line  40)
* Down:                                  TUI Keys.            (line  60)
* down-silently:                         Selection.           (line  64)
* downcase-word (M-l):                   Commands For Text.   (line  45)
* download server address (M32R):        M32R/D.              (line  27)
* download to H8/300 or H8/500:          H8/300.              (line  19)
* download to Renesas SH:                H8/300.              (line  19)
* download to Sparclet:                  Sparclet Download.   (line   6)
* download to VxWorks:                   VxWorks Download.    (line   6)
* DPMI:                                  DJGPP Native.        (line   6)
* drain, E7000:                          Renesas ICE.         (line  37)
* dump:                                  Dump/Restore Files.  (line  13)
* dump all data collected at tracepoint: tdump.               (line   6)
* dump core from inferior:               Core File Generation.
                                                              (line   6)
* dump data to a file:                   Dump/Restore Files.  (line   6)
* dump-functions ():                     Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  61)
* dump-macros ():                        Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  73)
* dump-variables ():                     Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  67)
* dump/restore files:                    Dump/Restore Files.  (line   6)
* DWARF 2 compilation units cache:       Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 185)
* DWARF-2 CFI and CRIS:                  CRIS.                (line  18)
* dynamic linking:                       Files.               (line 113)
* e (edit):                              Edit.                (line   6)
* e7000:                                 Renesas ICE.         (line  24)
* EBCDIC character set:                  Character Sets.      (line  74)
* echo:                                  Output.              (line  12)
* edit:                                  Edit.                (line   6)
* editing:                               Editing.             (line  15)
* editing command lines:                 Readline Bare Essentials.
                                                              (line   6)
* editing source files:                  Edit.                (line   6)
* editing-mode:                          Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  78)
* eight-bit characters in strings:       Print Settings.      (line 181)
* elaboration phase:                     Starting.            (line  82)
* else:                                  Command Files.       (line  56)
* Emacs:                                 Emacs.               (line   6)
* empty response, for unsupported packets: Overview.          (line  86)
* enable:                                Disabling.           (line  42)
* enable display:                        Auto Display.        (line  58)
* enable mem:                            Memory Region Attributes.
                                                              (line  42)
* enable tracepoint:                     Enable and Disable Tracepoints.
                                                              (line  12)
* enable-keypad:                         Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  84)
* enable/disable a breakpoint:           Disabling.           (line   6)
* end (breakpoint commands):             Break Commands.      (line  11)
* end (if/else/while commands):          Command Files.       (line  85)
* end (user-defined commands):           Define.              (line  46)
* end-kbd-macro (C-x )):                 Keyboard Macros.     (line   9)
* end-of-history (M->):                  Commands For History.
                                                              (line  22)
* end-of-line (C-e):                     Commands For Moving. (line   9)
* entering numbers:                      Numbers.             (line   6)
* environment (of your program):         Environment.         (line   6)
* errno values, in file-i/o protocol:    Errno values.        (line   6)
* error annotation:                      Errors.              (line  10)
* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.        (line  12)
* error-begin annotation:                Errors.              (line  22)
* event debugging info:                  Debugging Output.    (line  35)
* event designators:                     Event Designators.   (line   6)
* event handling:                        Set Catchpoints.     (line   6)
* examine process image:                 SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line   6)
* examining data:                        Data.                (line   6)
* examining memory:                      Memory.              (line   9)
* exception handlers:                    Set Catchpoints.     (line   6)
* exception handlers, how to list:       Frame Info.          (line  60)
* exceptionHandler:                      Bootstrapping.       (line  38)
* exchange-point-and-mark (C-x C-x):     Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  36)
* exec-file:                             Files.               (line  39)
* executable file:                       Files.               (line  16)
* executable file target:                Target Commands.     (line  50)
* execute commands from a file:          Command Files.       (line  14)
* execute remote command, remote request: General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 157)
* exited annotation:                     Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  18)
* exiting GDB:                           Quitting GDB.        (line   6)
* expand macro once:                     Macros.              (line  41)
* expand-tilde:                          Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  89)
* expanding preprocessor macros:         Macros.              (line  32)
* expression debugging info:             Debugging Output.    (line  42)
* expressions:                           Expressions.         (line   6)
* expressions in Ada:                    Ada.                 (line  11)
* expressions in C or C++:               C.                   (line   6)
* expressions in C++:                    C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line   6)
* expressions in Modula-2:               Modula-2.            (line  12)
* extend GDB for remote targets:         Connecting.          (line 104)
* f (frame):                             Selection.           (line  11)
* f (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  16)
* F packet:                              Packets.             (line 103)
* F reply packet:                        The F reply packet.  (line   6)
* F request packet:                      The F request packet.
                                                              (line   6)
* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.        (line   9)
* fatal signals:                         Signals.             (line  15)
* FDL, GNU Free Documentation License:   GNU Free Documentation License.
                                                              (line   6)
* features of the remote protocol:       General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 182)
* fg (resume foreground execution):      Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  15)
* file:                                  Files.               (line  16)
* file-i/o examples:                     File-I/O Examples.   (line   6)
* file-i/o overview:                     File-I/O Overview.   (line   6)
* File-I/O remote protocol extension:    File-I/O remote protocol extension.
                                                              (line   6)
* file-i/o reply packet:                 The F reply packet.  (line   6)
* file-i/o request packet:               The F request packet.
                                                              (line   6)
* find downloadable SREC files (M32R):   M32R/D.              (line  15)
* find trace snapshot:                   tfind.               (line   6)
* finish:                                Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 110)
* flinching:                             Messages/Warnings.   (line  50)
* float promotion:                       ABI.                 (line  29)
* floating point:                        Floating Point Hardware.
                                                              (line   6)
* floating point registers:              Registers.           (line  15)
* floating point, MIPS remote:           MIPS Embedded.       (line  60)
* flush_i_cache:                         Bootstrapping.       (line  60)
* flushregs:                             Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 153)
* focus:                                 TUI Commands.        (line  34)
* focus of debugging:                    Threads.             (line  38)
* foo:                                   Symbol Errors.       (line  50)
* fork FORK-ID:                          Processes.           (line  85)
* fork, debugging programs which call:   Processes.           (line   6)
* format options:                        Print Settings.      (line   6)
* formatted output:                      Output Formats.      (line   6)
* Fortran:                               Summary.             (line  35)
* Fortran Defaults:                      Fortran Defaults.    (line   6)
* Fortran operators and expressions:     Fortran Operators.   (line   6)
* Fortran-specific support in GDB:       Fortran.             (line   6)
* forward-backward-delete-char ():       Commands For Text.   (line  15)
* forward-char (C-f):                    Commands For Moving. (line  12)
* forward-search:                        Search.              (line   9)
* forward-search-history (C-s):          Commands For History.
                                                              (line  30)
* forward-word (M-f):                    Commands For Moving. (line  18)
* FR-V shared-library debugging:         Debugging Output.    (line 104)
* frame debugging info:                  Debugging Output.    (line  50)
* frame number:                          Frames.              (line  28)
* frame pointer:                         Frames.              (line  21)
* frame pointer register:                Registers.           (line  26)
* frame, command:                        Frames.              (line  45)
* frame, definition:                     Frames.              (line   6)
* frame, selecting:                      Selection.           (line  11)
* frameless execution:                   Frames.              (line  34)
* frames-invalid annotation:             Invalidation.        (line   9)
* free memory information (MS-DOS):      DJGPP Native.        (line  19)
* fstat, file-i/o system call:           stat/fstat.          (line   6)
* ftpload, E7000:                        Renesas ICE.         (line  33)
* ftplogin, E7000:                       Renesas ICE.         (line  27)
* Fujitsu:                               remote stub.         (line  69)
* full symbol tables, listing GDB's internal: Symbols.        (line 269)
* function call arguments, optimized out: Backtrace.          (line  65)
* function entry/exit, wrong values of variables: Variables.  (line  58)
* functions without line info, and stepping: Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  93)
* g packet:                              Packets.             (line 108)
* G packet:                              Packets.             (line 124)
* g++, GNU C++ compiler:                 C.                   (line  10)
* garbled pointers:                      DJGPP Native.        (line  42)
* GCC and C++:                           C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line   8)
* gcore:                                 Core File Generation.
                                                              (line  18)
* GDB bugs, reporting:                   Bug Reporting.       (line   6)
* GDB reference card:                    Formatting Documentation.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB startup:                           Startup.             (line   6)
* GDB version number:                    Help.                (line 127)
* gdb.ini:                               Startup.             (line  44)
* GDB/MI development:                    GDB/MI Development and Front Ends.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, breakpoint commands:           GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, compatibility with CLI:        GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, data manipulation:             GDB/MI Data Manipulation.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, input syntax:                  GDB/MI Input Syntax. (line   6)
* GDB/MI, its purpose:                   GDB/MI.              (line   9)
* GDB/MI, out-of-band records:           GDB/MI Out-of-band Records.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, output syntax:                 GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, result records:                GDB/MI Result Records.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, simple examples:               GDB/MI Simple Examples.
                                                              (line   6)
* GDB/MI, stream records:                GDB/MI Stream Records.
                                                              (line   6)
* gdbarch debugging info:                Debugging Output.    (line  18)
* GDBHISTFILE, environment variable:     Command History.     (line  26)
* gdbserver:                             Server.              (line   6)
* GDT:                                   DJGPP Native.        (line  24)
* generate-core-file:                    Core File Generation.
                                                              (line  18)
* get thread-local storage address, remote request: General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  87)
* getDebugChar:                          Bootstrapping.       (line  14)
* gettimeofday, file-i/o system call:    gettimeofday.        (line   6)
* global debugging information directory: Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* GNU C++:                               C.                   (line  10)
* GNU Emacs:                             Emacs.               (line   6)
* GNU Hurd debugging:                    Hurd Native.         (line   6)
* GNU/Linux LWP debug messages:          Debugging Output.    (line  66)
* gnu_debuglink_crc32:                   Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line  94)
* h (help):                              Help.                (line   9)
* H packet:                              Packets.             (line 135)
* H8/300 or H8/500 download:             H8/300.              (line  19)
* handle:                                Signals.             (line  45)
* handle_exception:                      Stub Contents.       (line  15)
* handling signals:                      Signals.             (line  27)
* hardware breakpoints:                  Set Breaks.          (line  81)
* hardware breakpoints, and E7000:       Renesas ICE.         (line  41)
* hardware watchpoints:                  Set Watchpoints.     (line  22)
* hash mark while downloading:           Target Commands.     (line  99)
* hbreak:                                Set Breaks.          (line  81)
* help:                                  Help.                (line   6)
* help target:                           Target Commands.     (line  19)
* help user-defined:                     Define.              (line  63)
* heuristic-fence-post (Alpha, MIPS):    MIPS.                (line  14)
* history events:                        Event Designators.   (line   7)
* history expansion:                     History Interaction. (line   6)
* history expansion, turn on/off:        Command History.     (line  53)
* history file:                          Command History.     (line  26)
* history number:                        Value History.       (line  13)
* history of values printed by GDB:      Value History.       (line   6)
* history size:                          Command History.     (line  45)
* history substitution:                  Command History.     (line  26)
* history-preserve-point:                Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  93)
* history-search-backward ():            Commands For History.
                                                              (line  50)
* history-search-forward ():             Commands For History.
                                                              (line  45)
* HISTSIZE, environment variable:        Command History.     (line  45)
* hook:                                  Hooks.               (line   6)
* hookpost:                              Hooks.               (line  11)
* hooks, for commands:                   Hooks.               (line   6)
* hooks, post-command:                   Hooks.               (line  11)
* hooks, pre-command:                    Hooks.               (line   6)
* horizontal-scroll-mode:                Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  98)
* host character set:                    Character Sets.      (line   6)
* how many arguments (user-defined commands): Define.         (line  25)
* HPPA support:                          HPPA.                (line   6)
* htrace:                                OpenRISC 1000.       (line  69)
* hwatch:                                OpenRISC 1000.       (line  59)
* i (info):                              Help.                (line 100)
* i packet:                              Packets.             (line 149)
* I packet:                              Packets.             (line 154)
* i/o:                                   Input/Output.        (line   6)
* I/O registers (Atmel AVR):             AVR.                 (line  10)
* i386:                                  remote stub.         (line  57)
* i386-stub.c:                           remote stub.         (line  57)
* IBM1047 character set:                 Character Sets.      (line  74)
* IDT:                                   DJGPP Native.        (line  24)
* if:                                    Command Files.       (line  56)
* ignore:                                Conditions.          (line  77)
* ignore count (of breakpoint):          Conditions.          (line  66)
* INCLUDE_RDB:                           VxWorks.             (line  33)
* incomplete type:                       Symbols.             (line  99)
* indentation in structure display:      Print Settings.      (line 157)
* inferior debugging info:               Debugging Output.    (line  57)
* inferior functions, calling:           Calling.             (line   6)
* inferior tty:                          Input/Output.        (line  44)
* infinite recursion in user-defined commands: Define.        (line  73)
* info:                                  Help.                (line 100)
* info address:                          Symbols.             (line  44)
* info all-registers:                    Registers.           (line  15)
* info args:                             Frame Info.          (line  51)
* info auxv:                             OS Information.      (line  33)
* info breakpoints:                      Set Breaks.          (line 136)
* info catch:                            Frame Info.          (line  60)
* info checkpoints:                      Checkpoint/Restart.  (line  31)
* info classes:                          Symbols.             (line 196)
* info common:                           Special Fortran commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* info copying:                          Help.                (line 137)
* info dcache:                           Caching Remote Data. (line  21)
* info display:                          Auto Display.        (line  67)
* info dll:                              Cygwin Native.       (line  23)
* info dos:                              DJGPP Native.        (line  15)
* info extensions:                       Show.                (line  34)
* info f (info frame):                   Frame Info.          (line  17)
* info files:                            Files.               (line 191)
* info float:                            Floating Point Hardware.
                                                              (line   9)
* info for known object files:           Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 156)
* info forks:                            Processes.           (line  80)
* info frame:                            Frame Info.          (line  17)
* info frame, show the source language:  Show.                (line  15)
* info functions:                        Symbols.             (line 175)
* info handle:                           Signals.             (line  33)
* info io_registers, AVR:                AVR.                 (line  10)
* info line:                             Machine Code.        (line  13)
* info line, and Objective-C:            Method Names in Commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* info locals:                           Frame Info.          (line  55)
* info macro:                            Macros.              (line  50)
* info mem:                              Memory Region Attributes.
                                                              (line  45)
* info meminfo:                          SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  78)
* info or1k spr:                         OpenRISC 1000.       (line  20)
* info pidlist:                          SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  74)
* info proc:                             SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  16)
* info program:                          Stopping.            (line  18)
* info registers:                        Registers.           (line  11)
* info scope:                            Symbols.             (line 130)
* info selectors:                        Symbols.             (line 202)
* info serial:                           DJGPP Native.        (line 142)
* info set:                              Help.                (line 120)
* info share:                            Files.               (line 323)
* info sharedlibrary:                    Files.               (line 323)
* info signals:                          Signals.             (line  33)
* info source:                           Symbols.             (line 150)
* info source, show the source language: Show.                (line  21)
* info sources:                          Symbols.             (line 169)
* info stack:                            Backtrace.           (line  34)
* info symbol:                           Symbols.             (line  54)
* info target:                           Files.               (line 191)
* info terminal:                         Input/Output.        (line  12)
* info threads:                          Threads.             (line  59)
* info threads (HP-UX):                  Threads.             (line  96)
* info tp:                               Listing Tracepoints. (line   6)
* info tracepoints:                      Listing Tracepoints. (line   6)
* info types:                            Symbols.             (line 116)
* info udot:                             OS Information.      (line  16)
* info variables:                        Symbols.             (line 187)
* info vector:                           Vector Unit.         (line   9)
* info w32:                              Cygwin Native.       (line  12)
* info warranty:                         Help.                (line 141)
* info watchpoints [N]:                  Set Watchpoints.     (line  49)
* info win:                              TUI Commands.        (line  12)
* information about tracepoints:         Listing Tracepoints. (line   6)
* inheritance:                           Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line  24)
* init file:                             Startup.             (line  11)
* init file name:                        Startup.             (line  37)
* init-if-undefined:                     Convenience Vars.    (line  41)
* initial frame:                         Frames.              (line  12)
* initialization file, readline:         Readline Init File.  (line   6)
* innermost frame:                       Frames.              (line  12)
* input syntax for GDB/MI:               GDB/MI Input Syntax. (line   6)
* input-meta:                            Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 105)
* insert-comment (M-#):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  51)
* insert-completions (M-*):              Commands For Completion.
                                                              (line  14)
* inspect:                               Data.                (line   6)
* installation:                          Installing GDB.      (line   6)
* instructions, assembly:                Machine Code.        (line  36)
* integral datatypes, in file-i/o protocol: Integral datatypes.
                                                              (line   6)
* Intel:                                 remote stub.         (line  57)
* Intel disassembly flavor:              Machine Code.        (line  68)
* interaction, readline:                 Readline Interaction.
                                                              (line   6)
* internal commands:                     Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* internal GDB breakpoints:              Set Breaks.          (line 241)
* interpreter-exec:                      Interpreters.        (line  43)
* interrupt:                             Quitting GDB.        (line  13)
* interrupt remote programs:             Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  29)
* interrupting remote programs:          Connecting.          (line  77)
* interrupting remote targets:           Bootstrapping.       (line  25)
* interrupts (remote protocol):          Interrupts.          (line   6)
* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.        (line  16)
* invoke another interpreter:            Interpreters.        (line  37)
* isatty, file-i/o system call:          isatty.              (line   6)
* isearch-terminators:                   Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 112)
* ISO 8859-1 character set:              Character Sets.      (line  68)
* ISO Latin 1 character set:             Character Sets.      (line  68)
* jump:                                  Jumping.             (line  10)
* jump, and Objective-C:                 Method Names in Commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* k packet:                              Packets.             (line 158)
* kernel crash dump:                     BSD libkvm Interface.
                                                              (line   6)
* kernel memory image:                   BSD libkvm Interface.
                                                              (line   6)
* keymap:                                Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 119)
* kill:                                  Kill Process.        (line   6)
* kill ring:                             Readline Killing Commands.
                                                              (line  19)
* kill-line (C-k):                       Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line   6)
* kill-region ():                        Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  41)
* kill-whole-line ():                    Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  15)
* kill-word (M-d):                       Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  19)
* killing text:                          Readline Killing Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* kvm:                                   BSD libkvm Interface.
                                                              (line  24)
* l (list):                              List.                (line   6)
* languages:                             Languages.           (line   6)
* last tracepoint number:                Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line  31)
* latest breakpoint:                     Set Breaks.          (line   6)
* layout:                                TUI Commands.        (line  15)
* LDT:                                   DJGPP Native.        (line  24)
* leaving GDB:                           Quitting GDB.        (line   6)
* Left:                                  TUI Keys.            (line  63)
* libkvm:                                BSD libkvm Interface.
                                                              (line   6)
* limit hardware breakpoints and watchpoints: Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  75)
* limit on number of printed array elements: Print Settings.  (line 123)
* limits, in file-i/o protocol:          Limits.              (line   6)
* linespec:                              List.                (line  45)
* Linux lightweight processes:           Debugging Output.    (line  66)
* list:                                  List.                (line   6)
* list active threads, remote request:   General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  60)
* list of supported file-i/o calls:      List of supported calls.
                                                              (line   6)
* list output in GDB/MI:                 GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line 115)
* list, and Objective-C:                 Method Names in Commands.
                                                              (line   9)
* list, how many lines to display:       List.                (line  29)
* listing GDB's internal symbol tables:  Symbols.             (line 269)
* listing machine instructions:          Machine Code.        (line  36)
* listing mapped overlays:               Overlay Commands.    (line  60)
* load address, overlay's:               How Overlays Work.   (line   6)
* load FILENAME:                         Target Commands.     (line 115)
* load shared library:                   Files.               (line 320)
* load symbols from memory:              Files.               (line 162)
* local variables:                       Symbols.             (line 130)
* locate address:                        Output Formats.      (line  35)
* lock scheduler:                        Thread Stops.        (line  89)
* log output in GDB/MI:                  GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line 111)
* logging file name:                     Logging output.      (line  13)
* logging GDB output:                    Logging output.      (line   6)
* loop_break:                            Command Files.       (line  75)
* loop_continue:                         Command Files.       (line  79)
* lseek flags, in file-i/o protocol:     Lseek flags.         (line   6)
* lseek, file-i/o system call:           lseek.               (line   6)
* M packet:                              Packets.             (line 185)
* m packet:                              Packets.             (line 165)
* M32-EVA target board address:          M32R/D.              (line  21)
* M32R/Chaos debugging:                  M32R/D.              (line  50)
* m680x0:                                remote stub.         (line  60)
* m68k-stub.c:                           remote stub.         (line  60)
* machine instructions:                  Machine Code.        (line  36)
* macro define:                          Macros.              (line  54)
* macro definition, showing:             Macros.              (line  50)
* macro exp1:                            Macros.              (line  39)
* macro expand:                          Macros.              (line  32)
* macro expansion, showing the results of preprocessor: Macros.
                                                              (line  32)
* macro list:                            Macros.              (line  76)
* macro undef:                           Macros.              (line  69)
* macros, example of debugging with:     Macros.              (line  80)
* macros, user-defined:                  Macros.              (line  54)
* mailing lists:                         GDB/MI Development and Front Ends.
                                                              (line  36)
* maint agent:                           Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  12)
* maint check-symtabs:                   Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  48)
* maint cplus first_component:           Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  51)
* maint cplus namespace:                 Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  54)
* maint demangle:                        Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  57)
* maint deprecate:                       Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  60)
* maint dump-me:                         Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  68)
* maint info breakpoints:                Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  17)
* maint info psymtabs:                   Symbols.             (line 269)
* maint info sections:                   Files.               (line 200)
* maint info sol-threads:                Threads.             (line 126)
* maint info symtabs:                    Symbols.             (line 269)
* maint internal-error:                  Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  73)
* maint internal-warning:                Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  73)
* maint packet:                          Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  94)
* maint print architecture:              Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 100)
* maint print cooked-registers:          Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 122)
* maint print dummy-frames:              Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 104)
* maint print objfiles:                  Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 156)
* maint print psymbols:                  Symbols.             (line 250)
* maint print raw-registers:             Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 122)
* maint print reggroups:                 Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 137)
* maint print register-groups:           Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 122)
* maint print registers:                 Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 122)
* maint print statistics:                Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 161)
* maint print symbols:                   Symbols.             (line 250)
* maint print type:                      Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 174)
* maint print unwind, HPPA:              HPPA.                (line  17)
* maint set dwarf2 max-cache-age:        Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 181)
* maint set profile:                     Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 195)
* maint show dwarf2 max-cache-age:       Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 181)
* maint show profile:                    Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 195)
* maint show-debug-regs:                 Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 211)
* maint space:                           Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 218)
* maint time:                            Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 225)
* maint translate-address:               Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 232)
* maint undeprecate:                     Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  60)
* maintenance commands:                  Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* make:                                  Shell Commands.      (line  19)
* manual overlay debugging:              Overlay Commands.    (line  23)
* map an overlay:                        Overlay Commands.    (line  30)
* mapinfo list, QNX Neutrino:            SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  78)
* mapped address:                        How Overlays Work.   (line   6)
* mapped overlays:                       How Overlays Work.   (line   6)
* mark-modified-lines:                   Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 132)
* mark-symlinked-directories:            Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 137)
* match-hidden-files:                    Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 142)
* maximum value for offset of closest symbol: Print Settings. (line  70)
* mem:                                   Memory Region Attributes.
                                                              (line  22)
* member functions:                      C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line  18)
* memory address space mappings:         SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  32)
* memory map format:                     Memory map format.   (line   6)
* memory models, H8/500:                 H8/500.              (line   6)
* memory region attributes:              Memory Region Attributes.
                                                              (line   6)
* memory tracing:                        Breakpoints.         (line  20)
* memory transfer, in file-i/o protocol: Memory transfer.     (line   6)
* memory used by commands:               Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 218)
* memory used for symbol tables:         Files.               (line 308)
* memory, alignment and size of remote accesses: Packets.     (line 172)
* memory, viewing as typed object:       Expressions.         (line  42)
* memset:                                Bootstrapping.       (line  70)
* menu-complete ():                      Commands For Completion.
                                                              (line  18)
* meta-flag:                             Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 105)
* mi interpreter:                        Interpreters.        (line  26)
* mi1 interpreter:                       Interpreters.        (line  34)
* mi2 interpreter:                       Interpreters.        (line  31)
* minimal language:                      Unsupported languages.
                                                              (line   6)
* Minimal symbols and DLLs:              Non-debug DLL symbols.
                                                              (line   6)
* MIPS addresses, masking:               MIPS.                (line  84)
* MIPS boards:                           MIPS Embedded.       (line   6)
* MIPS GP register size on stack:        MIPS.                (line  32)
* MIPS remote floating point:            MIPS Embedded.       (line  60)
* MIPS stack:                            MIPS.                (line   6)
* MIPS stack space for arguments:        MIPS.                (line  50)
* MMX registers (x86):                   Registers.           (line  71)
* mode_t values, in file-i/o protocol:   mode_t values.       (line   6)
* Modula-2:                              Summary.             (line  27)
* Modula-2 built-ins:                    Built-In Func/Proc.  (line   6)
* Modula-2 checks:                       M2 Checks.           (line   6)
* Modula-2 constants:                    Built-In Func/Proc.  (line 109)
* Modula-2 defaults:                     M2 Defaults.         (line   6)
* Modula-2 operators:                    M2 Operators.        (line   6)
* Modula-2 types:                        M2 Types.            (line   6)
* Modula-2, deviations from:             Deviations.          (line   6)
* Modula-2, GDB support:                 Modula-2.            (line   6)
* monitor:                               Connecting.          (line 104)
* Motorola 680x0:                        remote stub.         (line  60)
* MS Windows debugging:                  Cygwin Native.       (line   6)
* MS-DOS system info:                    DJGPP Native.        (line  19)
* MS-DOS-specific commands:              DJGPP Native.        (line   6)
* multiple processes:                    Processes.           (line   6)
* multiple targets:                      Active Targets.      (line   6)
* multiple threads:                      Threads.             (line   6)
* multiple threads, backtrace:           Backtrace.           (line  37)
* n (next):                              Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  78)
* n (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  19)
* names of symbols:                      Symbols.             (line  14)
* namespace in C++:                      C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line  22)
* native Cygwin debugging:               Cygwin Native.       (line   6)
* native DJGPP debugging:                DJGPP Native.        (line   6)
* negative breakpoint numbers:           Set Breaks.          (line 241)
* NetROM ROM emulator target:            Target Commands.     (line  88)
* New SYSTAG message:                    Threads.             (line  44)
* New SYSTAG message, on HP-UX:          Threads.             (line  86)
* next:                                  Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  78)
* next-history (C-n):                    Commands For History.
                                                              (line  16)
* nexti:                                 Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 203)
* ni (nexti):                            Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 203)
* non-incremental-forward-search-history (M-n): Commands For History.
                                                              (line  40)
* non-incremental-reverse-search-history (M-p): Commands For History.
                                                              (line  35)
* non-member C++ functions, set breakpoint in: Set Breaks.    (line 127)
* noninvasive task options:              Hurd Native.         (line  73)
* nosharedlibrary:                       Files.               (line 336)
* notation, readline:                    Readline Bare Essentials.
                                                              (line   6)
* notational conventions, for GDB/MI:    GDB/MI.              (line  25)
* notify output in GDB/MI:               GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line 100)
* NULL elements in arrays:               Print Settings.      (line 148)
* number of array elements to print:     Print Settings.      (line 123)
* number representation:                 Numbers.             (line   6)
* numbers for breakpoints:               Breakpoints.         (line  41)
* object files, relocatable, reading symbols from: Files.     (line 132)
* Objective-C:                           Objective-C.         (line   6)
* Objective-C, classes and selectors:    Symbols.             (line 196)
* Objective-C, print objects:            The Print Command with Objective-C.
                                                              (line   6)
* observer debugging info:               Debugging Output.    (line  73)
* octal escapes in strings:              Print Settings.      (line 181)
* online documentation:                  Help.                (line   6)
* opaque data types:                     Symbols.             (line 232)
* open flags, in file-i/o protocol:      Open flags.          (line   6)
* open, file-i/o system call:            open.                (line   6)
* OpenRISC 1000:                         OpenRISC 1000.       (line   6)
* OpenRISC 1000 htrace:                  OpenRISC 1000.       (line  58)
* operations allowed on pending breakpoints: Set Breaks.      (line 228)
* optimized code, debugging:             Compilation.         (line  26)
* optimized code, wrong values of variables: Variables.       (line  58)
* optional debugging messages:           Debugging Output.    (line   6)
* optional warnings:                     Messages/Warnings.   (line   6)
* or1k boards:                           OpenRISC 1000.       (line   6)
* or1ksim:                               OpenRISC 1000.       (line  16)
* OS ABI:                                ABI.                 (line  11)
* OS information:                        OS Information.      (line   6)
* out-of-band records in GDB/MI:         GDB/MI Out-of-band Records.
                                                              (line   6)
* outermost frame:                       Frames.              (line  12)
* output:                                Output.              (line  35)
* output formats:                        Output Formats.      (line   6)
* output syntax of GDB/MI:               GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line   6)
* output-meta:                           Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 149)
* overlay:                               Overlay Commands.    (line  17)
* overlay area:                          How Overlays Work.   (line   6)
* overlay example program:               Overlay Sample Program.
                                                              (line   6)
* overlays:                              Overlays.            (line   6)
* overlays, setting breakpoints in:      Overlay Commands.    (line  93)
* overload-choice annotation:            Prompting.           (line  32)
* overloaded functions, calling:         C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line  27)
* overloaded functions, overload resolution: Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line  47)
* overloading:                           Breakpoint Menus.    (line   6)
* overloading in C++:                    Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line  14)
* overwrite-mode ():                     Commands For Text.   (line  53)
* p packet:                              Packets.             (line 198)
* P packet:                              Packets.             (line 213)
* Pacal objects, static members display: Print Settings.      (line 312)
* packet size, remote protocol:          General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 275)
* packets, reporting on stdout:          Debugging Output.    (line  86)
* packets, tracepoint:                   Tracepoint Packets.  (line   6)
* page tables display (MS-DOS):          DJGPP Native.        (line  56)
* page-completions:                      Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 154)
* partial symbol dump:                   Symbols.             (line 250)
* partial symbol tables, listing GDB's internal: Symbols.     (line 269)
* Pascal:                                Summary.             (line  30)
* Pascal support in GDB, limitations:    Pascal.              (line   6)
* passcount:                             Tracepoint Passcounts.
                                                              (line   6)
* patching binaries:                     Patching.            (line   6)
* patching object files:                 Files.               (line  26)
* path:                                  Environment.         (line  14)
* pause current task (GNU Hurd):         Hurd Native.         (line  49)
* pause current thread (GNU Hurd):       Hurd Native.         (line  91)
* pauses in output:                      Screen Size.         (line   6)
* pending breakpoints:                   Set Breaks.          (line 195)
* PgDn:                                  TUI Keys.            (line  54)
* PgUp:                                  TUI Keys.            (line  51)
* physical address from linear address:  DJGPP Native.        (line  81)
* pipe, target remote to:                Connecting.          (line  60)
* pipes:                                 Starting.            (line  54)
* pmon, MIPS remote:                     MIPS Embedded.       (line 132)
* po (print-object):                     The Print Command with Objective-C.
                                                              (line   6)
* pointer values, in file-i/o protocol:  Pointer values.      (line   6)
* pointer, finding referent:             Print Settings.      (line  79)
* port rights, GNU Hurd:                 Hurd Native.         (line  85)
* port sets, GNU Hurd:                   Hurd Native.         (line  85)
* possible-completions (M-?):            Commands For Completion.
                                                              (line  11)
* post-commands annotation:              Prompting.           (line  27)
* post-overload-choice annotation:       Prompting.           (line  32)
* post-prompt annotation:                Prompting.           (line  24)
* post-prompt-for-continue annotation:   Prompting.           (line  40)
* post-query annotation:                 Prompting.           (line  36)
* pre-commands annotation:               Prompting.           (line  27)
* pre-overload-choice annotation:        Prompting.           (line  32)
* pre-prompt annotation:                 Prompting.           (line  24)
* pre-prompt-for-continue annotation:    Prompting.           (line  40)
* pre-query annotation:                  Prompting.           (line  36)
* prefix for shared library file names:  Files.               (line 366)
* prefix-meta (<ESC>):                   Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  18)
* premature return from system calls:    Thread Stops.        (line  36)
* preprocessor macro expansion, showing the results of: Macros.
                                                              (line  32)
* pretty print arrays:                   Print Settings.      (line  98)
* pretty print C++ virtual function tables: Print Settings.   (line 323)
* previous-history (C-p):                Commands For History.
                                                              (line  12)
* print:                                 Data.                (line   6)
* print an Objective-C object description: The Print Command with Objective-C.
                                                              (line  11)
* print array indexes:                   Print Settings.      (line 108)
* print settings:                        Print Settings.      (line   6)
* print structures in indented form:     Print Settings.      (line 157)
* print-object:                          The Print Command with Objective-C.
                                                              (line   6)
* print/don't print memory addresses:    Print Settings.      (line  13)
* printf:                                Output.              (line  46)
* printing data:                         Data.                (line   6)
* proc-trace-entry:                      SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  70)
* proc-trace-exit:                       SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  70)
* proc-untrace-entry:                    SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  70)
* proc-untrace-exit:                     SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  70)
* process detailed status information:   SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  40)
* process ID:                            SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  16)
* process info via /proc:                SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line   6)
* process list, QNX Neutrino:            SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  74)
* process status register:               Registers.           (line  26)
* processes, multiple:                   Processes.           (line   6)
* procfs API calls:                      SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  53)
* profiling GDB:                         Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 195)
* program counter register:              Registers.           (line  26)
* program entry point:                   Backtrace.           (line  87)
* prompt:                                Prompt.              (line   6)
* prompt annotation:                     Prompting.           (line  24)
* prompt-for-continue annotation:        Prompting.           (line  40)
* protocol basics, file-i/o:             Protocol basics.     (line   6)
* protocol specific representation of datatypes, in file-i/o protocol: Protocol specific representation of datatypes.
                                                              (line   6)
* protocol, GDB remote serial:           Overview.            (line  14)
* ptrace system call:                    OS Information.      (line   9)
* ptype:                                 Symbols.             (line  77)
* putDebugChar:                          Bootstrapping.       (line  20)
* pwd:                                   Working Directory.   (line  19)
* q (quit):                              Quitting GDB.        (line   6)
* q (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  22)
* Q packet:                              Packets.             (line 226)
* q packet:                              Packets.             (line 226)
* qC packet:                             General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  41)
* qCRC packet:                           General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  51)
* qfThreadInfo packet:                   General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  60)
* qGetTLSAddr packet:                    General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  87)
* QNX Neutrino:                          Neutrino.            (line   6)
* qOffsets packet:                       General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 139)
* qP packet:                             General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 148)
* qRcmd packet:                          General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 157)
* qsThreadInfo packet:                   General Query Packets.
                                                              (line  60)
* qSupported packet:                     General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 182)
* qSymbol packet:                        General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 292)
* qThreadExtraInfo packet:               General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 328)
* query annotation:                      Prompting.           (line  36)
* quit [EXPRESSION]:                     Quitting GDB.        (line   6)
* quit annotation:                       Errors.              (line   6)
* quoted-insert (C-q or C-v):            Commands For Text.   (line  20)
* quotes in commands:                    Completion.          (line  57)
* quoting Ada internal identifiers:      Additions to Ada.    (line  76)
* quoting names:                         Symbols.             (line  14)
* qXfer packet:                          General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 354)
* r (run):                               Starting.            (line   6)
* r (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  25)
* R packet:                              Packets.             (line 235)
* r packet:                              Packets.             (line 230)
* raise exceptions:                      Set Catchpoints.     (line  64)
* range checking:                        Type Checking.       (line  65)
* ranges of breakpoints:                 Breakpoints.         (line  48)
* rbreak:                                Set Breaks.          (line 111)
* RDI heartbeat:                         ARM.                 (line  93)
* rdilogenable:                          ARM.                 (line  76)
* rdilogfile:                            ARM.                 (line  70)
* re-read-init-file (C-x C-r):           Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* read special object, remote request:   General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 354)
* read, file-i/o system call:            read.                (line   6)
* read-only sections:                    Files.               (line 258)
* reading symbols from relocatable object files: Files.       (line 132)
* reading symbols immediately:           Files.               (line  90)
* readline:                              Editing.             (line   6)
* readnow:                               Files.               (line  90)
* receive rights, GNU Hurd:              Hurd Native.         (line  85)
* recent tracepoint number:              Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line  31)
* record aggregates (Ada):               Omissions from Ada.  (line  44)
* record serial communications on file:  Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  60)
* recording a session script:            Bug Reporting.       (line 104)
* redirection:                           Input/Output.        (line   6)
* redraw-current-line ():                Commands For Moving. (line  30)
* reference card:                        Formatting Documentation.
                                                              (line   6)
* reference declarations:                C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line  51)
* refresh:                               TUI Commands.        (line  39)
* register stack, AMD29K:                A29K.                (line   6)
* registers:                             Registers.           (line   6)
* regs, Super-H:                         Super-H.             (line   9)
* regular expression:                    Set Breaks.          (line 111)
* reloading symbols:                     Symbols.             (line 208)
* reloading the overlay table:           Overlay Commands.    (line  52)
* relocatable object files, reading symbols from: Files.      (line 132)
* remote connection without stubs:       Server.              (line   6)
* remote debugging:                      Remote.              (line   6)
* remote memory comparison:              Memory.              (line 101)
* remote monitor prompt:                 MIPS Embedded.       (line 107)
* remote packets, enabling and disabling: Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  80)
* remote programs, interrupting:         Connecting.          (line  77)
* remote protocol debugging:             Debugging Output.    (line  86)
* remote protocol, binary data:          Overview.            (line  55)
* remote protocol, field separator:      Overview.            (line  47)
* remote query requests:                 General Query Packets.
                                                              (line   6)
* remote serial debugging summary:       Debug Session.       (line   6)
* remote serial debugging, overview:     remote stub.         (line  14)
* remote serial protocol:                Overview.            (line  14)
* remote serial stub:                    Stub Contents.       (line   6)
* remote serial stub list:               remote stub.         (line  54)
* remote serial stub, initialization:    Stub Contents.       (line  10)
* remote serial stub, main routine:      Stub Contents.       (line  15)
* remote stub, example:                  remote stub.         (line   6)
* remote stub, support routines:         Bootstrapping.       (line   6)
* remote target:                         Target Commands.     (line  58)
* remote target, limit break- and watchpoints: Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  75)
* remote timeout:                        Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  68)
* remote, a command:                     Remote.              (line  26)
* remotetimeout:                         Sparclet.            (line  12)
* remove actions from a tracepoint:      Tracepoint Actions.  (line  17)
* rename, file-i/o system call:          rename.              (line   6)
* Renesas:                               remote stub.         (line  63)
* Renesas SH download:                   H8/300.              (line  19)
* repeated array elements:               Print Settings.      (line 135)
* repeating command sequences:           Command Syntax.      (line  42)
* repeating commands:                    Command Syntax.      (line  21)
* reporting bugs in GDB:                 GDB Bugs.            (line   6)
* reprint the last value:                Data.                (line  21)
* reset SDI connection, M32R:            M32R/D.              (line  44)
* response time, MIPS debugging:         MIPS.                (line  10)
* restart:                               Checkpoint/Restart.  (line   6)
* restart CHECKPOINT-ID:                 Checkpoint/Restart.  (line  44)
* restore:                               Dump/Restore Files.  (line  41)
* restore data from a file:              Dump/Restore Files.  (line   6)
* result records in GDB/MI:              GDB/MI Result Records.
                                                              (line   6)
* resuming execution:                    Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line   6)
* RET (repeat last command):             Command Syntax.      (line  21)
* retransmit-timeout, MIPS protocol:     MIPS Embedded.       (line  83)
* return:                                Returning.           (line   6)
* returning from a function:             Returning.           (line   6)
* reverse-search:                        Search.              (line  16)
* reverse-search-history (C-r):          Commands For History.
                                                              (line  26)
* revert-line (M-r):                     Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  25)
* rewind program state:                  Checkpoint/Restart.  (line   6)
* Right:                                 TUI Keys.            (line  66)
* ROM at zero address, RDI:              ARM.                 (line  83)
* run:                                   Starting.            (line   6)
* run to main procedure:                 Starting.            (line  71)
* run until specified location:          Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 117)
* running:                               Starting.            (line   6)
* running and debugging Sparclet programs: Sparclet Execution.
                                                              (line   6)
* running VxWorks tasks:                 VxWorks Attach.      (line   6)
* running, on Sparclet:                  Sparclet.            (line  28)
* rwatch:                                Set Watchpoints.     (line  41)
* s (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  28)
* s (step):                              Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  46)
* s packet:                              Packets.             (line 241)
* S packet:                              Packets.             (line 247)
* save command history:                  Command History.     (line  36)
* save GDB output to a file:             Logging output.      (line   6)
* save tracepoints for future sessions:  save-tracepoints.    (line   6)
* save-tracepoints:                      save-tracepoints.    (line   6)
* scheduler locking mode:                Thread Stops.        (line  89)
* scope:                                 M2 Scope.            (line   6)
* scripting commands:                    Command Files.       (line   6)
* sdireset:                              M32R/D.              (line  44)
* sdistatus:                             M32R/D.              (line  47)
* SDS protocol:                          PowerPC.             (line  17)
* sds, a command:                        PowerPC.             (line  28)
* search:                                Search.              (line   9)
* searching source files:                Search.              (line   6)
* section:                               Files.               (line 182)
* section offsets, remote request:       General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 139)
* segment descriptor tables:             DJGPP Native.        (line  24)
* select trace snapshot:                 tfind.               (line   6)
* select-frame:                          Frames.              (line  51)
* selected frame:                        Stack.               (line  19)
* selecting frame silently:              Frames.              (line  51)
* self-insert (a, b, A, 1, !, ...):      Commands For Text.   (line  27)
* send command to E7000 monitor:         Renesas ICE.         (line  24)
* send command to remote monitor <1>:    Connecting.          (line 104)
* send command to remote monitor:        Remote.              (line  26)
* send command to simulator:             Embedded Processors. (line   9)
* send PMON command:                     MIPS Embedded.       (line 132)
* send rights, GNU Hurd:                 Hurd Native.         (line  85)
* separate debugging information files:  Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line   6)
* sequence-id, for GDB remote:           Overview.            (line  29)
* serial connections, debugging:         Debugging Output.    (line  86)
* serial device, Renesas micros:         Renesas Boards.      (line   6)
* serial line speed, Renesas micros:     Renesas Boards.      (line  11)
* serial line, target remote:            Connecting.          (line  18)
* serial port name:                      Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  40)
* serial protocol, GDB remote:           Overview.            (line  14)
* server, command prefix:                Command History.     (line  20)
* set:                                   Help.                (line 108)
* set ABI for MIPS:                      MIPS.                (line  55)
* set annotate:                          Annotations Overview.
                                                              (line  29)
* set architecture:                      Targets.             (line  21)
* set args:                              Arguments.           (line  21)
* set arm:                               ARM.                 (line  18)
* set auto-solib-add:                    Files.               (line 300)
* set backtrace:                         Backtrace.           (line  98)
* set board-address:                     M32R/D.              (line  21)
* set breakpoint pending:                Set Breaks.          (line 211)
* set breakpoints in many functions:     Set Breaks.          (line 111)
* set breakpoints on all functions:      Set Breaks.          (line 131)
* set can-use-hw-watchpoints:            Set Watchpoints.     (line  68)
* set case-sensitive:                    Symbols.             (line  27)
* set charset:                           Character Sets.      (line  47)
* set check range:                       Range Checking.      (line  34)
* set check type:                        Type Checking.       (line  42)
* set coerce-float-to-double:            ABI.                 (line  41)
* set com1base:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set com1irq:                           DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set com2base:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set com2irq:                           DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set com3base:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set com3irq:                           DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set com4base:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set com4irq:                           DJGPP Native.        (line 125)
* set complaints:                        Messages/Warnings.   (line  29)
* set confirm:                           Messages/Warnings.   (line  50)
* set cp-abi:                            ABI.                 (line  53)
* set cygwin-exceptions:                 Cygwin Native.       (line  30)
* set debug:                             Debugging Output.    (line  18)
* set debug hppa:                        HPPA.                (line  10)
* set debug mips:                        MIPS.                (line 104)
* set debug monitor:                     Target Commands.     (line 108)
* set debug nto-debug:                   Neutrino.            (line   9)
* set debug-file-directory:              Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line  47)
* set debugevents:                       Cygwin Native.       (line  59)
* set debugexceptions:                   Cygwin Native.       (line  70)
* set debugexec:                         Cygwin Native.       (line  66)
* set debugmemory:                       Cygwin Native.       (line  74)
* set demangle-style:                    Print Settings.      (line 255)
* set detach-on-fork:                    Processes.           (line  55)
* set disassembly-flavor:                Machine Code.        (line  68)
* set download-path:                     M32R/D.              (line  15)
* set editing:                           Editing.             (line  15)
* set endian:                            Byte Order.          (line  13)
* set environment:                       Environment.         (line  39)
* set exceptions, Hurd command:          Hurd Native.         (line  40)
* set exec-done-display:                 Debugging Output.    (line  11)
* set extension-language:                Show.                (line  30)
* set follow-fork-mode:                  Processes.           (line  35)
* set gnutarget:                         Target Commands.     (line  28)
* set hash, for remote monitors:         Target Commands.     (line  99)
* set height:                            Screen Size.         (line  21)
* set history expansion:                 Command History.     (line  65)
* set history filename:                  Command History.     (line  26)
* set history save:                      Command History.     (line  36)
* set history size:                      Command History.     (line  45)
* set host-charset:                      Character Sets.      (line  34)
* set inferior controlling terminal:     Input/Output.        (line  44)
* set inferior-tty:                      Input/Output.        (line  49)
* set input-radix:                       Numbers.             (line  14)
* set language:                          Manually.            (line   9)
* set listsize:                          List.                (line  32)
* set logging:                           Logging output.      (line   9)
* set machine:                           Renesas Special.     (line   8)
* set max-user-call-depth:               Define.              (line  73)
* set memory MOD:                        H8/500.              (line   6)
* set mips abi:                          MIPS.                (line  55)
* set mips mask-address:                 MIPS.                (line  84)
* set mips saved-gpreg-size:             MIPS.                (line  32)
* set mips stack-arg-size:               MIPS.                (line  50)
* set mipsfpu:                           MIPS Embedded.       (line  60)
* set monitor-prompt, MIPS remote:       MIPS Embedded.       (line 107)
* set monitor-warnings, MIPS remote:     MIPS Embedded.       (line 123)
* set new-console:                       Cygwin Native.       (line  42)
* set new-group:                         Cygwin Native.       (line  51)
* set opaque-type-resolution:            Symbols.             (line 232)
* set osabi:                             ABI.                 (line  11)
* set output-radix:                      Numbers.             (line  31)
* set overload-resolution:               Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line  47)
* set pagination:                        Screen Size.         (line  38)
* set print:                             Print Settings.      (line  11)
* set processor:                         Targets.             (line  31)
* set procfs-file:                       SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  59)
* set procfs-trace:                      SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  53)
* set prompt:                            Prompt.              (line  16)
* set radix:                             Numbers.             (line  44)
* set rdiheartbeat:                      ARM.                 (line  93)
* set rdiromatzero:                      ARM.                 (line  83)
* set remote:                            Remote configuration.
                                                              (line   6)
* set remote system-call-allowed:        system.              (line  38)
* set remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs: MIPS.               (line  94)
* set remoteaddhost:                     WinCE.               (line  24)
* set remotecache:                       Caching Remote Data. (line  13)
* set remotedirectory:                   WinCE.               (line   9)
* set remoteupload:                      WinCE.               (line  16)
* set retransmit-timeout:                MIPS Embedded.       (line  83)
* set rstack_high_address:               A29K.                (line   6)
* set sdstimeout:                        PowerPC.             (line  21)
* set server-address:                    M32R/D.              (line  27)
* set shell:                             Cygwin Native.       (line  78)
* set signal-thread:                     Hurd Native.         (line  21)
* set signals, Hurd command:             Hurd Native.         (line  11)
* set sigs, Hurd command:                Hurd Native.         (line  11)
* set sigthread:                         Hurd Native.         (line  21)
* set solib-absolute-prefix:             Files.               (line 366)
* set solib-search-path:                 Files.               (line 380)
* set step-mode:                         Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  92)
* set stop-on-solib-events:              Files.               (line 346)
* set stopped, Hurd command:             Hurd Native.         (line  32)
* set struct-convention:                 i386.                (line   7)
* set substitute-path:                   Source Path.         (line 114)
* set symbol-reloading:                  Symbols.             (line 215)
* set syn-garbage-limit, MIPS remote:    MIPS Embedded.       (line  98)
* set target-charset:                    Character Sets.      (line  28)
* set task, Hurd commands:               Hurd Native.         (line  49)
* set thread, Hurd command:              Hurd Native.         (line  91)
* set timeout:                           MIPS Embedded.       (line  83)
* set trace-commands:                    Messages/Warnings.   (line  65)
* set tracepoint:                        Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line   6)
* set trust-readonly-sections:           Files.               (line 258)
* set tui active-border-mode:            TUI Configuration.   (line  25)
* set tui border-kind:                   TUI Configuration.   (line  10)
* set tui border-mode:                   TUI Configuration.   (line  30)
* set unwindonsignal:                    Calling.             (line  26)
* set usehardbreakpoints, E7000:         Renesas ICE.         (line  41)
* set variable:                          Assignment.          (line  16)
* set verbose:                           Messages/Warnings.   (line  15)
* set watchdog:                          Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 245)
* set width:                             Screen Size.         (line  21)
* set write:                             Patching.            (line  15)
* set-mark (C-@):                        Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  32)
* set_debug_traps:                       Stub Contents.       (line  10)
* setting variables:                     Assignment.          (line   6)
* setting watchpoints:                   Set Watchpoints.     (line   6)
* SH:                                    remote stub.         (line  63)
* sh-stub.c:                             remote stub.         (line  63)
* share:                                 Files.               (line 327)
* shared libraries:                      Files.               (line 281)
* sharedlibrary:                         Files.               (line 327)
* shell:                                 Shell Commands.      (line  10)
* shell escape:                          Shell Commands.      (line  10)
* show:                                  Help.                (line 113)
* show all user variables:               Convenience Vars.    (line  37)
* show annotate:                         Annotations Overview.
                                                              (line  34)
* show architecture:                     Targets.             (line  21)
* show args:                             Arguments.           (line  28)
* show arm:                              ARM.                 (line  22)
* show auto-solib-add:                   Files.               (line 317)
* show backtrace:                        Backtrace.           (line 105)
* show board-address:                    M32R/D.              (line  24)
* show breakpoint pending:               Set Breaks.          (line 211)
* show can-use-hw-watchpoints:           Set Watchpoints.     (line  71)
* show case-sensitive:                   Symbols.             (line  40)
* show charset:                          Character Sets.      (line  53)
* show check range:                      Range Checking.      (line  34)
* show check type:                       Type Checking.       (line  42)
* show coerce-float-to-double:           ABI.                 (line  50)
* show com1base:                         DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show com1irq:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show com2base:                         DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show com2irq:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show com3base:                         DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show com3irq:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show com4base:                         DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show com4irq:                          DJGPP Native.        (line 137)
* show commands:                         Command History.     (line  78)
* show complaints:                       Messages/Warnings.   (line  35)
* show confirm:                          Messages/Warnings.   (line  56)
* show convenience:                      Convenience Vars.    (line  37)
* show copying:                          Help.                (line 137)
* show cp-abi:                           ABI.                 (line  53)
* show cygwin-exceptions:                Cygwin Native.       (line  38)
* show debug:                            Debugging Output.    (line  22)
* show debug mips:                       MIPS.                (line 108)
* show debug monitor:                    Target Commands.     (line 112)
* show debug nto-debug:                  Neutrino.            (line  13)
* show debug-file-directory:             Separate Debug Files.
                                                              (line  51)
* show detach-on-follow:                 Processes.           (line  71)
* show directories:                      Source Path.         (line 111)
* show disassembly-flavor:               Machine Code.        (line  77)
* show download-path:                    M32R/D.              (line  18)
* show editing:                          Editing.             (line  22)
* show environment:                      Environment.         (line  33)
* show exceptions, Hurd command:         Hurd Native.         (line  46)
* show exec-done-display:                Debugging Output.    (line  14)
* show follow-fork-mode:                 Processes.           (line  49)
* show gnutarget:                        Target Commands.     (line  40)
* show hash, for remote monitors:        Target Commands.     (line 105)
* show height:                           Screen Size.         (line  21)
* show history:                          Command History.     (line  70)
* show host-charset:                     Character Sets.      (line  56)
* show inferior-tty:                     Input/Output.        (line  52)
* show input-radix:                      Numbers.             (line  36)
* show language:                         Show.                (line  10)
* show last commands:                    Command History.     (line  78)
* show listsize:                         List.                (line  36)
* show logging:                          Logging output.      (line  26)
* show machine:                          Renesas Special.     (line   8)
* show max-user-call-depth:              Define.              (line  73)
* show mips abi:                         MIPS.                (line  77)
* show mips mask-address:                MIPS.                (line  90)
* show mips saved-gpreg-size:            MIPS.                (line  47)
* show mipsfpu:                          MIPS Embedded.       (line  60)
* show monitor-prompt, MIPS remote:      MIPS Embedded.       (line 119)
* show monitor-warnings, MIPS remote:    MIPS Embedded.       (line 129)
* show new-console:                      Cygwin Native.       (line  47)
* show new-group:                        Cygwin Native.       (line  56)
* show opaque-type-resolution:           Symbols.             (line 247)
* show osabi:                            ABI.                 (line  11)
* show output-radix:                     Numbers.             (line  39)
* show overload-resolution:              Debugging C plus plus.
                                                              (line  64)
* show pagination:                       Screen Size.         (line  42)
* show paths:                            Environment.         (line  29)
* show print:                            Print Settings.      (line  39)
* show processor:                        Targets.             (line  31)
* show procfs-file:                      SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  64)
* show procfs-trace:                     SVR4 Process Information.
                                                              (line  56)
* show prompt:                           Prompt.              (line  19)
* show radix:                            Numbers.             (line  44)
* show rdiheartbeat:                     ARM.                 (line  98)
* show rdiromatzero:                     ARM.                 (line  90)
* show remote:                           Remote configuration.
                                                              (line   6)
* show remote system-call-allowed:       system.              (line  42)
* show remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs: MIPS.              (line 100)
* show remoteaddhost:                    WinCE.               (line  28)
* show remotecache:                      Caching Remote Data. (line  18)
* show remotedirectory:                  WinCE.               (line  13)
* show remoteupload:                     WinCE.               (line  21)
* show retransmit-timeout:               MIPS Embedded.       (line  83)
* show rstack_high_address:              A29K.                (line  17)
* show sdstimeout:                       PowerPC.             (line  25)
* show server-address:                   M32R/D.              (line  31)
* show shell:                            Cygwin Native.       (line  82)
* show signal-thread:                    Hurd Native.         (line  28)
* show signals, Hurd command:            Hurd Native.         (line  17)
* show sigs, Hurd command:               Hurd Native.         (line  17)
* show sigthread:                        Hurd Native.         (line  28)
* show solib-absolute-prefix:            Files.               (line 377)
* show solib-search-path:                Files.               (line 390)
* show stop-on-solib-events:             Files.               (line 352)
* show stopped, Hurd command:            Hurd Native.         (line  37)
* show struct-convention:                i386.                (line  15)
* show substitute-path:                  Source Path.         (line 151)
* show symbol-reloading:                 Symbols.             (line 229)
* show syn-garbage-limit, MIPS remote:   MIPS Embedded.       (line 103)
* show target-charset:                   Character Sets.      (line  59)
* show task, Hurd commands:              Hurd Native.         (line  57)
* show thread, Hurd command:             Hurd Native.         (line 101)
* show timeout:                          MIPS Embedded.       (line  83)
* show unwindonsignal:                   Calling.             (line  33)
* show usehardbreakpoints, E7000:        Renesas ICE.         (line  41)
* show user:                             Define.              (line  67)
* show values:                           Value History.       (line  47)
* show verbose:                          Messages/Warnings.   (line  21)
* show version:                          Help.                (line 127)
* show warranty:                         Help.                (line 141)
* show width:                            Screen Size.         (line  21)
* show write:                            Patching.            (line  26)
* show-all-if-ambiguous:                 Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 164)
* show-all-if-unmodified:                Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 170)
* si (stepi):                            Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 190)
* signal:                                Signaling.           (line   6)
* signal annotation:                     Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  42)
* signal-name annotation:                Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  22)
* signal-name-end annotation:            Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  22)
* signal-string annotation:              Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  22)
* signal-string-end annotation:          Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  22)
* signalled annotation:                  Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  22)
* signals:                               Signals.             (line   6)
* SIGQUIT signal, dump core of GDB:      Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line  69)
* silent:                                Break Commands.      (line  38)
* sim:                                   Z8000.               (line  15)
* sim, a command:                        Embedded Processors. (line  13)
* simulator, Z8000:                      Z8000.               (line   6)
* size of remote memory accesses:        Packets.             (line 172)
* size of screen:                        Screen Size.         (line   6)
* snapshot of a process:                 Checkpoint/Restart.  (line   6)
* software watchpoints:                  Set Watchpoints.     (line  22)
* source:                                Command Files.       (line  14)
* source annotation:                     Source Annotations.  (line   6)
* source file and line of a symbol:      Print Settings.      (line  51)
* source line and its code address:      Machine Code.        (line   6)
* source path:                           Source Path.         (line   6)
* Sparc:                                 remote stub.         (line  66)
* sparc-stub.c:                          remote stub.         (line  66)
* sparcl-stub.c:                         remote stub.         (line  69)
* Sparclet:                              Sparclet.            (line   6)
* SparcLite:                             remote stub.         (line  69)
* Special Fortran commands:              Special Fortran commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* speed:                                 Renesas Boards.      (line  11)
* spr:                                   OpenRISC 1000.       (line  33)
* SSE registers (x86):                   Registers.           (line  71)
* ST2000 auxiliary commands:             ST2000.              (line  26)
* st2000 CMD:                            ST2000.              (line  30)
* stack frame:                           Frames.              (line   6)
* stack on Alpha:                        MIPS.                (line   6)
* stack on MIPS:                         MIPS.                (line   6)
* stack pointer register:                Registers.           (line  26)
* stacking targets:                      Active Targets.      (line   6)
* standard registers:                    Registers.           (line  26)
* start:                                 Starting.            (line  70)
* start a new trace experiment:          Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line   6)
* start-kbd-macro (C-x ():               Keyboard Macros.     (line   6)
* starting:                              Starting.            (line   6)
* starting annotation:                   Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line   6)
* startup code, and backtrace:           Backtrace.           (line  87)
* stat, file-i/o system call:            stat/fstat.          (line   6)
* static members of C++ objects:         Print Settings.      (line 301)
* static members of Pacal objects:       Print Settings.      (line 312)
* status of trace data collection:       Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line  20)
* status output in GDB/MI:               GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line  92)
* STDBUG commands (ST2000):              ST2000.              (line  30)
* step:                                  Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  46)
* stepi:                                 Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 190)
* stepping:                              Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line   6)
* stepping into functions with no line info: Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line  93)
* stop a running trace experiment:       Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line  12)
* stop on C++ exceptions:                Set Catchpoints.     (line  13)
* stop reply packets:                    Stop Reply Packets.  (line   6)
* stop, a pseudo-command:                Hooks.               (line  21)
* stopped threads:                       Thread Stops.        (line  31)
* stopping annotation:                   Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line   6)
* stream records in GDB/MI:              GDB/MI Stream Records.
                                                              (line   6)
* struct return convention:              i386.                (line   7)
* struct stat, in file-i/o protocol:     struct stat.         (line   6)
* struct timeval, in file-i/o protocol:  struct timeval.      (line   6)
* struct user contents:                  OS Information.      (line   9)
* struct/union returned in registers:    i386.                (line   7)
* stub example, remote debugging:        remote stub.         (line   6)
* stupid questions:                      Messages/Warnings.   (line  50)
* Super-H:                               Super-H.             (line   6)
* supported packets, remote query:       General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 182)
* switching threads:                     Threads.             (line   6)
* switching threads automatically:       Threads.             (line 152)
* symbol decoding style, C++:            Print Settings.      (line 255)
* symbol dump:                           Symbols.             (line 250)
* symbol from address:                   Symbols.             (line  54)
* symbol lookup, remote request:         General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 292)
* symbol names:                          Symbols.             (line  14)
* symbol overloading:                    Breakpoint Menus.    (line   6)
* symbol table:                          Files.               (line   6)
* symbol tables, listing GDB's internal: Symbols.             (line 269)
* symbol, source file and line:          Print Settings.      (line  51)
* symbol-file:                           Files.               (line  45)
* symbols, reading from relocatable object files: Files.      (line 132)
* symbols, reading immediately:          Files.               (line  90)
* synchronize with remote MIPS target:   MIPS Embedded.       (line  98)
* syscall DSO:                           Files.               (line 162)
* sysinfo:                               DJGPP Native.        (line  19)
* system calls and thread breakpoints:   Thread Stops.        (line  36)
* system, file-i/o system call:          system.              (line   6)
* t packet:                              Packets.             (line 254)
* T packet:                              Packets.             (line 259)
* T packet reply:                        Stop Reply Packets.  (line  22)
* tabset NCHARS:                         TUI Commands.        (line  65)
* target:                                Target Commands.     (line  49)
* target abug:                           M68K.                (line   9)
* target architecture:                   Targets.             (line  17)
* target array:                          MIPS Embedded.       (line  49)
* target byte order:                     Byte Order.          (line   6)
* target character set:                  Character Sets.      (line   6)
* target cpu32bug:                       M68K.                (line  12)
* target dbug:                           M68K.                (line  15)
* target ddb PORT:                       MIPS Embedded.       (line  41)
* target debugging info:                 Debugging Output.    (line 111)
* target dink32:                         PowerPC.             (line   6)
* target e7000, with H8/300:             H8/300.              (line  11)
* target e7000, with Renesas ICE:        Renesas ICE.         (line   6)
* target e7000, with Renesas SH:         SH.                  (line  11)
* target est:                            M68K.                (line  18)
* target hms, and serial protocol:       Renesas Boards.      (line  48)
* target hms, with H8/300:               H8/300.              (line   6)
* target hms, with Renesas SH:           SH.                  (line   6)
* target jtag:                           OpenRISC 1000.       (line   9)
* target lsi PORT:                       MIPS Embedded.       (line  44)
* target m32r:                           M32R/D.              (line   6)
* target m32rsdi:                        M32R/D.              (line   9)
* target mips PORT:                      MIPS Embedded.       (line  14)
* target op50n:                          PA.                  (line   6)
* target output in GDB/MI:               GDB/MI Output Syntax.
                                                              (line 108)
* target pmon PORT:                      MIPS Embedded.       (line  38)
* target ppcbug:                         PowerPC.             (line   9)
* target ppcbug1:                        PowerPC.             (line  10)
* target r3900:                          MIPS Embedded.       (line  46)
* target rdi:                            ARM.                 (line   6)
* target rdp:                            ARM.                 (line  11)
* target remote:                         Connecting.          (line  11)
* target rom68k:                         M68K.                (line  21)
* target rombug:                         M68K.                (line  25)
* target sds:                            PowerPC.             (line  14)
* target sh3, with H8/300:               H8/300.              (line  14)
* target sh3, with SH:                   SH.                  (line  14)
* target sh3e, with H8/300:              H8/300.              (line  14)
* target sh3e, with SH:                  SH.                  (line  14)
* target sim, with Z8000:                Z8000.               (line  15)
* target sparclite:                      Sparclite.           (line   6)
* target vxworks:                        VxWorks.             (line   6)
* target w89k:                           PA.                  (line   9)
* task attributes (GNU Hurd):            Hurd Native.         (line  49)
* task exception port, GNU Hurd:         Hurd Native.         (line  68)
* task suspend count:                    Hurd Native.         (line  60)
* tbreak:                                Set Breaks.          (line  74)
* TCP port, target remote:               Connecting.          (line  29)
* tdump:                                 tdump.               (line   6)
* terminal:                              Input/Output.        (line   6)
* Text User Interface:                   TUI.                 (line   6)
* tfind:                                 tfind.               (line   6)
* thbreak:                               Set Breaks.          (line 101)
* this, inside C++ member functions:     C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line  22)
* thread apply:                          Threads.             (line 143)
* thread attributes info, remote request: General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 328)
* thread breakpoints:                    Thread Stops.        (line  10)
* thread breakpoints and system calls:   Thread Stops.        (line  36)
* thread default settings, GNU Hurd:     Hurd Native.         (line 131)
* thread identifier (GDB):               Threads.             (line  56)
* thread identifier (GDB), on HP-UX:     Threads.             (line  82)
* thread identifier (system):            Threads.             (line  44)
* thread identifier (system), on HP-UX:  Threads.             (line  86)
* thread info (Solaris):                 Threads.             (line 126)
* thread information, remote request:    General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 148)
* thread number:                         Threads.             (line  56)
* thread properties, GNU Hurd:           Hurd Native.         (line  91)
* thread suspend count, GNU Hurd:        Hurd Native.         (line 110)
* thread THREADNO:                       Threads.             (line 128)
* threads and watchpoints:               Set Watchpoints.     (line 143)
* threads of execution:                  Threads.             (line   6)
* threads, automatic switching:          Threads.             (line 152)
* threads, continuing:                   Thread Stops.        (line  69)
* threads, stopped:                      Thread Stops.        (line  31)
* time of command execution:             Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 225)
* timeout for commands:                  Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 245)
* timeout for serial communications:     Remote configuration.
                                                              (line  68)
* timeout, MIPS protocol:                MIPS Embedded.       (line  83)
* tload, M32R:                           M32R/D.              (line  39)
* trace:                                 Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line   6)
* trace experiment, status of:           Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line  20)
* traceback:                             Backtrace.           (line   6)
* tracepoint actions:                    Tracepoint Actions.  (line   6)
* tracepoint data, display:              tdump.               (line   6)
* tracepoint deletion:                   Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line  34)
* tracepoint number:                     Create and Delete Tracepoints.
                                                              (line  31)
* tracepoint packets:                    Tracepoint Packets.  (line   6)
* tracepoint pass count:                 Tracepoint Passcounts.
                                                              (line   6)
* tracepoint variables:                  Tracepoint Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* tracepoints:                           Tracepoints.         (line   6)
* trailing underscore, in Fortran symbols: Fortran.           (line   9)
* translating between character sets:    Character Sets.      (line   6)
* transpose-chars (C-t):                 Commands For Text.   (line  30)
* transpose-words (M-t):                 Commands For Text.   (line  36)
* tstart:                                Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line   6)
* tstatus:                               Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line  20)
* tstop:                                 Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment.
                                                              (line  12)
* tty:                                   Input/Output.        (line  23)
* TUI:                                   TUI.                 (line   6)
* TUI commands:                          TUI Commands.        (line   6)
* TUI configuration variables:           TUI Configuration.   (line   6)
* TUI key bindings:                      TUI Keys.            (line   6)
* tui reg:                               TUI Commands.        (line  42)
* TUI single key mode:                   TUI Single Key Mode. (line   6)
* type casting memory:                   Expressions.         (line  42)
* type chain of a data type:             Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 174)
* type checking:                         Checks.              (line  31)
* type conversions in C++:               C plus plus expressions.
                                                              (line  27)
* u (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  31)
* u (until):                             Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 117)
* UDP port, target remote:               Connecting.          (line  49)
* undisplay:                             Auto Display.        (line  46)
* undo (C-_ or C-x C-u):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                              (line  22)
* unions in structures, printing:        Print Settings.      (line 195)
* universal-argument ():                 Numeric Arguments.   (line  10)
* unix-filename-rubout ():               Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  32)
* unix-line-discard (C-u):               Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  12)
* unix-word-rubout (C-w):                Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  28)
* unknown address, locating:             Output Formats.      (line  35)
* unlink, file-i/o system call:          unlink.              (line   6)
* unlinked object files:                 Files.               (line  26)
* unload symbols from shared libraries:  Files.               (line 336)
* unmap an overlay:                      Overlay Commands.    (line  39)
* unmapped overlays:                     How Overlays Work.   (line   6)
* unset environment:                     Environment.         (line  55)
* unset substitute-path:                 Source Path.         (line 143)
* unsupported languages:                 Unsupported languages.
                                                              (line   6)
* until:                                 Continuing and Stepping.
                                                              (line 117)
* unwind stack in called functions:      Calling.             (line  26)
* Up:                                    TUI Keys.            (line  57)
* up:                                    Selection.           (line  35)
* up-silently:                           Selection.           (line  64)
* upcase-word (M-u):                     Commands For Text.   (line  41)
* update:                                TUI Commands.        (line  57)
* upload, M32R:                          M32R/D.              (line  34)
* use only software watchpoints:         Set Watchpoints.     (line  60)
* use_dbt_break:                         M32R/D.              (line  64)
* use_debug_dma:                         M32R/D.              (line  53)
* use_ib_break:                          M32R/D.              (line  61)
* use_mon_code:                          M32R/D.              (line  57)
* user-defined command:                  Define.              (line   6)
* user-defined macros:                   Macros.              (line  54)
* user-defined variables:                Convenience Vars.    (line   6)
* v (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  34)
* value history:                         Value History.       (line   6)
* value optimized out, in backtrace:     Backtrace.           (line  65)
* variable name conflict:                Variables.           (line  36)
* variable object debugging info:        Debugging Output.    (line 122)
* variable objects in GDB/MI:            GDB/MI Variable Objects.
                                                              (line  41)
* variable values, wrong:                Variables.           (line  58)
* variables, readline:                   Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line  34)
* variables, setting:                    Assignment.          (line  16)
* vCont packet:                          Packets.             (line 273)
* vCont? packet:                         Packets.             (line 299)
* vector unit:                           Vector Unit.         (line   6)
* vector, auxiliary:                     OS Information.      (line  21)
* verbose operation:                     Messages/Warnings.   (line   6)
* verify remote memory image:            Memory.              (line 101)
* vFlashDone packet:                     Packets.             (line 349)
* vFlashErase packet:                    Packets.             (line 310)
* vFlashWrite packet:                    Packets.             (line 327)
* virtual functions (C++) display:       Print Settings.      (line 323)
* visible-stats:                         Readline Init File Syntax.
                                                              (line 179)
* VTBL display:                          Print Settings.      (line 323)
* VxWorks:                               VxWorks.             (line   6)
* vxworks-timeout:                       VxWorks.             (line  23)
* w (SingleKey TUI key):                 TUI Single Key Mode. (line  37)
* watch:                                 Set Watchpoints.     (line  33)
* watchdog timer:                        Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 245)
* watchpoint annotation:                 Annotations for Running.
                                                              (line  50)
* watchpoints:                           Breakpoints.         (line  20)
* watchpoints and threads:               Set Watchpoints.     (line 143)
* weak alias functions:                  Calling.             (line  36)
* whatis:                                Symbols.             (line  66)
* where:                                 Backtrace.           (line  34)
* where to look for shared libraries:    Files.               (line 361)
* while:                                 Command Files.       (line  67)
* while-stepping (tracepoints):          Tracepoint Actions.  (line  67)
* wild pointer, interpreting:            Print Settings.      (line  79)
* Windows CE:                            WinCE.               (line   6)
* winheight:                             TUI Commands.        (line  61)
* word completion:                       Completion.          (line   6)
* working directory:                     Source Path.         (line  99)
* working directory (of your program):   Working Directory.   (line   6)
* working language:                      Languages.           (line  13)
* write data into object, remote request: General Query Packets.
                                                              (line 410)
* write, file-i/o system call:           write.               (line   6)
* writing into corefiles:                Patching.            (line   6)
* writing into executables:              Patching.            (line   6)
* wrong values:                          Variables.           (line  58)
* x (examine memory):                    Memory.              (line   9)
* x command, default address:            Machine Code.        (line  30)
* X packet:                              Packets.             (line 357)
* x(examine), and info line:             Machine Code.        (line  30)
* x86 hardware debug registers:          Maintenance Commands.
                                                              (line 211)
* yank (C-y):                            Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  59)
* yank-last-arg (M-. or M-_):            Commands For History.
                                                              (line  64)
* yank-nth-arg (M-C-y):                  Commands For History.
                                                              (line  55)
* yank-pop (M-y):                        Commands For Killing.
                                                              (line  62)
* yanking text:                          Readline Killing Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* z packet:                              Packets.             (line 370)
* Z packets:                             Packets.             (line 370)
* Z0 packet:                             Packets.             (line 385)
* z0 packet:                             Packets.             (line 385)
* Z1 packet:                             Packets.             (line 411)
* z1 packet:                             Packets.             (line 411)
* z2 packet:                             Packets.             (line 432)
* Z2 packet:                             Packets.             (line 432)
* Z3 packet:                             Packets.             (line 446)
* z3 packet:                             Packets.             (line 446)
* z4 packet:                             Packets.             (line 460)
* Z4 packet:                             Packets.             (line 460)
* Z8000:                                 Z8000.               (line   6)
* Zilog Z8000 simulator:                 Z8000.               (line   6)
* {TYPE}:                                Expressions.         (line  42)


\1f
Tag Table:
Node: Top\7f1179
Node: Summary\7f3605
Node: Free Software\7f5241
Node: Contributors\7f10809
Node: Sample Session\7f18793
Node: Invocation\7f25629
Node: Invoking GDB\7f26173
Node: File Options\7f28486
Node: Mode Options\7f31246
Node: Startup\7f37658
Ref: Startup-Footnote-1\7f40113
Node: Quitting GDB\7f40222
Node: Shell Commands\7f41119
Node: Logging output\7f41961
Node: Commands\7f42807
Node: Command Syntax\7f43445
Node: Completion\7f45611
Node: Help\7f49946
Node: Running\7f55176
Node: Compilation\7f56358
Node: Starting\7f58997
Node: Arguments\7f63886
Node: Environment\7f65156
Node: Working Directory\7f68424
Node: Input/Output\7f69532
Node: Attach\7f71503
Node: Kill Process\7f73939
Node: Threads\7f74905
Node: Processes\7f81049
Node: Checkpoint/Restart\7f86100
Ref: Checkpoint/Restart-Footnote-1\7f90633
Node: Stopping\7f90668
Node: Breakpoints\7f91815
Node: Set Breaks\7f95233
Node: Set Watchpoints\7f106952
Node: Set Catchpoints\7f114790
Node: Delete Breaks\7f118268
Node: Disabling\7f119985
Node: Conditions\7f122752
Node: Break Commands\7f127700
Node: Breakpoint Menus\7f130585
Node: Error in Breakpoints\7f132317
Node: Breakpoint related warnings\7f133895
Node: Continuing and Stepping\7f136222
Node: Signals\7f145562
Node: Thread Stops\7f149834
Node: Stack\7f154439
Node: Frames\7f155914
Node: Backtrace\7f158666
Ref: Backtrace-Footnote-1\7f163556
Node: Selection\7f163744
Node: Frame Info\7f166608
Node: Source\7f168939
Node: List\7f169943
Node: Edit\7f173472
Ref: Edit-Footnote-1\7f175203
Node: Search\7f175438
Node: Source Path\7f176246
Ref: set substitute-path\7f182000
Node: Machine Code\7f184221
Node: Data\7f187631
Node: Expressions\7f190012
Node: Variables\7f191980
Node: Arrays\7f195966
Node: Output Formats\7f198495
Ref: Output Formats-Footnote-1\7f200717
Node: Memory\7f200874
Node: Auto Display\7f205910
Node: Print Settings\7f209682
Node: Value History\7f221468
Node: Convenience Vars\7f223884
Node: Registers\7f227408
Ref: Registers-Footnote-1\7f232083
Node: Floating Point Hardware\7f232478
Node: Vector Unit\7f233008
Node: OS Information\7f233393
Node: Memory Region Attributes\7f235391
Node: Dump/Restore Files\7f239207
Node: Core File Generation\7f241510
Node: Character Sets\7f242742
Node: Caching Remote Data\7f249574
Node: Macros\7f250712
Node: Tracepoints\7f257663
Node: Set Tracepoints\7f259505
Node: Create and Delete Tracepoints\7f260704
Node: Enable and Disable Tracepoints\7f262348
Node: Tracepoint Passcounts\7f263047
Node: Tracepoint Actions\7f264471
Node: Listing Tracepoints\7f267471
Node: Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment\7f268592
Node: Analyze Collected Data\7f269770
Node: tfind\7f271075
Node: tdump\7f275468
Node: save-tracepoints\7f277127
Node: Tracepoint Variables\7f277546
Node: Overlays\7f278561
Node: How Overlays Work\7f279281
Ref: A code overlay\7f281841
Node: Overlay Commands\7f285279
Node: Automatic Overlay Debugging\7f289469
Node: Overlay Sample Program\7f291610
Node: Languages\7f293370
Node: Setting\7f294533
Node: Filenames\7f296235
Node: Manually\7f297021
Node: Automatically\7f298230
Node: Show\7f299291
Node: Checks\7f300613
Node: Type Checking\7f302003
Node: Range Checking\7f304736
Node: Supported languages\7f307137
Node: C\7f308310
Node: C Operators\7f309541
Node: C Constants\7f313922
Node: C plus plus expressions\7f316409
Node: C Defaults\7f319952
Node: C Checks\7f320635
Node: Debugging C\7f321358
Node: Debugging C plus plus\7f321878
Node: Objective-C\7f324964
Node: Method Names in Commands\7f325425
Node: The Print Command with Objective-C\7f327140
Node: Fortran\7f327791
Node: Fortran Operators\7f328516
Node: Fortran Defaults\7f329106
Node: Special Fortran commands\7f329491
Node: Pascal\7f329991
Node: Modula-2\7f330506
Node: M2 Operators\7f331481
Node: Built-In Func/Proc\7f334479
Node: M2 Constants\7f337257
Node: M2 Types\7f338858
Node: M2 Defaults\7f342131
Node: Deviations\7f342736
Node: M2 Checks\7f343837
Node: M2 Scope\7f344655
Node: GDB/M2\7f345679
Node: Ada\7f346591
Node: Ada Mode Intro\7f347390
Node: Omissions from Ada\7f349262
Node: Additions to Ada\7f353223
Node: Stopping Before Main Program\7f357121
Node: Ada Glitches\7f357653
Node: Unsupported languages\7f359631
Node: Symbols\7f360321
Node: Altering\7f373682
Node: Assignment\7f374651
Node: Jumping\7f377756
Node: Signaling\7f379913
Node: Returning\7f381044
Node: Calling\7f382246
Node: Patching\7f384139
Node: GDB Files\7f385216
Node: Files\7f385757
Node: Separate Debug Files\7f403498
Node: Symbol Errors\7f411840
Node: Targets\7f415443
Node: Active Targets\7f416972
Node: Target Commands\7f418551
Node: Byte Order\7f423791
Node: Remote\7f424783
Node: Remote Debugging\7f425893
Node: Connecting\7f426283
Node: Server\7f431151
Ref: Server-Footnote-1\7f435514
Node: Remote configuration\7f435634
Ref: set remotebreak\7f436658
Ref: set remote hardware-watchpoint-limit\7f438383
Ref: set remote hardware-breakpoint-limit\7f438383
Node: remote stub\7f440297
Node: Stub Contents\7f443194
Node: Bootstrapping\7f445305
Node: Debug Session\7f449114
Node: Configurations\7f450674
Node: Native\7f451443
Node: HP-UX\7f452037
Node: BSD libkvm Interface\7f452326
Node: SVR4 Process Information\7f453397
Node: DJGPP Native\7f456827
Node: Cygwin Native\7f463407
Node: Non-debug DLL symbols\7f466805
Node: Hurd Native\7f471355
Node: Neutrino\7f476618
Node: Embedded OS\7f476993
Node: VxWorks\7f477469
Node: VxWorks Connection\7f479686
Node: VxWorks Download\7f480620
Node: VxWorks Attach\7f482355
Node: Embedded Processors\7f482753
Node: ARM\7f484130
Node: H8/300\7f487084
Node: Renesas Boards\7f488583
Node: Renesas ICE\7f493007
Node: Renesas Special\7f494734
Node: H8/500\7f495184
Node: M32R/D\7f495559
Node: M68K\7f497264
Node: MIPS Embedded\7f497898
Node: OpenRISC 1000\7f502843
Node: PowerPC\7f505697
Node: PA\7f506361
Node: SH\7f506641
Node: Sparclet\7f507102
Node: Sparclet File\7f508574
Node: Sparclet Connection\7f509456
Node: Sparclet Download\7f509936
Node: Sparclet Execution\7f510987
Node: Sparclite\7f511580
Node: ST2000\7f511956
Node: Z8000\7f513501
Node: AVR\7f514882
Node: CRIS\7f515245
Node: Super-H\7f516223
Node: WinCE\7f516479
Node: Architectures\7f517387
Node: i386\7f517735
Node: A29K\7f518419
Node: Alpha\7f519258
Node: MIPS\7f519391
Node: HPPA\7f522703
Node: Controlling GDB\7f523209
Node: Prompt\7f523970
Node: Editing\7f524749
Node: Command History\7f525692
Node: Screen Size\7f529072
Node: Numbers\7f530777
Node: ABI\7f532754
Node: Messages/Warnings\7f535683
Node: Debugging Output\7f538176
Node: Sequences\7f542383
Node: Define\7f542985
Node: Hooks\7f546336
Node: Command Files\7f548526
Node: Output\7f552379
Node: Interpreters\7f554793
Node: TUI\7f556884
Node: TUI Overview\7f557578
Node: TUI Keys\7f560663
Node: TUI Single Key Mode\7f563164
Node: TUI Commands\7f564007
Node: TUI Configuration\7f565944
Node: Emacs\7f567422
Node: GDB/MI\7f572530
Node: GDB/MI Command Syntax\7f574321
Node: GDB/MI Input Syntax\7f574534
Node: GDB/MI Output Syntax\7f576088
Node: GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI\7f579506
Node: GDB/MI Development and Front Ends\7f580243
Node: GDB/MI Output Records\7f582045
Node: GDB/MI Result Records\7f582327
Node: GDB/MI Stream Records\7f583054
Node: GDB/MI Out-of-band Records\7f584325
Node: GDB/MI Simple Examples\7f585762
Node: GDB/MI Command Description Format\7f587575
Node: GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands\7f588455
Node: GDB/MI Program Context\7f604824
Node: GDB/MI Thread Commands\7f609306
Node: GDB/MI Program Execution\7f611382
Node: GDB/MI Stack Manipulation\7f619991
Node: GDB/MI Variable Objects\7f629625
Ref: -var-list-children\7f635389
Node: GDB/MI Data Manipulation\7f638622
Node: GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands\7f652988
Node: GDB/MI Symbol Query\7f653232
Node: GDB/MI File Commands\7f656520
Node: GDB/MI Target Manipulation\7f660626
Node: GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands\7f667805
Ref: -interpreter-exec\7f669937
Node: Annotations\7f671159
Node: Annotations Overview\7f671999
Node: Prompting\7f674457
Node: Errors\7f675981
Node: Invalidation\7f676877
Node: Annotations for Running\7f677354
Node: Source Annotations\7f678874
Node: GDB Bugs\7f679799
Node: Bug Criteria\7f680525
Node: Bug Reporting\7f681402
Node: Command Line Editing\7f689024
Node: Introduction and Notation\7f689692
Node: Readline Interaction\7f691312
Node: Readline Bare Essentials\7f692501
Node: Readline Movement Commands\7f694288
Node: Readline Killing Commands\7f695251
Node: Readline Arguments\7f697169
Node: Searching\7f698211
Node: Readline Init File\7f700360
Node: Readline Init File Syntax\7f701423
Node: Conditional Init Constructs\7f713355
Node: Sample Init File\7f715886
Node: Bindable Readline Commands\7f719001
Node: Commands For Moving\7f720056
Node: Commands For History\7f720915
Node: Commands For Text\7f724037
Node: Commands For Killing\7f726761
Node: Numeric Arguments\7f728901
Node: Commands For Completion\7f730038
Node: Keyboard Macros\7f731580
Node: Miscellaneous Commands\7f732149
Node: Readline vi Mode\7f735508
Node: Using History Interactively\7f736425
Node: History Interaction\7f736930
Node: Event Designators\7f738352
Node: Word Designators\7f739285
Node: Modifiers\7f740922
Node: Formatting Documentation\7f742147
Ref: Formatting Documentation-Footnote-1\7f745467
Node: Installing GDB\7f745531
Node: Requirements\7f746043
Node: Running Configure\7f747124
Node: Separate Objdir\7f750663
Node: Config Names\7f753547
Node: Configure Options\7f754992
Node: Maintenance Commands\7f757329
Ref: maint info breakpoints\7f757988
Node: Remote Protocol\7f767496
Node: Overview\7f767903
Ref: Binary Data\7f770089
Node: Packets\7f771895
Ref: read registers packet\7f775501
Ref: cycle step packet\7f776654
Ref: write register packet\7f778530
Ref: step with signal packet\7f779408
Ref: X packet\7f783079
Ref: insert breakpoint or watchpoint packet\7f783369
Node: Stop Reply Packets\7f785815
Node: General Query Packets\7f788874
Ref: qSupported\7f795860
Ref: qXfer read\7f803364
Ref: qXfer auxiliary vector read\7f803862
Ref: qXfer memory map read\7f804207
Ref: General Query Packets-Footnote-1\7f807009
Node: Register Packet Format\7f807336
Node: Tracepoint Packets\7f808254
Node: Interrupts\7f814343
Node: Examples\7f815806
Node: File-I/O remote protocol extension\7f816419
Node: File-I/O Overview\7f816877
Node: Protocol basics\7f819024
Node: The F request packet\7f821254
Node: The F reply packet\7f822153
Node: The Ctrl-C message\7f823069
Node: Console I/O\7f824696
Node: List of supported calls\7f825912
Node: open\7f826272
Node: close\7f828766
Node: read\7f829148
Node: write\7f829755
Node: lseek\7f830522
Node: rename\7f831400
Node: unlink\7f832796
Node: stat/fstat\7f833735
Node: gettimeofday\7f834622
Node: isatty\7f835057
Node: system\7f835653
Node: Protocol specific representation of datatypes\7f837195
Node: Integral datatypes\7f837570
Node: Pointer values\7f838377
Node: Memory transfer\7f839085
Node: struct stat\7f839705
Node: struct timeval\7f841907
Node: Constants\7f842424
Node: Open flags\7f842871
Node: mode_t values\7f843212
Node: Errno values\7f843704
Node: Lseek flags\7f844515
Node: Limits\7f844700
Node: File-I/O Examples\7f845060
Node: Memory map format\7f846174
Node: Agent Expressions\7f848629
Node: General Bytecode Design\7f851550
Node: Bytecode Descriptions\7f856350
Node: Using Agent Expressions\7f867036
Node: Varying Target Capabilities\7f868569
Node: Tracing on Symmetrix\7f869742
Node: Rationale\7f875564
Node: Copying\7f882943
Node: GNU Free Documentation License\7f902159
Node: Index\7f924594
\1f
End Tag Table